Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
7050 Gall Blvd (134)
e�1 cA cpuis tleslgn group ar A:(rcture.Pa � �� Advent Adventhealth Zephyrhills: Operating Room 5 - Cystoscopy Client Code/File Number: 23/100046-127-1 Construction Documents Architectural, Structural Project Manual VOLUME 1 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No. 042.21-177.01 FL Reg: AA-26003049 Table of Contents DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS NOT USED DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 16 WORK BY OWNER 01 14 16 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS 01 21 31 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (TAX EXEMPT) PROCESS 0125 13 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES AFTER EXECUTION OF CONTRACT 0126 13 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) 01 29 00 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT AND SCHEDULE OF VALUES (GC) 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 42 10 ABBREVIATIONS - TERMINOLOGY 01 42 11 ABBREVIATIONS - ORGANIZATIONS AND STANDARDS 01 42 13 ABBREVIATIONS FOR UNITS OF MEASURE - ENGLISH SYSTEM OF UNITS (IP) 01 42 15 ABBREVIATIONS FOR UNITS OF MEASURE INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS (SI) 014216 DEFINITIONS 01 43 43 COORDINATION DRAWINGS 01 45 23 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 01 65 00 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE: MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 74 23 CLEANING 01 7700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (GC) 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 26 INTERIOR FINISH FIRE PERFORMANCE DATA 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 DEMOLITION DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE NOT USED NOT USED DIVISION 05 - METALS NOT USED DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES NOT USED 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy Table of Contents - 1 3/17/2021 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 07 92 16 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS 11 l I . [el NOT USED DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 29 00 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 0965 13 RESILIENT BASE (RB) 0965 14 SHEET VINYL FLOORING (SV) 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 26 00 WALL PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 70 00 HOSPITAL EQUIPMENT - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 34 13 FORMALDEHYDE -FREE ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK (AC) 12 36 63 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS (SSF) 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 Table of Contents - 2 SECTION 01 11 16 WORK BY OWNER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Owner may perform work with their staff or may award separate contracts for performance of certain construction operations at site. Operations may be scheduled to be performed during Work under this Contract. B. Separate contracts include but are not limited to following: 1. Equipment and items indicated in documents as Owner furnished. 2. Owner furnished furnishing, such as, furniture, window coverings and art work. 3. System installation in empty conduit 4. Specialties 5. Equipment 6. Refer to Documents for additional miscellaneous items. C. Contractors holding separate contracts with Owner to perform work for Owner may be non- union contractors. By executing this Contract, the Contractor and all subcontractors acknowledge this and have no objection to it and agree that it will not have a negative impact on Project. D. Schedule activities to minimize interference with work of others and cooperate with other parties involved in such concurrent Work. Such cooperation by Contractor shall not, in and of itself, be grounds for a claim of delay or additional cost. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zcphyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 WORK BY OWNER 01 11 16-1 SECTION 01 1416 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NO INTERRUPTION OF OCCUPANCY A. Work is required to be performed within existing building. Each Contractor will have access to areas in which this work occurs, subject to rights of Owner. B. Owner will occupy existing building during life of this contract. Schedule all work at such time and in such a manner to minimize interference and inconvenience to public, staff and Owner's operations. Contractor must obtain approval of Owner before starting any work within any existing area of building. C. Area immediately surrounding all areas of Work shall be protected from danger of materials being dropped or dislodged. D. Work shall be carried out in a manner that will not impose avoidable hardship, danger, or inconvenience to public or staff. E. Prior to commencement of Work, Contractor and Owner shall jointly survey construction site and surrounding areas, making permanent record of such existing damage as cracks, malfunctioning utility equipment and fixtures, or other similar damage. This record shall serve as a basis for determination of subsequent damage to these structures and adjacent areas due to Contractor's operations. Any damage of any nature to these structures and adjacent areas not noted in original survey but subsequently noted, shall be reported immediately to Owner. 1.2 DISRUPTION OF EXISTING SERVICES A. Work shall be planned so as to minimize shutdown time of any service. I . Request approval of a utility or equipment shutdown in writing to Owner not less than five (5) working days before time shutdown is desired. Provide Owner an estimate of duration of shutdown and how facility is going to be affected. 2. Coordinate with Owner's building engineering staff in advance of any shut down. 3. Begin work only after engineering staff is fully informed and has agreed to schedule of shut offs. 4. Do not cut into existing services without first verifying with Owner that service has been correctly identified and shut off. 5. Operation of existing valves, switches, etc., to effect service shutdown will be completed by Owner, unless arranged otherwise. B. Limit duration of each such disruption of service to maximum of 4 hours or as approved by Owner. C. Fabricate and install interconnecting portions of these systems prior to shut down for final connections. D. Maintain utilities or other service, indicated to be abandoned, in service or provide alternate means of service until new facilities are provided, tested, and put in operation. E. Maintain fire protection and fire alarm systems at all times within existing facilities. F. Review all existing conditions, drawings and other documents for proper coordination between new and existing construction. G. Active utilities whose locations are unknown to Owner are suspected to exist. Contractor shall be cautious of their existence. If they are encountered, immediately report to Owner for direction. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS 01 14 16 - 1 H. Damages to existing structures, utilities and other items which are caused by Contractor's operations shall be repaired or replaced to their original conditions. 1.3 USE OF PREMISES A. Use of site: Limit use and operation at site to "Limits of Construction," indicated and required to perform Work. Portions of site beyond area of required Work shall not be disturbed without written approval of Owner. 1. Obtain written approval from Owner at least seven (7) working days in advance when scheduling Work outside limits of construction. Provide Owner an estimate of time needed to perform Work outside limits of construction. 2. Cutting, capping, and reconnecting utility systems outside limits of construction shall be performed by Contractor, unless otherwise noted. 3. Conform to all laws, ordinances, permits and regulations affecting Work on site. 4. Existing roads, streets, drives, parking lots, entrances and required fire exitways shall be kept clear and available at all times for their intended use. Do not use these areas for parking, staging or storage without Owner's written approval. Coordinate with Owner, and provide alternate routes for public and Owner access if normal routes are affected. 5. Do not unreasonably encumber site with equipment, materials or vehicles. 6. Return all improvements on or about site and adjacent property which are not shown to be altered, removed or otherwise changed; to conditions which existed previous to starting performance under Contract. B. Use of facilities: 1. Limit use and operation within existing facilities to areas indicated for construction Work and as required to perform Work. Other areas within facility shall not be disturbed or disrupted. 2. Perform Work so as not to interfere or inconvenience public, staff and Owner's operation. 3. Maintain and keep clear all required fire exitways throughout facility within and in vicinity of construction areas. Coordinate alternate temporary egress routes with Owner and local fire authority. 4. Do not load structure with weights that will endanger structure. 5. Smoking is prohibited within facilities or on Owner's property. 6. Audio devices and radios are prohibited, except two-way radios needed for Contractor's operations. Use of two-way radios within occupied facilities shall be limited, so not to disrupt occupants. 7. Use of toilet facilities, washrooms, and telephones within existing facility or occupied areas is not allowed without Owner's consent. 8. Elevators in existing facility or within occupied areas of addition may not be used by construction personnel without Owner's consent and such use shall meet following conditions: a. Protect and maintain entire system during temporary use. b. Repair or replace any damaged components of system. c. Clean all finishes. 9. Cafeteria and dining areas may not be used by construction personnel without Owner's consent. 10. T-shirts or other clothing with derogatory depictions, language, and/or slogans regarding alcohol, drugs, race or sexual in nature, shall not be worn on premises. 11. Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 12. Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage and leaks caused by construction operations. Take all precautions necessary to protect building and its occupants during construction period. 13. Make every effort to keep noise to a minimum in construction operation. Jack hammer will not be permitted to use within the existing building without Owner's consent. 14. Derogatory language regarding race, sexual or religious in nature, shall not be used on premises. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS 01 14 16 - 2 1.4 WORKING DAYS AND HOURS A. Days: Monday - Friday B. Hours: 7:00 AM to 5:00 PM. C. Work performed during Holidays or other than normal working days or hours shall be scheduled in advance with, and approved by Owner. 1.5 DIRECTED PREMIUM TIME A. Actual premium wages paid for original contract Work directed by Owner to be performed other than normal working hours, including; social security taxes, unemployment insurance, and union fringe benefits if required by union agreements; to be without overhead and profit mark-ups. 1. Any Owner approved scheduled utility line tie-in or shutdown that affect building operation that is not allowed to be competed during normal working hours shall be completed on premium time basis. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS 011416-3 SECTION 01 21 31 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (TAX EXEMPT) PROCESS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Owner Direct Purchase Materials (ODPM): The purchase of construction related materials and equipment by the Owner which will be incorporation into the Work of the Project. B. ODPM Purchase Orders: The term in this document relates to Purchase Orders executed by the Owner for ODPM. C. Owner Furnished: The term used in other portions of the Contract Documents relates to materials and equipment indicated to be purchased by the Owner, and is not subject to the provisions of this Section. D. Owner Furnished and Installed or Owner Provided: These term used in other portions of the Contract Documents relates to materials and equipment indicated to be furnished and installed by the Owner or a separate contractor, and is not subject to the provisions of this Section. 1.2 GENERAL A. Owner, as voluntary non-profit organization, is exempt from payment of State sales, consumer, use or other similar taxes on material and equipment purchased directly by Owner for incorporation into the Work of the Project. 1. Owner shall administer this process with Construction Manager. 2. Construction Manager shall administer this process with their Contractors. 3. The ODPM process included herein is to facilitate Owner in benefiting financially for not having to pay certain State sales, consumer, use or other similar taxes on the purchase of major material and equipment incorporated into the Work. 4. Nothing in these provisions is intended or should be construed as relieving Construction Manager and Contractors from their contractual obligations. B. Owner may directly purchase, at Owner's expense, materials and equipment identified in Contract Documents for the Project. 1. Contractor shall purchase all material and equipment that Owner decides not to direct purchase. a. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use or other similar taxes on all material and equipment not purchased directly by Owner. 2. Owner grants to Construction Manager and Contractors authority as agents of Owner to negotiate the acquisition of such ODPM, prepare Purchase Orders for execution by Owner, and coordinate all matters necessary to effectuate such purchases. a. Such services by Construction Manager and Contractors described herein being already included in Cost of the Work/ Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP) and Contractor's Contract Sums. b. Construction Manager and Contractors are not entitled to receive any additional compensation for performance of duties related to this process. c. Construction Manager and Contractors shall maintain separate records for all transactions carried out under this process, and such records shall be open for review by Owner during Construction Manager's and Contractor's normal business hours. d. Contractor is responsible for selecting, coordinating, approving and submitting all required Submittals for Architect's review and Owner's review (if required) of all ODPM as required by Contract Documents. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (TAX EXEMPT) PROCESS 012131-1 e. Upon making payment by Owner, materials and equipment covered thereby become sole property of Owner, but do not constitute Owner's acceptance of material, equipment or Work, nor be construed as waiver of any right or claim by Owner. f. Contractor shall be deemed as having care, custody, and control of items until Substantial Completion. g. Contractor is responsible for, but not limited to: all required coordination, expediting, scheduling, receiving, inspecting, unloading, accepting or rejecting, proper storage, transportation, proper installation, protection, clean up, discarding of packing/shipping materials, safeguarding, startup and training of all ODPM, as required by Contract Documents. h. Contractors warrant installation of all ODPM, as required by Contract Contract. i. Warrantee and guarantee period does not commence until Substantial Completion of the Work. j. Contractor responsible for extended warrantee or guarantee if Project is delayed as a result of Contractor. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Project Information: 1. ODPM Request for Purchase Orders to be submitted directly to Construction Manager. 2. ODPM Purchase Orders to be submitted directly to Owner for execution. 3. ODPM Monthly Accounting Log to be submitted directly to Owner. B. Contract Closeout Information 1. Itemization of all ODPM Contract Modifications, associated costs and tax savings. 2. Deductive Change Order for ODPM Contract Modifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - PROCESS 3.1 GENERAL A. Construction Manager and Contractors shall include all cost associated with the purchase of material and equipment indicated in the Contract Documents into the Cost of the Work/GMP and Subcontractor's Contract Sums (including potential State sales, consumer, use or other similar taxes which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, and all required coordination, receiving, inspecting, unloading, proper storage, transportation, proper installation, protection, clean up, discarding of packing/shipping materials, safeguarding, startup and training, as required by Contract Documents.). B. Construction Manager and Contractors shall breakout and list material and equipment costs which will be incorporated into Project separately from labor on Schedule of Values and Application for Payments Continuation Sheets (see Section 01027). 3.2 DIRECT PURCHASE PROCESS A. Step 1: Contractor shall after award of contract, furnish Construction Manager with information on materials and equipment required by Contract Documents in amount of $10,000 or more from any one supplier. 1. List items by supplier, manufacturer, model or part number where appropriate, quantity and cost (indicating tax separately). 2. Furnish ODPM Purchase Order scheduling requirements for each. 3. Utilize ODPM Request for Purchase Order form furnished by Construction Manager. 4. Owner will furnish Construction Manager with any tax exempt certificates or other documents required or useful to provide to vendors of potential ODPM as evidence of tax- exempt status of Owner. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (TAX EXEMPT) PROCESS 01 21 31 - 2 B. Step 2: Construction Manager shall record information furnished by Contractors, initiate and submit ODPM Purchase Order forms to Owner for consideration. C. Step 3: Owner may execute ODPM Purchase Order to Construction Manager for processing. 1. Owner is responsible for timely approvals and execution of ODPM Purchase Order so not to delay construction process and Project. 2. If Owner decides to not purchase the material or equipment indicated on ODPM Purchase Order, Construction Manager shall be notified immediately and Contractor shall purchase such material and equipment. a. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use or other similar taxes on all material and equipment not purchased directly by Owner. D. Step 4: Contractors will order respective materials and equipment upon Owner issuance of ODPM Purchase Order, as required to maintain schedule. E. Step 5: Vendor/suppliers shall send ODPM invoices to Contractor for review and approval. 1. Contractor to verify correctness of invoice, approve and submit to Construction Manager with proper backup for submittal to Owner. 2. Vendor/suppliers shall not send invoices directly to Owner. F. Step 6: Owner will make payment directly to respective vendor/supplier as provided on ODPM invoice, and will copy Construction manager on all such paid invoices. 1. Owner is responsible for timely processing and payment of ODPM invoices so not to delay construction process and Project. G. Step 7: Construction Manager shall execute a deductive ODPM Contract Modification to respective Contractor reducing their Contract Sum by the amounts of such paid ODPM invoices including the tax and any bond savings. 1. Contractor shall indicate such deductive ODPM Contract Modification adjustments on their Pay Application Schedule of Values for the associated material or equipment line item and adjust the Contract Sum accordingly. 2. Overhead and profit will not be reduced for such ODPM Contract Modifications. 3. Contractor shall not request payment for such ODPM. H. Step 8: Construction Manager will adjust each respective Subcontractor Contract Sum on the Construction Manager's Application for Payment recap sheet, and will list each ODPM Contract Modification and associated amount. 1. Fee will not be reduced for ODPM Contract Modifications. 2. Construction Manager shall not request payment for such ODPM. 3.3 ODPM ACCOUNTING LOG RECONCILIATION MEETINGS A. Held quarterly or when requested by Owner. B. Owner Representative, Owner's accounting staff, Construction Manage and Contractors (if needed) shall attend at Project site. C. Construction Manger's/Contractor's Monthly Accounting Logs shall be reviewed and reconciled against Owner's accounting records. 3.4 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT A. Construction Manager's GMP/Contract Sum will be reduced by sum of all ODPM Contract Modifications by a deductive Change Orders on a maximum of quarterly basis. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (TAX EXEMPT) PROCESS 01 21 31 - 3 SECTION 01 25 13 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES AFTER EXECUTION OF CONTRACT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITION A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: See Section 01 61 00. B. Any product proposed by Contractor that does not meet requirements of the Contract Documents, whether in product characteristics, performance, quality, or manufacturer or brand names, is considered a substitution. C. No substitutions will be considered: 1. In case of non -availability of materials contact Architect for review and action. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION REASON FOR SUBSTITUTION: Non -availability due to: Strike Lockout Bankruptcy Discontinuation of Production Proven Shortage (Explain) Similar Occurrence (Explain) 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES AFTER EXECUTION OF CONTRACT 012513-1 SECTION 01 2613 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Requests for Information (RFI). B. RFI is intended for requesting clarifications and interpretations of Contract Documents due to apparent inconsistencies, errors or omissions in Contract Documents, and due to unanticipated existing conditions. C. RFI is not intended for requesting substitutions, Contractor's proposed changes, resolution of nonconforming work or for general questions not related to Contract Documents. D. RFI process is intended to be a cooperative effort between Architect and Contractor to expedite responses to RFIs and maintain progress of Work without utilizing other lengthy procedures. E. Any other proposed method of processing RFI's other than indicated within this Section, such as project collaboration systems, shall be evaluated by Architect for potential impact on Architect's services. 1. If Architect agrees to utilize another proposed method, Architect will be reimbursed for any special training, usage fees, extra time required to implement, maintain, utilize and administer such a system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION A. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: I. Contract Documents are complementary; therefore, before starting each portion of Work, carefully study and compare various Drawings, Specifications and any other Contract Documents, coordination drawings, shop drawings, prior correspondence or documentation relative to that portion of Work, as well as information furnished by Owner. 2. Contractor and Subcontractors shall evaluate and take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of Work and shall observe any conditions at site affecting Work. 3. These obligations are for purpose of facilitating and coordinating construction and are not for purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in Contract Documents. 4. Contractor and subcontractors acknowledge that all documents pertaining to Work has been examined, have examined character of site and any existing conditions, and are satisfied with nature of Work, and all other matters which can in any way affect Work. 5. In event of inconsistency between portions of Contract Documents or within Contract Documents; provide better quality or greater quantity of Work, and comply with more stringent requirement, either or both in accordance with Architect's interpretation. 6. Any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered in Contract Documents shall be reported promptly to Architect as a properly prepared and timely RFI. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) 012613-1 Contractor and Subcontractors are not required to ascertain Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, and rules and regulations, unless they bear upon construction means, methods, techniques or safety and health precautions, but the Contractor shall promptly report to Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to Contractor as a RFI. If Contractor or Subcontractor fail to give such notice, and knowingly proceeds with Work affected by errors or omissions in Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct any such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions at no additional cost. B. Contractor's and Subcontractor's Responsibilities: 1. When interpretation, clarification or explanation of portion of Construction Documents is needed by Contractor, Subcontractor, Vendor or Supplier, the request shall be processed through Contractor. a. Review request for completeness, quality, proper referencing to drawing or specification section and reason submitted. b. If request is not acceptable it shall be sent back to submitter with comments regarding reason for being returned. C. Make every attempt to validate, resolve or respond to RFI by thoroughly researching and reviewing Contract Documents and field conditions. d. Respond to RFI accordingly if review of RFI discloses a response or is related to coordination of construction or other issue not related to Contract Documents. e. If unable to respond to request, it shall be restated in clear, concise, correct, complete and easily understood manner, and rewritten if necessary, additional information included if necessary, and only then submitted to Architect for response. 2. Request for interpretation, clarification or explanation of Contract Documents shall be submitted to Architect through Contractor. a. List specific Contract Documents researched when seeking information being requested. b. Reference all applicable Contract Drawings by sheet number, section, detail, room number, door number, etc., Specifications by section and paragraph number, and reference any other relevant documents. c. The field titled "Regarding" on attached RFI form must be clear for future reference in reports or correspondence. d. Clearly state request and provide Contract Document references and any additional information needed so request can be fully understood, including sketches, photos or other reference material. e. Fully assess issues, suggest any reasonable solutions and include various factors, including potential costs, schedule impacts, if any, and recommendations which will aid in determining a solution or response. If a reasonable solution can not be suggested, a statement to that effect should be so stated. f. Indicate reason request is being submitted. g. Any critical RFI's requiring a rapid response shall clearly indicate such with an explanation as to why RFI is critical. h. Priority for responses shall be indicated when multiple RFI's are submitted within short period of time. 3. Copies of responses to RFI's shall be distributed to all parties affected. 4. A response to RFI shall not be considered a notice to proceed with a change that may revise the Contract Sum or Contract Time, unless authorized by Owner in writing. 5. If response to RFI is determined incomplete, it shall be resubmitted with reason response is unacceptable and any necessary additional information within five (5) days of time of receipt of response to RFI. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) 012613-2 6. If determined or believed that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications, interpretations or instructions issued by Architect in response to a RFI, resubmit RFI within five (5) days of receipt of response with reason and alternate solution or suggestion for performing work at no additional cost. If no other solution is possible or desirable, submit Claim in accordance with the Contract Documents with in twenty-one (21) days of receipt of response to the RFI. C. RFI Submittal Format: 1. Request for information shall be submitted to Architect on RFI form provided at end of this section, or form provided by Architect in electronic text file format, or in similar format acceptable to Architect. a. BFI's shall be assigned unique numbers in sequential order (1, 2, 3, 4, etc.). b. A resubmitted RFI or a previously answered RFI requiring revising or further clarification shall be submitted using original RFI number proceeded by "Y' to indicate revision one of RFI (i.e.: RFI No. 34.1 for revision 1 to RFI No. 34). c. RFI form shall be electronically filled out and emailed to Architect's designated representative in text file format. Attachments shall be in electronic text or PDF file format. Photo attachments may be in JPG format. D. Architect's Response to Request for Information (RFI): 1. Clarifications, interpretations and decisions of Architect in response to RFI will be consistent with intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents, and will be in writing, and if determined to be necessary by Architect, will be provided in form of drawings and other attachments or both. 2. When making such interpretations and initial decisions, Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. 3. Architect's decisions on matters related to aesthetic effects will be final if consistent with intent expressed in Contract Documents. 4. Architect will not undertake to settle differences between Contractor, Subcontractors, trades suppliers, fabricator or manufacturer, or act as arbiter as to which Subcontractor, trade, supplier or manufacturer is to furnish or install various items indicated or required. 5. Architect shall provide responses to RFI's with reasonable promptness, but will endeavor to respond within twenty-one (21) days from date of receipt. a. If multiple RFI's are submitted on same day or within a five (5) day period, review time may be extended by mutual agreement of parties b. Architect will provide a written response to RFI if Architect believes response only involves an interpretation, clarification, supplemental information or orders a minor change in Work not involving an adjustment in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time, and is not inconsistent with intent of Contract Documents, and shall be binding. c. If Architect believes response may result in a change to Contract Sum or Contract Time, response will indicate that a change document will be issued for the response, and appropriate change document will be issued indicating changes to Contract Documents. d. Architect will provide any additional or supplemental drawings, specifications or other information as Architect may deem necessary to facilitate response. 6. Architect may return RFI without response for following reasons: a. Unclear. b. Incomplete. c. Detailed information not provided. d. Is related to construction means, methods or techniques. e. Is related to health or safety measures. f. Is due to Contractor's lack of adequate coordination. g. Is considered a "Substitution Request." h. Is due to non-conformance. i. Response is required by another party. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) 012613-3 E. If requested information is available from careful study and comparison of Contract Documents, field conditions, other Owner -provided information, coordination drawings, or prior Project correspondence or documentation, Architect may invoice Owner as a change in services for costs involved in Architect's review, analysis, responding and processing of such RFI. 1. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for such costs. A. Contractor and Subcontractors may anticipate receiving (_) clarifications, interpretations, orders for Minor Changes in Work or responses to valid requests for interpretations or clarifications of Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) 012613-4 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION Project: AdventHealth - Zephyrhills OR #5 - Cystoscopy To: ❑ CDG Architecture, PA ❑ (consultant?) ❑ (other?) Regarding: References: Spec. No.: RFI Number: Project No.: 21-177.01 ❑ Action ❑ Info Pages ❑ Action ❑ Info Pages ❑ Action ❑ Info Pages (List specific Contract Documents researched when seeking the information being requested) Dwg. No.: Request: (Provide complete description of request with document references and sketches or photos if necessary, and present status of work) Requester's Recommended Solution: (If RFl concerns a site or construction condition, provide a recommended solution, including cost & schedule considerations) Response Priority: ❑ Normal ❑ Rush (Work in progress) Reason For ❑ Existing ❑ Non- ❑ Clarification / ❑ Agency ❑ Request: Condition conformance Interpretation Generated Other Subcontractor: CM/Contractor: By: Response: Date: Date: ❑ Above is considered a change. Following document will be used for processing: ❑ Above is consistent with intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents, or makes minor changes in Work without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. If Contractor does not agree, submit written notice substantiating claim in accordance with Contract Documents. ❑ This RFI is related to one of following and may be returned without response: ❑ Incomplete or lack of detailed information ❑ Related to "means and ❑ Response required by others methods" ❑ Lack of adequate Coordination Drawings ❑ Is a "Substitution Request' From: Chapuis Design Group Architecture, PA. By: Date: END OF FORM 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) 012613-5 SECTION 01 29 00 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT AND SCHEDULE OF VALUES (GC) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Project information: 1. Submittals, prior to first application for payment: a. Schedule of Values. B. Contract Closeout Information: (See Section 01 77 00). PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Prior to first Application for Payment, submit to Architect a Schedule of Values allocated to various portions of Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as Owner and Architect may require. B. At a minimum, subdivide into following allocated items: 1. Bond. 2. Insurance. 3. General condition items: mobilization, temporary facilities, temporary utilities, submittals, demobilization, and other similar general condition items. 4. Phases or areas or both of building. 5. Specification sections. 6. Individual components of Work, and major pieces of equipment. 7. Labor amount and material or equipment amount, listed separately. 8. Contract closeout items: manuals, spare parts, maintenance material, system demonstrations, record documents, operation and maintenance data, and other similar contract closeout items. 9. Individually approved changes. C. Labor amount shall include all on site installation costs including labor, applicable taxes, insurance, fringe benefits, erection equipment, tools, overhead and profit. D. Material and equipment shall include all material and manufactured equipment costs including delivery costs, taxes, insurance, overhead and profit. E. The schedule, unless objected to by Owner or Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing percent complete of line items on Contractor's Applications for Payments. 3.2 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. On or before day of month, Contractor submit to Architect itemized Application for Payment for work completed during previous calendar month, in accordance with schedule of values. 1. Submit on AIA Document G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment, and AIA Document G703 - Continuation Sheet, or similar format acceptable to Architect. a. Itemize in accordance with approved Schedule of Values, and as indicated in AIA documents. b. Bond and insurance costs may be requested for payment on first application. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT AND SCHEDULE OF VALUES (GC) 012900-1 c. Equal monthly payments may be made for general conditions based upon number of months Contractor is scheduled to be on site. d. May include amounts for changes in work that have been authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by Change Proposal Requests approved by Owner. e. Furnish in triplicate. f. Signed by duly authorized agent of Contractor. g. Notarize Application for Payment. 2. Furnish copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and suppliers to substantiate values. 3. Shall not include request for payments for portions of Work for which Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom Contractor intends to pay. 4. Provide additional supporting data substantiating Contractor's right to payment, as Owner or Architect may require. B. Application for Payment serves as certification of status by Contractor of Project. C. Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to Owner upon receipt of payment. D. Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from Owner shall, to the best of Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to Work. 3.3 PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Application for Payment may include materials and equipment ready, but not yet incorporated in Work, delivered, and suitably stored at site. B. Warranty and guarantee period does not commence until Substantial Completion of work. C. Payment will be treated same as "work -in -place," with evidence of delivery to job site, except that payments will not include value of labor and mark-up. D. Each subsequent Application for Payment will restate prior month's materials and equipment not incorporated in Work, and current month additions and deletions for materials and equipment incorporated into work. Inventory must be updated and included with each subsequent application to indicate current status. E. Upon making of partial payments by Owner, all materials and equipment covered thereby become sole property of Owner. Partial payments, however, do not constitute Owner's acceptance of material, equipment or work, nor be construed as waiver of any right or claim by Owner. F. Contractor shall be deemed as having care, custody, and control of items. 3.4 RETAINAGE A. Until Substantial Completion of entire project, 10 percent retainage will be withheld from value of Work completed and material stored. B. Any reduction of retainage beyond that allowable by Contract Documents, and including adjustments at Substantial Completion requires Consent of Surety, recommendation of Architect, and approval of Owner prior to incorporating into an Application for Payment. 1. Provide Request for Reduction of Retainage on form furnished by Architect and Consent of Surety; AIA Document G707A. 2. If approved by Architect and Owner, Contractor may incorporate reduction in next Application for Payment. 3. Include copy of approved form with Application for Payment. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room 95 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT AND SCHEDULE OF VALUES (GC) 012900-2 STORED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT AFFIDAVIT PROJECT: AdventHealth Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy PROJECT NO: 21-177.01 ITEM NO. QUANTITY UNIT MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION VALUE LOCATION STORED: IDENTIFICATION METHOD: AFFIDAVIT: Items listed above have been purchased exclusively for use on above referenced Project and have been received in good condition, and items are identified as property for use only on above referenced Project. Owner may enter upon premises for verification, inspection, or for any other purpose considered necessary. It is expressly understood and agreed that this affidavit is furnished to the Owner for purpose of obtaining approval for payment for said items, and that storage thereof at location indicated and payment by Owner shall not relieve Contractor of full responsibility for the protection, safeguarding, insurance, transporting, and proper installation at Project referenced above, and will warrant and defend against claims and demands of all persons. Upon making of partial payment by Owner, said items covered thereby become sole property of Owner. Attached are receipted invoice(s), bills of sale(s), and/or other documents as evidence that Contractor is unconditional owner of said items, and they are free from all encumbrance, security agreements, mortgages or liens. FROM CONTRACTOR: BY: DATE: SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE ME THIS DAY OF NOTARY PUBLIC: MY COMMISSION EXPIRES: Owner (APPROVES) (DISAPPROVES) location of off site storage, and Contractor's inclusion of cost for above items in an Application for Payment. OWNER'S APPROVAL: BY: DATE: Contractor shall include this affidavit and other required documents with Application for Payment and shall maintain an inventory of all stored materials for submittal with future applications. END OF FORM 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT AND SCHEDULE OF VALUES (GC) 01 29 00 - 3 STORED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT INVENTORY PROJECT: AdventHealth Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy FOR APPLICATION NO.: PAGE: of The following inventory represents our accounting of the current status of material and equipment in storage which we have received payment for: IPPL. INCORPORATED NO. I TEMMATE DIESCORIPTION UIPMENT I QUANTITY I VALUE I ANO. I DATE QUANTITY I FROM CONTRACTOR: BY: DATE: This form shall be updated and submitted with each application for payment. END OF FORM 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT AND SCHEDULE OF VALUES (GC) 012900-4 REQUEST FOR REDUCTION OF RETAINAGE PROJECT: AdventHealth Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 — Cystoscopy PROJECT NO.: 21-177.01 CONTRACT FOR: Contractor hereby requests that the percentage of partial payment retained by Owner under provision of contract be REDUCED to % for following reasons: CONTRACTOR: BY: DATE: Power of Attorney and AIA Document G707A must be attached. Architect (RECOMMENDS) (DOES NOT RECOMMEND) the reduction of retainage to %. Percentage of completion as of is %. ARCHITECT: M DATE: Owner hereby (APPROVES) (DISAPPROVES) reduction of retainage to %, and authorizes Architect to certify the reduction in an Application for Payment. An DATE: If approved, Contractor may incorporate reduction in next Application for Payment, and shall include copy of this document with it. DISTRIBUTION: ❑ OWNER ❑ ARCHITECT ❑ CONTRACTOR END OF FORM 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT AND SCHEDULE OF VALUES (GC) 012900-5 SECTION 0131 19 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PRE -BID CONFERENCE A. Pre -bid conference: See Section 00 21 13, Instructions to Bidders. 1.2 PRE -CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Architect schedule and hold pre -construction conference prior to construction. B. Attendance: 1. Owner: a. Project representative. b. Director of Operations or Engineering. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor: a. Home office representative. b. Field Project Manager. 4. Construction Manager: C. Contractor must be prepared to discuss, as a minimum, following items: 1. Contractor distribute and discuss: a. List of subcontractors. b. Tentative construction schedule. 1) Start and completion dates. 2) Critical work sequence. 2. Status of Contract, bonds, and insurance. a. Accepted alternates. 3. Procedures. 4. Designation of responsible personnel. 5. Processing of field decisions and change orders. 6. Submittal process. 7. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 8. Use of premises: a. Office and storage areas. b. Owner's requirements. 9. Submission and processing of monthly Application for Payment and associated requirements. 10. For projects requiring demolition of existing structures address removal and disposal of hazardous materials and toxic substances as applicable. D. Contractor to have meeting with subcontractors after preconstruction conference to discuss procedures. 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Attend regularly scheduled meetings; time, day and place to be determined. 1. Meetings to be scheduled with Architect to coincide with Architect's regular scheduled site visits. B. Contractor administer meetings and record minutes. C. Generally, meetings will be held monthly or as required by progress of the Work. D. Location of meetings: Job site or as arranged. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 PROJECT MEETINGS -CD 013119-1 E. Attendance: 1. Owner: a. Project representative. b. Director of Operations or Engineering. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor: a. Home office representative. b. Field Project Manager. c. Superintendent. F. Minimum Agenda: 1. Review, approve minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review work progress since last meeting. 3. Planned progress during next work period. 4. Review construction schedule. 5. Identify concerns which impede planned progress. 6. Note field observations, questions, and decisions. 7. Review submittal schedules. 8. Review Owner/Contractor coordination items. 9. Review status of changes. 1.4 CONTRACTOR MEETINGS A. It is recommended Contractor have weekly progress, coordination and scheduling meetings with subcontractors. B. Contractor to have pre -installation meetings with subcontractors and suppliers as needed for different segments of work. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 PROJECT MEETINGS -CD 01 31 19 - 2 SECTION 0132 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work includes: 1. Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. Schedule shall not exceed time limits current under Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to entire Project to extent required by Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of Work. B. Coordinate Subcontractors' schedules for entire project: 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in sequence of Work. 3. Show each activity in proper sequence. 4. Indicate graphically the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of Work. 5. Resolve conflicts among schedules of Subcontractors. 6. Revise as required by conditions and progress of work. 7. Furnish copy of schedules for entire project to each Subcontractor. 8. Coordinate with Section 01 50 00; Construction Facilities, Temporary Controls and Utilities. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Project information: 1. Preliminary Construction Schedule: a. Provide to Owner and Architect prior to start of Work, but not later than date set for preconstruction conference. 2. Project Schedules: a. Provide to Owner and Architect within 60 days of start of construction. 3. Updated Project Schedules: a. Provide to Owner and Architect quarterly. b. Provide if completion date is revised or sequence of Work is revised. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Horizontal bar chart: 1. Provide separate horizontal bar column for each line item of the approved Schedule of Values. 2. Indicate each bar with start and completion date of each item, its total dollar value percent to be completed for each month. 3. Identify each bar column: a. By specification section number, Work element and major component. b. By distinct graphic delineation. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 013216-1 4. Horizontal time scale: Identify first week day of each week. 5. Scale and spacing: To allow space for updating. 6. As Work progresses, place contrasting mark in each bar to indicate actual progress and completion. B. Sheet size: Maximum 11 x 17 IN. C. CPM Schedule option (in addition to bar chart): 1. Furnish a CPM schedule covering items of construction with, as a minimum, early/late start and early/late finish and normal float. 2. Schedule may be manually or computer produced and updated. 3.2 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES A. Provide complete sequence of construction by activity. 1. Shop drawings, product data and samples: a. Submittal dates as indicated in approved Submittal Schedule. b. Dates reviewed copies will be required. 2. Decision dates for: a. Selection of finishes. 3. Product procurement and delivery dates. 4. Dates product information and delivery of Owner furnished, installed equipment and materials is needed. B. Dates for early and late beginning, and completion of each element of construction. C. Identify Work of separate floors, or separate phases, or other logically grouped activities. D. Show how requirements for phased completion and partial occupancy by Owner affect sequence of Work. E. Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of Work, including submittal review, testing, and installation. F. Identify punch list preparation and completion durations, agencies inspections, and Owner occupancy dates. G. Show projected percentage of completion for each item of Work as of last day of every month. H. Identify restraints and constraints. I. Identify critical path and critical portions of entire schedule. There shall be only one critical path and it shall be clearly identified. 3.3 UPDATING A. Show changes occurring since previous submission of updated schedules. B. Indicate progress of each activity, actual verses scheduled start and completion dates, and actual verses scheduled percent complete by month. C. Include: 1. Major changes in scope. 2. Activities modified since previous updating. 3. Review projections due to changes. 4. Other identifiable changes. D. Provide narrative report including: 1. Discussion of problem areas including current and anticipated delay factors and their impact. 2. Corrective action taken or proposed and its effect. 3. Effect of change in schedule. 4. Description of revisions. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16 - 2 a. Effect on schedule due to changes to Contract. b. Revisions in duration of activities. c. Other changes that may affect schedule. 3.4 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of revised schedules to: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. Contractors/Subcontractors. 4. Other concerned parties. B. Instruct recipients to report inability to comply and provide detailed requirements and schedule, with suggested remedies. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 0132 16 - 3 SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, Project Information and Contract Closeout Information submittals. B. Provisions of this Section take precedence over provisions in General Conditions of the Contract for Construction governing Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, Project Information and Contract Closeout Information submittals. C. Submittals are not to be used as means for substitution requests. 1. Submittals that include substitutions will be returned without review or action. D. Contact Architect in event of non -availability of specified product due to strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy, production discontinuance, proven shortage, or similar occurrences. 1. Notify Architect, in writing, with substantiating data as soon as non -availability becomes apparent. 2. Notify in time to avoid delay in construction. E. Appropriateness and accuracy of calculations is responsibility of Contractor, and Contractor's Professional Structural Engineer when such calculations are required to be professionally sealed. F. When professional or other certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by Contract Documents, Architect shall be entitled to rely upon accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifications. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: 1. Submittals are NOT Contract Documents. 2. Purpose of submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of Work, for which submittals are required by Contract Documents, the way Contractor proposed to conform to information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. B. Contractor: The term Contractor shall mean Construction Manager and Contractor when used in this section. C. Shop Drawings Action Submittals: 1. Drawings to scale, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor, sub -subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of Work. A. Product Data Action Submittals: 1. Certifications, illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, color charts, performance curves, diagrams, test data and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrate material, product, equipment or system for some portion of Work. B. Samples Action Submittals: 1. Physical examples which illustrate size, kind, pattern, texture, materials, equipment, systems or workmanship and establish standards by which Work will be judged. 2. Samples also include job site Mock-ups and sample construction. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES -CD 013300-1 C. Project Information Submittals: 1. Items pertaining to quality control and Owner information which do not require review or response by Architect and are to be retained for project file only. 2. Examples include but are not limited to: a. Product performance and construction test reports. b. Certifications. c. Design calculations. d. Coordination drawings. 3. Architect may review at its sole discretion, for general compliance with Contract Documents only. 4. Review will not constitute a detailed check of submitted design calculations. D. "Contract Closeout Information" Submittals: 1. Items pertaining to quality control and Owner information, which are required at Substantial or Final Completion, and do not require review or response by Architect. 2. Examples: a. Pre -occupancy test reports. b. Warranties. c. Operation and maintenance data. d. Owner instruction reports. e. Record documents. f. Interior finish fire performance data. g. Extra materials or tools. E. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products, Base and Optional: See Section 01 6100. 1.3 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED BY THIS SECTION A. Project information: 1. Schedule of Submittals: Provide prior to first application for payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS A. Complete Schedule of Submittals shall include Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, Project Information, and Contract Closeout Information required by specification section Submittal paragraphs. 1. Contractor or Subcontractors may require submittals for their coordination purposes even when submittals are not required by Contract Documents for Architect's review. Do not include or submit such submittals to Architect. 2. Do not include or submit MSDS information. 3. Do not include or submit items not required to be submitted by Contract Documents. 4. Indicate proposed submittal dates for each submittal. 5. Arrange submittals by specification section: a. Submittals shall include items from one specification section only. b. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Project Information (except for Field Test Reports) items specified in a section at same time for a complete review. 1) Shop Drawings: Individual submittal item. Subparagraphs represent description of items to include. a) Indicate additional submittals that will be generated as result of dividing required submittal by building, floor, area of a floor, or other subdivision. 2) Product Data: Individual submittal item. Subparagraphs represent description of items to include as part of single submittal. 3) Sample and Information submittals: Each subparagraph represents an individual submittal item. 6. Indicate submittals that will be provided to agencies having jurisdiction. Schedule sufficiently in advance of date required to allow agency reasonable time for review, and Contractor resubmission if necessary, and to cause no delay in Work or in activities of Owner or other contractors. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES -CD 01 33 00 - 2 7. Schedule submittals sufficiently in advance of date required to allow Architect reasonable time for review, and Contractor's resubmission if necessary, and to cause no delay in Work or in activities of Owner or other contractors. 8. Allow at least two weeks for Architect's review and processing of each submittal, excluding mailing. 9. Do not submit large quantities of submittals at one time. 10. Schedule Contract Closeout Information submittals during last quarter of construction period and prior to Substantial Completion. See specific specification sections for requirements. 11. Partial payment requests may be withheld until satisfactory Schedule of Submittals has been received. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawing Action Submittals are required as called for in each specification section Submittal paragraph. 1. Do not use Contract Drawings as Shop Drawings. B. Certain Shop Drawing plan sheets shall be produced in electronic CAD format so they can be used for Coordination Drawings and be updated at end of Project for Project Record Drawings. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor electronic drawing files of architectural plan backgrounds on CDR in AutoCAD DWG format. a. CAD drawings floor plan backgrounds will include wall layout, column lines and room name and numbering. b. Architect makes no representation as to accuracy or completeness of CAD files. 2. Have skilled CAD technician produce following Shop Drawing plans in same CAD program and version. a. Conveying systems. b. HVAC ductwork system. c. Piping systems. d. Plumbing systems. e. Fire protection system. £ Fire alarm system. g. Nurse call, communication and security systems. h. Cable tray system. i. Lightning protection system. j. Building management system. 3. Indicate systems on separate CAD file with layers compliant with National CAD Standard to facilitate Coordination Drawings and Project Record Documents, using the background as an XREF to the coordination file. 4. Contractor may choose to create paperspace views and increase scale of plotted drawings to facilitate clarity of detail. Revised scale shall be indicated on plotted sheets. 1.6 PRODUCT DATA A. Product Data Action Submittals are required as called for in specification section Submittal paragraph. 1. See Section 01 31 26 for specific information. 1.7 SAMPLES A. Sample Action Submittals are required in applicable specification section Submittal paragraph. 1. Identify samples with manufacturer's name, item, use, type, Project designation, specification section or drawing detail reference, color, range, texture, finish and other pertinent data. 2. Submit samples to address indicated, or Project site if required or requested. 3. Samples shall have a label affixed or attached thereto of sufficient size to accommodate Contractor's approval stamp. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES -CD 01 33 00 - 3 4. Architect may retain samples for comparison purposes. 1.8 PROJECT INFORMATION AND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT INFORMATION A. Project Information and Contract Closeout Information submittals are required by specification section Submittal paragraph. B. Project Information that requires professional seals and signatures shall be submitted per following. 1. Unless otherwise agreed to by Architect, submit to Architect's for records one (1) original, or high quality high contrast copy of submittal suitable for reproduction, unless quantity is indicated elsewhere. Submit quantity indicated in specifications sections to Owner. 2. Architect is not required to return submittal. 3. Information shall be 8-1/2 x 11 IN or 8-1/2 x 14 IN maximum. 4. Do not fold. Submit in envelope large enough for submitted items. 1.9 TRANSMITTAL — GENERAL A. Contractor is responsible for making submissions. 1. Submit items to Contractor for transmittal to office of Architect: Chapuis Design Group Architecture, PA. 510 Vonderburg Drive, Suite 216 Brandon, FL 33511 Attention: Tom Chapuis B. Transmit items with Submittal Transmittal form included at end of this section, or supplied by Architect, or of a similar format approved in advance by Architect. 1. If submittal is based on an Optional manufacturer listed in Part 2 of technical specification sections, in lieu of Base manufacturer listed, submit completed form titled Optional Manufacturer Product/System Comparison included at end of this section along with Submittal Transmittal form. a. Optional Manufacturer Product/System Comparison form is not required to be submitted if Optional manufacturer product name, and product or model number are specifically listed in technical specification sections. 2. Contact Architect for copy made for Project. 3. Indicate Project name, Architect's project number, specification section title, description of submitted items or systems, manufacturer and submittal type on transmittal form. 4. Indicate submitted date, approval and sign in appropriate space on transmittal form. 5. Submittal Transmittal form shall stay with submittal throughout its routing. a. Make copy for file if necessary. 6. Indicate submittal number in space provided on Submittal Transmittal form. Following submittal numbering system shall be used: a. Identify each submittal using applicable 5 or 6 digit specification section number from Contract Documents. b. After section number, indicate sequence number. First submittal of section series would be numbered "######-1 ", next would be "######-2", etc. c. If returned for re -submission, add a designation character. Second submission would be 1A", third would be "######-1B", etc. 7. Indicate description of submitted items including drawing numbers, etc. 8. Indicate "Submittal type" being submitted. C. Submit submittals required by Contract Documents according to approved Schedule of Submittals. D. Submittals shall only include items from one specification section. 1. Project Information Submittals and Contract Closeout Information Submittals shall be submitted separately from other submittals required by specification section. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES -CD 013300-4 2. Submit all items specified in section at same time for complete review, except Contract Closeout Information Submittals. E. Do not submit following: 1. Submittals not required by specification section Submittal paragraph. 2. Submittals required by other contractors or trades for their coordination that are not required by specification section Submittal paragraph. 3. Submittal of products, systems or manufactures not specified. 4. Submittal of substitution. 5. Submittal of MSDS information. 6. Large quantities of submittals at one time. F. Do not mark copies with highlighters that black out information, or turn opaque when reproduced, or will not scan or reproduce legibly. 1.10 CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR ACTION A. Direct specific attention in writing with submittal or on submittal, indicating deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. l . Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from requirements of Contract Documents by Architect's approval of submittals unless, (1) Contractor has informed Architect in writing of such deviation at time of submission, and (2) Architect has given written approval to specific deviation as a minor change in Work, or (3) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has authorized the deviation. 2. Completed work shall match appearance of approved samples and mock-ups. B. Contractor represents and warrants that submittals shall be prepared by persons and entities possessing expertise and experience in the trade for which submittal is prepared, and if required by Architect or applicable law, by a licensed Professional Engineer or Structural Engineer, or other specialized Engineer, where so stipulated. C. Contractor is responsible for confirmation and correlation of dimensions at Project site; for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction; and for coordination of work of trades. D. Contractor and Subcontractor shall review submittal required by Contract Documents for compliance with Contract Documents, approve and submit to Architect. E. Submittal to Architect indicates Contractor, Subcontractor represent they have: 1. Reviewed submittal for compliance with the Contract Documents and has approved submittal; 2. Determined and verified field measurements, and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so; 3. Determined and verified quantities, materials, performance criteria, installation requirements, catalog numbers and similar data related thereto; 4. Determined substitutions have not been included; 5. Checked, determined, verified and coordinated information contained within such submittals with requirements of Work, Contract Documents and other submittals; 6. Certified that submittal is in compliance with Contract Documents, and have approved the submittal. F. Resubmit items returned by Architect and marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Not Approved" until approval is received. 1. Direct specific attention, in writing, or on resubmitted submittals to revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals. 2. Bubble or otherwise clearly identify all changes from previous submittal. 3. Tag each re -submittal with a designation that reuses the previous submittal number and a suffix designating the re -submittal sequence in accordance with the numbering system indicated in this section. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES -CD 013300-5 G. Contractor shall reproduce and distribute copies of submittals after Architect's review to: 1. Project site: Copy of "Approved" or "Approved as Noted" submittals for use by Contractor's field staff, Owner and Architect's representatives. 2. Subcontractor/vendor. 3. Other Contractors, Subcontractors or vendors as may be required for coordination purposes. 4. Owner: Copy of "Approved" or "Approved as Noted" submittals. 5. Authorities having jurisdiction: Copy of "Approved" or "Approved as Noted" submittals if required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 6. Inspector (if any): Copy of "Approved" or "Approved as Noted" submittals. 7. Testing and Inspection Agencies: Copy of "Approved" or "Approved as Noted" submittals required for them to perform inspections and testing. H. Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for coordination with other submittals or for errors or omissions in submittals by Architect's approval thereof. I. Material lists and quantity information included in submittals are sole responsibility of Contractor. J. Where a submittal is required by Specifications, any related Work performed prior to Architect's review and approval of the pertinent submission will be sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. 1.11 ARCHITECT ACTION ON SUBMITTALS A. Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon Contractor's submittals, but only for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1. Such review and action is limited to only those submittals identified in Contract Documents. 2. Architect's review of such submittals is not conducted for purpose of determining accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions, quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain responsibility of the Contractor. 3. Architect's review or approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 4. Architect's review or approval shall not constitute a review of safety or health precautions, or of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. 5. Architect's review or approval on a resubmission shall not apply to revisions that Contractor has, not directed specific attention to in writing on resubmitted submittals, other than those requested by Architect on previous submittal. B. Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in Work or in activities of Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review by Architect, Architect's consultants, and Owner, if needed. 1. Architect's obligation to review or approve submittals and to return them with reasonable promptness is conditional upon prior review and approval of submittals by Contractor, and Contractor's transmittal of submittals in accordance with Contract Documents and approved Schedule of Submittals. C. Items not submitted in accordance with provisions of this section may be returned, without review or action. 1. Submittals which do not indicate Contractor has reviewed submittal for compliance with Contract Documents, and approved submittal. 2. Submittals which are not required by Contract Documents. 3. Submittal on items not approved for use by Contract Documents. 4. Submittals which include information from more than one specification section. 5. Project Information Submittals or Contract Closeout Information Submittals included with other submittals required by specification section Submittal paragraph. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room 95 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES -CD 013300-6 6. Submittals required by other contractors or trades for their coordination that are not required by specification section Submittal paragraph. 7. Submittal of products, systems, or manufactures not specified. 8. Submittal of substitution. 9. Submittal of MSDS information. 10. Information on only a portion of a submittal. 11. If approved Submittal Transmittal form was not used. D. If a submittal must be delayed for coordination with other submittals not yet submitted, Architect may, as an option, either return submittal with no action or notify Contractor of other submittals which must be received before submittal will be reviewed. E. Additional copies of submittals not required or requested may not be returned. F. Architect may review Project Information Submittals or Contract Closeout Information Submittals at its sole discretion, for general compliance with design concept expressed in Contract Documents. END OF DOCUMENT 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES -CD 013300-7 SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL PROJECT: AdventHealth - Zephyrhills SUBMITTAL NO: Operating Room 45 - Cystoscopy SECTION NUMBER -----------I SEQUENCE NUMBER ---------------------I ARCH PROJ. NO.: 042-21-177.01 RE -SUBMITTAL CHARACTER ------------- SPECIFICATION TITLE: MANUFACTURER: ❑ `Base" Manufacturer ❑ "Optional' Manufacturer (Do not submit on manufacturers not listed in specifications) (Complete attached Optional Manufacturer Product/System Comparison form if manufacturer is an "Optional" manufacturer) DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTED ITEM: NOTE 1: Submittal transmittal to Architect indicates Contractor, and subcontractor have reviewed for compliance with Contract Documents and have approved submittal. THIS TRANSMITTAL FORM SHALL STAY WITH SUBMITTAL THROUGHOUT ROUTING. COPY FOR FILE ROUTING SEQUENCE ACTION TAKEN BY DATE REC'D DATE SENT NUMBER COPIES ACTION TAKEN SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER: A NOTE 1 CONTRACTOR: A NOTE 1 ARCHITECT: Cha uis Design Group Architecture PA. CONTRACTOR: SUBCONTRACTOR / SUPPLIER: N.A. OWNER: N.A. N.A. N.A. ACTION LEGEND: (Indicate in ACTION TAKEN column above) A APPROVED B APPROVED AS NOTED C REVISE AND RESUBMIT D NOT APPROVED E NO ACTION REQUIRED BY ARCHITECT E1 Submittal not required E2 Project Information or Contract Closeout Information Submittal Architect's action taken in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents. COMMENTS: ❑ SEE ATTACHED COMMENTS ❑ SEE ENCLOSED SUBMITTAL FOR COMMENTS ❑ SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION REQUIRED END OF SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES -CD 013300-8 OPTIONAL MANUFACTURER PRODUCT / SYSTEM COMPARISON IF SUBMITTING ON A MANUFACTURER LISTED AS "OPTIONAL" IN TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, COMPLETE THIS FORM, AND SUBMIT WITH FIRST SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FOR PRODUCT (Note: Form not required if "Optional" manufacturer product name, product number or model number or both are specifically listed in technical specification sections) AdventHealth - Zephyrhills PROJECT: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy SUBMITTAL NO: _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ SECTION NUMBER -----------I SEQUENCE NUMBER ---------------------I RE -SUBMITTAL CHARACTER ------------- Specification Section No.: Article(s)Iparagraph(s): PRODUCT 1 SYSTEM COMPARISON: Provide a one-to-one comparison with ALL specified requirements. SPEC DESIGNATION BASE MANUFACTURER'S SUBMITTED MANUFACTURER'S (IF ANY) PRODUCTISYSTEM PRODUCT/SYSTEM Manufacturer: Name, brand: Catalog No.: Features.: etc.: EFFECT OF PRODUCT: Optional affects other parts of Work: No ❑ Yes ❑ (If yes, explain below) Optional requires dimensional revision or redesign of No ❑ Yes ❑ (If yes, explain below) structure or mechanical and electrical Work: Same warrantee provided as specified base product: No ❑ Yes ❑ (If yes, explain below) Explanation: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES -CD 01 33 00 - 9 STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE OF PRODUCT OR SYSTEM TO CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS: Supplier, Subcontractor and Contractor in making submittal of Optional manufacturer's product or system, or in using an Optional manufacturer's product or system represent: ❑ Will coordinate installation of proposed product or system into Work, to include necessary changes or modifications or both to the Work, including additional costs to other contractors, when such changes result solely from the use of an Optional Manufacturer. ❑ Waive all claims for additional costs or time extensions related to proposed product or system that subsequently become apparent or are caused by product. ❑ Will modify other parts of Work as may be needed by use of proposed product or system to make all parts of Work complete and functioning. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS: FOLLOWING FIRM HEREBY REQUESTS CONSIDERATION OF OPTIONAL PRODUCT OR SYSTEMS: Requested by (firm): Acknowledged by (print & sign): Position: Subcontractor: Acknowledged by (print & sign): Position: Contractor: Acknowledged by (print & sign): Position: END OF OPTIONAL PRODUCT / SYSTEM COMPARISON Date: Phone Date: Phone Date: Phone 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES -CD 013300-10 SECTION 0142 10 ABBREVIATIONS - TERMINOLOGY A acid, compressed air BB boiler burner, broad band AB anchor bolt, air barrier, air blender, auger boring BBD boiler blowdown, broad band data A/C air condition, air conditioner B to B back to back AC air compressor, alternating current, B & B balled and burlapped architectural casework, asphaltic concrete B & BB breakers and bus bracing ACB air circuit breaker BARO barometer ACH air changes per hour BAS building automation system ACIP architectural cast in place concrete BCCMP bituminous coated corrugated metal pipe ACLD air cooled BDD backdraft damper ACSR aluminum conduit or steel reinforced BDF building distribution frame ACU air conditioning unit BF boiler feed, bamboo flooring ACV air control valve BFP backflow preventer AD area drain, automatic damper BFS boiler feed system ADJ adjust, adjustable BHC booster heating coil A/E Architect/Engineer BKR breaker AF access flooring, air filter, amps frame BKT bracket AFD adjustable frequency drive BL bed locator, baseline AFF above finished floor BLDG building AFG above finished grade BM beam AFH air filter housing BOF bottom of footing AFM air flow meter BP base plate AGGR aggregate BR bare root, bottom register, bullet resistive AHU air handling unit BRG bearing AIC ampere interrupting capacity BRZ bronze ALUM aluminum BS barium sink ALT alternate BSMT basement AM amplitude modulation, ammeter, BT bathtub acoustical material BUR built-up roof AMB ambient BUSY in -use ANCT acid neutralization tank BWS brine water supply AMP amplifier BWR brine water return ANOD anodized ANN annunciator C conduit ANS automatic answer and recall switch C & G curb and gutter ANT antenna CA cold air, cardiac arrest APC architectural precast concrete CAC custom acoustical ceiling APD air pressure drop CAD cadmium ARCH architectural CALL incoming call ARR arrester CANT cantilever ASPH asphalt CAP capacity AT autotransformer CATV community antenna television ATS automatic transfer switch CB chalkboard, circuit breaker, catch basin ATF athletic flooring CC cooling coil ATM atmosphere CCT cubical curtain track ATU air terminal unit CCTV closed circuit television AUTO automatic CCW counter clockwise AUX auxiliary CD ceiling diffuser, condensate drain, coiling door AV acid vent CFCI contractor furnished, contractor installed AW acid waste CFS concrete floor sealer AWC acrylic wall coating CFWC composite fiber wall covering CG container grown, corner guard, coiling grille, B boiler, bottom center of gravity 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 ABBREVIATIONS - TERMINOLOGY 014210-1 CGU CH CHW Cl CIP CIR Ci CJP CKS CKT CL CLG CLPR CLPS CLR CM CMP CMPA CMPR CMPS CMU CO CO2 COL CONC COND CONN CONST CONT CONTR CONV CORR CP CPD CPR CPT CPTT CPU CPVC CR CRAF CRCS CRF CRPS CRIT CRT CS CSI CSMU CSS CSV CT CTOC CTR ceramic glazed units chiller chilled drinking water cast iron cast iron pipe, cast in place circulating construction joint, control joint complete joint penetration control key switch circuit center line ceiling, cooling clean low pressure steam return clean low pressure steam supply clear Construction Manager corrugated metal pipe corrugated metal pipe arch compressor, clean medium pressure steam return clean medium pressure steam supply concrete masonry unit cleanout, carbon monoxide carbon dioxide column concrete condition, condenser, condensing, condensation connection construction continuous contractor converter corridor concrete pipe (non -reinforced), condensate pump discharge change proposal request carpet carpet tile central processor unit chlorinated polyvinyl chloride control room, ceiling register, crash rail clean room raised access flooring clean room ceiling system condensation resistance factor clean room partition system critical cathode ray tube concrete stain, counter shutter current source inverters calcium silicate masonry unit clinical service sink cushioned sheet vinyl ceramic tile, cooling tower, current transformer, computer terminal center to center center, cooling tower return, controlled time run CTS cooling tower supply CU condensing unit, copper CUH cabinet unit heater CULV culvert CW cold water, clockwise CWS chilled water supply, curtain wall system CWR chilled water return D delta, depth DB dry bulb, decibel, direct bury DBA deformed bar anchor DBL double DBT dry bulb temperature DC direct current DD diversion dike DDC direct digital control DEMO demolition, demolish DET detail DF drinking fountain DIC difference in conditions contract DIFF difference DIM dimension DISP dispenser DIP ductile iron pipe DIST distribution, distilled DIW deionized water DIWI double -inlet, double -width DL dead load DLF decorative laminate flooring DLO daylight opening DMPR damper DN down DO ditto DP data processing, differential pressure, dew point DPA damper position adjustment DPAN distribution panel DPF decorative polymer fabrication DPS door position switch DR drain DS downspout DT dew point temperature, drain tile DTS data transmission system DW display wall DWC dry erase wall covering DWG drawing DWH domestic water heater DWL dowel DWV drain, waste and vent DX direct expansion E SCAN emergency medical status scan switch EA exhaust air, expansion anchor, each EAH exhaust hood EAT entering air temperature 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 ABBREVIATIONS - TERMINOLOGY 014210-2 EE electrical engineer FE fire extinguisher, finished end EEG electro encephalograph FEC fire extinguisher cabinet EF exhaust fan FF final filter EFF efficiency FH fire hose EFT electric finned tube FHC fire hose cabinet EGS ethylene glycol supply FHV fire hose valve EGR ethylene glycol return FIN finished EH electric heater FL floor EIFS exterior insulation finish system FLA full load amps EJ expansion joint FLUOR fluorescent EJC expansion joint cover FM frequency modulation radio EKG electro cardiograph FO fiber optic EL elevation FOBB fiber optic backbone ELEC electrical FOCC fiber optic cross connect EM electro-magnetic FODC fiber optic distribution cabinet EMB embedment FOF fuel oil fill EMER emergency FOR fuel oil return EMI electro-magnetic interference FOS fuel oil supply EMS energy management system FOSE fiber optic service entrance EMT electrical metallic tubing FOV fuel oil vent ENG engine FP full penetration ENGR Engineer FR fire retardant EO exit only, electrically operated FRP fiberglass reinforced plastic EPDM Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer FS floor sink EPR ethylene propylene rubber FSD flexible strip door EPT electric power transfer FSK foil scrim kraft EQ equal FT finned tube EQF engineered quartz fabrication FTG footing EQUIP equipment FURN furnish ER emergency room, exhaust register FU furnace unit ES emergency shower FUT future EST estimate FV field verify, face velocity ET expansion tank FVC fire valve cabinet EV evaporator FW flammable waste EVT equiviscous temperature FXTR fixture EW each way EWC electric water cooler G gas, ground, grille EWT entering water temperature GA gauge, gage EXC excavate GALV galvanize(d) EXH exhaust GC high build glazed coating, general contractor EXP expansion, exposed GCWR glycol chilled water return EXIST existing GCWS glycol chilled water supply EXT exterior GEN generator GF granular fill, granite flooring F filter GFI ground fault interrupter F TO F face to face GFP ground fault protection FA fire alarm, face area GFCI ground fault circuit interrupter FC foot control GFRC glass fiber reinforced cement FCAN full capacity above nominal GFRG glass fiber reinforced gypsum FCBN full capacity below nominal GI galvanized iron FCO floor clean out GL glass FCS fire command station GR grade FCU fan coil unit GUM glass unit masonry FD fire damper, floor drain GWB gypsum wallboard FDN foundation GWS glycol water supply FDV fire department valve GWR glycol water return 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 ABBREVIATIONS - TERMINOLOGY 014210-3 GYP gypsum I/O input/output GYWC glass yarn wall covering IPS iron pipe size IU induction unit H humidifier, height IV intravenous HA hot air IVT intravenous track H2O water IWR ice water return HB hose bibb, horizontal blinds IWS ice water supply HBC high build glazed coating HC handicapped, heating coil JC Janitor's closet HCWS hot chilled water supply JT joint HCWR hot chilled water return HD heavy duty KO knockout HDG hot dip galvanized KT keyboard tray HDPE high density polyethylene HDWD hardwood L length, lavatory, lock HE helium LA lightning arrester HECMP horizontal elliptical corrugated metal pipe LAT leaving air temperature HG mercury LAV lavatory HID high intensity discharge LC lead covered HK hook LAHP laboratory air (high pressure) HM hollow metal LALP laboratory air (low pressure) HORIZ horizontal LCD liquid crystal display HOSP hospital grade LCW laboratory cold water HP heat pump, horse power, high point LD linear diffuser, laboratory drain HPS high pressure sodium, high pressure steam LDW less door width supply LED light emitting diode HPR high pressure steam return LF limestone flooring HR handrail, hour LHWC laboratory hot water circulating H-STAT humidistat LIM line isolation monitor HS headed studs LIN linear, lineal HSB high strength bolt LL liveload, lead lined HT heat LLH long leg horizontal HTG heating LLV long leg vertical HTR heater LMC linear metal ceiling HV high voltage LN linoleum, liquid nitrogen HVAC heating, ventilating and air conditioning LONG longitudinal HW hardware group, hot water LP low point HWC hot water circulating LPR low pressure steam return HWS hot water supply LPS low pressure steam supply HWR hot water return LR linear return HX heat exchanger LRA locked rotor amps HZ hertz LS life safety, life support LSH long slotted holes IAQ indoor air quality LSS lock status switch IC intercom LT light ICW industrial cold water LTGWR low temperature glycol water return ID inside diameter LTGWS low temperature glycol water supply IG isolated ground LV low voltage IH intake head LVT laboratory vent pipe IHW industrial hot water LVTR laboratory vent through roof IMC intermediate metal conduit LW lightweight, laboratory waste INCAND incandescent LWIC lightweight insulating concrete INFO information LWT leaving water temperature INSUL insulation INT interior M meter INWC inches water column MA mixed air, make-up air 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 ABBREVIATIONS - TERMINOLOGY 014210-4 MAS masonry NO number, normally open, nitrous oxide MATL material NOM nominal MATV master antenna television NR noise reduction MAU make-up air unit NRC noise reduction coefficient MAX maximum NST natural stone tile MB main breaker, markerboard NTS not to scale MBH thousand BTUH MCB main circuit breaker 02 oxygen MCC motor control center OA outside air MCP motor circuit protector OC on center, overcurrent MD manual damper, motion detector OCB oil circuit breaker MECH mechanical OD outside diameter, overflow roof drain MED medicine, medical OF overflow MEK methyl ethyl ketone OFCI owner furnished, contractor installed MERC mercury OFOI owner furnished, owner installed MET metal OH overhead MEZZ mezzanine OPNG opening MF marble flooring OPP opposite MFR manufacturer OPT operators terminal MGA medical gas alarm OSD open site drain MH manhole, metal halide OSL outstanding leg MIN minimum MISC miscellaneous P pump, plenum ML metal laminate P SCAN Personal attention medical status scan MLO main lugs only PA public address MO masonry opening, motor operated PB push button, pullbox power brick MOD modified PBX private board exchange MP medium pressure PC plug connector, portland cement MPS medium pressure steam supply PCC portland cement concrete MPR medium pressure steam return PCG polycarbonate corner guard MRGWB mold and moisture resistant gypsum wallboard PCWR process cooling water return MS mop sink, motion sensor PCWS process cooling water supply MSV manufactured stone veneer PD pressure drop, pressure drain pipe MTL material PE Polyethylene MTP metal toilet partition PERF perforated MWP metal wall panel PERM permanent PF prefilter, power factor N2 nitrogen PFCC power factor correction capacitor NA not applicable PFF provision for future feeder NAT natural PH phase NBD narrow band data pH measure of acidity/alkalinity NBDC narrow band data cabinet PH/0 phase NC nurse call, normally closed, non -corrosive PHC preheat coil ND normal duty PI passive infrared NDC nose down curb PID proportional -integral -derivative NDT non-destructive testing PIV post indicator valve NEG negative PL property line, plate, pilot light, plastic laminate NET nylon entrance tile PLBG plumbing NFWC natural fiber wall covering PLNJ paper and lead neoprene jacket NWT normal weight PLS pure live seed NI nickel PNL Panel NIC not in contract PNT paint NP non -plenum PNTE paint (epoxy) NPO non -plenum office PNTL paint (latex) NPS nominal pipe size PNTLO paint (low -odor) NPT nominal pipe thread PNSR paint (stain resistant) 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 ABBREVIATIONS - TERMINOLOGY 014210-5 POL polished RHD relief hood PP partial penetration, pump plumbing RI rubber insulated PPCF patch panel connection field RTI response time index PPM parts per million RL refrigerant liquid, roof drain leader PR pair RO rough opening, reverse osmosis water PRL parallel RP radiant panel PROJ project, projection RS refrigerant suction, roller shade PROP property RST resilient stair tread PROT protective, protection RT resilient tile PRV pressure reducing valve, pressure relief valve RTP reinforced thermosetting plastic PS plaster sink, presence sensor, pull switch RTV room temperature vulcanized PT printer, pneumatic tube, potential transformers, RTZ urethane rubber terrazzo porcelain tile RV reduced voltage, relief vent PTAC packaged terminal air conditioner RVT resilient vinyl tile PTS pneumatic tube station R/W right-of-way PVC polyvinyl chloride RW return wall register PVF polyvinylidene fluoride PVMT pavement S sink, soil (piping), sprinkler (piping), PVS polyvinyl spiral (pipe) sanitary sewer PW purified water SA shock absorber, supply air, sound attenuator PWC purified water circulating SAF surge arrester field PWD plywood SAN sanitary PWM pulse width modulated SAT saturation SDR sound distribution rack QT quarry tile SB sitz bath QTB quarry tile base SC sill cock, shading coefficient SCE stabilized construction entrance R radius, rankine, riser, rubber sheath, register SCF station connection field RA return air SCH schedule RAD radiology SCR silicone controlled rectifier RB resilient base SCSV static conductive sheet vinyl RCCP reinforced concrete culvert pipe SCT station cable tray, static conductive tile RCF riser connection field SCW soft cold water RCG recycled glass portland cement countertop SCWR secondary chilled water return RCP reinforced concrete pipe, reflected ceiling plan SOWS secondary chilled water supply RCPT receptacle SD smoke damper, storm drain, sensing device RCW ribbon wall/ curtain wall SDC station distribution cabinet RD roof drain SDOT star -delta open transition REC recess, receiver SDCT star -delta -closed transition RECIRC recirculate SDRS static dissipative resilient sheet flooring RED reducing SDRT static dissipative resilient tile flooring REF reference SEC security REFR refrigerator SECT section REG regulator, register SEF seamless epoxy flooring REINF reinforcement SERV service REL A relief air SEOR structural engineer of record REM reminder light set and scan switch, SF supply fan, silt fence, square feet removable SFD smoke actuated fire damper RET retaining, return SFWC synthetic fiber wall covering REV revise, revision, reversing, revolutions SG supply grille RF return fan, radio frequency SGB signal grounding bus RFI request for information, radio frequency interference SGD sectional glass door RIFT rubber floor tile SGL single RGSC rigid galvanized steel conduit SH shower, sensible heat RH relative humidity SHW soft hot water RHC reheat coil SHWC soft hot water circulating 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 ABBREVIATIONS - TERMINOLOGY 014210-6 SIM similar TD temperature differential SIM single -inlet, single -width TDC transverse duct connection SL sliding TEFC totally enclosed fan -cooled SOG slab on grade TEL telephone SP standpipe, sump pump, static pressure, TEMP temperature, temporary single pole TENV totally enclosed non -ventilated SPA setpoint adjustment, spaces TERR terrazzo SPD standpipe drain TERM terminal SPDT single pole double throw TFC textured finish coating SPEC specification TH total heat, total head (pumps) SPKR sprinkler, speaker THD Total Harmonic Distortion SPS security pushbutton switch TOC top of curb, top of concrete SQ square TOF top of footing SR sheet rubber, supply register TONE tone transfer SRV safety relief valve TOS top of steel SS service sink, sanitary sewer, stainless steel, TOW top of wall storm sewer TP total pressure, twisted pair SSCG stainless steel corner guard TPC textured plastic coating SSD sectional steel door TPO thermoplastic olefin SSF solid surface fabrication TPWC thermoplastic olefin wallcovering SSH short slotted holes TR top of register SSS surgeons' scrub sink, solid state starter T-STAT thermostat SST stainless steel sink TSP total static pressure ST steam trap TSU thermal storage unit STA station, stationary TU terminal unit START starter TV television STC sound transmission class TVSS transient voltage surge suppressor STD standard TX transformer STDWT standard weight TYP typical STIFF stiffener STIR stirrup UC undercounter STM steam UD underdrain STOR storage UG underground STP shielded twisted pair UGE underground electric STR strainer UGS underground signal STRUCT structural UGT underground telephone SUF seamless urethane flooring UH unit heater SUSP suspend(ed) UHF ultra high frequency SV sheet vinyl, steam vent UNEX unexcavated SVD switched voice and data UNO unless noted otherwise SW supply wall grille, switch, soft water, UPS uninterruptible power supply sidewalk UPWC ultra pure water circulating SWBD switchboard UPWR ultra pure water return SWD sectional wood door UPWS ultra pure water supply SWC soft wall covering UR urinal SWGR switchgear US utility sink, ultrasound SX steam exhaust UTIL utility SYM symmetrical UV ultraviolet SYS system V valve, vent, velocity, vacuum T toilet, tank, temperature VAC vacuum, volts alternating current T & B testing and balancing, top and bottom VAV variable air volume T & G tongue and groove VB vapor barrier, vacuum breaker TA tempered air, transfer air, toilet accessories VC vitrified clay TB tackboard VCG vinyl corner guard TBB the backer board VCP vitrified clay pipe 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 ABBREVIATIONS - TERMINOLOGY 014210-7 VCPX vitrified clay pipe, extra strength VD volume damper VERT vertical VEST vestibule VF ventilation fan VFD variable frequency drive VHF very high frequency VM voltmeter VOC volatile organic compound VOL volume VP vacuum pump, velocity pressure, venetian plaster VR vapor retarder VRI variable volume with reheat interior VS venturi station, vacuum (canister) slide VSI voltage source inverters VT vinyl tile VTR vent through roof VV variable volume VVR variable volume with reheat VWC vinyl wall covering W width, waste (piping), water, wire W/ with WB wet bulb WBT wet bulb temperature WC water closet WD wood WDW window WF wall fin, wood flooring WG water gauge, wall guard WH water heater, wall hydrant WHA water hammer arrester WL wind load END OF SECTION WLD welded WM wattmeter W/O without WP waterproofing, weatherproof, work point WPD water pressure drop WPF waterproof flooring WS wall switch, waterstop, water softener, waste stack WT weight WWR welded wire reinforcement XFMR transformer XL extra long XLPE cross linked polyethylene XP explosion proof X-STR extra strength YD yard YH yard hydrant YR year Y,W wye ZA zone annunciator ZN zone 1 P one pole 2P double pole is single speed 2S two speed 1 W one winding 2W two winding 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 ABBREVIATIONS - TERMINOLOGY 014210-8 SECTION 0142 11 ABBREVIATIONS - ORGANIZATIONS AND STANDARDS AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association ABAA Air Barrier Association of America ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association ACI American Concrete Institute ADA Americans with Disabilities Act ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines ADC Air Diffusion Council AGA American Gas Association AGC Associated General Contractors of America AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International ANSI American National Standards Institute APA APA — The Engineered Wood Association ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASA Acoustical Society of America ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ASLA American Society of Landscape Architects ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BAAQM Bay Area Air Quality Management District BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Industry Association BIFMA Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association CAC California Administrative Code CP Comprehensive Procurement Guide (EPA) CRA California Redwood Association CRREL Cold Region Research Engineering Lab CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Comm.) CRI Carpet and Rug Institute CSI Construction Specifications Institute CTI Cooling Tower Institute EIA Electronics Institute of America EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association EIFSA Exterior Insulation Finish Systems Association EPA Environmental Protection Agency FCI Fluid Controls Institute, Inc. FM Factory Mutual FS Federal Specification FSC Forest Stewardship Council 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy ABBREVIATIONS - ORGANIZATIONS AND STANDARDS 014211-1 3/17/2021 GS GreenSeal HEI Heat Exchanger Institute HI Hydraulic Institute HMI Hoist Manufacturers Institute HYDI Hydronics Institute IBI Intelligent Buildings Institute IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers ICC International Code Council ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IIA Incinerator Institute of America IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design Green Building Rating System (US Green Building Council) MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBS National Bureau of Standards NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NCRP National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEC National Electrical Code NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NECS National Electrical Code Standards NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology NFoPA National Forest Products Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NOAA National Oceanographic and Atmospheric Administration NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NSF National Sanitation Foundation NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PDI Plumbing Drainage Institute PS Public Standard (U.S. Dept. of Comm.) PTI Post Tensioning Institute RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SAMA Scientific Apparatus Markers Association SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District SCS Scientific Certification Systems SDI Steel Deck Institute / Steel Door Institute SFIA Steel Framing Industry Association 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy ABBREVIATIONS - ORGANIZATIONS AND STANDARDS 014211-2 3/17/2021 SFPA Southern Forest Products Association SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. SPRI Single Ply Roofing Institute SSMA Steel Stud Manufacturers Association SSPC Structural Steel Painting Council TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association TIA Telecommunications Institute of America UFC Uniform Fire Code UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UMC Uniform Mechanical Code UPC Uniform Plumbing Code USGBC US Green Building Council WI Woodwork Institute WWPA Western Wood Products Association END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 ABBREVIATIONS - ORGANIZATIONS AND STANDARDS 014211-3 SECTION 0142 13 ABBREVIATIONS FOR UNITS OF MEASURE - ENGLISH SYSTEM OF UNITS (IP) A (amp) ampere(s), area ACFM actual CFM AIC amps interrupting capacity AWG American Wire Gauge BF board foot (feet) BHP brake horsepower BTU british thermal unit BTUH british thermal units per hour C Value thermal conductance (BTU/(HR)(SF)(F) per inch thickness CF cubic feet CFH cubic feet per hour CFM cubic feet per minute CM centimeter(s) CM/SEC centimeter(s) per second CPS cycle(s) per second CU cubic CU FT cubic feet CU IN cubic inch(es) CY cubic yard(s) dB decibel(s) DbmV decibel millivolts DEG degree(s) (angular) degF degree(s) Fahrenheit EDR equivalent direct radiation F fahrenheit FPM feet per minute FPS feet per second FT feet, foot GAL gallon(s) GAL/SF gallon(s) per square foot GPH gallon(s) per hour GPM gallon(s) per minute GPS gallon(s) per second GHZ gigahertz GR grains GSF gross square feet HD head HP horsepower HR hour(s) Hz hertz 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 ABBREVIATIONS FOR UNITS OF MEASURE - ENGLISH SYSTEM OF UNITS (IP) 014213-1 IN inch(es) IN Hg inches - mercury IN -LB inch -pounds (force) IN WG inches - water gage K kip(s) K value thermal conductivity (BTU/(HR)(SF)(F/IN) KHz kilohertz KSF Kips per square foot KV kilovolt(s) KVA kilovolt ampere(s) KVAR kilovars KW kilowatt(s) KWH kilowatt-hours LB pound(s) LBF-IN pound (force) inch LF linear foot, linear feet LIN linear, lineal mA milliamps MBTU thousand BTU MBH thousand BTU/HR MCFH thousand cubic feet per hour MCM thousand circular mils MFBM thousand feet board measure MHz megahertz mHz millihertz MI mile(s) MIN minute(s) MO month(s) MPH miles per hour MVA megavoltamperes NSF net square feet OZ ounce(s) PCE pyrometric cone equivalent PCF pound(s) per cubic foot PCY pound(s) per cubic yard PPH pounds per hour PPM parts per million PSF pound(s) per square foot PSI pound(s) per square inch PSIA pound(s) per square inch absolute PSIG pound(s) per square inch gage Q total heat transfer (BTUH) QT quart RH relative humidity R value thermal resistance (HR)(SF)(F)/BTU RMS root mean square RPM revolutions per minute 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 ABBREVIATIONS FOR UNITS OF MEASURE - ENGLISH SYSTEM OF UNITS (IP) 014213-2 RPS revolutions per second S second SCFM standard CFM SF square feet SQ M square inch(es) SQ FT square foot SSU saybolt seconds universal T ton TR tons refrigeration U value thermal conductance (1 divided by total R value) (BTU/(HR)(SF)(F) uV microvolts V volt(s), volume, velocity VAC volt(s), AC VAR volt amperes reactive VDC volt(s), DC w watt(s) YD yard(s) YR year(s) END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 ABBREVIATIONS FOR UNITS OF MEASURE - ENGLISH SYSTEM OF UNITS (IP) 014213-3 SECTION 0142 15 ABBREVIATIONS FOR UNITS OF MEASURE INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS (SI) A (amp) ampere(s), area AIC amps interrupting capacity AWG American Wire Gauge C Celsius cm3 cubic centimeter cd candela cm3/s cubic centimeter(s) per second cm centimeter(s) cm2 square centimeter(s) cm/s centimeter(s) per second cps cycle(s) per second Cu cubic dB decibel(s) Db/m decibel/meter DbmV decibel millivolts DEG degree(s) (angular) degC degree(s) Celsius FV face velocity g gram(s) GHZ gigahertz GR Grains ha hectare HD head HR, h hour(s) Hz hertz J joule K kelvin k value thermal conductivity (W/mK) kg kilogram(s) kg/ha kilogram/hectare kg/m kilogram/meter kg/mm kilogram/millimeter kHz kilohertz kJ kilojoule km kilometer km/h kilometer/hour kNm kilonewton meter kPa kilopascal(s) km2 kilogram(s) per square meter kV kilovolt(s) kVA kilovolt ampere(s) kVAR kilovars kW kilowatt(s) 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 ABBREVIATIONS FOR UNITS OF MEASURE INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS (SI) 014215-1 kWh kilowatt-hours L liter(s), length L/h liters/hour L/ha liters/hectare L/m liters/meter Us liters/second LIN linear, lineal lm lumen Lm linear meter(s) L/m liter(s)/meter Lpf liters per flush Us liters/second Ix lux In meter m2 square meter(s) m3 meters cubed mA milliamps MCM thousand circular mils MHz megahertz mHz Millihertz min minute(s) m/h meter(s)/hour mL milliliter m/L meter(s)/liter mL/s milliliter/second mm millimeter(s) MPa megapascal m/s meter(s)/second MVA megavoltamperes N newton Pa Pascal PCE pyrometric cone equivalent PPM parts per million R value thermal resistance (m2K/W) r value thermal resistivity (mK/W) RH relative humidity RMS root mean square rpm revolutions per minute rps revolutions per second s second SSU saybolt seconds universal t ton t/ha tons/hectare U value thermal conductance (1 divided by total R value) (W/m2K) mV microvolts V volt(s), volume, velocity 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 ABBREVIATIONS FOR UNITS OF MEASURE INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS (SI) 014215-2 VAC volt(s), AC VDC volt(s), DC W watt(s) W/m watts/meter END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 ABBREVIATIONS FOR UNITS OF MEASURE INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS (SI) 014215-3 SECTION 01 42 16 DEFINITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: 1. Basic definitions are included to define terminology used throughout specifications. 2. Source for some definitions in this section is THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS DOCUMENT A201-2007, the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, Copyright 2007. a. Some AIA definitions have been modified. 1.2 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Project Manual, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order or a Change Proposal Request, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a clarification, interpretation or a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's bid or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements).* B. The Contract Documents shall be enumerated on attachment(s) to the Agreement, and attachment(s) shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor.* 1. These Documents shall prevail in case of an inconsistency with subsequent versions made through manipulatable electronic operations involving computers. C. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them.* D. Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed, nor to limit the scope of work performed by any trade or by any Subcontractor or supplier.* 1. Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements apply to all specifications. E. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.* 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 DEFINITIONS 014216-1 F. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form, prepared by the Architect and/or Architect's consultants are instruments of service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and/or the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyrights, unless indicated differently in the Owner - Architect Agreement. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and Architect's consultants. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub -subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and/or the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and/or the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants' copyrights or other reserved rights.* 1.3 THE CONTRACT A. The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind 1) between the Architect and Contractor, 2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub -subcontractor or 3) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties.* 1.4 THE WORK A. The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.* B. Although not indicated, Work includes providing supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. 1.5 THE PROJECT A. The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors.* 1.6 THE DRAWINGS A. The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams.* 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 DEFINITIONS 014216-2 1.7 THE SPECIFICATIONS A. The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.* 1.8 THE PROJECT MANUAL A. The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications.* 1.9 FURNISH A. Unless specifically limited in context, means; furnishing to project site items specified, to include unpacking and assembly if necessary. 1.10 INSTALL A. Means incorporating in the Work including all necessary labor, materials, equipment and connections to perform work indicated. 1.11 PROVIDE A. Means furnish and install. 1.12 INDICATED AND SHOWN A. The word "indicated" or "shown" and any derivative thereof shall mean; as detailed, scheduled, or stated in Contract Documents. 1.13 THE CONTRACTOR SHALL A. In interest of conciseness; sentences, statements, and clauses may be verb phrases with expressed verbs such as "furnish," "install," "provide," "perform," "construct," "erect," "comply," "apply," "submit," etc. Any such sentences, statements, and clauses are to be interpreted to include the applicable form of the phrase "the Contractor shall" preceding the expressed verb, with the requirements described interpreted as mandatory elements of Contract. 1.14 EVALUATION A. "Evaluate" or `Evaluation' means, "to become generally familiar with the process and quality of the work and to determine if the work is proceeding in general accordance with the Contract Documents based on what is plainly visible at the construction site, without the removal of materials or other construction that is in place". 1.15 INSPECT A. As used in these documents means: "The type of observation that a reasonably prudent architect, in the exercise of ordinary care, would make to determine if the work is in general compliance with the Contract Documents; they are not inspections as would necessarily disclose a defect." 1.16 SEE A. In interest of conciseness, references to specification sections and details are preceded by word "see." Any such references are to be interpreted to include applicable form of phrase ", and comply with,". 1.17 CAPITALIZATION A. Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are 1) specifically defined, 2) the titles of numbered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document or 3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.* 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 DEFINITIONS 014216-3 1.18 OWNER A. The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative.* B. Owner as referred to in these documents is: 1.19 CONTRACTOR A. The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative.* 1.20 SUBCONTRACTOR A. A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.* 1.21 SUB -SUBCONTRACTOR A. A Sub -subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub -subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub - subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub -subcontractor.* 1.22 ARCHITECT A. The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative.* 1.23 ARCHITECT, ENGINEER, ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OR ENGINEER/ARCHITECT A. Each of these terms mean Chapuis Design Group Architecture, PA, or an affiliate as otherwise provided in Contract Documents, or duly authorized representatives, such representatives acting severally within scope of particular duties entrusted to them, unless otherwise provided in Contract Documents. 1.24 BASE AND OPTIONAL A. See Acceptable Manufacturers and Products, Section 01 61 00. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED NOTES * AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 1997 Edition. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 DEFINITIONS 0142 16 - 4 SECTION 0143 43 COORDINATION DRAWINGS (GC) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION - INTERIOR A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of all parts of Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. B. Coordination drawings: Reproducible overlay drawings showing work with horizontal and vertical dimensions to avoid interference with structural framing, ceilings, partitions, equipment, lights, mechanical, electrical, conveying systems, and other services: 1. In and above ceilings. 2. Within walls. 3. Within chases. 4. In mechanical spaces. 5. In electrical spaces. C. Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is needed for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. D. Prepare coordination drawings where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. E. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. F. Work out all "tight" conditions involving Work of various Sections in advance of installation. G. Sleeve, coredrill and blockout layout drawings: 1. Drawings showing proposed locations and sizes of sleeves, coredrills blockouts, and embedded items in concrete walls, columns, floors and beams. H. Prior to start of work in any given area, each Subcontractor approve, in writing, coordination drawings affecting Subcontractor's work in that area. I. Modifications required as result of failure to resolve interferences, provide correct coordination drawings, or call attention to changes required in other work as result of modifications shall be paid for by responsible Subcontractor. J. Coordination meetings scheduled by Contractor, with all affected Subcontractors. 1.2 PRODUCTION OF COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Contractor provide minimum 1/4 IN scale plan, elevation and section drawings, showing: 1. Partitions. a. Fire/smoke rated barriers. 2. Ceiling heights. 3. Structural framing locations and elevations. 4. Column lines. 5. Other work. B. Subcontractors produce combined coordination layout drawings plan and sections of HVAC ductwork, hydronic, steam, condensate, fuel oil, fire protection piping, plumbing, special water systems, natural gas and medical gas systems electrical cable tray, conduit, conveying systems, equipment, and other work. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COORDINATION DRAWINGS (GC) 014343-1 C. Resolve major interferences at initial coordination meeting prior to production of any drawings. D. Produce initial coordination drawings within 30 days after initial meeting. E. Contractor arrange for production of said drawings not provided by that time. F. Meet as required to resolve interferences and correct drawings. 1.3 AFTER APPROVAL A. After Subcontractors' written approval of coordination drawings, Contractor determine method used to resolve interferences not previously identified. B. Contractor give written approval of changes to coordination drawings prior to start of work in affected area. C. Maintain one copy of current approved Coordination Drawings at project site. 1.4 PRECEDENCE OF SERVICES FOR COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. In event of conflicts involving location and layout of work; use following priority to resolve disputes: 1. Structure and partitions have highest priority. 2. Equipment location and access. 3. Ceiling system and recessed light fixtures. 4. Gravity drainage lines. 5. High pressure ductwork and devices. 6. Large pipe mains, valves and devices. 7. Pneumatic tube and material conveying systems. 8. Low pressure ductwork, diffusers, registers, grilles, HVAC equipment. 9. Fire protection piping, devices and heads. 10. Small piping, tubing, electrical conduit, and devices. a. Conduits installed in corridors shall be maintained at least 9 IN above finished ceiling. Conduits shall be grouped within a 12 IN width. b. The space utilized for conduit shall be selected to allow access to all devices which normally require adjustment, repair, resetting, etc. 11. Sleeves through rated partitions. 12. Access panels. 1.5 PRODUCTION OF LAYOUT DRAWINGS A. Contractor provide scale plan and elevation drawings. B. Subcontractors indicate proposed location and size of their required sleeves, coredrills, blockouts and embedded items. 1. At floor slabs and walls to be core drilled or cut, Find and mark all reinforcing in both faces located by means of x-ray, pach-ometer, or prof-ometer. 2. Submit sketch showing location of rebar and proposed cores for review. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Project information: 1. Contractor's approved Coordination Drawings. a. Letter indicating one copy of approved Coordination Drawings available at project site. b. One copy of approved Coordination Drawings to Architect for information, if requested. 2. Contractor's proposed sleeve, coredrill and blockout layout drawings. a. One copy of drawing to Architect for information. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COORDINATION DRAWINGS (GC) 014343-2 SECTION 0145 23 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: 1. Work shall be subject to inspection, testing and approval by testing agency, inspector and public authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Approval as result of inspection or testing shall not be construed to be an approval of a violation of provisions of Contract Documents, or by governing codes, laws, ordinances, rules or regulations. 3. Testing, inspections and approvals presuming to give authority to violate or cancel provisions of Contract Documents, or by governing codes, laws, ordinances, rules or regulations shall not be valid. 4. It shall be duty of Contractor to cause Work to remain accessible and exposed for testing and inspection purposes. 5. It shall be duty of Contractor to notify testing agency, inspector and public authorities having jurisdiction when Work is in conformance with Contract Documents and is ready for testing and inspection. 6. It shall be duty of Owner and Contractor to provide access to, and means for testing and inspections of such Work required by Contract Documents, or by governing codes, laws, ordinances, rules or regulations. 7. Any portion that does not comply shall be corrected and shall not be covered or concealed until authorized by testing agency, inspector and public authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of Work required by Contract Documents or by codes, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. 9. Contractor shall give testing agency, inspector, public authorities having jurisdiction, and Architect, if requested, timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that they may be present for such procedures. 10. In event such procedures for testing, inspection and approval reveal portions of Work fail to comply with requirements established by Contract Documents, or by governing codes, laws, ordinances, rules or regulations, all costs made necessary by such failure, including those of repeated procedures and compensation for Architect's services and expenses, shall be at Contractor's expense. 11. Required certificates of testing, inspection and approval shall, unless otherwise required by Contract Documents, be secured by Contractor and promptly delivered to Architect, inspector and public authorities having jurisdiction. 12. If Architect, Owner, public authorities having jurisdiction, testing agency or inspector is to observe tests, inspections and approvals required by Contract Documents, or by governing codes, laws, ordinances, rules or regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction, they will do so promptly, and where practicable, at normal place of testing. B. Test and inspection method standards: See technical sections and governing codes, laws, ordinances, rules and regulations. C. Qualifications of independent testing agencies: 1. Meet American Council of Independent Laboratories, "Recommended Requirements of Independent Laboratory Qualification", latest edition. 2. Meet requirements of ASTM E329, "Standards of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and Bituminous Materials as used in Construction", latest edition. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 014523-1 3. Satisfy inspection criteria of Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards. 4. See technical sections for additional requirements. D. Testing equipment calibration: Shall be by accredited calibration agency, at maximum 12 month intervals, by devices of accuracy traceable to either: 1. National Institute of Standards and Technology. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Owner will arrange and pay for following testing and inspections performed by testing agency or special inspector: 1. Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. 2. Owner will bear the costs of RF and magnetic shielding once the magnet is in place and functional. Contractor to have avialable personele on the job to open up finished work should the need arise and assist with the correction of the work. 3. Testing and balancing mechanical systems: Section 20 08 00. B. Contractor arrange and bear all related costs for following tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing agency or entity acceptable to Owner: 1. Concrete testing for qualification of proposed materials, establishment of mix design, and for Contractor's convenience: Section 03 08 13. 2. Concrete moisture testing a. Minimum three location with MR scan room including one, min at thickened slab at MR bore location. 3. Rebar locating for core drilling or cutting of concrete. a. Contractor to provide radiographs testing of concrete slab above MRI scanner room to verify location of existsing rebar prior to drilling for threaded rod placement. 4. Testing of manufacturers' products for compliance with specifications. 5. All other testing and inspections specified. 6. Testing and inspections of Contractor provided shoring or forming. 7. Any additional inspection and testing required by public authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Contractor's duties for Owner provided tests, as specified. C. Contractor shall arrange for, and bear all related costs for following with Owner provided independent testing agency, or entity acceptable to Owner: 1. Re -testing due to failure of initial test or due to nonconformance with Contract Documents. 2. Re -inspections of Work due to failure of Work to pass initial inspection or due to nonconformance with Contract Documents. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS A. Employment of independent testing agency does not relieve obligation of Contractor to comply with Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 014523-2 PART 3 - PART 4 - EXECUTION 4.1 PERFORMANCE A. Perform indicated inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction. B. Use test and inspection or sampling methods or both conforming with methods indicated. C. Report each test and inspection or sampling or both as indicated. D. Report results called for by test method, in form specified. E. Retest failed products and systems. 4.2 REPORTS A. Submit reports and logs promptly to Architect, Structural Engineer, Contractor, inspector, and public authorities having jurisdiction. B. Include following for test or inspection reports or both: 1. Project name and number. 2. Project location. 3. Product and specification section applicable. 4. Type of test or inspection or both. 5. Name of testing agency, if used. 6. Name of testing or inspecting personnel, or both. 7. Date of test or inspection or both. 8. Record of field conditions encountered; i.e., temperature, weather. 9. Test location. 10. Observations regarding compliance. 11. Test method used. 12. Results of test. 13. Date of report. 14. Signature of testing or inspecting personnel or both. C. Maintain log of tests which have failed: 1. Type of test or inspection or both. 2. Date of test or inspection or both. 3. Test or inspection number or both. 4. Reason failed. 5. Date of retest or inspection or both. 6. Results of retest. 7. Method of retest. 4.3 INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY DUTIES AND LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY A. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor. B. Provide qualified personnel promptly on notice. C. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities, or deficiencies of work which are observed during performance of services. D. Testing agency is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of Work. 3. Perform any duties of Contractor. 042.21-177.01 AdventHcalth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 01 45 23 - 3 4.4 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES A. Cooperate with testing agency personnel, inspector and public authorities having jurisdiction and provide access to work. B. Provide preliminary representative samples of materials to be tested, in required quantities. C. Furnish copies of mill test reports. D. Furnish labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at site. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. Storage and curing facilities for testing agency's exclusive use. E. Notify appropriate testing agency, inspector or public authorities having jurisdiction sufficiently in advance of operations. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 014523-4 SECTION 0165 00 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE: MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 JOB CONDITIONS A. Comply with applicable codes. B. Accomplish work to avoid damage to property. C. Provide fire protection. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. By manufacturer's normal means. B. In original labeled containers. C. Where applicable, with UL labeling on packages. D. Contractor responsible for acceptance at site. E. Schedule deliveries to avoid delaying Work, and to minimize space and duration of storage on site. F. Sequence deliveries to avoid unnecessary additional construction of temporary protection. G. Schedule and coordinate deliveries to avoid interference with Owner's operation. H. Inspect items for damage upon delivery, reorder as required to avoid delays. 2.2 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Use methods to avoid damage to item or structure. B. Protect weather fragile items from weather damage. C. Handle and store bulk aggregates to avoid contamination. D. Store to allow air circulation. E. Store only in authorized areas. F. Coordinate on site storage with Owner and other contractors working on site. G. Replace or repair damaged items. H. Uncrate, assemble if required, and remove debris. I. When off -site storage is utilized, move items to site at no added cost. 2.3 CLEANUP A. Remove excess materials from site. B. Turn over to Owner, excess materials scheduled to remain. C. Clean debris from site and storage area. D. Restore site storage areas to original condition or as directed by Architect or Owner. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE: MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 016500-1 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. B. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio. C. Operational Limitations: do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic or visual qualities. Do no cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. E. Warranty or existing warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Install Work in such a manner and sequence as to preclude or minimize cutting and patching of new Work. B. Execute cutting (including excavation), fitting or patching of Work, required to: 1. Make several parts fit properly. 2. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective Work. 4. Remove and replace non -conforming Work. 5. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 6. Install specified Work in existing construction. 7. Provide rerouting penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit. 8. Patch and repair fireproofing damaged after installation of other Work or demolition activities. 9. Remove and finish construction at connections to other structures. 10. Remove existing roofing where required by new Work, and patch to match existing roofing. C. Do not endanger any Work or any Work of other Contractors, by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering any Work except with written consent of Contractor subject to review by Architect. D. Do not cut into or cut away any structural concrete or other structural members, any other concrete nor dig under any foundations or into structural walls or other parts, or in any case allow same to be done without full knowledge and written consent of Architect. E. Be responsible for damage resulting from violation of these provisions. F. Use only firms or individual trades qualified to perform Work required under this Section. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 CUTTING AND PATCHING -CD 017329-1 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS A. Before start of Work, obtain and pay for all permits required by all authorities having jurisdiction and notify all interested utilities companies. B. Obtain approval of Owner and authorities having jurisdiction for Work which affects existing exitways, exit stairs, means of egress, or access to, or exit from, areas. 1. Review with and obtain approval of authorities for any temporary construction which affects such areas. C. Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. D. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. E. Avoid cutting existing utilities, pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until alternate provisions have been provided. F. Items to be salvaged and delivered to Owner shall be carefully removed and properly stored in an area easily accessible for removal by Owner. 1.4 PAYMENT FOR COSTS A. Costs caused by non -coordinated or defective Work, or Work not conforming to Contract Documents, paid by Contractor responsible for non -coordinated, rejected, or non -conforming Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Use materials identical to existing materials. B. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used. C. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. D. Where applicable, comply with specifications for type of Work to be performed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Prior to the bid, review all existing facilities that are related to this contract and shall be familiar with all utility requirements and construction. 1. Existing facility documents may be available through the Owner for review. B. Perform preliminary investigations as required to ascertain extent of Work. 1. Conditions which would be apparent by such investigation will not be allowed as cause for claims for extra costs. C. Inspect existing conditions for work, including elements subject to movement or damage during: 1. Cutting and patching. 2. Excavating and backfilling. D. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding. E. Before proceeding, meet at Project Site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 CUTTING AND PATCHING -CD 01 73 29 - 2 1. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. 2. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. F. After uncovering existing conditions for Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new products or Work. 3.2 PREPARATION PRIOR TO CUTTING A. Provide adequate shoring, bracing and support as required to maintain structural integrity of Project. B. Provide protection for other portions of Project which may be affected. C. Provide protection from elements when required. D. Contracto to perorm radiographic testing of concrete slab and concrete members above the MR scanner room in anticipation of driplling and epoxy of supports 1. Contracto to coordinate support of members with findings of scan. 3.3 CUTTING AND REMOVAL - GENERAL A. Execute fitting and adjustment to provide fmished installation to comply with specified tolerances and finishes. B. Execute cutting by methods which will prevent damage to existing or other Work and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of new Work. C. Perform backfilling as specified in applicable sections. D. Neatly cut and remove materials, and prepare all openings to receive new work. E. Remove masonry or concrete in small sections. F. Provide shoring, bracing, and other supports to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of remaining or adjacent wall areas, structure, or facilities. G. Arrange shoring, bracing, and supports to prevent overloading of structure. H. Take all precautions necessary to prevent damage to existing remaining work or to adjacent facilities. I. Execute Work using methods which will prevent interference with use of remaining and adjacent facilities by Owner. J. Remove existing work indicated to be removed, or as necessary for installation of new Work. K. Provide for cutting, fitting, repairing, patching and finishing of Work disturbed by installation of new Work. L. Do not remove or damage fireproofing materials. 1. Install hangers, inserts, supports, and anchors prior to installation of fireproofing. 2. Repair or replace fireproofing damaged. 3.4 CUTTING IN CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION A. Do not cut into nor core drill openings or holes in beams, joists, and columns without prior written approval of Architect. 1. When written approval is obtained, comply with additional requirements and instructions of Architect. B. In members other than beams, joists, and columns; where an opening larger than 10 INin any dimension is required, or where dimension between 2 openings in less than 2 times maximum dimension of largest opening, and condition is not shown on architectural or structural drawings, obtain prior written approval of Architect. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 CUTTING AND PATCHING -CD 017329-3 1. At floor slabs and walls to be core drilled or cut, find and mark all reinforcing in both faces located by means of x-ray, pach-ometer, or prof-ometer. Submit sketch showing location of rebar and proposed cuts or cores for review. 2. When written approval is obtained, comply with additional requirements and instructions of Architect. CUTTING IN POST TENSIONED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION Do not cut into nor core drill openings or holes in beams or joists. Do not cut into nor core drill openings or holes in slabs without prior written approval of Architect. When approval is obtained, comply with additional requirements and instructions of Architect. Openings not greater than 6 IN in any dimension are permitted in flat slab portions of construction except that such openings shall not interfere with or disturb strands. Do not place closer than 12 IN to any column face, or closer than 24 IN to any post tensioning strand anchor. Do not install any trenched duct electrical systems. CUTTING IN PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION Do not cut openings nor core drill vertically nor horizontally through stems of members. Openings smaller than 6 IN diameter or 6 IN maximum dimension may be cut in flanges of units after obtaining prior written approval of Architect. When approval is obtained, comply with instructions of Architect. 3.5 CUTTING IN STEEL FRAME AND METAL DECK CONSTRUCTION A. Do not cut nor drill holes in webs and flanges of columns, beams, purlins, and joists without prior written approval of Architect. 1. When approval is obtained, comply with requirements and instructions of Architect and provide reinforcing at such locations when required. B. When openings are cut into metal decks having cast -in -place concrete slab over metal deck: 1. No reinforcing of holes is required for circular openings or sleeves up to 6 IN diameter and for rectangular openings having no side dimension greater than 6 IN. 2. Reinforce openings greater than 6 IN. 3. Obtain prior written approval of Architect for openings not shown on architectural or structural drawings. a. Comply with additional requirements and instructions of Architect. C. When openings are cut into metal roof decks that have no concrete cast -in -place (except lightweight insulating cementitious roof fill) over deck: 1. No reinforcing of holes is required for circular openings less than 6 IN diameter and for rectangular openings having no side dimension greater than 6 IN. 2. Reinforce openings between 6 IN and 12 IN, with 20 GA flat steel sheet 12 IN greater in dimension than opening; fusion weld to top surface of deck at each corner and on each side midway between corners. 3. Do not cut openings greater than 12 IN without prior written approval of Architect. a. Comply with requirements and instruction of Architect. 3.6 MATCHING AND PATCHING A. Where items are removed from existing walls, ceilings, floors or partitions to remain, repair wall, ceiling, floor or partition disturbed by removal. B. Where walls, ceilings, floors or partitions are removed, repair abutting walls, ceilings or floors disturbed by removal. C. Where existing construction is cut, removed or otherwise disturbed to permit installation of new Work, match and patch existing disturbed construction. D. Use methods and materials similar in appearance, and equal in quality to areas or surfaces being repaired. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 CUTTING AND PATCHING -CD 01 73 29 - 4 E. Restore Work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed Work in accord with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Patch Work must in every way possible match existing work and adjacent surfaces. G. Re -finish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes. 1. Continuous surfaces; to nearest intersections. 2. Assembly - entire refinishing. H. In existing areas remove and replace existing ceilings and finishes for installation of Work, if not shown to be removed on Architectural Drawings and Schedules. 1. If existing ceiling can not be satisfactorily reinstalled, replace with like materials and construction. 2. Replace damaged construction with like materials. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 CUTTING AND PATCHING -CD 017329-5 SECTION 01 74 23 CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 FIRE PROTECTION A. Store volatile waste in covered metal containers. B. Remove from premises daily. 1.2 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Conduct cleanup and disposal operations to comply with codes, rules, regulations, ordinances, and anti -pollution laws. B. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste on site. C. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Use materials recommended by manufacturers of surfaces to be cleaned. B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. C. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and will not damage surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Clean all items installed under this Contract. 1. Leave free of stains, dirt, dust, damage, or defects. 2. Include washing, sweeping, polishing of wall surfaces, floors, windows, hardware, mirrors, lighting fixtures, equipment, etc. 3.2 DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Provide on -site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. B. Clean up all waste materials, rubbish, and debris from site and access daily. 1. Dispose of off site once a week. C. Wet down dusty materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust during entire construction period. 1. If use of water is prohibited by law, seek an alternate method to prevent blowing dust. D. Perform cleaning operations as required during construction to prevent accumulations of dust, soil, and debris. E. Clean and protect Work in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and installation. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 CLEANING 017423-1 F. Clean and vacuum interior space prior to start of painting, and continue cleaning on an as -needed basis until painting is completed. G. Schedule cleaning operations so that contaminants resulting from cleaning do not fall on wet painted surfaces. H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed Work as frequently as necessary through out construction period. I. Clean lunch/break area after each use. J. Maintain site and building so no condition provides a fire hazard. K. Remove snow and ice from accesses to buildings. 3.3 FINAL CLEANING A. At Substantial Completion, perform final cleaning of Work and existing areas wherever any area are left less than clean by construction operations. 1. Complete cleaning operations before requesting review for Substantial Completion. B. Use experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final cleaning. C. Repair and touch-up marred areas. D. Broom clean and remove stains from paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds. E. Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction. F. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if air conditioning units were operated during construction. G. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, mastic, adhesive, and other foreign materials from interior and exterior surfaces, and fixtures, hardware, and equipment. H. Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. I. Wash and shine glazing, mirrors, stainless steel, etc., including existing windows in area of construction. J. Prior to Owner occupancy, Contractor and Owner shall conduct an inspection of interior and exterior surfaces and all Work areas to verify that the Project is clean to the Owner's satisfaction. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 CLEANING 01 74 23 - 2 SECTION 01 77 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (GC) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Contract closeout information: 1. For substantial completion: a. Comprehensive list of all items to be completed or corrected. b. Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. c. Certificates of governing authorities. d. Project paperwork 1) RFI Log 2) All RFI's and responses 3) Revisions a) All disciplines b) Drawings c) Narrative 4) All ASI's 5) Submittals a) Final, approved versions b) Interim reviews not required 6) Warranties e. Submittals required by other Sections. 2. For final completion: a. Contractor's Certificate of Completion. b. Evidence of payments and release or waiver of liens in triplicate. 1) Contractor's Affidavit of Payments of Debts and Claims: AIA Document G706. 2) Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens: AIA Document G706A. 3) Contractor's release or waiver of liens. 4) Separate releases or waivers of liens for subcontractors, suppliers, and others with lien rights against Owner, together with list of all such parties. 5) If required by Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations arising out of Contract. c. Consent of Surety (if any) to Final Payment: AIA Document G707. d. Certificates evidencing that insurance to remain enforce. e. Final application for payment. f. Initialed list(s) of items to be completed or corrected verifying completion of each items. g. List of Subcontractors and equipment suppliers. Include: 1) Name. 2) Address. 3) Telephone number. 4) Representative. h. Letter of site conformance. i. Closeout submittals required by other Sections. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in general accordance with Contract Documents so Owner can occupy or utilize Work for its intended use. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (GC) 01 77 00 - 1 B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. I . Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. a. The Contractor develops the punch list .This list is then provided to Architect as basis for review. b. Architect may add to the punch list as he sees fit to further identify items which are to be corrected 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, attic stock, as required by individual specification sections, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Schedule and complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 12. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 13. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. C. State of Florida: AHCA reviewable projects 1. Should a project be an AHCA reviewable project, the date of substantial completion shall match the date of the approved 100% AHCA survey date. a. Therefore, above identified material must be provided on or before the 100% AHCA survey date. b. Should the project be delivered in phases and have multiple AHCA 100% site surveys, each phase shall be identified in the closeout documents. The project will have multiple substantial completion dates- one for each approved phase. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. a. Architect will perform one reinspection for work identified as incomplete b. Should additional inspection(s) be required, architect may submit labor and reimbursable costs to Owner prior to inspection. Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for such costs. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (GC) 01 77 00 - 2 2. Work will not be considered for Substantial Completion until all systems and equipment are operational; all designated or required governing agency inspections and certifications have been made and posted, instruction of designated Owner's personnel in operation of systems and equipment has been completed, operation and maintenance data has been satisfactorily turned over to Owner, and finishes are in place. In general, the only remaining Work shall be minor in nature, such that Owner may occupy or utilize Work or designated portion thereof, and completion or correction of Work by Contractor would not materially interfere or hamper Owner's intended business use or operation. 3. Contractor shall certify that all remaining Work will be completed within 30 consecutive calendar days following date of Substantial Completion, or as agreed to in writing, and failure to do so shall automatically reinstate provisions for damages due Owner as contained elsewhere in Contract Document or as provided by law for such period of time as may be required by Contractor to fully complete Work whether Owner has occupied Work or not. 4. Obtain evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities: 5. Certificates of inspection of: a. Mechanical. b. Electrical. c. Plumbing. d. Fire protection and life safety systems. e. Elevators. f. Etc. 6. Health Department and other governing authorities as required. 7. Certificate of Occupancy. E. When Contractor considers that Work, or a portion thereof which Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, Contractor shall thoroughly inspect Work, and prepare and submit to Architect a comprehensive list of items to be corrected or completed, and Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion (utilize form at end of this Section). F. Contractor certify that: 1. Work performed under this Contract has been thoroughly inspected and considered to be sufficiently complete, in accordance with Contract Documents, so Owner can occupy or utilize Work for its intended use. G. Failure of Contractor to include an item on such list(s) does not alter responsibility of Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with Contract Documents. H. Contractor shall proceed promptly to complete and correct the items on list. I. After receipt of Contractor's comprehensive list of items to be corrected or completed, and Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion, Architect and Owner will, within reasonable period after notification, review list of items to be completed or corrected, or inspect Work, or designated portion thereof, to determine whether Work is Substantially Complete. J. If Architect's or Owner's review or inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on Contractor's list, which is not sufficiently complete in general accordance with Contract Documents so Owner can occupy or utilize Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use: 1. Contractor will be notified stating reasons. 2. Contractor shall substantially complete or correct Work. 3. Contractor shall thoroughly reinspect Work. 4. Contractor shall submit another Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion, a revised list of items to be completed or corrected, and a request for another review and inspection. 5. Architect and Owner will again review list of items to be completed or corrected and Work. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (GC) 017700-3 K. If Contractor prematurely submits a Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion or requests Architect's review of the Work, and Architect determines that Project or designated portion thereof is not Substantially Complete, Architect may invoice the Owner as a change in services for such cost involved in evaluating and reviewing Work, and associated travel costs. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for such costs. L. Architect will not perform more reviews of sub -projects or phases than number indicated in Contract Documents or Owner — Architect Agreement, unless otherwise mutually agreed to by Architect and Owner. M. When Work or designated portion thereof is considered Substantially Complete, Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall establish date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to Work and insurance, and shall fix time within which Contractor shall complete and correct Work. 2. Warranties required by Contract Documents shall commence on date of Substantial Completion of Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in Certificate of Substantial Completion. 3. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. N. Owner may occupy Project, or designated portion thereof, under provisions agreed to in Certificate of Substantial Completion, and if required, a certificate of occupancy has been issued by governing authorities. 1. If Owner is going to occupy Project, or designated portion thereof, Contractor shall perform final cleaning immediately. 2. If Owner or architect discovers any Work which is not complete and/or is not in conformance with Contract Documents, during or after occupying or utilizes Work, whether included on a list or not, Owner shall notify Contractor to complete or correct item(s) identified. O. Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces to complete or correct Work, and to complete all Project closeout requirements within designated time. P. Upon completion of Work, employ Licensed Surveyor to make survey of site to assure conformance of elevations, grade and site work to contours shown. Provide letter of site conformance. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. After Contractor has completed all Work, and has thoroughly inspected Work to determine that it is complete, is in accordance with Contract Documents and Contract is fully performed, Contractor shall submit Contractor's Certificate of Completion to Architect, and the list(s) of items to be completed or corrected initialed to indicate Contractor has verified completion of each item. Utilize form at end of this section. Certify that: (1) Work has been thoroughly inspected by Contractor for compliance with Contract Documents. (2) Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. (3) Equipment and systems have been tested and are operating satisfactorily. (4) Contract closeout requirements have been completed satisfactorily and submitted. (5) Contractor knows of no reason that insurance will not be renewable to cover period required by Contract Documents. (6) Format: (i) Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (GC) 01 77 00 - 4 (ii) Contractor to submit 2 complete hard -copy sets of shop drawings, as -built drawings documented on fully conformed drawings from Architect, product data, etc. (iii) Documents to be submitted via hard copy AND PDF format on electronic media i.e. thumb drive, read/writeable CD, other 1. Confirm with Owner which format is preferred for electronic transmission (7) Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. (8) Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. (9) Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. (10) Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." (11) Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. B. Submit final closeout submittals required by this and other Sections. C. Owner and Architect will make final walk through within a reasonable time after receipt of Contractor's Certificate of Completion and final Application for Payment. 1. If Contractor prematurely submits a Contractor's Notice of Final Completion or requests Architect's fmal review of Project, and Architect determines that Project is not satisfactorily complete, Architect may invoice Owner as a change in services for such cost involved in evaluating and reviewing Work, and associated travel costs. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for such costs. D. Contractor shall remedy any remaining deficiencies or incomplete Work, at Contractor's expense. E. When Owner and Architect finds Work acceptable under Contract Documents and Contract satisfactorily performed, Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment. F. Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until Contractor submits to Architect. 1. an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with Work for which Owner or Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied (AIA Documents G706 and G706A), 2. a certificate evidencing that insurance required by Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner, 3. a written statement that Contractor knows of no substantial reason that insurance will not be renewable to cover period required by Contract Documents, 4. consent of surety, if any, to final payment (AIA Document G707), 5. Contractor's release or waiver of liens, 6. if required by Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of Contract, to extent and in such form as may be designated by Owner, for Owner's review, and 7. if a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by Owner, Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to Owner all money that Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (GC) 017700-5 G. If Substantial Completion or Final Completion is delayed through no fault of Owner or Architect, Architect may invoice Owner as a change in services for such costs, and associated travel costs. Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for such costs. 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11 inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2-PRODUCTS 1. MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. d. Clean exposed interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. e. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (GC) 017700-6 f. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. g. Remove labels that are not permanent. h. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. I . Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. i. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment (including existing if work was done in the areas) and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. j. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. k. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. 1. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. in. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. n. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. o. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (GC) 017700-7 CONTRACTOR'S NOTICE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROJECT: AdventHealth — Dade City: Negative Pressure Patient Rooms and Endoscopy Suite Renov. ARCH PROJ. NO.: 21-167.01 CONTRACT DATE: CONTRACT FOR: WORK OR DESIGNATED PORTION SHALL INCLUDE: Work performed under this Contract has been thoroughly inspected and is considered to be sufficiently complete, in accordance with Contract Documents, so Owner can occupy or utilize Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use. ❑ Certificates of inspections indicating compliance with requirements of governing authorities, are attached hereto. ❑ Certificate of Occupancy have been obtained from governing authorities, are attached hereto. ❑ A comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected, prepared by Contractor is attached, hereto. Failure to include any items on such list does not alter responsibility of Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with Contract Documents. Contractor will complete or correct Work by: CONTRACTOR: BY: DATE: OWNER (agrees) (does not agree) to accept portion designated above separately from rest of Project. Owner intends to utilize, occupy or take use on: OWNER: BY: DATE: The Work designated above, has been determined to be: ❑ Substantially Complete and a Certificate of Substantial Completion will be issued. ❑ Not substantially complete for following reasons: ARCHITECT: CDG Architecture, PA BY: DATE: DISTRIBUTION: ❑ OWNER ❑ ARCHITECT ❑ CONTRACTOR END OF CONTRACTOR'S NOTICE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (GC) 017700-8 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION PROJECT: ARCH. PROJECT NUMBER: CONTRACT FOR: CONTRACT DATE: AdventHealth — Dade City: Negative Pressure Patient Rooms and Endoscopy Suite Renov. 21-167.01 This is to certify that I am an authorized official of, and have been properly authorized by said firm or corporation to certify following: I know of my own personal knowledge, and do hereby certify on behalf of Contractor, that Work has been reviewed and thoroughly inspected for compliance with Contract Documents, that Work has been completed, in accordance with Contract Documents and Contract is fully performed, that all equipment and systems have been tested and are operating satisfactorily, that all Contract closeout requirements have been completed satisfactorily and submitted, know of no substantial reason that insurance will not be renewable to cover period required by Contract Documents, and Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance. Attached are three (3) copies of following documents, which are required prior to final payment: ❑ Final Application for Payment. ❑ Contractor's Affidavit of Payments of Debts and Claims: AIA Document G706. ❑ Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens: AIA Document G706A. ❑ Consent of Surety (if any) to Final Payment: AIA Document G707. ❑ Certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least thirty (30) days' prior written notice has been given to Owner. ❑ The list(s) of if items which were to be completed and corrected, with each item initialed to indicate Contractor has verified completion or correction of each. ❑ List of subcontractors and equipment suppliers. ❑ Certified list of all sales and service taxes paid. ❑ Letter of site conformance by licensed surveyor. ❑ If required by Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations arising out of Contract. ❑ Bond satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against liens from Subcontractors. ❑ Transmittal indicating Owner has received Project Record Documents. I understand that acceptance of final payment by Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at time of final Application for Payment. CONTRACTOR: TITLE: Subscribed and sworn to me this day of NOTARY PUBLIC: My commission expires: DISTRIBUTION: ❑ OWNER ❑ ARCHITECT M. DATE: END OF CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT (GC) 01 77 00 - 9 SECTION 0178 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Contract closeout information: 1. Copy of transmittal letter indicating Owner's acceptance to Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble data indicated and other data required to completely describe operation and maintenance procedures. B. Assemble in 3-ring binders, completely indexed by specification section, with each item clearly labeled. Identify each volume with Project name and contents. C. Identify each item in manner consistent with names and identification numbers used in Contract Documents, not with manufacturer's catalog numbers. D. Neatly type data not furnished in printed form. E. Organize data for ease of reference with indexed tabs. F. Included each item on table of contents. 2.2 DATA REQUIRED FOR EACH COMPONENT AND SYSTEM A. Sequence of operation: 1. List valves, switches, etc., used to start, stop and adjust systems. 2. Provide flow diagrams, control sequences and valve directory. 3. Submit valve directory for review prior to inclusion in manual: a. Show valve number, location. b. List equipment controlled. B. Lubrication instructions: 1. Frequency of inspection and lubrication recommended. 2. Type of grease. 3. Amount of lubrication recommended. C. Maintenance and trouble shooting data: 1. All manufacturer furnished data. 2. Project record wiring diagrams. 3. Name and address of manufacturer. 4. Name and address of local representatives who stock or distribute repair parts. 2.3 DATA REQUIRED FOR FINISH MATERIALS A. Maintenance data: 1. Precautions necessary. 2. Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3. Maintenance materials and tools required. 4. Repair and/or replacement instructions. 5. Name and address of manufacturer. 6. Name and address of local supplier of materials. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY A. Deliver two copies to Owner 10 days prior to Owner instruction of systems and equipment, and substantial completion. B. Use Operation and Maintenance Data Transmittal form at end of this Section. C. Acquire Owner's acceptance of items listed on transmittal form. D. Forward copy of transmittal form with Owner's acceptance to Architect. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA TRANSMITTAL Project: AdventHealth — Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy To Owner: From C.M./Contractor: Date: Contractor to assemble data required to completely describe operation and maintenance procedures. Index and bind in 3-ring binders. Include name, address, and phone number of closest supplier for each item. DATA TURNED OVER TO OWNER SECTION DESCRIPTION BINDER OWNER'S VERIFICATION & ACCEPTANCE Accepted by: Forward coov of this transmittal to the Architect. Date: DISTRIBUTION: ❑ OWNER ❑ CONTRACTOR ❑ C. M. ❑ ARCHITECT END OF TRANSMITTAL 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 3 SECTION 01 78 26 INTERIOR FINISH FIRE PERFORMANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Contract closeout information: 1. Copy of transmittal letter indicating Owner's acceptance to Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR FINISH FIRE PERFORMANCE DATA MANUALS A. Assemble data indicated and other data required to completely describe operation and maintenance procedures. B. Assemble in 3-ring binders, completely indexed by specification section, with each item clearly labeled. Identify each volume with Project name and contents. C. Identify each item in manner consistent with names and identification numbers used in Contract Documents, not with manufacturer's catalog numbers. D. Neatly type data not furnished in printed form. E. Organize data for ease of reference with indexed tabs. F. Included each item on table of contents. 2.2 DATA REQUIRED FOR FINISH MATERIALS A. Interior finish fire performance data: 1. Provide for each interior finish and furnishing material and type specified: a. Manufacturer's printed information including: 1) Fire class. 2) NFPA test number. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY A. Deliver two copies to Owner 60 days prior to Owner instruction of systems and equipment, and substantial completion. B. Use Interior Finish Fire Performance Data Transmittal form at end of this Section. C. Acquire Owner's acceptance of items listed on transmittal form. D. Forward copy of transmittal form with Owner's acceptance to Architect. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room 95 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 INTERIOR FINISH FIRE PERFORMANCE DATA 01 78 26 - 1 INTERIOR FINISH FIRE PERFORMANCE DATA TRANSMITTAL Project: AdventHealth - Zephyrhills Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy To Owner: Date: From C.M./Contractor: Contractor to assemble data required to completely describe operation and maintenance procedures. Index and bind in 3-ring binders. Include name, address, and phone number of closest supplier for each item. DATA TURNED OVER TO OWNER SECTION DESCRIPTION BINDER OWNER'S VERIFICATION AND ACCEPTANCE Accepted by: Forward coov of this transmittal to the Architect. Date: DISTRIBUTION: ❑ OWNER ❑ CONTRACTOR ❑ C. M. ❑ ARCHITECT END OF TRANSMITTAL 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 INTERIOR FINISH FIRE PERFORMANCE DATA 01 78 26 - 2 SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Execute and provide notarized Project Warranty on form furnished at end of section. B. Provide special written warranties or guarantees or both for products, equipment, systems and installations required by other sections of Contract Documents for duration indicated. C. Provide manufacturer's warranties or guarantees or both required by other sections of Contract Documents for products, equipment and systems for duration indicated. 1. Where manufacturer's standard warranties or guarantees or both expire before duration required by other sections of Contract Documents, obtain and pay for extensions as part of Contract Price. D. Provide all warranties or guarantees or both prior to final payment. E. Warranties or guarantees or both required by Contract Documents shall commence on date of Substantial Completion of Work, or designated portion thereof, unless otherwise indicated in Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Full executed and notarized Project Warranty on included form. 2. Transmittal letter indicating Owner's receipt of 3-ring binder containing all product equipment and system warranties or guarantees or both required by other sections of Contact Documents. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS A. If for any reason, Contractor cannot warrant or guarantee or both any portion of Work using products or construction methods indicated or required by other sections of Contract Documents, notify Architect in writing during bid period, and before contracts are awarded, indicating reasons and names of products and data on substitutions that can be warranted or guaranteed or both. 1. Should Contractor fail to notify Architect, Contractor will be held to having agreed to warrant or guarantee or both Work indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES 01 78 36 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROJECT WARRANTY A. Execute and provide notarized Project Warranty on form furnished at end of section. 1. Provide Contractor's name, address, signature and date. 2. Notarial Act and notarization: Warranty document is required to be signed, dated, and sealed with Notary Public seal or stamp in accordance with state and territorial notary laws. 3.2 PRODUCT, EQUIPMENT & SYSTEM WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES A. Compile approved warranties and guarantees or both required by other sections of Contract Documents. B. Bind or assemble in 3-ring binders, completely indexed by specification section, with each warranty or guarantee or both clearly labeled. C. Identify each warranty or guarantee or both in manner consistent with names and identification numbers used in Contract Documents. D. Neatly type or draft all warranties or guarantees or both not furnished in printed form. E. Organize warranties or guarantees or both for ease of reference. F. Provide transmittal letter containing: 1. Date. 2. Project title. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. Title and number of warranties or guarantees or both. 5. Indicating Owner's receipt. G. Deliver to Owner prior to final payment with copy of transmittal letter indicating Owner's receipt. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES 017836-2 PROJECT WARRANTY PROJECT: AdventHealth Zephyrhills PROJECT NO.: 21-177.01 Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy OWNER: DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: As indicated on Certificate of Substantial Completion Contractor, warrants to Owner that Work is free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that Work conforms with requirements of Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If, within one-year after the date of Substantial Completion of Work or designated portion thereof, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from Owner to do so unless Owner has previously given Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. The above shall not be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which Contractor might have under Contract Documents. Establishment of one-year period for correction of Work relates only to specific obligation of Contractor to correct Work, and has no relationship to time within which obligation to comply with Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish Contractor's liability with respect to Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct Work. CONTRACTOR: ADDRESS: BY: SIGNATURE: TITLE: Subscribed and sworn to me this NOTARY PUBLIC: LOCATION: My Commission Expires: DATE: _ day of in the year of SIGNATURE: END OF DOCUMENT 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES 01 78 36 - 3 SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Definitions: 1. Documents required for construction: Complete set of all documents required by Contract Documents, including but not limited to: a. Contract Drawings. b. Project Manual and Specifications. c. Addenda. d. Shop Drawings. e. Product Data. f. Samples and Mock-ups. g. Project Information. h. Change Orders. i. Directives, Clarifications, Interpretations, etc. j. Field test records. k. Warranties. 2. Field documents: Complete set of all documents required for construction. a. Used for construction of project. b. Contract drawings in form of prints. 3. Periodic Update Documents: Complete separate set of all documents required for construction with exception of samples and mock-ups. a. Do not use for construction of project. 4. Project Record Documents: Complete set of all documents required for construction with exception of samples and mock-ups. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Contract closeout information: 1. Copy of transmittal letter to Owner. a. At completion of project, turn over Project Record Documents to Owner with letter of transmittal. b. Submit Record Documents in containers used for Periodic Update Documents. c. Provide Transmittal Letter containing: 1) Date. 2) Project title. 3) Contractor's name and address. 4) Title and number of each Project Record Document. 5) Certification that Project Record Documents submitted are complete, accurate and reflect actual construction of project. 6) Owner's signature indicating receipt and acceptance of Project Record Documents. 2. Copy of Record Drawing files on compact disk to Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 POSTING PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION A. After Contract is executed, but prior to start of construction, obtain Contract Drawings and Project Manual/Specifications that will be used for Field Documents and Periodic Update Documents. B. Obtain copies of all addenda and post all above documents. 3.2 FIELD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain minimum of one copy at project site. B. Label each document "FIELD." C. These documents will be used for construction of project. D. Make documents available at all times for review by Architect, Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 PERIODIC UPDATE DOCUMENTS A. Maintain one copy at project site. B. Label each document "PERIODIC UPDATE." C. Do not use these documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents available at all times for review by Architect, Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. E. Maintain in clean, dry, legible condition. F. Maintain Contract Drawings in stackable, enclosed cardboard file drawers designed to hold drawings horizontally. 1. Provide index of contents of each file drawer on outside of drawer. G. Maintain all other Periodic Update Documents in stackable, enclosed file boxes designed to hold specific type of document. 1. Provide index of contents of each box on outside of box. 3.4 POSTING AND UPDATING OF PERIODIC UPDATE DOCUMENTS A. Post and update on weekly basis. B. Contract drawings: Mark legibly to record actual construction including but not limited to: 1. Depths of various elements of foundations in relation to first floor level. 2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and accessible features of structure. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by change order, field order, clarifications, interpretations, directives, etc. 6. Addenda. C. Project Manual/Specifications: Type on each section to record all changes including but not limited to: 1. Addenda. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 2 2. Change order or field order. 3. Clarifications, interpretations, directives, etc. 4. Bind added sections into Project Manual/Specifications. 5. Indicate manufacturer, makes, and models used for actual construction of project. D. Do not conceal work for which information must be recorded until all required information is recorded on Periodic Update Documents. E. Any work concealed prior to recording of required information must be uncovered. F. Once all required information is recorded on Periodic Update Documents, restore work at Contractor's expense. G. Make available current fully posted set of Contract Documents to Owner's consultants including Authorities Having Jurisdiction, Special Inspections, and Testing Agencies. 3.5 PRODUCTION OF PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Utilize set of Contract Drawings. B. Record Drawings: 1. Clean set of Contract Drawings with Architect's seals and signatures removed shall be used for Record Drawings. 2. Skilled draftsperson shall transfer all changes, corrections, entries, and other items from Periodic Update Documents to prints utilizing red pen. 3. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD PRODUCED BY CONTRACTOR" and date in prominent place. 4. Scan Record Drawings into electronic Adobe PDF file format. a. 300 dpi resolution. b. Name each PDF file to match Contract Drawing identification (i.e. "A-103G.pdf'). 5. Provide Owner original Record Drawings, and CD-R of scanned drawings in PDF file format. 6. Provide Architect CD-R of scanned drawings in PDF file format. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 3 SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Demolition, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents. B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conduct work in accordance with OSHA and EPA requirements. B. Use only firms or individual trades qualified to perform work required under this section. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Work includes: 1. Demolition of portions of structures indicated. 2. Removal of demolition debris. 3. Protection of construction to remain, including: a. Utilities to remain. b. Other items indicated. B. Condition of existing structures to be demolished: 1. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of structures to be demolished. 2. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. C. Where a building is being demolished and a standpipe exists within such a building, such standpipe shall be maintained in an operable condition so as to be available for use by fire department. 1. Such standpipe shall be demolished with building but shall not be demolished more than one floor below floor being demolished. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Perform preliminary investigations as required to ascertain extent of work. 1. Conditions which would be apparent by such investigation will not be allowed as cause for claims for extra costs. B. Before start of work, obtain and pay for permits required by authorities having jurisdiction and notify interested utilities companies. C. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction for work which affects existing exitways, exit stairs, means of egress, or access to, or exit from, areas. 1. Review with and obtain approval of authorities for temporary construction which affects such areas. 2. Obtain approval of fire authorities. D. Hazardous Materials and Toxic Wastes shall be separated, stored and disposed of in accordance with local and EPA regulations and additional criteria listed below: 1. Disposal of fluorescent tubes to open containers is not permitted. 2. Disposal of ballasts and other building elements containing PCBs to open containers is not permitted. 3. Disposal of building elements containing mercury to open containers is not permitted. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 DEMOLITION -CD 02 41 00 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. B. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of work. 3.2 ITEMS TO BE SALVAGED FOR OWNER A. Remove salvage items at appropriate stage of demolition, but early enough to prevent damage to them by demolition operations: 1. Coordinate with Owner items Owner wishes to save. B. Remove salvage items as a unit: 1. Clean, list, and tag for storage. 2. Protect from damage. 3. Salvage each item with auxiliary or associated equipment required for operation. 4. Store in an area designated within building. 3.3 ITEMS SALVAGED FOR CONTRACTOR A. Items of salvage value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. B. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. C. Storage or sale of removed items not permitted on site. 3.4 ITEMS TO BE REMOVED FOR RE -INSTALLATION IN PROJECT A. Remove items designated for re -use: 1. Tag, protect from damage, store if required, and deliver to locations designated. 2. Brace motors attached to flexible mountings until reinstallation. 3.5 GENERAL DEMOLITION PROCEDURES A. Demolition of entire portions of structures: 1. Demolish completely and remove from site. 2. Use such methods as required to complete work within limitations of governing regulations. 3. Coordinate with Owner and utility suppliers for shut-off of utilities serving each building and disconnect and seal utilities before starting demolition. B. Start and complete work as established by approved schedule; operational procedures and sequence of work are optional provided schedule is maintained. C. Protect property to remain: 1. Promptly repair damage caused by demolition, as directed by Architect, at no cost to Owner. 2. Conduct operations to prevent damage by falling debris or other cause to adjacent buildings, structures, and other facilities as well as persons. 3. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of structures. D. Conduct operations to insure minimum interference with roads, walks, entrances, exits, and other adjacent occupied facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct private drives, walks or other occupied or used facilities unless approved in writing. 2. Do not close or obstruct public thoroughfares or walks unless approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 DEMOLITION -CD 02 41 00 - 2 3. Do not obstruct exits from existing facilities without approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways. E. Provide covered passageways where necessary to ensure safe passage of persons in or near areas of work. F. Provide barricades and safety lights as required. G. Maintain existing utilities that are indicated to remain. 1. Keep in service, and protect against damage during demolition. 2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized by Owner. 3. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner. H. Structural demolition: 1. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. 2. Perform removal to avoid excessive loads on supporting walls, floors or framing. 3.6 PROTECTION OF OCCUPIED FACILITIES TO REMAIN A. Protect occupants from injury and discomfort. B. Provide temporary dustproof partitions between demolition areas and occupied areas. 1. In public areas use clean, painted, minimum 1/2 IN thick, plywood. 2. Where authorities having jurisdiction require, use fire rated construction. C. Provide temporary weather protection and insulation as necessary to prevent damage to existing facilities and discomfort to persons in occupied areas. 1. Insulation value: R 19. 3.7 CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL OF DEMOLITION MATERIALS A. Remove debris, rubbish, and materials resulting from demolition operations. 1. Remove from site; legally dispose of off site. 2. Do not burn materials on site. B. Dispose of items and materials not designated by Owner or these documents for Owner's salvage or reuse. 1. Promptly remove from site. 2. Do not store or sell Contractor salvaged items or materials on site. C. Clean up other debris resulting from this work. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 DEMOLITION -CD 02 41 00 - 3 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Firestopping, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents. B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades. C. Coordinate firestopping with acoustical sealant requirements in Section 09 29 00. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide firestop systems in compliance with following requirements: 1. Obtain firestop system for each type of penetration and construction condition from a single firestop systems manufacturer. 2. Firestop products and systems shall bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency. 3. Firestopping tests, performed by qualified, testing and inspection agency. a. UL or other agency, performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems, acceptable to local authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Existing applications for which no tested and listed classified system is available through a manufacturer: a. Provide Engineering Judgment or Equivalent Fire Resistance Rated Assembly (EFRRA) for submittal derived from similar UL system designs or other tests approved by local authorities having jurisdiction, prior to installation. b. Engineering judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by International Firestop Council. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. Certified, licensed or approved by firestopping manufacturer, trained to install firestop products per specified requirements. 2. Licensed by State or local authority, where applicable. 3. Shown to have successfully completed not less than five (5) comparable scale projects. C. Fire Test Requirements: 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. UL 263, Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials b. UL 723, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials c. UL 1479, Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops d. UL 2079, Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials b. ASTM E 119 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials c. ASTM E136 Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750F d. ASTM E814 Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops e. ASTM E 13 99 Cyclic Movement and Measuring the Minimum and Maximum Joint Widths of Architectural Joint Systems f. ASTM E1966 Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems g. ASTM E2174 Standard Practice for On -site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops h. ASTM E2307 Standard Test Method for Determining the Fire Endurance of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using the Intermediate -Scale, Multi Story Test Apparatus (ISMA) 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 FIRESTOPPING 078400-1 i. ASTM E2393 Standard Practice for On -site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers D. References: 1. Building Code as locally adopted and amended. 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Fire Resistance Directory: a. Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ). b. Joint Systems (XHBN). c. Fill, Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW). d. Firestop Devices (XHJI). e. Forming Materials (XHKU). f. Wall Opening Protective Materials (CLIV). 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code b. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code c. NFPA 22: Standard for High Challenge Fire Walls, Fire Walls, and Fire Barrier Walls d. NFPA 251: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 4. Firestop Contractors International Association (FCIA): a. MOP — FCIA Firestop Manual of Practice 5. International Firestop Council, latest edition (IFC): a. Ref. 1 Recommended IFC Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Engineering Judgments b. Ref. 2 Inspectors Field Pocket Guide E. Identification Labels for Firestop Assemblies: 1. Follow guidelines set in Chapter 7 of International Building Code. 2. Coordinate with Sections 04 22 00 and 09 29 00. F. Pipe insulation shall not be removed, cut away or otherwise interrupted through wall or floor openings. 1. Provide products appropriately tested for the thickness and type of insulation utilized. G. Cabling where frequent cable moves, add-ons, and changes are likely to occur in future: 1. Where cable trays are used: a. Utilize re -enterable products (e.g. removable intumescent pillows) specifically designed for retrofit. 2. Where cable trays are not used: a. Utilize fire -rated cable pathway devices. b. Where not practical, re -enterable products designed for retrofit may be used. H. Protect penetrations passing through fire -resistance rated floor -ceiling assemblies contained within chase wall assemblies with products tested by being fully exposed to fire outside of chase wall. 1. Identify systems within UL Fire Resistance Directory with the words: Chase Wall Optional. I. Fire Resistive Joint Sealants: 1. Provide flexible fire -resistive joint sealants to accommodate normal and thermal building movement without seal damage. 2. Provide fire -resistive joint sealants designed to accommodate a specific range of movement. a. Test in accordance with cyclic movement test criteria as outlined in: ASTM E1399, ASTM E1966 or UL 2079. 3. Provide fire -resistive joint systems subjected to an air leakage test. a. Conduct in accordance with UL 2079, with published L-Ratings for ambient and elevated temperatures, as evidence of ability of fire -resistive joint system to restrict movement of smoke. J. Subject smoke wall containment systems to air leakage test. 1. Conduct in accordance with UL 1479, with published L-Ratings for ambient and elevated temperatures, as evidence of ability of fire -resistive joint system to restrict movement of smoke. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 FIRESTOPPING 078400-2 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Through Penetration Firestop Systems for protection of penetrations through following fire - resistance rated assemblies, including both blank openings and openings containing penetrating items: 1. Floor assemblies. 2. Roof assemblies. 3. Wall and partition assemblies. 4. Fire -rated smoke barrier assemblies. 5. Construction enclosing compartmentalized areas. 6. Existing, fire and smoke -rated assemblies. B. Fire Resistive Joint Assemblies for linear voids where fire -rated floor, roof, or wall assemblies abut one another, including following types of joints: 1. Top of wall interface with overhead roof or floor structure: a. Fire -rated walls: Agency -approved assemblies employing materials specified in this section. b. Non -fire rated partitions, including smoke partitions: Seal to structure with acoustical sealant specified in Section 09 29 00. 2. Non -Fire Rated Expansion Joints: Specified in Section 07 95 13. 3. Fire Rated Expansion Joints: Specified in Section 07 95 13. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's standard information indicating certification of products proposed for use on project. B. Project Information: 1. UL reports with illustration of systems, system numbers, temperature ratings, and products proposed for use on project. 2. Contractor Certification per FM 4991, UL, HAFSC, or all. C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Warranty. 2. Electronic file of all project documentation provided to General Contractor [Construction Manager], Architect and Owner. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide written warranty to Owner, guaranteeing performance of installed fu•estop material as designed and tested, for sustainable lifetime of structure; defect in material shall be replaced at no cost to Owner. B. Installer Warranty: 1. Provide written warranty to Owner guaranteeing quality of installation and meeting requirements of manufacturers written instructions and tested system, for a minimum of five (5) years. Deficiencies found in installed firestop shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Firestopping Materials: 1. Base: a. Hilti Inc. 2. Optional: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FIRESTOPPING 078400-3 a. 3 M. b. Rectorseal. c. Specified Technologies, Inc. d. Tremco, Inc. e. United States Gypsum Company. f. W.R. Grace & Company. B. Forming Materials: 1. Base: a. Hilti, Inc. 2. Optional: a. IIG Minwool. b. Rock Wool Manufacturing. c. Roxul Inc. d. Thermafiber. C. Other manufacturers of UL listed systems desiring approval, comply with Section 00 26 00. 1. See systems Volume 2 of UL Building Materials Directory. 2. Systems not UL listed for conditions will not be accepted. 2.2 FIRESTOPPING — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Select systems approved for conditions encountered and maintain required fire separations. B. Provide firestopping systems and materials compatible with one another, with substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items, under conditions of service and application. C. Provide components for each firestopping system needed to install fill materials. D. Materials shall be provided by a single firestopping products manufacturer as far a possible. E. All materials used shall be specific items named in UL assemblies being installed. F. All materials must be UL, or approved third party testing agency, listed for designated fire resistance rated systems, and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. G. Use products tested for specific fire -resistance -rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, void width, movement capabilities, and fire -rating involved for each instance. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Basis of design: Hilti, Inc. B. Through Penetration Firestop Systems: 1. Base Products: a. FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant. b. CP 604 Self -leveling Firestop Sealant. c. CP 620 Fire Foam. d. CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant. e. CP 601 S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant. C. Fire -resistive Joints: 1. Base Products: a. CSF-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray. b. CP 601 S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant. c. CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant. d. CP 604 Self -leveling Firestop Sealant. D. Firestop Devices: 1. Factory -assembled collars lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific outside diameter of penetrating item. 2. Base Products: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 4 a. CP 680-P Cast -in -Place Firestop Device. b. CP 680-M Cast -in -Place Firestop Device. c. CP 681 Tub Box Kit. d. CFS-DID Firestop Device. E. Intumescent Pads, Wall Opening Protective Materials: 1. Intumescent, non -curing pads or inserts for protection of electrical panels, switch and receptacle boxes, medical gas outlets and valve boxes, film illuminators, and other items recessed in face of fire rated walls. 2. Base Product: a. CP 617 Firestop Putty Pad. F. Fire -rated Cable Pathways: 1. Usage: a. Cables passing through fire -rated floors or walls shall pass through fire -rated cable pathway devices made from an intumescent material that adjusts automatically to cable additions or subtractions. 2. Product Description and Requirements: a. Pathway device modules comprised of steel raceway and intumescent pads. b. F-Rating equal to the rating of barrier the device penetrates. c. Pathway devices shall be capable of allowing a 0 to 100 percent fill of cables. d. Size to accommodate quantity and size of electrical wires and data cables indicated plus 100 percent expansion. e. Devices available in square and round configurations that are able to be completely opened for retro-fit applications of existing cables. f. Provide wire devices with steel wall plates allowing for single or multiple devices ganged together without requiring additional wall structure framing. 3. Base Product: a. CP 653 Speed Sleeve. G. Firestop Putty: 1. Intumescent, non -hardening, water resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers or silicone compounds. 2. Firestop Putty shall be provided and installed at, but not limited to, the gap between wire, cabling, or both, exiting an open end of conduit, where conduit penetrates one or both sides of a smoke or fire rated wall assembly. 3. Base Products: a. CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick. b. CP 658 Firestop Plug. H. Wrap Strips: 1. Single component intumescent elastomeric strips faced on both sides with a plastic film: 2. Base Products: a. CP 643N Firestop Collar. b. CP 644 Firestop Collar. c. CP 648E/648S Wrap Strips. Firestop Pillows: 1. Re -enterable, non -curing, mineral fiber core encapsulated with an intumescent coating contained in a flame retardant poly bag. 2. Base Products: a. FS 657 Fire Block. b. CP 658T Firestop Plug. J. Mortar: 1. Portland cement based dry -mix product formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a non -shrinking, water-resistant, homogenous mortar. 2. Base Product: a. CP 637 Firestop Mortar. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FIRESTOPPING 078400-5 K. Silicone Sealants: 1. Moisture curing, single component, silicone elastomeric sealant for horizontal surfaces pourable or nonsag or vertical surface nonsag. 2. Base Product: a. CP 601 S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant. L. Pre -formed mineral wool: 1. CP 767 Speed Strips 2. CP 777 Speed Plugs M. Smoke and Acoustical Sealants: 1. Single component latex formulations that upon cure do not re -emulsify during exposure to moisture. a. CP 506 Smoke and Acoustic Sealant. b. CP 572 Smoke and Acoustic Spray. N. Composite Sheet: 1. Non -curing, re -penetrable material. 2. Base Products: a. CP 675T Firestop Board. b. FS 657 FireBlock. O. Forming Materials: 1. Materials listed as components in laboratory -approved designs. 2. Mineral Wool: a. Base Product:Type SAF by Thermafiber, or b. Similar product specifically named as components in laboratory -approved designs. P. Perimeter Fire Containment: Specified in Section 07 84 53. 2.4 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. General: 1. Schedules below identify requirements for acceptable through penetration firestop systems based on barrier type, fire -resistive rating, and penetrant type. Each system must comply with building code and fire code as locally adopted and amended. 2. Requirements for single -membrane penetrations and through penetration firestops are identical. Unless otherwise noted, penetrants which pass through a single membrane, shall be treated the same as if it passed through the entire fire -resistive assembly. 3. Select each firestop system based on actual field conditions, including penetration type, shape, size, quantities and physical position within opening. 4. Refer to Plans for indication of the required ratings of fire -resistive wall, floor, and roof assemblies. 5. Indicated ratings are minimum and may be exceeded. 6. Firestop Assemblies at Fire -Rated Walls: a. The minimum Fire (F) Rating for Firestop assemblies in walls shall equal that of the wall, but not less than 1-HR. b. The minimum Temperature (T) Rating of Firestop assemblies in walls may equal zero. c. Smoke Barrier: In addition to (F) Rating, (L) Rating of maximum 5 CFM per SF. d. Non -rated walls and Smoke -Partitions with no fire -resistive requirement: Assembly with (L) rating. 7. Firestop assemblies at fire -rated floors and roofs: a. Minimum Fire (F) and Temperature (T) Ratings of Firestop assemblies used in floors or roof shall equal hourly rating of floor or roof being penetrated, but not less than 1-HR. 1) Exception 1: The T-rating may equal zero when portion of penetration, above or below floor, is contained within a wall. 2) Exception 2: Firestops are not required for floor penetrations within a 2-hour rated shaft enclosure. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 FIRESTOPPING 078400-6 B. Voids in wall with no penetrations: 1. Fill with approved through penetration firestopping system. 2. Contractors option: Patch void in wall with like construction. C. Penetrating Ducts with Dampers: 1. Utilize only firestop materials which are included in damper's classification. 2. Do not install firestop systems that hamper performance of fire dampers. D. Cable Trays and similar devices: 1. Provide re -enterable products specifically designed for removal and re -installation at openings within walls and floors designed to accommodate voice, data and video cabling. E. Electrical panels and devices, medical gas outlets and valve boxes, film illuminators, and other items recessed in to face of rated walls: 1. Where electrical devices are placed on opposite sides of wall, and are less than 610mm 24 IN apart measured horizontally, install intumescent pads over back of devices in approved manner or maintain continuity of rated barrier within wall cavity surrounding recessed item. Guide to Through Penetration Firestop Systems - WALLS ,... ..i'Fv': .'�''��J/`.F ,1 ty��J �Fi� "'� �,�'l�f'�� �i "'Y/y1�5' �F'�``' t � t !rvh' � •', �FF �i ��41 � � f�i'� � "..'U ri��lf /ram .� r F f �J"rf . 1,1 iF' ` ��!V�4*Mt �% ✓�f��� �l J���'� �'i t"9.''ff FF � ��vJ ���✓-'��f .Jc %X'�x"l 5,/' L,J::F „1' '"F',% 13' ,'4� J``ifi.,:?. iN'", F'" yr f lJ f r/'•�',;J ..�f, yfffi.`,, "..-. ,''K►E: ,$.," 5r„ No Penetrating Items N/A*' N/A„ C-AJ-0055, C-AJ-0090, C-AJ-0086 Metallic, Un-Insulated Pipe, W-L-1054,W-L-1058, C-AJ-1226, W-J-1067, Conduit, or Tubing Single Penetrant W-L-1054,W-L-1058, W-L-1164, W-L-1110, W-J-1041, W-J-1068, (i.e. Copper, Iron, Steel) W-L-1164 W-L-1111 C-BJ-1034, C-BJ-1037, W-J-1042 Non -Metallic, Un-Insulated W-L-2078, W-L-2075, C-AJ-2109, C-AJ-2098, Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing Single Penetrant W-L-2078, W-L-2075, W-L-2128, W-L- 2184, C-AJ-2167, C-AJ-2371, (i.e. PVC, CPVC, Glass) W_L-2128 W-L-2245 C-AJ-2342, W-J-2057, W_J_2091 W-L-3065, W-L-3111, W-J-3036, C-AJ-3095, Electrical Cables Single or Multiple W-L-3065, W-L-3111, W L-31 W-L-3139, C-AJ-3180, W-J-3060, Penetrants W-L-3112, W-L-3334 - WL -3334 W-J-3050, W-J-3167, C-AJ-3283 Cable Trays w/cabling Single or Multiple W-L 4011, W-L-4019 W-L-4019, W-L-4019 W-J-4027, C-AJ-4034, Penetrants C-AJ-4035, W-J-8007 Insulated Pipes W-L-5028, W-L-5029, W-L-5028, W-L-5029, C-AJ-5090, C-AJ-5091, (Le. Copper, Glass, Iron, Single Penetrant W-L-5047 W-L-5047, W-L-5073 C-AJ-5061, W-J-5042, Plastic, Steel C-BJ-5006, W-J-5028 Miscellaneous Electrical Single Penetrant N/A' N/A-* C-AJ-6006, C-AJ-6017, Penetrations (i.e. Bus Ducts) C-AJ-6036 Non -insulated W-L-7017, W-L-7040, W-L-7017, W-L-7040, C-AJ-7046, C-AJ-7051, Metal Duct W-L-7042, W-L-7155 W-L-7042, W-L-7155 W-J-7021 W-J-7022 Insulated W-L-7153, W-L-7156 W-L-7059, W-L-7153, W-J-7029, W-J-7029 W-L-7156 Electrical Boxes Single Penetrant CLIV CLIV CLIV C-AJ-8099, C-AJ-8056, Mixed Penetrants Multiple Penetrants W-L-1095, W-L-8013 W-L-1095, W-L-8014, W-J-8007, C-AJ-8143, W-L-8013 C-AJ-8041, C-AJ-8099, C-AJ-8095 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 FIRESTOPPM 078400-7 Through Penetration Firestop Systems - Floors and Roofs r u ��r East -in -Place ` � Y fit �n �'lac� Prescription 11ena ,, "" Framed;SfllcIr Concreteperete �r r thickness Single Penetrant F-A-0006, C-AJ-0055, No Penetrating Items N/A** C-AJ-0090, C-AJ-0086, N/A** Multiple Penetrants p F-A-0014 Metallic, Un-Insulated Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing Single Penetrant F-C-1009, F-C-1059 C-AJ-1226, F-A-1028, C-BJ-1037, C-BJ-1034, i.e. Copper, Iron, Steel F-A-1017 F-B-1010 F-A-2053, F-A-2025, Non -Metallic, Un-Insulated Pipe, F-C-2232,F-C-2029 C-AJ-2109, C-AJ-2098, C-BJ-2021, C-BJ-2016 Conduit, or Tubing Single Penetrant F-C-2030, F-C-2160, C-AJ-2271, C-AJ-2167, C-BJ-2017 (i.e. PVC, CPVC, Glass) F-C-2127, F-C-2128 C-AJ-2342, C-AJ-2371, F-A-2054,C-AJ-2017 Electrical Cables Single of Bundled F-C-3012, F-C-3044, F-A-3007, C-AJ-3095, N/A** Penetrants F-C-3012 C-AJ-3180, C-AJ-3283 Single Penetrant Cable Trays w/cabling N/A** C-AJ-4034, C-AJ-4035 N/A** Multiple Penetrants Insulated Pipes F-A-5015, F-A-5017, (i.e. Copper, Glass, Steel, Iron, Single Penetrant F-C-5004, F-C-5037, C-AJ-5090, C-AJ-5091, C-BJ-5006, C-BJ-1055 Plastic, Steel) F-C-5036 C-AJ-5098,F-A-5016, C-BJ-5015 F-A-5018 Miscellaneous Electrical Single Penetrant N/A** C-AJ-6006, C-AJ-6017, N/A** Penetrations (i.e. Bus Ducts) F-A-6002, C-AJ-6036 Non -insulated F-C-7013 C-AJ-7046, C-AJ-7051, N/A** Metal Duct C-AJ-7084 Insulated N/A** N/A** N/A** Mixed Penetrants Multiple Penetrants F-C-8009, F-C-8014, C-AJ-8099, C-AJ-8056, N/A** F-C-8026,F-C-8025 I C-AJ-8143, C-AJ-8095 2.5 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT ASSEMBLIES - GENERAL A. General: 1. Where joint will be exposed to elements, fire -resistive joint sealant must be approved by manufacturer for use in exterior applications and shall comply with ASTM C920. B. Head -of -Wall Assemblies: 1. General: a. Use at top of fire -rated and smoke barrier walls and partitions where they abut floor and roof structures above. b. Select systems with D designation, rated for dynamic movement capability. c. Select systems that can accommodate deflection of structure above. d. Maximum Leakage for Fire -resistive Joints in Smoke Barriers: 5 CFM or less per linear foot as tested in accordance with UL 2079. e. Sound -control walls and smoke partitions which are not stipulated to include fire - resistance rating. Seal with acoustical sealant, specified in Section 09 29 00. 2. Minimum F and T ratings: a. The minimum fire rating for firestop assemblies in walls shall equal that of wall, but not less than 1-HR. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 FIRESTOPPING 078400-8 b. The minimum temperature rating of firestop assemblies in walls may equal zero. 3. Acceptable Systems: a. Metal stud and drywall partitions: Select system from UL HW-D-0000 Series. b. Concrete and Masonry Walls: Select system from UL HW-D-1000 Series. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examination of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. B. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, scale, laitance, rust, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may inhibit optimum adhesion. C. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials. D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install firestop systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and conditions of testing and classification as specified in UL or other acceptable third -party testing agency listing. 2. Penetrations through fire -resistive floor assemblies shall be sealed with firestop system providing minimum Class 1 W-rating as tested in accordance with UL 1479 and ensure air and water resistant seal. 3. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. B. Identification Labels. 1. Identify each firestop assembly as defined in Quality Assurance. 2. Do not locate identification labels, tags, or both, on fmished surfaces or where exposed to view by public. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Maintain areas of work accessible until inspection by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace assemblies to comply with requirements. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition. B. Clean surfaces adjacent to sealed openings free of excess materials and soiling as work progresses. C. Perform patching and repair of firestopping systems damaged by other trades. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FIRESTOPPM 078400-9 SECTION 07 92 16 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Definition: 1. Words "calk" and "caulking" mean sealant work. 2. "Interior wet areas" means toilets, showers, kitchens and similar areas where sealant is subject to moisture. B. Seal joints which would otherwise permit penetration of moisture or air, unless sealant work is specifically required under other sections. C. Work included: Provide sealants as follows: 1. Masonry control joints, and between masonry and other materials. 2. Flooring joints. 3. Isolation joints. 4. Joints at penetrations of walls, floors and decks by piping and other services and equipment not requiring firestopping. 5. Perimeters of door and window frames, louvers, grilles, etc. 6. Between cabinets, casework, countertops and back splashes where adjacent to walls. 7. Joints between dissimilar materials, to provide visually acceptable closures. 8. Other joints where caulking, or sealant is indicated. D. Related materials specified elsewhere: 1. Exterior Joint Sealants: Specified in previous bid package. 2. Remolded Compressible Sealants: Specified in previous bid package. 3. Firestopping: Specified in Section 07 84 00. 4. Acoustical Sealant: Specified in Section 09 29 00. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant materials: 1. Sealant specification: ASTM C920 Type S or M, Grade NS, minimum Class 25. 2. Sealant testing: ASTM C510; ASTM C711; ASTM C719 Class-25, Grade-N; ASTM C792; ASTM C793; ASTM C910. 3. Sealant use: ASTM C 1193. 4. Installer approved by manufacturer. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Sealant Schedule with the following information: a. Generally describe locations requiring sealants (i.e. Brick to Alum Window). b. List type of sealant to be used, and name of product proposed. c. Include a blank column on schedule for colors. d. Upon review, Architect to complete Color Column. B. Samples: 1. Cured sample of each color for color selection (submit with Sealant Schedule). C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Warranty. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystology 3/17/2021 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS -CD 079216-1 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty that sealant work will remain free of defects for a period of 2 years: 1. Failure of water tightness constitutes defect. 2. Remove defective work and materials and replace with new work and materials. 3. Repair other work damaged as a result of defective sealant work at no additional expense to Owner. 4. Warranty signed by Installer and/or Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Polyurethane sealants: a. Base: 1) Tremco. b. Optional: 1) Pecora. 2) Sonnebom/ChemRex. 3) Sika. 4) Bondaflex Technologies. 2. Silicone sealants: a. Base: 1) Tremco. 2) Dow Corning. b. Optional: 1) Pecora. 2) GE Silicones. 3) Sonneborn/ChemRex. 4) Bondaflex Technologies. 3. Other Sealants: a. Base: As indicated. 4. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 00 26 00. 2.2 SEALANTS - GENERAL A. General: 1. Provide colors matching materials being sealed. 2. Where sealant is not exposed to view, use manufacturer's standard color which has best performance. 3. Use non -sag sealant in vertical and horizontal joints. 4. Use self -leveling in horizontal joints. 5. Before use of sealant, investigate its compatibility with surfaces, fillers and other materials in joint system. 6. Use only compatible materials. 7. Obtain sealants from manufacturers who will provide manufacturers' field service representatives at project site for purpose of advising and instructing installers. a. Provide such services, at no expense to Owner. B. Polyurethane Sealants: 1. Refer to Sealant Selection Guide for types required. 2. Comply with VOC limits as required by local laws or specified otherwise. C. Silicone Sealants: 1. Refer to Sealant Selection Guide for types required. 2. Comply with VOC limits as required by local laws or specified otherwise. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystology 3/17/2021 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS -CD 079216-2 D. Other Sealant Types: 1. Refer to Sealant Selection Guide for types required. 2. Comply with VOC limits as required by local laws or specified otherwise. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Joint cleaner, primer, bond breaker: 1. As recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Backer Rod: 1. Rod stock of polyethylene, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, or other flexible, non - absorbent, non -bituminous material recommended by sealant manufacturer to: a. Control joint depth. b. Break bond of sealant at bottom of joint. c. Provide proper shape of sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SEALANT USAGE GUIDELINES Guide to Sealant Types•' ,, Seala>Iif Type Ba Rema s it �=Puct rod Window Sills / Stools Cabinets and Casework to wall Product specified in Section 12 34 00 Countertops and Backsplashes (100% silicone by Color Rite) Sinks in Countertops Interior Alum Doors and Window Multi -part Polyurethane, Tremco Frame Perimeters chemically curing, "Dymeric -- e oxidized 240FC" InteriorException: Where sealant will not (General) Tremco a subsequently painted, and Hollow Metal Door and Window Siliconized Acrylic Latex "Tremflex hite color will not be visually Frames (paintable) 834" ompatible with adjacent finishes: se "Dymeric 240FC" of matching olor. Acoustical Sealant Joints at top and bottom terminations of Specified In Section 09 29 00 (and in Section 07 84 00 where fire -rated) Interior Walls Control Joints in Concrete Floors Interior in Mechanical Rooms and other Tremco "THC Exception: Where subject to Flatwork "un-finished" spaces Multi -part Polyurethane 900 / 9011, continual water emersion; use ' Vulkem 45 or 245" Stone and Precast Flooring Interior Wet Porcelain, Ceramic Tile, Metals, Silicone; Air cure Tremco "Tremsil Areas and surfaces with Epoxy Paints 200" General Notes: 1. The above shall be use as a "guide" to selection of appropriate sealant types. . Optional sealant products shall offer same number of color choices as the Base Product listed. 3. All of the conditions and materials listed may not necessarily apply to subject project. 4. Not all project conditions may be addressed on above table; Refer also to other specification sections and install sealants here called for by other sections. 5. The above is intended to be an overall guide. Additional conditions and materials may be required on subject project. Notify Architect if additional Guidance is required to select unlisted items. and Conditions "conventionally" occur on Exterior but used on Interior of this project may not be listed on this rMaterials able. Refer to Exterior Guide (Section 07 92 13) for appropriate sealant type. i.e. If project calls for Brick Masonry on interior: efer to Section 07 92 13 for type of Sealant to be used. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystology 3/17/2021 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS -CD 079216-3 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under following conditions: a. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 5 degC 40 degF. b. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint -Width Conditions: 1. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Apply only to joints free of material which may inhibit bond. D. Apply to cementitious materials only when thoroughly cured and dry. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Clean joints. B. Where finish coating or covering is to be applied to surface (e.g., paint, wall covering, glazed coating), wait until such coating or covering has been applied before installing sealant. 3.4 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. General: 1. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 2. Make joints water and air tight. 3. Make depth of sealant not more than one-half width of joint, but in no case less than 6mm 1 /4 IN. 4. Install correctly sized backer rods. 5. Apply bond breaker as required or recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. C. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Prime joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer for conditions: 1. Limit application to surfaces to receive sealants. 2. Mask off adjacent surfaces. F. Sub -caulk joints without suitable backstop, to proper depth. G. Tool sealants using sufficient pressure to fill voids. H. Upon completion, leave caulking smooth and even. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystology 3/17/2021 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS -CD 079216-4 I. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. J. Hollow Metal Frames: 1. Seal frames to wall. 2. Seal frames to floor substrates and hard floor finishes. 3. Do not seal frames to previously installed carpet and similar finishes. 4. Seal hairline gaps where stops and rabbets of frame members intersect. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystology 3/17/2021 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS -CD 079216-5 SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Non -Structural Metal Framing, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents. B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: 1. Where fire resistance classifications are indicated for walls or partitions: Provide studs and accessories of type tested and listed for construction indicated. 2. Products proposed for use in fire -rated assemblies shall be approved by nationally recognized testing laboratory. 3. Manufacturer shall be a member of either Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA) or Steel Framing Industry Association (SFIA). B. ASTM Reference Standards: 1. ASTM C645: Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. 2. ASTM C653: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process 3. ASTM C754: Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 4. ASTM A 1003: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and — Nonmetallic -Coated for Cold -Formed Framing Members. C. Select steel studs in accordance with manufacturer's standard load tables and following design pressures and maximum deflections: PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Use Condition z Design Maximum Pressure Deflection Wall enclosing stairs, elevator hoistways, and other 480 Pa U120 vertical shafts 10 LBS/FT2 Wall enclosing vestibules, ground floor lobbies, and 720 Pa similar spaces subject to intermittent exposure to exterior 15 LBS/FT2 U240 wind conditions Walls scheduled with Tile Backer Board, Moisture - resistant, or Abuse -Resistant Gypsum Wallboard 240 Paz 5 LBS/FT U360 Walls scheduled to receive Tile, lath and plaster, or veneer plaster.1 Typical Interior Walls/Partitions (those not listed above) 240 Pa 2 5 LBS/FT U240 Interior Ceilings, Soffits and Bulkheads 240 Pa 2 5 LBS/FT U360 Footnotes: 1. Limit deflection to L1360 where wall cladding on either face is any of the following: Ceramic Tile, Stone Tile, Porcelain Tile, Thin Brick, Lath & Plaster, Simulated Masonry, Adhered -stone, Veneer Plaster and similar brittle finishes which are prone to movement -induced cracking. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-1 2. Where elements meet multiple conditions; Use most stringent Deflection and Design Pressure values. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Provide copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of material and accessory required. 2. Where fire resistance classification is indicated, submit copies of nationally recognized testing laboratory listings of products proposed for use. 3. Include data required to show specification compliance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Non-structural Metal Framing: 1. Base: a. Telling Industries. 2. Optional: a. California Expanded Metal Products Co. (CEMCO). b. C1arkDietrich Building Systems. c. Custom Stud Inc. d. Marino/WARE. e. MRI Steel Framing LLC. f. The Steel Network. B. Interlocking Grid Support Systems for Gypsum Board Ceilings: 1. Base: a. USG Corporation. 2. Optional: a. Armstrong. b. Chicago Metallic. C. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 00 26 00. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: 1. C-shaped studs and tracks roll -formed from corrosion -resistant galvanized steel that conforms to ASTM C645. 2. Galvanized: ASTM A653, Z120 G40. B. Metal Studs: 1. Stud Depths: As indicated by Wall Types. 2. Minimum Flanges Width: 32mm 1-1/4 IN. Minimum thickness: 0.45mm 18 mil, except as follows: a. Provide heavier thickness as required to comply with performance criteria. b. Upgrade framing members to minimum 0.75mm 30 mil studs at following conditions: 1) At jambs of openings: Two 0.75mm 30 mil studs. 2) One or both sides of partition will be faced with any of following: a) Wall mounted cabinetry and equipment. b) Tile backing board. c) Adhered stone. d) Plaster. e) Moisture -resistant. f) Abuse -resistant wallboard. g) Lead backed gypsum wallboard. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-2 3) Where partitions are not extended to overhead structural deck, and are without supporting diagonal bracing, or horizontal stiffeners. c. Provide heavier gauge thickness where specifically indicated. 4. Instead of heavier stud thickness, the design may employ diagonal braces (kickers) above the ceiling to reduce the overall span and thus stiffen the wall frame. Coordinate locations with building services items. a. Do not employ studs with stud thickness less than allowed by Fire Resistance -rated assemblies. 5. Base Products: a. "Drywall Framing System" by Telling Industries. 6. High Strength (50 ksi) studs shall comply with all Design Criteria of equivalent thickness traditional (33 ksi) studs listed. 7. Optional Products (high strength steel): a. "Viper Stud" by Telling Industries, Marino/ Ware and CEMCO. b. "ProStud" by Clark Dietrich Building Systems. c. "Prime Wall EQ" by the Steel Network. C. Head -of -Wall Accessories: 1. General Criteria: a. Configure to permit deflection of overhead superstructure while maintaining structural integrity, fire and smoke -resistance, and sound control as required by each wall. 2. Basis of Design - Slotted Top Track (a.k.a. deflection Track): a. Deep leg, vertically slotted track for all walls which extend to structure. b. Minimum Thickness: 0.75mm 30 mil (20 GA). c. Width: As required for studs sizes indicated. d. Depth: Minimum 63mm 2-1/2 IN down -standing legs with 6mm 1/4 IN wide by 38mm 1-1/2 IN high slots spaced 25mm 1 IN on center. e. Material: Cold -formed sheet steel; galvanized; ASTM A653, Z 180, G60. f. Accessories: 1) Include fasteners suitable for attachment to superstructure elements. 2) Include Z-bars, cold formed channels, or similar clips to accommodate thickness of Spay -applied Fire -Resistive Materials (SFRM). g. Additional components where walls are fire -rated: 1) Include fasteners, clips and other items necessary to secure wall frame to building superstructure according to UL-listed designs. 2) Select systems tested in accordance with UL-2079 for conditions. h. Firestopping Sealants, Sprays and Forming Materials: Specified in Section 07 84 00. 3. Alternative top track configurations may be considered by Architect for approval. a. Proposed systems must be configured to accommodate deflection of superstructure without inducing axial loading on the partition wall. b. Proposed systems must be approved for fire resistive requirements indicated. c. Contractor is obligated to demonstrate to Architect that proposed system complies with project requirements. 4. Track with factory applied intumescent sealant at Contractor's option: a. Proposed systems must meet fire resistive requirements in Section 07 84 00. b. Coordinate with other sealants in Sections 07 84 00 and 07 92 16. c. Contractor is obligated to coordinate inspection and system acceptance by local authorities. d. Base Product: "FASTrack" by Marino/ Ware and CEMCO. e. Optional Product: "Blaze Frame" by Blazeframe Industries. Source: USG. D. Shaftwall Framing: C-T or C-H shaped studs with U or J shaped tracks. 1. Material: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A653, Z 120 G40. 2. Minimum Thickness: .75mm 30 mil. 3. Minimum Thickness: .84mm 33 mil. 4. Minimum Size: 64,102 and 152mm 2-1/2, 4, and 6 IN as indicated. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-3 5. Stud Spacing: 610mm 24 IN. 6. Structural Design Criteria: a. Select stud with properties necessary to limit deflection to L/240 deflection at load of 480 Pa 10 PSF. b. Use larger size and gauge if required to satisfy span and deflection criteria. 7. Shaftwall assembly with gypsum wallboard specified in Section 09 29 00: a. Fire resistance rating: 2 hours in accordance with ASTM E119. b. Sound transmission class: Minimum STC 47 in accordance with ASTM E90. 8. Base Product: "CT Cavity Shaftwall Studs" by Telling Industies. E. Z-Bar standoff clips: a. Galvanized steel, minimum 0.75mm 30 mil thickness, 51mm x 51mm x 51mm 2 IN x 2 IN x 2 IN size by length required, unless otherwise indicated to accommodate beam and deck fireproofing: 2. Provide Z-bars for attachment of top track to superstructure elements which are to be protected with sprayed fireproofing. 3. Length: a. At structural steel member: Length equal to flange width of structural steel member. b. At steel deck: Minimum length equal to partition width, or as required to span steel deck flutes. c. Extend length of Z-bar to accommodate partition offset that will not clear fireproofed steel beam. 4. Base Product: "ZFC" by Telling Industries. F. Furring Channels: 1. Hat -shaped sections. 2. Galvanized: ASTM A653, Z120 G40. 3. Sizes: 22 and 38mm 7/8 and 1-1/2 IN, as indicated. 4. Minimum Thickness: 0.75mm 30 mil (20 GA); Use heavier gauge as dictated by conditions. 5. Base Product: "DWFC" by Telling Industries. G. Z-Furring: 1. Z-shaped sections, attached to structural parent wall. 2. Galvanized: ASTM A653, Z120 G40. 3. Sizes: 25, 38, 51 and 64mm 1, 1-1/2, 2 and 2-1/2 IN, as indicated. 4. Minimum Thickness: 0.45mm 18 mil; Use heavier gauge as dictated by conditions. 5. XPS Foam Insulation: Specified in Section 07 2100. 6. Base Product: "ZFC" by Telling Industries. 2.3 ACCESSORY ITEMS A. Wire ties: 1. 1.09mm 43 mil (18 GA) soft annealed, galvanized. B. Fasteners for tracks: 1. Power driven type, to withstand minimum 845 N 190 LB shear when driven. C. Closure: 1. When continuous vapor retarder is required, provide continuous 0.75mm 30 mil galvanized closure angle to receive vapor retarder and vapor retarder tape. D. Isolation Strip Material: 1. Non -absorbent, foam padding as required to prevent direct contact between metal framing member and exterior concrete or masonry walls. 2. Minimum thickness: lmm 0.40 mil. E. Backing - modified track runners: 1. C-shaped track runners. a. Roll -form from corrosion -resistant galvanized steel. b. Conform to ASTM C645. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-4 2. Galvanized: ASTM A653, Z120 G40. 3. Minimum Backing Height: 150mm 6 IN. 4. Minimum Flange Width: 32mm 1-1/4 IN. 5. Minimum Thickness: 0.75mm 30 mil. 6. Base Product: "Drywall Track" by Telling Industries. 2.4 SUPPORT SYSTEMS FOR GYPSUM CEILINGS A. Interlocking Grid Systems: 1. Description: ASTM C645, direct -hung system composed of T-Shaped framing members designed to carry load of screw -applied gypsum ceiling board. 2. Tabs on Cross -Tees to interlock into slots in Main Runners where intersections occur. 3. Base Product: "Drywall Suspension System" by USG Corporation. 4. Optional Products: "Drywall Grid Systems" by Armstrong; "Drywall Furring System" by Chicago Metallic. 5. Other items including suspension wire, tie wire, attachment devices: As specified and indicated. B. Track and Channel Systems: 1. Material: ASTM C645 roll -formed steel with G40 galvanized coating. 2. Minimum Thickness: 0.75mm 30 mil (20 GA); Use heavier gauge as dictated by conditions. 3. Carrying Channels: a. Size: 38mm 1-1/2 IN. 4. Furring Channels (hat -channels): a. Sizes: 22 and 38mm 7/8 and 1-1/2 IN, as indicated. 5. Other items including suspension wire, tie wire, attachment devices: As specified and indicated. C. Stud -Framed Ceiling/Soffit Systems: 1. C-shaped studs or joists; roll -formed from corrosion -resistant galvanized steel that conforms to ASTM C645. 2. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A653, Z120 G40. 3. Minimum Frame Member Depth: 3-5/8 IN minimum, unless otherwise indicated. a. Use wider stud sections if ceiling span and support requires. 4. Minimum flange width: 32mm 1-1/4 IN. 5. Minimum stud thickness: 33 mil. 6. Other items including suspension wire, tie wire, attachment devices: As specified and indicated. D. Tie Wire: 1. Material: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Minimum Diameter (single -strand): 1.6mm 0.0625 IN (14 GA). 3. Minimum Diameter (double -strand): 1.2mm 0.0475 IN (18 GA). E. Wire Hangers: 1. Material: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Minimum Diameter: 4.12mm 0.162 IN (8 GA). F. Anchors in Concrete: 1. Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E488 or ASTM E1512 as applicable. 2. Acceptable types: Cast -in -place, post -installed expansion anchors and post -installed bonded anchors. 3. Material: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM-B633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. G. Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-5 1. Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E1190. 2. Comply with seismic design requirements where applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine supporting structure and conditions under which system will be installed. B. Correct conditions detrimental to proper installation. C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. General: 1. Layout and install metal framing accurate to dimensions indicated in drawings. 2. Installation Standard: ASTM C754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. a. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Comply with additional requirements in ASTM C840 relative to framing installation. 3. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. 4. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 5. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load -bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 6. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. 7. Extend framing full height to structural supports. Exception: Where partitions are indicated to terminate at, or just above, suspended ceilings. a. Continue framing around ducts and similar items which penetrate partitions. 8. Utilize slip -type head track assemblies where framing extends to overhead structural supports. a. Configure to resist lateral loads while accommodating deflection of overhead building superstructure without inducing axial loading on partition framing. B. Size floor tracks and head track assemblies to match studs. 1. Align floor track and deflection track accurately. 2. Secure floor track and deflection track to structure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and referenced regulatory requirements. 3. Secure at corners and at ends. C. Position studs vertically engaging floor track and head -of -wall deflection track. 1. Space studs maximum 405mm 16 IN on center. a. Provide additional studs at corners, partition intersections and terminations of partitions, and at each side of control joints. b. Positively anchor studs to floor tracks with self -tapping pan head screws, or stud clinching tool on both flanges of each stud. c. Positively anchor studs to deflection track with wafer -head screws on both flanges of each stud. D. Fire rated partitions: Anchor as required by fire resistance design, and Firestopping design. E. Align stud knockouts to facilitate running of wires and conduit. F. Where partitions abut vertical structural elements, provide perimeter relief. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-6 1. Gypsum Association GA-600, Figure 8. G. Head -of -Wall: 1. Provide slotted top track for all walls that go to structure. 2. Secure top track to superstructure with 3.7mm x 25mm 0.145 IN x I IN powder actuated fasteners located 400mm 16 IN on center (max). a. Pre -fit forming material that may be required as a part of a fire -resistive joint system. 3. Where partitions attach to structural elements that are scheduled to receive Spray -applied Fire Resistive Materials (SFRM): a. Install Z-bar to underside of steel beams and steel deck before sprayed fireproofing is applied. b. Locate Z-bars perpendicular to line of partition, spaced maximum 400mm 16 IN on center. c. Attach each Z-bar with two 3.7mm x 25mm 0.145 IN x 1 IN powder -actuated fasteners located minimum 25mm 1 IN from ends of Z-bar. d. After fireproofing, secure top track to Z-bars with 4 min x 17 mm No. 8 x 5/8 IN waferhead framing screws spaced maximum 400mm 16 IN on center. 4. Where fire -rated partitions are offset and will not clear fireproofed steel beam, extend Z-bar outrigger horizontally from bottom of beam out to minimum 50mm 2 IN beyond width of head -of -wall. a. Attach 19mm 3/4 IN expanded metal lath continuous, width of top of Z-bar outriggers prior to fireproofing steel beam to accommodate sprayed fireproofing. 5. Cut vertical studs 16mm 5/8 IN short to create a deflection gap when installed into top track. a. Secure vertical studs to top track with No. 8 x 9/16 IN waferhead framing screw at each stud flange, screwing through track slots for positive stud connection. 6. Secure Gypsum Wallboard to vertical studs; do not secure Gypsum Wallboard to top track directly. 7. Prepare wall for installation of seals, firestopping, or both: a. Fire -rated Walls: Prepare for fire -resistive joint assemblies specified in Section 07 84 00. b. Non -fire rated partitions including Smoke Partitions: Prepare for Acoustical Sealant specified in Section 09 29 00. H. Furring Channels: 1. Install furring channel systems, directly attached to parent walls, as indicated. 2. Install channels at maximum 405mm 16 IN OC. 3. Provide additional framing at openings, cutouts, corners, and control joints. 4. Fasten to masonry walls with cut nails. 5. Fasten to concrete with power driven fasteners. 6. Space fasteners not more than 610mm 24 IN OC, staggered on opposite flanges of hat channels. 3.3 FRAMING AT OPENINGS A. General: 1. Control Joints (CJ): Provide for control joints at all openings. a. Install additional stud, maximum 13mm 1/2 IN from jamb studs. b. Do not fasten extra stud to track or jamb stud. c. Refer to specification Section 09 29 00 for control joint locations. 2. Prefabricated headers, jambs, and sill framing systems option: a. Proprietary opening framing systems may be considered as an alternative to conventionally fabricated framing. b. Pre -approved Products: 1) "HDS Framing System" by C1arkDietrich. 2) "Quick Frame Rough Opening System" by Marino/ Ware. c. Submit proposed alternative systems to Architect for review. B. Door Openings: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-7 1. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 2. Unless indicated otherwise, extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and secure laterally to overhead structure. 3. Jamb Studs: a. Install two studs, toe -to -toe, at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Minimum thickness of jamb studs: 0.75mm 30 mil at all openings. c. Securely attach jamb studs to door frames. 4. Headers: a. Openings less than 2300mm 4 FT wide: 1) Cut -to -length section of floor runner above and below wall openings. 2) Split flanges and bend webs at ends. 3) Overlap and screw attach jamb studs to frames. b. Openings over 2300mm 4 FT wide: 1) Cut -to -length, horizontal box beam studs above and below wall openings. 2) Design for actual span and loading. c. Incorporate miscellaneous steel members, specified in Section 05 50 10, and wood blocking, specified in Section 06 10 53, where indicated. 5. Control Joints at head of Jambs: a. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 13mm 1/2 IN clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. C. Other Framed Openings: 1. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3. Headers and Sills: a. Openings less than 2300mm 4 FT wide: 1) Cut -to -length section of floor runner above and below wall openings. 2) Split flanges and bend webs at ends. 3) Overlap and screw attach jamb studs to frames. b. Openings over 2300mm 4 FT wide: 1) Cut -to -length, horizontal box beam studs above and below wall openings. 2) Design for actual span and loading. c. Incorporate Miscellaneous Steel members, specified in Section 05 50 10, and wood blocking, specified in Section 06 10 53, where indicated. 4. Cripple Studs: a. Install cut -to -length intermediate vertical studs above and below openings. b. Spacing: As indicated for typical full-length studs. 3.4 WALL BACKING AND BLOCKING A. Metal Wall Backing: Provide in -wall metal wall backing reinforcement where following items are required to be wall -mounted to interior walls and interior of exterior walls: 1. Crash rails, chair rails, wall bumpers, and similar wall protection devices. 2. Contractor or Owner -furnished equipment indicated to be wall -mounted. 3. Toilet accessories that do not include proprietary backing devices. 4. Toilet Partitions and Lockers. 5. Markerboards, Tackboards, and Chalkboards. 6. Other wall -mounted items where backing is indicated by details or specification. B. Wood Wall Blocking: Specified in Section 06 10 53. C. Coordinate mounting height, location, and coverage with item to be supported. D. Determine material width according to item to be supported. E. Provide in -wall metal wall backing material to interior metal stud walls specified herein and "Exterior" stud walls specified in Section 09 2127. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 0922 16 - 8 F. Attachment: Minimum 2 - #10 sheet metal screws at each stud. 3.5 INSTALLATION - CEILING A. Install in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide required items to support and trim out neatly, flush or recessed mechanical and electrical items. C. Frame openings in ceiling support system to accommodate access panels and similar openings and penetrations. 1. Completely frame openings with closed channel side of stud facing opening for support of recessed mechanical and electrical items. 3.6 INSTALLING CEILING SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast -in -place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled -in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Grid Suspension Systems: 1. Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. 2. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. 3. Install suspension systems that are level to within 3mm in 3.6 in 1/8 IN in 12 FT measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-9 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM WALLBOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Gypsum Wallboard, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents. B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide products manufactured within United States from materials free of sulfur, formaldehyde or other deleterious chemicals. Natural gypsum ore shall be mined in North America. Synthetic gypsum shall be pure calcium sulfate from domestic sources. B. ASTM Standards: 1. ASTM C475: Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard. 2. ASTM C557: Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. 3. ASTM C840: Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 4. ASTM C841: Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring. 5. ASTM C1002: Steel Drill Screws for Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases. 6. ASTM C1047: Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. 7. ASTM C1396: Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. 8. ASTM C 1629: Abuse -Resistant Non -decorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber - Reinforced Cement Panels. 9. ASTM D3273: Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 10. ASTM E84: Surface -Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 11. ASTM E90: Sound Transmission Testing. 12. ASTM E119: Fire Tests of Building Construction. 13. GA-216 Recommended Specifications. 14. GA-238 Guidelines for Prevention of Mold Growth on Gypsum Board. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Provide copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of material and accessory required. 2. Where fire resistance classification is indicated, submit copies of nationally recognized testing laboratory listings of products proposed for use. 3. Include data required to show specification compliance. B. Project Information: 1. Manufacturer exposure limitations for wallboard installation prior to building being weather -tight: 2. Manufacturer name of listed products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Gypsum Wallboard and Accessories: 1. Base: a. National Gypsum Company (NGC). 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 1 Optional: a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed. c. Georgia Pacific (GP). d. Temple-Inland. e. United States Gypsum (USG). B. Specialty Drywall Trim: 1. Base: a. Pittcon Industries. 2. Optional: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. C. FoamTape: 1. Base: a. Norton Performance Plastics. D. Sound Attenuation Batts (SAB): 1. Base: a. Owens Corning. 2. Optional: a. Johns Manville. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Guardian. d. Certainteed. e. Thermafiber. E. Acoustical Sealants: 1. Base: a. USG. 2. Optional: a. Pecora. b. Grabber. F. Pressure -sensitive Fire Tape: 1. Base: a. E-Z Taping System. G. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 00 26 00. 2.2 GYPSUM WALLBOARD (GWB) SCHEDULE A. General: 1. Utilize the following, in conjunction with Wall Types, Details, and Finish Schedule to determine types of wallboard appropriate to each condition. 2. Furnish in maximum available lengths, consistent with installation requirements. a. Long Edge: Tapered. b. Short Ends: Square. 3. Upgrade the listed types to fire -rated equivalent products when used in fire -rated assemblies. 4. Provide listed GWB products to mold -resistant types, where wallboard is installed in Electrical, Communication Rooms, Mechanical shafts, Stair Shafts and similar locations where wallboard is installed prior to building being weather -tight. B. Interior face of Exterior Walls: 1. Gypsum Panels — Mold and moisture -resistant (MR GWB): a. Gypsum panels, with facer. b. Thickness: 16mm 5/8 IN. c. Mold -resistance score: 10 per ASTM D3273. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 2 d. Base Product: 1) DensArmor PLUS Interior Guard and DensArmor PLUS Interior Guard Fireguard by Georgia Pacific. e. Optional Products: 1) GreenGlass by Temple-Inland. 2) Mold Tough and Mold Tough Firecode by USG. 3) ProRoc Moisture & Mold Resistant Gypsum and ProRoc Moisture & Mold Resistant Gypsum Type X by CertainTeed. 4) XP Wallboard and Fire -Shield XP Wallboard by National Gypsum. £ Apply continuously to interior face of exterior stud walls prior to framing interior partitions and ceilings. g. Where mold -resistant wallboard is scheduled in Fire Rated Walls, provide approved fire -resistive products with comparable moisture -resistance. h. Utilize approved fire -resistive products where mold -resistant wallboard is scheduled in Fire Rated Walls. C. Interior Partitions and Ceilings: 1. Gypsum Panels - Standard: a. Applications: Non -wet, non -fire rated interior walls and ceilings. b. Thickness: 16mm 5/8 IN. c. Base Product: ToughRock Gypsum Wallboard by Georgia Pacific. 2. Tile Backer Board (TBB): a. Applications: 1) Provide TBB at walls of showers, tub rooms, toilet rooms, decontamination rooms, and similar walls where tile is scheduled. 2) Provide TBB at non -tile walls that will be continuously wet. b. Description: Moisture -resistant treated gypsum core, glass mats (both sides), and vinyl, water barrier coating on finished side. 1) Conventional cement -board and "green -board" products are not acceptable. c. Thickness: 13mm 1/2 IN. d. Mold -resistance score: 10 per ASTM D3273. e. Base Product: DensShield Tile Backer by Georgia Pacific. 1) Include Level 5 finish at non -tiled portions. £ Optional Products: 1) Fiberock Interior Panel, Aqua -Tough by USG. 2) G1asRoc Tile Backer by Certainteed. g. TBB wallboard scheduled in Fire Rated Walls: 1) Approved fire -resistive products with comparable moisture -resistance. 2) Base Product: DensShield Fireguard Tile Backer by Georgia Pacific. 3. Mold and moisture resistant: a. Tested in accordance with ASTM E136. b. Fiberglass coated glass mats, both faces. c. Base Product: DensGlass Ultra Shaftliner by Georgia Pacific. d. Optional Products: 1) Sheetrock Glass -Mat Liner Panels by USG. 2) G1asRoc Shaftliner by Certainteed. 3) GreenGlass Liner Panel by Temple-Inland. D. Additional items, related to radiation shielding enclosures, but specified elsewhere: 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General Interior Trim: 1. General: a. Comply with ASTM C 1047. b. Material for general, interior uses: Galvanized or aluminum coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, or paper faced galvanized steel sheet c. Material for wet and exterior areas: Zinc. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 3 Shapes: a. Corner bead. b. LC -Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Control joint. f. Curved -Edge Corner bead: With notched or flexible flanges. 1;. Other items as indicated. B. Specialty Trim: 1. General: a. Profiles and dimensions indicated. b. Material: 6063-T5 Aluminum. c. Finish: Factory primed for field finishing. d. Flanges to be embedded: Corrosion -resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials indicated. 2. Base Products: a. Wall Reveals: SRW Series by Pittcon. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: 1. Comply with ASTM C475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Tile -backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compounds for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: 1. Ensure products are compatible with other compounds applied previously or on successive coats. Required Compound Types ose P"I, 'Ongpt Re uire , Pre -filling For filling open joints and voids Setting -type, Taping Compound Embedding and For embedding tapes & first coat over joints, Setting -type, Taping Compound First Coat fasteners, and trim flanges Setting -type, Sandable Topping Compound Fill Coat For second coat OR Drying -type, All purpose Compound. Finish Coat For third coat Drying -type, All purpose Compound. Setting -type, Sand -able Topping Compound OR For final coat of Level 5 finish, where a Drying -type, All purpose Compound. Skim Coat Level 5 finish is specified OR High -build, spray applied coating product designed to produce Level 5 finish without traditional, trowel applied skim coat. Notes: 1. Above table applies to conventional, paper faced, interior wallboard. For paperless wallboard panels: Use compounds recommended by panel manufacturer. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. Use compounds recommended by panel manufacturer. 3. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting -type taping compound and setting type, sandable topping compound. 4. Glass Mat, Water Resistant Backing Panel: Use compounds recommended by panel manufacturer. 5. Provide dust control products in occupied areas or adjacent to occupied areas. Base Product Sheetrock Brand Dust Control Joint Compound by USG. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 4 D. Laminating Adhesive: 1. Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS A. General: 1. Provide where indicated. 2. Minimum Nominal Thickness: As required to achieve STC indicated for wall systems. 3. Density: As required to achieve STC indicated for wall systems. B. Sound Attenuation Batts (SAB): 1. Material: Glass or Mineral Fiber. 2. Commercial sound blanket, ASTM C665, Type I, un-faced, produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 3. Surface burning characteristics per ASTM E84: a. Minimum Flame Spread: 10. b. Maximum Smoke developed: 10. 4. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Select SAB materials and thicknesses that that are approved for use in assemblies listed. 5. Acoustically rated Assemblies: Select SAB materials and thicknesses that that are approved for use in assemblies listed. 6. Base Product: Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation by Owens-Corning; 7. Optional: Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets by Thermafiber. 8. Base Product: "Sound -SHIELD Free" by Johns Manville. C. Acoustical Sealants: 1. Flexible, non -hardening. 2. UL listed for use in fire rated assemblies where required. 3. Coordinate with Section 07 84 00 Firestopping. 4. Spray -applied, expanding foam sealants will not be allowed. 5. Base Product: Acoustical Sealant by USG. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Screws: 1. ASTM C1002, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Self -tapping, bugle head, length to penetrate framing member minimum 16mm 5/8 IN. 3. Type S for gypsum wallboard to metal; Type G for gypsum wallboard to gypsum wallboard. 4. Screws used to secure wallboard panels to Metal Studs: Comply with ASTM C954. 5. Screws used with backer boards: As recommended by panel manufacturer. B. Sealants: 1. Other than acoustical sealant below, see Section 07 92 16. C. Foam tape: 1. PVC 13 x 6mm 1/2 x 1/4 IN: With pressure sensitive adhesive; Norseal. 2. EPDM 13 x 6mm 1/2 x 1/4 IN: With pressure sensitive adhesive; Cellular rubber by Gasket Dynamics. D. Backing for control joints: 1. Fire rated board. E. Sealer for moisture -resistant gypsum wallboard: 1. Manufacturer's standard compound. 2. Use at joints, cut edges and screw penetrations. 2.7 OTHER MATERIALS A. Framing and suspension systems for Gypsum Board Ceilings: Specified in Section 09 22 16. A. Firestopping: Specified in Section 07 84 00. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 092900-5 B. Thermal Insulation: Specified in Section 07 2100 and other Division 07 sections. C. Interior Expansion Joint Covers: Specified in Section 07 95 13. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Examine supporting structure and conditions prior to wallboard installation. B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. C. Start of installation assumes responsibility for shielding integrity of system. D. Verify areas scheduled to receive radiation shielding are suitable for installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION — GENERAL A. General Requirements: 1. Comply with ASTM C840. 2. Install products per manufacturer's specific installation instructions. 3. Remove loose materials and vacuum cavity of gypsum dust prior to enclosing stud space. 4. Install wallboard vertically with edges over metal stud framing members and similar framing support members. 5. Secure to each support or framing member with screws. 6. Secure wallboard to vertical studs; do not secure to top track directly. 7. Bring boards into contact but do not force into place. 8. Fit neatly and carefully. 9. Stagger edge joints on opposite side of partition so they occur on different framing members. 10. Proceed with attachment from board center toward ends and edges. 11. Make cuts neatly. 12. Install with 6mm 1/4 IN gap between gypsum board and floor. 13. Seal ends, cutouts and screw penetrations of moisture resistant boards with sealer. 14. Install wallboard over metal framing studs and similar framing support members at interior face of exterior walls full height from floor to structure above. B. Wallboard installation prior to building being weather -tight: 1. This is intended to allow early installation of wallboard in critical path areas such as: Electrical, Communication Rooms, Mechanical shafts, Stair Shafts and similar locations. a. Notify Architect and Owner where such early installation is proposed. 2. Where wallboard is installed prior to building being weathertight: Upgrade the scheduled GWB products to their mold -resistant counterparts. a. Products proposed are subject to Architect approval. 3. Exposure time shall be limited by manufacturer requirements. C. Sound Insulation: 1. Install sound insulation in walls from floor to structure above, where sound rated walls are indicated. 2. Install in thicknesses and densities necessary to achieve sound rating. 3. Pack spaces around electric boxes and other penetrations to maintain full sound rating. a. Utilize Acoustical Sealants to fill small voids that remain D. Acoustical Sealant: 1. General: a. Apply acoustical sealant at joints, voids, and penetrations through wallboard to maximize sound control. 1) Seal wallboard edges to adjacent construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 092900-6 2) Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. 3) Comply with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound -flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. b. Refer to Section 07 84 00 for firestopping of through -wall penetrations. 1) Provide firestop sealant where required in fire -rated assemblies. 2. Base of walls: a. Apply acoustical sealant to bottom edge of gypsum wallboard at floor. 3. Head of walls: a. Apply acoustical sealant to top edge of gypsum wallboard at building structure. E. Curved Partitions: 1. Space studs or furring to prevent flat areas between framing at curved surfaces. F. Wall Reveals: 1. Install reveal wall channels and/or aluminum framing as recommended by manufacturer. G. Changes in Material: 1. Install L-shaped corner bead where partition or ceiling abuts structural element or dissimilar wall or ceiling. H. Installation Wallboard around Metal Door and Window Frames: 1. Contract Documents call for hollow metal frames to be rigorously aligned at time of their original installation. a. Notify frame installer of specific frames that are noticeably out of alignment before wallboard work commences. b. Take care not to unduly disturb their original alignment when installing adjacent wall board. c. Notify frame installer of specific frames that become misaligned during the installation of wallboard. 2. Upon completion of wallboard work, notify frame installer to return to site and check openings to for proper alignment. 3. Work with frame installer to correct misalignment issues before proceeding. 3.3 INSTALLATION - SINGLE LAYER SYSTEM A. Set screws between 10mm to 13mm 3/8 to 1/2 IN from edges. 1. Space maximum 205mm 8 IN OC at edges and, 305mm 12 IN OC in field of board. 2. Where wallboard butts at wall/ceiling juncture, hold screws back 150mm 6 IN from edges. 3. Use closer screw spacing if required by UL. B. Drive screws so head rests in slight dimple without cutting face paper or fracturing core. 3.4 INSTALLATION - TWO LAYER SYSTEM A. Space screws in base layer maximum 205mm 8 IN OC at edges, and 305mm 12 IN OC in field of board. B. Screw apply finish layer. C. Stagger joints not less than one support from first layer. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: 1. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: 1. Install control joints according to ASTM C840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 092900-7 C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners where indicated. 3. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 5. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges where indicated. 6. Curved -Edge Comerbead: Use at curved openings. D. Specialty Trim: Install in locations indicated. 3.6 INSTALLATION - SHAFTWALL A. Install shaft walls in compliance with UL and Gypsum Association description. B. Provide shaft wall systems permitting entire erection procedure from outside shaft. C. Provide special metal runner angles and channels, and studs or splines spaced per manufacturers requirements. D. Provide number, type and thickness of wallboard layers including air spaces and insulation to achieve indicated ratings for fire resistance and sound reduction. E. Comply with requirements for thickness of metal and thickness of wall, for heights of wall indicated. F. Use maximum practical board lengths. G. Bring boards into contact but do not force into place. H. Fit neatly and carefully. I. Seal perimeter and openings with firestopping. 3.7 INSTALLATION — CEILING A. Install in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels' not less than one framing member. C. Access Panels and Doors: Locate where required by Section 20 05 00 and Section 26 00 10, or where indicated. See Section 08 31 16 for product description. 3.8 CONTROL JOINTS A. General: 1. Install Control Joints in location indicated and as described in this article. 2. Comply with additional requirements of ASTM C840, GA-216, and GA-234. 3. Install suitable backing material to maintain required rating where Control Joints occur in fire or sound rated assemblies. B. Partitions: 1. Provide vertical Control Joints on both wall faces which align with door frames, window frames, and similar opening as follows: a. Single Doors and Cased Opening: 1) Locate CJ's at both jambs, from head of opening to top of partition. b. Pair doors: 1) Locate CJ's at both jambs, from head of opening to top of partition. 2) Exception: Control Joints are not required where partition forms a cross -corridor condition. c. Doors with adjacent sidelights: 1) Locate CJ's at both jambs from head of opening to top of partition, and, from sill to floor at sidelight jambs. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 092900-8 d. Sliding Doors: 1) Locate CJ's at both jambs, from head of opening to top of partition. e. Punched Windows (less than 9.2 M 30 FT in width): 1) Both jambs from head of opening to top of partition, and from sill edge to floor. £ Ribbon Windows (more than 9.2 M 30 FT in width): 1) Both jambs from head of opening to top of partition, and from sill edge to floor. 2) Locate additional intermediate CJ's so maximum distance between CJ's does not exceed 9.2 M 30 FT apart. Provide additional vertical Control Joints, spaced no more than 9.2 M 30 FT apart from each other, from opening -related CJ's, or from corners. Provide horizontal Control Joints at partitions which are more than one story in height: a. Locate horizontal Control Joints where partitions bypass each intermediate floor. b. Align control joint with floor line, unless otherwise indicated. C. Ceilings: 1. Use Control Joints to subdivide ceilings/soffits as indicated, and within the following limits: a. Ceilings with perimeter relief: 1) Subdivide so that no area exceeds 235 Mz 2500 FTz, and no area has a length which exceeds 15.2 M 50 FT. a) Exception where Ceiling occurs at Exterior: Subdivide so that no area exceeds 85 Mz 900 FTz, and no area has a length which exceeds 9.2 M 30 FT. b. Ceilings without perimeter relief: 1) Subdivide so that no area exceeds 85 Mz 900 FT, and no area has a length which exceeds 9.2 M 30 FT. c. Locate Control Joints at transitions between areas of different shapes. D. Soffits: 1. Use Control Joints to subdivide ceilings/soffits as indicated, and within the following limits: a. Exterior Subdivide so that no area exceeds 85 Mz 900 FTz, and no area has a length which exceeds 9.2 M 30 FT. b. Locate Control Joints at transitions between areas of different shapes. c. Continue lines of soffit Control Joints vertically to top of fascia. 3.9 WALLBOARD FINISHING A. General: 1. Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. 2. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Pre -fill open joints and voids, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Where wallboard abuts dissimilar surfaces: Securely attach continuous trim beads in accordance with manufacturer's directions. E. Where bead abuts exterior metal window frames or other metal components, separate from other material by use of foam tape. F. Apply Joint Compound and Tape in accordance with fire -rated design. 1. Apply joint treatment compound in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 2. Fill joints, screw heads, and internal corners with compound. 3. Extend joint system vertically from floor to extent described as follows: a. Fire Walls, Barriers, and Partitions: Extend to full height of wall. b. Smoke Barriers and Partitions: Extend to full height of wall. c. Interior face of exterior wall (non -rated): Extend to full height of wall. d. Other interior partitions (non -rated): Extend to 150mm 6 IN above ceiling. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 092900-9 4. Refer to Drawings for indication of partition heights. G. Level 4 Finish: 1. Comply with ASTM C840. 2. After drying, sand or otherwise smooth final coat of compound as needed to eliminate high spots or excess compound to leave smooth, even, and level surface. 3. Draw down final coat of compound to a smooth even plane. 4. Locations: a. Wallboard scheduled to be finished with Gloss Level 1 (flat), Level 2 (velvet), or Level 3 (eggshell) paint, glazed coating, textured coating, or wall covering. b. Where above listed surfaces are to be finished with textured decorative treatments, wall covering, paneling, or wall guard. c. All remaining locations, unless noted otherwise. H. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. I. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Repairs: 1. After painter has applied primer to wallboard surfaces, repair and refinish defective areas. 2. If wallboard is damaged, or surfaces are roughened, repair or replace. 3.10 PARTITION IDENTIFICATION A. Identify partitions indicated on Drawings as having a required fire or smoke rating. 1. Permanently identify with signs or stenciling with contrasting, 3 inch high letters in a manner acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. 2. Suggested text for fire and smoke barriers: FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER — PROTECT ALL OPENINGS. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.12 PROTECTION A. Protect installed wallboard from water damage during construction. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. D. Prior to finishing, walls shall be inspected for visible mold growth. 1. Replace affected portions. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 10 SECTION 09 65 14 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 — GENERAL INFORMATION 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section deals with resilient flooring found in the drawings and schedules of the contract that meet the requirements of this section. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 3 — Cement: not covered in this section. B. Section 6 — Wood and plastic: not covered in this section. C. Section 7 — Thermal and humidity protection: not covered in this section. D. Section 9 — Other sections containing information related to floor finishes: not covered in this section. 1.03 REFERENCES (INDUSTRY STANDARDS) A. ASTM F 710: Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. B. ASTM E 648: Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. C. ASTM E 662: Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. D. ASTM F 1869: Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. E. ASTM F 2170: Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in Situ Probes. 1.04 ITEMS TO DELIVER A. Provide the product's Technical Specifications data sheet as well as all Installation and Maintenance Instructions. B. When required, supply floor drawings and installation plans. C. Supply a set of samples measuring at least 7.5 cm (3 in.) by 15 cm (6 in.) of the complete range of colors and finishes chosen for the project. D. When required, provide American Biltrite's attestation, certified by an independent laboratory, confining that the flooring complies with the fire standards of the following tests: 1. ASTM E 648; Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts/cm' or more; 2. ASTM E 662; Smoke Density: 450 or less. E. Provide American Biltrite's Warranty Certificate. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Have American Biltrite flooring installed by a qualified installer of this type of flooring. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 RESILIENT FLOORING Section 096514 - 1 B. In accordance with the technical instructions in the Installation Instructions, use all the accessories recommended by American Biltrite when installing its flooring. C. Follow the instructions specified in the most recent version of American Biltrite's Installation Instructions. 1.06 DELIVERY, HANDLING, STORAGE A. Deliver the flooring to the installation site in American Biltrite's original packaging. Indicate the project name and handling instructions on the outside of the boxes. B. Advise the carrier of any damaged material and indicate it on the packing slip. C. Store the flooring inside, sheltered from extreme hot or cold temperatures. Place the material on a smooth level floor or where there is uniform solid support in a clean, dry well -ventilated area. Unstack the palettes. The long-term storage temperature must be maintained between 18°C (65°F) and 24°C (75°F). Protect adhesive and flooring material from freezing, extreme heat and direct sun exposure. D. Acclimatize the subfloor, all flooring material and adhesive for 48 hours before, during and after the installation by maintaining the room temperature between 18°C (65°F) and 24°C (75°F). Palettes must be unstacked 24 hours prior to their use. E. Afterwards, maintain the room temperature between 18°C (65°F) and 29°C (85°F). Protect the material from direct sources of heat such as air vents and other types of heaters. F. Do not install on cement slabs unless they are thoroughly cleaned, level, structurally sound and free from paint, varnish, adhesive, oil, grease, solvent, sealer, curing compounds or other foreign substances that may adversely affect adhesion. G. Install the flooring after all other finishing work, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. American Biltrite 200 Bank Street Sherbrooke, QC, Canada, J 1 H 4K3 Telephone: 819-829-3 300 Toll free: 1-800-437-8743 Internet: www.american-biltrite.com 2.02 RESILIENT FLOORING DESCRIPTION A. Characteristics: 1. Texas Granite vinyl flooring. 2. Nominal thickness: 3.17 mm (1/8 in.). 3. Texas Granite is a homogenous product; the entire thickness is the wear layer. 4. Sizes: 305 mm x 305 mm (12 in. x 12 in.), 610 mm x 610 mm (24 in. x 24 in.) or 915 min x 915 mm (36 in. x 36 in.) tiles. 5. Complies with ASTM F 1700, Class I, type A requirements. 6. Refer to the product's Technical Specifications data sheet for detailed specifications. 7. Choose from any of American Biltrite's complete line of colors (indicate the item number). 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 RESILIENT FLOORING Section 096514 - 2 8. Texas Granite has F1oorScore certification. 9. This product was manufactured in a factory that has ISO 9001 certification and ISO 14001. 2.03 ADHESIVES A. Use either American Biltrite's AD-610 or AD-535 adhesive. Both adhesives cover 18.6 sq. m/3.8 litres (200 sq. ft./gallon), when applied with the recommended notched trowel. 2.04 OTHER MATERIAL A. Subfloor repairs: use a good -quality Portland cement -based compound modified with latex that has a minimal resistance to compression of 246 kg/cm2 (3 500 lbs/sq. in.) to fill, smooth or level subfloor imperfections. B. Self -levelling underlayment: use a Portland cement -based self -levelling underlayment modified with a polymer that has a minimal resistance to compression of 246 kg/cm2 (3,500 lbs/sq. in.). PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 SITE INSPECTION A. Examine the subfloor before installation to ensure that the surface is clean, dry, smooth, structurally sound and free from foreign substances that may adversely affect adhesion or cause discoloration. Furthermore, ensure that the subfloor is free of paint, varnish, adhesive, oil, grease, solvent and other foreign substances, including treatment compounds, sealers and curing compounds that may adversely affect adhesion or alter the appearance or durability of the vinyl flooring. B. Verify the surface to ensure there is no powder, scaling or mold. If there is, remove it with a mechanical sander and level with a good -quality cement -based Portland primer. C. Never remove residual or other adhesive with chemical adhesive removal products; their use will automatically void the manufacturer's guarantee. D. Report and rectify all unsatisfactory conditions. Do not start flooring installation until all rectifications have been completed. 3.02 SUBFLOOR PREPARATION A. Level all rough surfaces and fill cracks and marks with a Portland cement -based patching compound modified with latex. B. Mechanically remove all surface contaminants such as paint, oil, grease, varnish, adhesive as well as various other products such as treatment compounds. C. Measure the humidity and pH levels in the cement in compliance with the following standards before installation: 1. ASTM F 1869, Anhydrous Calcium Chloride test for Moisture levels. The maximum allowable readings are: • 5 lbs/1,000 sq. ft./24 hours (2.26 kg/92.9 sq. m/24 hours) for the AD-610 and AD-535 adhesives; 2. ASTM F 2170, Relative Humidity (RH) test using in situ probes. The maximum allowable reading is 80% RH for AD-610 and 85% RH for AD-535. 3. ASTM F 710, pH levels (test procedure 5.3.1). The readings should be between 8 and 10; 4. The ASTM test frequency recommendation is 3 measures for the first 1,000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m) and one measure for each additional 1,000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m). 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 RESILIENT FLOORING Section 096514 - 3 D. Ensure Moisture, Relative Humidity and pH tests have all been conducted and measures meet manufacturer's recommendations. E. In case of doubt, test the adhesion on the cement subfloor or other surface that will be covered by the flooring. Do the test using the specified flooring and recommended adhesive. 3.03 RESILIENT FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Install the flooring according to the latest version of American Biltrite's Installation Instructions. Use the tools, adhesives, trowel types and procedures recommended in the instructions. Acclimatize the subfloor, all flooring material and adhesive for 48 hours before, during and after the installation by maintaining the room temperature between 18°C (65°F) and 24°C (75°F). Afterwards, maintain the temperature between 18°C (65°F) and 29°C (85°F). C. Flash Coving of tile (when required). Extend flooring up the wall using the boot or butterfly flash coving method, to the required height (normally 6 inches). Provide cove stick and suitable capping strip. All internal and external vertical seams shall be heat welded with coordinated color (ColorRite cold welding products can also be used. ColorRite can match the tile's base color upon request). For the wall section, regular vinyl cove base adhesive can be used or our PS-30 pressure -sensitive adhesive. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove all excess adhesive immediately after installation as recommended in American Biltrite's Installation Instructions. B. Before allowing traffic after installation, consult and follow the recommendations in American Biltrite's Installation Instructions. C. Following installation and cleanup, if the work of all other trades has not yet been completed, protect the flooring by laying sheets of brown non -staining Kraft paper and then a layer of plywood sheets; non -staining cardboard rolls can also be used in an efficient matter to protect the floor. D. Follow the instructions in American Biltrite's Maintenance Instructions when performing initial and regular maintenance procedures. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 RESILIENT FLOORING Section 096514 - 4 SECTION 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Interior Painting, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents. B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Definitions: 1. "Paint" and "painting" refer to applied coatings, except Section 09 96 59, Section 09 91 13, and Section 07 19 16. 2. Finished room or space: Room or space indicated to receive a finish on Drawing I-001 Interior Notes & Finish Legend. 3. Mechanical work: Work included in Mechanical Specification Divisions. 4. Electrical work: Work included in Electrical Specification Divisions. B. Work included: 1. Interior surfaces in finished rooms or spaces, unless indicated not to be painted or indicated to be painted under other sections. 2. Mechanical and electrical work: a. Interior mechanical and electrical equipment not completely factory finished. b. In finished rooms and spaces: Exposed ductwork, piping, insulated piping, conduit, busways, raceways, and associated accessories. c. Where duct surfaces are visible through grilles or diffusers, paint interior surfaces of ducts flat black. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's data for each paint type to be applied indicating conformance to specifications. B. Samples: 1. Three 216mm X 280mm 8 1/2 IN x 11 IN samples of each color and finish as noted in Drawing I-001 Interior Notes & Finish Legend. 2. Gloss samples. C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide paint as product of one manufacturer as far as possible. B. Paint, stain, and coating systems listed are Sherwin Williams unless noted otherwise. 1. Use comparable performance, environmental, and aesthetic requirements for paints by Optional manufacturers. 2. Manufacturers listed in Room Finish and Color Schedule are for color reference only. 3. Use MPI rating for comparison. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-1 C. Paints: 1. Base: a. Sherwin-Williams. b. As noted for individual types in Room Finish and Color Schedule 2. Optional: a. Benjamin Moore. b. Glidden Professional. c. PPG Architectural Finishes. d. Pratt & Lambert. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Paints and stains: As Scheduled in Part 3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. B. Examine surfaces carefully for defects which cannot be corrected and might prevent satisfactory results. C. Commencing of work in a specific area constitutes acceptance of surfaces, and responsibility for performance. 3.2 SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED A. Do not paint anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, glass, copper, bronze or similar materials. B. Do not paint moving parts of valves, operating units, motor and fan shafts, sending devices or mechanical and electrical parts such as valve and damper operators. C. Do not paint code labels, such as UL, FM that are mylar or flat (non -embossed) plates. 1. Embossed plates and labels stamped into frames will be painted, label and information on label to be readily visible and convenient for identification by authority having jurisdiction. D. Do not paint equipment identification or rating plates. E. Do not paint items having complete factory finish with exception of items noted in Section 09 60 00 Room Finish Schedule. 3.3 PREPARATION - GENERAL A. Assure that surfaces are clean and dry. B. Assure that surfaces are free of foreign materials which will affect adhesion or appearance. C. Remove mildew and neutralize surface. D. Eliminate efflorescence before painting. E. Before painting, test surfaces with moisture meter. F. Paint when moisture is within paint manufacturer's acceptable limits. 3.4 MATERIAL PREPARATION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 2 A. Mix and prepare materials per manufacturer's specifications. B. Stir, agitate or blend materials to produce a mixture of uniform density as required for application of materials. 3.5 PREPARATION - FERROUS METAL SURFACES AND HOLLOW METAL A. Follow requirements of SSPC SP1 and SP3. 1. Except where higher preparation levels are indicated. B. Wire brush, or grind as necessary to remove shoulders at edge of sound paint to prevent telegraphing. C. Touch up damaged shop coats. D. For surfaces with touched up shop coat, omit first coat. E. Hollow metal frame joints at intersections of rabbets, stops, and soffit joints: 1. Neatly fill corner seam with painter's caulk prior to painting. 3.6 PREPARATION - GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Repair minor irregularities left by finishers. B. Exercise care to avoid raising nap of paper. C. Apply prime coat. D. Notify gypsum wallboard finisher to repair and refmish areas which indicate defects after application of primer. E. Re -prime refinished areas. 3.7 APPLICATION - GENERAL A. Paint surfaces as specified in paragraphs "Schedule - Interior Paint Systems". B. Provide complete coverage to hide. 1. Paint systems are to cover. 2. When color or undercoats show through, apply additional coats at no additional cost until paint film is of uniform finish and color. C. Employ only skilled mechanics. D. Mix and apply as recommended by manufacturer. E. Do not apply succeeding coats until Architect has an opportunity to observe previous coat, or as directed otherwise by Architect. F. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, finished work, and similar items, or provide ample in place protection. G. Upon completion of painting, carefully replace removed items and/or remove protection. H. Apply materials under adequate illumination. I. Evenly spread and smoothly flow on for full, smooth cover. J. Assure that coats are dry before recoating. K. Touch up suction or hot spots in plaster, gypsum wallboard, concrete block, and concrete before painting. L. Touch up abraded areas of shop prime coats before subsequent coats are applied. M. Back prime wood trim with penetrating sealer. 3.8 APPLICATION - INTERIOR 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-3 A. Finish door edges same as faces of doors. B. Finish closets, semi -exposed surfaces behind grilles, radiation, etc., to match nearest adjoining surfaces. 3.9 PROTECTION AND CLEANUP A. Protect adjacent work against damage by painting and finishing work. B. Clean, repair or replace, and repaint damaged work as directed by Architect. C. Provide "WET PAINT" signs. D. Remove temporary protective wrappings, after completion of operations. E. Clean paint spattered surfaces. F. Use care not to damage finished surfaces. G. Remove surplus materials, scaffolding and debris. H. Leave areas broom clean. 3.10 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Gypsum wallboard and plaster surfaces, walls: 1. Low Odor (PNTLO), Gloss Level 3 Eggshell: a. Sherwin Williams: 1) Primer coat: Recommended by topcoat manufacturer for each substrate. 2) Intermediate coat: Harmony Interior Low Odor Latex Eg-Shel, B9. 3) Topcoat: Harmony Interior Low Odor Latex Eg-Shel, B9. b. PPG: 1) Primer coat: Recommended by topcoat manufacturer for each substrate. 2) Intermediate coat: Performance 0 VOC Latex; 9-300. 3) Topcoat: Performance 0 VOC Latex; 9-300. Scrub ToughCeramic CP.LiquaPearl Finish. Pearl -Protector. B. Gypsum wallboard and plaster surfaces, ceilings: 1. Low Odor (PNTLO), Gloss Level 1 Flat: a. Sherwin Williams: 1) Primer coat: Recommended by topcoat manufacturer for each substrate. 2) Intermediate coat: Harmony Interior Low Odor Latex Flat, B5. 3) Topcoat: Harmony Interior Low Odor Latex Flat, B5. b. PPG: 1) Primer coat: Recommended by topcoat manufacturer for each substrate. 2) Intermediate coat: Performance 0 VOC Latex; 9-45. 3) Topcoat: Performance 0 VOC Latex; 9-45. C. Metal doors and frames: 1. Waterborne acrylic, Gloss Level 5 Semi gloss: a. Sherwin Williams: 1) Primer coat: Recommended by topcoat manufacturer for each substrate. 2) Intermediate coat: Pro Classic Waterborne Acrylic Semi -Gloss, B31 Series. 3) Topcoat: Pro Classic Waterborne Acrylic Semi -Gloss, B31 Series. b. PPG: 1) Primer coat: Recommended by topcoat manufacturer for each substrate. 2) Intermediate coat: Acrylic metal finish S/G; 7-374. 3) Topcoat: Acrylic Metal Finish S/G; 7-374. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 4 SECTION 10 26 00 WALL PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Wall Protection Specialties, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents. B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single source responsibility: 1. Provide all components of the wall protection system manufactured by same company to ensure compatibility of color, texture and physical properties. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's standard literature indicating systems and products specified. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Showing locations, extent and installation details of handrails. 2. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction. C. Samples: 1. Material samples of full range of standard and optional range of for pre -selection of colors. 2. After color pre -selection furnish two 305mm 12 IN long/square samples of each item in selected color. a. Include end cap and mounting hardware. D. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Maintenance data. 2. Interior fmish fire performance data for each item and type specified: a. Manufacturer's printed information including: PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Wall Protection Specialties: 1. Base: a. Construction Specialties. B. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 00 26 00. 2.2 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. The following general material requirements apply to all vinyl/acrylic wall protection devices. 1. Cover Material: a. High -impact, rigid vinyl/acrylic, homogeneous color throughout entire thickness, free of embedded foreign material, and having a blemish free surface. 2. Retainer assemblies: a. Material: 6063-T6 aluminum ASTM B221. b. Finish: Anodized finish complying with AAMA 611, Class II 3. End Caps: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 WALL PROTECTION SPECIALTIES -CD 102600-1 a. Pre -fabricated, color -matched rigid vinyl/acrylic. b. Mechanically secured with concealed fasteners. 4. Gasket and Base : a. Prefabricated Acrovyn gasket. b. Aluminum sub -base. 5. Fasteners: a. Non -corrosive and compatible with aluminum retainers. b. Attachment hardware type: As appropriate for wall construction. 6. Impact Strength: Tested in accordance with the applicable provisions of ASTM F476. 7. Chemical and stain resistance: In accordance with ASTM D1308. a. Resistant to alkali, chemicals, cleaning agents and light. 8. Color match: Provide wall protection components that are color matched in accordance with the following: Delta E difference of no greater than 1.5 using the Hunter Lab Scale. 9. Fire performance characteristics: UL-listed and tested per in accordance with ASTM E84 (CAN/ULC S 102.2) for Class I (Class A) characteristics listed below. a. Flame Spread Index: less than 25. b. Smoke Developed: less than 450. 10. Include fasteners, mounting brackets, and hardware necessary for installations indicated. 2.3 2-PIECE VINYL CORNER GUARDS (CG) A. General: 1. Cover: 1.9mm 0.078 IN thick (nominal), high -impact, rigid vinyl and acrylic with matching end caps. 2. Retainers: Continuous extruded aluminum; fastened at 455mm 18 IN OC maximum. 3. Impact resistance ASTM D256: 0.3 kg/mm 18 LB/IN width. 4. Unit Length - Surface Mount: 1220mm 48 IN. 5. Furnish custom angled units where corners are less or greater than 90-degrees. 6. At ends of wing -walls, where terminal end of wall is less than 200mm 8 IN: Use compound units such as model "SSM-25" by Construction Specialties and match mounting type specified in surrounding area. B. Surface -mounted Vinyl Corner Guards (CG-: 1. Base Product: "SM-20" by Construction Specialties. 2. Size: 75mm x 75mm 3 IN x 3 IN. 3. Nose Radius: 6mm 1/4 IN. 4. Color, Pattern and Texture: a. As scheduled in Section 09 06 10. b. To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard or optional range. c. Architect reserves the right to select up to 3 color/texture/pattern combinations. d. Architect reserves the right to select up to color/pattern/texture combinations. 2.4 STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS (SSCG) A. General: 1. Material: Type 304 or 430 Stainless Steel w/satin finish. 2. Sheet thickness: 1.58mm 0.0625 IN (16 GA). 3. Unit Length: Full height, floor to ceiling. 4. Provide custom units where substrate corners are other than 90 DEG. B. Stainless Steel Corner Guards (SSGC): 1. Base Product: "CO-8" by Construction Specialties. 2. Size: 90mm x 90mm 3-1/2 IN x 3-1/2 IN. 3. Nose Radius: 3mm 1/8 IN. a. Exception: 19mm 3/4 IN Radius "CG-55" by Pawling where indicated over bull -nosed CMU blocks. 2.5 1-PIECE VINYL CORNER GUARDS (VCG) 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 WALL PROTECTION SPECIALTIES -CD 102600-2 2.6 WALL GUARD (WG) A. Wall Guard (WG) sheets and accessories: 1. Base Product: "Acrovyn Rigid Sheet Wallcovering" by Construction Specialties. 2. Material: High -impact, polyester resin. 3. Sheet Thickness: 1.Omm 0.040 IN. 4. Color, Pattern and Texture: a. As scheduled in Section 09 06 10. 5. Include prefabricated trim items: a. Inside and outside corners. b. Wainscot cap molding. c. Ceiling trim. d. Vertical joint mouldings where specified in Part 3. 6. Include appropriate primers, adhesives, and sealants. 2.7 HANDRAILS AND HANDRAIL BUMPERS (HR) A. General: 1. Description: a. Surface -mounted assemblies consisting of a continuous extruded aluminum retainer with snap -on vinyl and acrylic cover and integral shock absorbing cushion where indicated. b. Color -matched mounting brackets; spaced per manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Color -matched end caps and corners. 2. Cover: 1.9mm 0.078 IN thick nominal, high -impact, rigid vinyl and acrylic. 3. Retainers: Aluminum; 2mm 0.075 IN nominal wall thickness: B. Combination Handrail/Bumper (HR-_): 1. Description: Combination handrail/bumper guard configuration. a. Comprised of up to 3 separate colors, matching or contrasting; 1 at handrail, 1 at main body, 1 at reveal between handrail and body. 2. Shock absorbing rail design. 3. Total Height: 158mm 6-1/4 IN. 4. Projection from Wall: 76mm 3 IN. 5. Color, Pattern and Texture: a. As scheduled in Section 09 06 10. 6. Base Product: "HRB-IOC" by Construction Specialties. C. Miscellaneous items: 1. Include mounting brackets. 2. Include prefabricated inside, outside corners and returns. D. Mounting Height: As indicated. 2.8 CRASH RAILS (CR) A. General: 1. Description: a. Wall -mounted assemblies consisting of a continuous extruded aluminum retainer with snap -on vinyl and acrylic cover and integral shock absorbing cushion, where indicated. b. Color matched end caps and corners. 2. Cover: 1.9mm 0.078 IN thick nominal, high -impact, rigid vinyl and acrylic. 3. Retainers: Aluminum; 1.6mm 0.062 IN nominal wall thickness: 4. Impact Strength: Tested in accordance with the applicable provisions of ASTM F476. 5. Include fasteners, mounting brackets, and hardware. 6. Include prefabricated inside, outside corners, end caps and returns. B. Crashrails (CR-__): 1. Base Product: `BCR-_" bumper -mount by Construction Specialties. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 WALL PROTECTION SPECIALTIES -CD 102600-3 2. Total Height: _mm _ IN. 3. Projection from Wall: mm _ IN. 4. Color, Pattern and Texture: a. As scheduled in Section 09 06 10. 5. Mounting Height: As indicated. C. Crashrails (CR-_): 1. Base Product: "BCR-_" (bumper -mount) by Construction Specialties. 2. Total Height: _mm _ IN. 3. Projection from Wall: mm _ IN. 4. Color, Pattern and Texture: a. As scheduled in Section 09 06 10. 5. Mounting Height: As indicated. 2.9 BED LOCATOR (BL) A. General: 1. Description: a. Wall -mounted assemblies consisting of a snap -on vinyl and acrylic cover over continuous aluminum retainer secured to wall as indicated. 2. Cover: 1.9mm 0.078 IN thick (nominal), high -impact, rigid vinyl and acrylic. 3. Retainer assemblies: Aluminum; 1.86mm 0.072 IN nominal wall thickness: 4. End Caps: a. Pre -fabricated, color matched rigid vinyl and acrylic. b. Mechanically secured with concealed fasteners. 5. Fasteners: a. Non -corrosive and compatible with aluminum retainers. 6. Include fasteners, mounting brackets, and hardware. B. Bed Locator (BL): 1. Description: a. Wall mounted assemblies consisting of snap -on vinyl and acrylic cover over continuous aluminum retainer mounted on 13mm 1/2 IN thick bumper cushions spaced at 406mm 16 IN. O.C. 2. Base Product: `BL-100" by Construction Specialties. 3. Total Height: 108mm 4-1/2 IN. 4. Projection from Wall: 75mm 3 IN at bumper rail; 150mm 6 IN at end caps. 5. Unit Width: 940mm 37 IN. 6. Color, Pattern and Texture: a. As scheduled in Section 09 06 10. 7. Mounting Height: As indicated. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wall protection systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, detail, finish and member sizes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: 1. Verify walls are in proper condition to receive installation of protection items. 2. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. 3. Start of installation indicates acceptance of responsibility for performance. B. Verify temperature at the time of installation is between 18-24 DegC 65-75 DegF and will be maintained in this range throughout installation and for at least 48 hours after completion. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 WALL PROTECTION SPECIALTIES -CD 102600-4 C. Coordinate and direct installation of backing required for Wall Protection Specialties scheduled. D. Insure adequate Wall Backing has been installed. 1. Metal Wall Backing: Specified in Section 09 22 16. 2. Coordinate with other trades to insure backing is installed as walls are framed and prior to installation of gypsum wall board. E. Install surface mounted items after wall finishes have been completed. 3.2 INSTALLATION — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using only approved mounting hardware, and locate all components firmly in position, level and plumb. 2. Install with fasteners suitable for wall substrates encountered, and provide adequate anchoring for anticipated impact loads. B. Install items where indicated. C. Install end caps, returns, transition etc. 3.3 INSTALLATION - CORNER GUARDS A. General: 1. Comply with general requirements in Part 3.2. 2. Unless otherwise indicated: Align bottom edge of corner guards with top of Wall Base. B. 2-piece Vinyl Corner Guards (CG) — Surface -mounted type: 1. Install bottom at top of wall base. 2. Fasten retainers to corners. 3. Mount caps so they overlap retainers. 4. Snap covers into place. 5. Install endcaps. C. Full -height installations, floor to ceiling: 1. Install where indicated. 2. Install aluminum retainer. 3. Install guard to ceiling and terminate. D. Stainless Steel Corner Guards (SSCG): 1. Fasten directly to finished wall surfaces using adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. E. 1-piece Vinyl Corner Guards (VCG): 1. Surface apply to wall corners indicated using adhesive and in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 2. Align bottom edge of all 1-piece vinyl corner guards with top of Wall Base. 3.4 INSTALLATION — HANDRAILS AND CRASHRAILS A. General: 1. Comply with general requirements in Part 3.2. 2. Install Handrails and Crash Rails where indicated. B. Prepare substrates as required to receive Handrails and Crash Rails. C. Coordinate installation with locations of door frames, fire extinguishers, signage and similar items which might interrupt continuity of Handrails and Crash Rails. 1. Terminate Handrails and Crashrails 100 to 150mm 4 to 6 IN from vertical edges of such intersecting items. D. Make all transitions smooth. If profiles do not match, align visible surfaces and fill or remove material from hidden side to eliminate hazard and touch up finish. E. Detail horizontal runs with splices designed to accommodate thermal expansion/contraction. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 WALL PROTECTION SPECIALTIES -CD 102600-5 1. Stagger splices in aluminum retainer from splice in cover. F. Snap on covers over brackets and retainers. 3.5 INSTALLATION - WALL GUARD (WG) A. General: 1. Install Wall Guard where indicated. 2. Prepare substrates as required to receive Wall Guard. 3. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Comply with general requirements indicated in Part 3.2. B. Preparation — WG over New Gypsum Wallboard: 1. Ensure new drywall has been taped and sanded smooth. 2. Wipe clean to remove dust. C. Wainscot partial -height installations where indicated: I . Start bottom edge at floor line and install prior to installation of Wall Base. a. Install Wall Base over Wall Guard. 2. Install sheets horizontally to top of wainscot height and terminate with color coordinated trim cap. 3. Top of Wainscot Height: a. 1100 mm 44 IN AFF (unless otherwise indicated). 4. Vertical Joints buttjoints: a. Install wall guard with butted joints and matching colored sealant. b. Joint width: 1.5mm 1/16 IN. D. Full -height installations, where indicated: 1. Start bottom edge at floor line and install prior to installation of Wall Base. a. Install Wall Base over Wall Guard. 2. Install sheets vertically to ceiling and terminate w/ceiling trim. 3. Vertical Joints buttjoints: a. Install wall guard with butted joints and matching colored sealant. b. Joint width: 1.5mm 1/16 IN. E. Sealant: 1. Specified in Section 07 92 16. 2. Seal to adjacent finish materials including top edge, lateral edges and bottom edge. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust installed end caps as necessary to ensure tight seams. B. Remove and replace defective, misaligned or damaged units. C. Verify wall protection items are plumb and rigidly secured to substrate; make adjustments required. D. Remove protective films. E. Clean items adjacent areas, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 WALL PROTECTION SPECIALTIES -CD 102600-6 SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Fire Protection Specialties, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents. B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for portable fire extinguishers. B. Provide fire extinguishers, cabinets and accessories by single manufacturer. C. Fire -Rated Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM-E814 for fire - resistance rating of walls where they are installed. D. Non-magnetic Fire Extinguishers: UL listed and in compliance with ASTM F2503, and tested to 3 Tesla. E. Conform to Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) regarding mounting heights and maximum projection of cabinets into corridors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Maintenance data. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver cabinets in time to allow installation. B. Deliver and install filled and charged extinguishers just prior to building occupancy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Protection Specialties: 1. Base: a. JL Industries. 2. Optional: a. Amerex. b. Larsen's Manufacturing. B. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Base: a. JL Industries. 2. Optional: a. Amerex. b. Badger. 3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 00 26 00. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400-1 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER (FE) A. General: 1. Determine proper type of extinguisher required for room in which they are indicated. 2. Coordinate cabinet and extinguisher sizes. Bring discrepancies to attention of Architect. 3. Include wall brackets where extinguishers (FE) are indicated without cabinets. 4. Provide FIRE EXTINGUISHER decal for each extinguisher. B. Multi -Purpose Chemical Fire Extinguishers; typical FE, except where more specialized types are required: 1. Extinguishing Agent: Specially fluidized and siliconized chemical powder suitable for classes A, B, C fires. 2. Construction: a. Heavy-duty steel cylinder with metal valve and siphon tube with replaceable molded valve stem seal, visual pressure gauge, pull pin and upright squeeze grip. b. Corrosion and impact -resistant, powder coat fmish. c. Color: Red, in accordance with OSHA requirements. 3. Capacity: 4.5 kg 10 LBS. a. UL-rating:4A-80BC. b. Base Product Model: "Cosmic l0E" by JL Industries. 4. Locations; Provide one FE for each: a. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet (FEC). b. Fire Extinguisher (FE) location. 2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (FEC) A. General: 1. Provide FIRE EXTINGUISHER decal for each cabinet. Orient letters vertically. 2. Provide fixed door pull at each cabinet. 3. Keys to Door Locks: Three per lock. B. FEC-1— Semi -recessed, Steel, Fire Extinguisher Cabinet: 1. Description: Semi -recessed cold rolled steel tub with 38mm 1-1/2 IN square edge steel trim style and door. a. Fire -rated Cabinets: Provide fire -rated cabinets where FEC-1 is indicated to be installed in fire -rated walls. b. Maximum projection from wall surface: 38mm 1-1/2 IN. 2. Cabinet Construction: a. Non -fire rated Cabinets: Single -wall, 0.6mm 0.026 IN (26 GA) cold -rolled steel. b. Fire Rated Cabinets: Double -wall construction fabricated from 1.1mm 0.043 IN (18 GA) cold -rolled steel lined with minimum 16mm 5/8 IN thick, fire -barrier material. 3. Finish: Powder coated. a. Color: White. 4. Tub Size, inside clear (WxTxD): 270mm x 610mm x 150mm 10-1/2 x 24 x 6 IN. 5. Door Style: Full Glazing; Clear acrylic. 6. Lock: Cam lock with emergency break -away release mechanism. a. Base Product: "Saf-T-Lok" by JL Industries. 7. Base Product: "Ambassador" Series 1016 and "Ambassador FX" series by JL Industries. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Cabinets: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard box with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 2. Weld joints and grind smooth. 3. Provide factory -drilled mounting holes. 4. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 5. Install door locks at factory. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400-2 B. Cabinet Doors: 1. Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 2. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow -metal design, 13mm 1/2 IN thick. C. Cabinet Trim: 1. Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical fmishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify suitability of substrates to accept installation. B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. 2. Prepare recesses in walls for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturers instructions. 3. Securely fasten mounting brackets and cabinets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Install in accordance with NFPA-10 and manufacturer's instructions. 5. Provide required closures. B. Installation Heights: 1. General: a. Install extinguishers and cabinets within limitations of NFPA-10 and ADA. 2. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets (FEC): a. Locate with centerline of cabinet door handle not more than 1220mm 48 IN AFF. b. Exception: Extinguishers with at gross weight > 18 kg 40 LBS: Locate with centerline of cabinet door handle not higher than 610mm 24 IN AFF. 3. Fire Extinguishers (FE) not contained in a cabinet: a. Locate wall brackets such that top of extinguisher will not be higher 1220mm 48 IN AFF. b. Exception: Extinguishers with at gross weight greater than 18 kg 40 LBS: Install with extinguisher top not more than 915mm 36 IN above floor. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed items from damage. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400-3 A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films. B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. 1. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. Clean interior and exterior surfaces. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace cabinets that cannot be restored to factory -finished appearance. 1. Conform with procedures recommended by manufacturer. E. Replace items that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400-4 SECTION 11 70 00 HOSPITAL EQUIPMENT - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Hospital Equipment - General Requirements, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents. B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Dimensions, voltages, electrical power requirements, and utility connections are based on items specified. B. Contractor is responsible for costs for dimensional adjustments and for providing or arranging for additional electrical or utility services or equipment required as a result of using approved substitute products. C. If necessary to vary from arrangement indicated, make such variations only after approval of Architect and at no additional expense to Owner. D. Field verify all dimensions involving work. Measure recesses and openings and provide trim pieces, fillers, closures in sizes required. E. Equipment may be inspected by Owner at manufacturer's plant prior to shipment. F. Equipment found not in accordance with specifications and approved drawings may be rejected. G. Replace rejected equipment at no cost to Owner. H. Electric operated equipment, heated equipment, or both: 1. Comply with latest version of National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA), National Electric Code (NEC) and Underwriters' Laboratories, (UL). 1. Installer qualifications: Manufacturer, or approved in writing by manufacturer. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit drawings to indicate arrangement and location of equipment. 2. Complete equipment list including manufacturer, model number, power and utility requirements, room name and number where located. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturers standard literature describing specified equipment. 2. Installer qualifications. C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Warranty. 2. Owner Instructions. 3. Operation and Maintenance manuals. 4. Parts lists. 5. Contract closeout information not required for Owner furnished equipment. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Contractor Installed - Contractor furnished new equipment: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 HOSPITAL EQUIPMENT - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11 70 00 - 1 1. Contractor store equipment to prevent damage to materials or structure in dry, weathertight, ventilated spaces. 2. Deliver to site in manufacturer's original labeled containers. 3. Protect exposed surfaces and edges until work is completed. 4. Repair or remove and replace damaged or rejected work. B. Contractor Installed - Owner furnished new equipment: 1. Owner to receive and store new equipment. Contractor to obtain such equipment from Owner's storage location, deliver to site and install. 2. Deliver to site in manufacturer's original labeled containers. 3. Protect exposed surfaces and edges until work is completed. 4. Contractor to provide fasteners, supports, or other miscellaneous items necessary for complete installation, not provided by equipment manufacturer. 5. Owner to provide Contractor with rough -in and installation Drawings of purchased equipment. 6. Delivery place and time to be determined by Owner but not necessarily during normal working hours. C. Contractor Installed - Owner furnished existing equipment: 1. Contractor disconnect, remove, store and install such equipment in same manner as new equipment. Replace fasteners or supports as required. 2. Inspect equipment at existing location if rough -in and installation drawings are unavailable. D. Contractor and Owner mutually inspect existing equipment prior to removal, upon delivery to new location, and after installation to verify physical appearance and working condition. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard warranty against equipment failure, including cost of shipping, repair, replacement and legal discard of waste materials. B. Equipment furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor, shall be excluded from Contractor's one year warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hospital equipment: As noted for individual items. B. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 00 26 00. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Provide equipment of each specialty type, as designated by Sections referenced, by one manufacturer, insofar as is possible, and except as otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which work is to be performed. B. Insure that adequate Wall Backing has been installed. 1. Metal Wall Backing: Specified in Section 09 22 16. 2. Coordinate and direct installation of backing required for wall -mounted equipment. C. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. D. Start of work constitutes acceptance of responsibility for performance. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 HOSPITAL EQUIPMENT - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 117000-2 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install per manufacturer's printed instructions, drawings, or both. B. Except for final connection, installation of each item shall be complete in every respect. 1. Provide controls, regulating devices and other accessories necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment including, but not necessarily limited to, pressure reducing valves, strainers, steam traps, control valves, relief valves, etc. 2. Include these accessories whether or not they are specifically indicated. C. Where an item of equipment is furnished without a cord and plug, electrical wiring from equipment shall be brought to an equipment junction box to make a final connection between item and junction box with flexible connection. D. Provide stands, supports, sleeves, collars, escutcheons, ferrules, brackets, braces or other miscellaneous items required for a complete installation. E. Repair damage done to premises as a result of installation. F. Repair or replace damaged, stained or rejected work. G. Test and adjust items of equipment for satisfactory operation. H. Remove debris left by this installation. 3.3 OWNER INSTRUCTION A. Perform instruction of Owner personnel: See Section 01 79 00. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 HOSPITAL EQUIPMENT - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 117000-3 SECTION 12 3413 FORMALDEHYDE -FREE ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK (AC) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work includes: 1. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for laminate faced architectural casework (AC) as indicated in the Q-series drawings, plans and elevations, both plastic laminate and wood veneer -faced, standard and custom configurations as indicated. 2. Completely coordinate with work of other trades. 3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation, including, but not limited to accompanying countertops and brackets, nurse stations and other surrounds. 4. See Division 01 for General Requirements. 5. Architectural casework (AC) elevations as indicated in Q-Series Drawings in Contract Documents are covered in this section. B. See drawings for types of countertops required. C. Definitions: 1. Refer to Fabrication requirements in Part II of this specification. a. Exposed surfaces: Surfaces visible after installation. b. Concealed surfaces: Surfaces not visible after installation. c. Semi exposed surfaces: Surfaces not meeting the definition of exposed or concealed, including the interiors of drawer and door components. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer qualifications: Manufacturer, or manufacturer's authorized representative. B. Construction details, fastening, tolerances and workmanship: 1. Comply with 81 Edition (or most current) of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" by AWI. 2. Architectural Woodworking Institute (AWI) Premium grade standards, with exceptions indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Plans and elevations: a. Plans of casework at 1:100 1/8 IN = 12 IN or larger. b. Elevations of casework at 1:50 1/4 IN = 1 FT or larger. c. Cross reference shop drawings to Construction Drawing casework elevation reference numbers. B. Samples: 1. Sealant colors for selection. 2. Hardwood veneer. 3. Hardware. C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operating and maintenance data. 2. Warranty. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FORMALDEHYDE -FREE ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK (AC) 123413-1 A. Verify dimensions at site. B. Verify locations of items furnished in other sections. C. If necessary to vary from arrangement indicated because of structural, mechanical, electrical or other considerations, make such variations only after approval of Architect. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store in dry, weathertight, ventilated, temperature and humidity controlled spaces. B. Stack to provide air circulation. C. Time delivery and installation to avoid delaying progress of other work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer to provide 5-year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship, such as but not limited to delamination, swelling, or warping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Plastic Laminate -faced Architectural Casework: a. Base: 1) TMI Systems Design. 2) LSI of America. 3) Calmar Manufacturing (Tru-Bilt). b. The apparent successful bidder shall provide the following prior to submittal of Shop Drawings: 1) Sample of fmished base cabinet unit, 450mm 18 IN wide minimum, with one drawer, door and shelf, complete with hardware conforming to requirements. 2) Catalog of standard units (detailing construction and assembly of components. 3) If not acceptable, construct additional sample cabinets. 4) Sample cabinet constitutes standard of quality for actual construction. 5) Maintain sample at job office during construction, as a basis for Architect's acceptance of the remainder of the work. 2. Formaldehyde -free particleboard: a. Base: 1) PureKor Formaldehyde -free Plus. 2) SkyBlend Formaldehyde -free. 3) Tem-Stock Free. 4) Kirei Wheatboard. 3. Agrifiber Composite Board: a. Base: 1) Purekor Ag Fiber Particleboard. 2) BioFiber Wheat. 4. Medium Density Fiberboard: a. Base: 1) Sierra Pine. 5. Plastic Laminate: a. Base: 1) Formica. 2) Nevamar. 3) Wilsonart. 6. Contact Adhesive: a. Base: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 FORMALDEHYDE -FREE ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK (AC) 123413-2 1) Conbond. 7. Plastic Overlay Panel products: a. Base: 1) Simpson Timber.; Shelton, WA. 2) Selply.; White City, OR. 3) Casework Manufacturer. 8. Cabinet Hardware: a. Base: 1) Accuride. 2) Epco; Flint, MI. 3) Hafele. 4) Blum. 5) Knape & Vogt. 6) Grant; West Hyack, NY. 7) National Lock; Mauldin, SC. 8) Ilco Unican Corporation. 9) Stanley Hardware. 10) HEWI. 11) LSI America. 9. Plastic Laminate -faced Countertops: a. Base: 1) VT Industries.; Holstein, IA. 10. Sealant: a. Base: 1) Color Rite. 11. Other miscellaneous items: a. Base: Products and Manufacturers as listed. 12. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 00 26 00. 2.2 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Plastic Laminate -Faced Casework: 1. Fixed factory built formaldehyde -free core casework finished on exterior with high pressure laminate. Interior of plastic laminate faced units with plastic overlay. Provide units complete with hardware, countertops and subbases, in sizes and configurations indicated. Refer to Fabrication requirements in Part II of this specification. a. Style: 1) Reveal overlay, with square cornered doors and drawer fronts overlapping case front with minimum reveal at plastic laminate casework. 2) Plastic laminate doors and drawer fronts shall be edged with 3mm ABS banding, machine applied using waterproof hot melt adhesive. Machine profile exposed edges with 3mm 1/8 IN radius. b. Jointing: 1) Cabinet body construction shall be 20mm 3/4 IN thick formaldehyde -free core joined with 10mm diameter industrial grade hardwood dowels, securely glued and clamped under pressure during assembly. B. Plastic Laminate Facings: 1. Standard: NEMA 1,133-1991 high-pressure decorative laminate (HPDL). 2. Thickness and Grade: a. Countertops and backsplashes, and their edges: Grade-GP50, 1.3mm 0.050 IN thick. b. Formed surfaces: Post form Grade-PF42. c. Other exposed surfaces: Grade-GP28, 0.7mm 0.028 IN thick. 3. Backer Sheets for laminated items. a. Semi -exposed cabinet liner: Grade-CL20, 0.5mm 0.020 IN thick; color to match plastic overlay. b. Concealed backer sheet: Grade-BK20, 0.5mm 0.020 IN thick. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FORMALDEHYDE -FREE ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK (AC) 1234 13 - 3 4. Laminate Color(s): a. as selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full line. 1) See finish legend for plastic laminates b. Color of laminate on countertop edges: Same as surface of the item. c. Color of other plastic laminate edges: Black or to match plastic overlay, as selected by Architect. 5. See "Fabrication -Case Components" for components requiring plastic laminate finish. C. Contact Adhesive: 1. Comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 for VOC content of not more than 80 g/L. D. Plastic Overlay: 1. Resin impregnated 80 gram paper overlay, glued and press cured onto substrate. 2. Conform to NEMA LD3.3 wear resistance Grade-GP28 requirements for "General Purpose" decorative board (not "Light Duty" liner type). 3. Finish: Satin. 4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color line of dove gray, frosty white and light beige. 5. Material: Polyester or Melamine; phenolic resin may be used on concealed surfaces. 6. Substrates: As indicated below; see "Fabrication- Case Components" for components requiring plastic overlay fmish. E. Hardwood: 1. Solid, S4S. 2. Type: Quarter sawn red oak. 3. Grade: AWI Premium grade. F. Formaldehyde -free particleboard: 1. ANSI-A208.1, mat formed. 2. Density: 720 KG/MZ 45 PCF. 3. Type 1-M-3 for general use. G. Factory Stains and Varnishes: 1. Quality Assurance: 8' Edition (or more current) of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" by AWI. a. Comply with Section 1500; Premium Quality. 2. Washcoat: Prepare wood to accept stain uniformly by application of a compatible washcoat. H. Adhesives: 1. No greater than 80 g/L in accord with SCAQMD Rule 1168. I. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): 1. Meet or exceed ANSI 1037-87. 2. Exterior grade, 768 KG/M2 48 PCF density, formaldehyde free. 3. Base: Medite Corporation "MEDEX"; Medford, OR. (800/ 676-3339). 4. Core material for counters, backsplash, and sidesplashes with sinks. 5. Core material for p-lam faced window sills where indicated. J. ABS Edge -banding for case body & components: 1. Machine applied with waterproof hot -melt adhesive. 2. Thickness:lmm. 3. Color: To match case, as selected by Architect. K. ABS edge banding (all shelves in plastic laminate clad units): 1. Machine applied with waterproof hot -melt adhesive. 2. Shelves: Apply to 4 edges. 3. Thickness:lmm. 4. Color: To match case, as selected by Architect. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FORMALDEHYDE -FREE ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK (AC) 12 34 13 - 4 L. ABS Edge -banding for doors and drawer fronts and removable panels: 1. Machine applied with waterproof hot -melt adhesive. 2. Thickness:3mm. 3. See color schedule for selections (Section 09 06 10). 4. Color: As selected by Architect, to match laminate. a. Allow for 5 different colors. M. Sealant: 1. Base Product: "Poly-Sil" by Color Rite. 2. Description: a. Polymers suspended in 100% Silicone. b. Specifically formulated for applications indicated, including wet areas. c. Mold/Mildew-resistant. d. Elastomeric. e. Shore A Hardness: 25. f. Compatible with Gypsum wallboard, Painting, Plastic Laminate, Stone, Wood, Solid Polymer Materials (SPM), and other materials specified in this section. 3. Colors: a. Colors as required to match Plastic Laminate, Stone, Wood, Solid Polymer Materials (SPM) specified for casework bodies, countertops and splashes. b. Architect to select from no less than 450 standard color choices. c. Number of different colors required for project shall not be limited. 2.3 CABINET DOOR HARDWARE A. 5-knuckle Hinges: 1. Institutional (hospital tip), 5 knuckle, wrap around type (screwed to back of door and side of divider/end), with barrel only projecting beyond face of cabinet. (used on plastic laminated faced units). 2. Not less than 70mm 2-3/4 IN long. 3. Minimum 8 screws per hinge. 4. Shall pass ANSI/BHMA-A156.9 Grade-1 requirements. 5. Hinge Quantities per leaf: a. For doors up to 1200mm 48 IN high: 2 hinges. b. For doors over 1200mm 48 IN high: 3 hinges. 6. Finish: Epoxy Powder Coat. 7. Color: Architect to select. 8. CASEWORK HARDWARE IN MRI ROOM TO BE MRI SAFE / NON FERROUS B. Wire Pulls: 1. Wire type (for use on plastic laminate -faced doors). 2. 100mm 4 IN centers. 3. Finish: Epoxy Powder Coat. 4. Color: Architect to select. C. Catches: 1. Magnetic, adjustable, 2.7-3 KG 6-7 LB pull; or Roller type; provide 18 KG 40 LB unit on doors over 0.4 MZ 4 FTz. D. Locks: 1. Provide locks on all cabinet doors a. National Lock: "C8170 Series b. Cam locks not accepted. E. Elbow Catch: 1. Provide at doors with locks. F. Door Stops: 1. Metal slide type with positive stop. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FORMALDEHYDE -FREE ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK (AC) 123413-5 G. Door Bumpers: 1. Provide on backside of add doors. 2.4 CABINET DRAWER HARDWARE A. Drawer Slides: 1. Nylon wheels/rollers, stainless steel or polymer ball bearings, positive closing and pull out stops, drawer removable without use of tools; file drawers. 2. Full extension (all capacities). 3. Capacity: a. Standard Drawers (other than types listed below): 45 KG 100 LBS. b. File Drawers: 68 KG 150 LBS. c. Lateral Files: 1) Less than 1070mm 42 IN wide: 91 KG 200 LBS. 2) 1070 to 1220mm 42 to 48 IN wide: 181 KG 400 LBS. 4. Optional Product: a. "Metabox System" by Blum, is acceptable where capacities (listed above) can be met. 5. CASEWORK HARDWARE IN MRI ROOM TO BE MRI SAFE / NON FERROUS B. Wire Pulls: 1. Wire type (for use on plastic laminate faced -drawers). 2. 100mm 4 IN centers. 3. Finish: Epoxy Powder Coat. 4. Color: Architect to select. C. Locks: 1. Provide as noted drawings D. Suspension Rails (file drawers): 1. Description: 1.9mm 14 GA steel pendaflex file suspension rails, epoxy coated in dove gray, frosty white or light beige to match drawer body color. 2. Provide one pair of such rails at file drawers. E. Drawer bumpers: 1. Provide on backside of drawer faces. 2.5 LOCKS A. Locks (typical type): 1. Small -pin tumbler with heavy-duty deadbolt. a. Disc -tumbler type locks will not be accepted. b. Cam locks will not be accepted. 2. Keyway: D4292 (5-pin). 3. ANSI/BHMA Standard: E07121. a. Cycle Tested per ANSI/BHMA A156.11 Grade 1. 4. Base Products: a. Door Locks: "# 100DR" by Olympus Lock. b. Drawer Locks: "#200DW ' by Olympus Lock. 5. Finish: Satin Chrome US26D (BHMA 626). 6. Include spacers, adapters, fasteners and strikes. 7. Barrel Length: As appropriate for conditions. 8. Provide 2 keys for each lock. 9. Master key and grand master key as directed. 10. Finish: As selected by Architect. 11. Provide 20 extra locks. 2.6 SUPPORTS AND BRACKETS A. Adjustable Shelf Supports (drilled hole type): 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FORMALDEHYDE -FREE ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK (AC) 1234 13 - 6 I . Description: Friction fit into cabinet end panels and vertical dividers, readily adjustable on 32mm 1 1/4 IN centers. 2. Material: Injection molded polycarbonate. 3. Color: Clear to blend with selected interior finish. 4. Provide non -tip feature and allow for field fixing of shelf if desired 5. Capacity: Structural test shall indicate loading of shelf to 680 KG 1500 LBS (170 KG 375 LBS per support device). 6. No substitutions. B. CASEWORK HARDWARE IN MRI ROOM TO BE MRI SAFE / NON FERROUS C. Coat Hooks: 1. Concealed locations: a. Match hooks in Section 10 28 13 / Toilet Accessories; single, double or ceiling style as indicated. 2. Exposed locations: a. Base Product: "501" by HEWI. 2.7 HARDWARE FOR REMOVABLE PANELS A. Catches (for removable panels): 1. "Flush Recessed Catch" by Bull Dog. 2. Provide 4 per panel. B. Electrical access panel below nurse station counters: 1. Heavy duty concealed hinges (2 per panel). 2. Key lock at strike side - no pulls. 2.8 GROMMETS A. Grommets for cords: 1. Base Product: "XG-3" by Doug Mockett & Company. 2. Finish: Black or putty as selected by Architect. 3. Provide cap with 16mm 5/8 IN cord slot. 4. Provide as indicated on Drawings and at each location with undercounter electrical or systems outlet, cord drop location, and keyboard drawer location. B. Grommets for paper slots: 1. Base Product: "CP-1, with "nubber" paper retainer" by Doug Mockett & Company. 2. Finish: Black or putty as selected by Architect. 3. Provide as indicated on Drawings. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS CABINET HARDWARE A. Articulating keyboard drawer: 1. Base Products: "14725 Mini -Arm (with tilt)" and "14675 Keyboard Tray" by Weber Knapp Company. 2. Length: 350mm 14 IN. B. Hinged lid stay: 1. Base Manufacturer: Hafele. 2. Finish: Satin chrome. 3. Provide with metal construction and spring loaded adjustable brake mechanism. C. Hinge, continuous: 1. Base Product: "0351.04.039"by Hafele. 2. Finish: Chrome finish. D. Pocket door slide system: 1. Base Product: "RP-60"by Hafele. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 FORMALDEHYDE -FREE ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK (AC) 123413-7 2. Finish: Satin chrome. 2.10 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS & FABRICATIONS A. Plastic Laminate -Faced Countertops: 1. General: a. HPDL facing on exposed surfaces: 1.3mm 0.050 IN thick. b. Backer sheets on concealed surfaces: 0.5mm 0.020 IN thick. c. All edges of raw formaldehyde -free to be sealed with polyurethane before assembly. 2. Countertop Construction: a. Core Material: Formaldehyde -free particleboard, agrifiber composite board or Medium Density Fiberboard. b. Core Thickness: 32mm 1-1/4 IN, or 18mm 3/4 IN with 12mm 1/2 IN build -down. c. Laminate backer sheet on underside of countertop. d. Laminate top surface with HPDL. e. Joints in plastic laminate: Not closer than 600mm 24 IN to sinks. f. Joints in counter length: Factory fitted, splined, glued, and mechanically fastened. g. Provide 45mm 1-1/2 IN radius on exposed outside corners (Exception: Radius not required at 3mm ABS applications) 3. Countertop Front Edges: a. Apply laminate to front edge before top surface of countertop. b. ABS Edge Banding: 3mm ABS banding at front edge Nurse Stations, Island Counters, and other locations where indicated. 4. Backsplash: a. Backsplash with scribe piece 25mm 1 IN to be glued and secured to back edge of countertops where indicated. b. Apply laminate to vertical face before top edge. c. Apply backer sheet on back face. d. Height as indicated. e. Cove radius 6mm 1/4 IN maximum. 5. Sidesplash: a. Apply backer sheet on back face. b. Apply laminate to vertical faces before top edge. c. Provide laminate backer sheet on hidden surfaces before applying plastic laminate. d. Secure to top and side wall. B. Solid Surface Countertops (SSF): Specified in Section 12 36 63. C. Solid Surface Window Sills (SSF): Specified in Section 12 36 63. 2.11 FABRICATION - DEFINITIONS A. Definitions: 1. Exposed surfaces: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed: a. Door and drawer fronts, and their edges. b. Exposed ends. c. Bottom of wall case. d. Countertop and backsplash and their exposed edges. e. Face of cabinet body not covered by doors or drawer fronts. f. Toe strip not to be covered by separate base. g. Wall mounted adjustable shelves and their edges. h. Interior of open cabinets, including shelving. i. Interior of cabinets with glass doors. 2. Concealed surfaces: Surfaces not visible after installation: a. Solid top panels. b. Security panels. c. Locking rails. 3. Semi -exposed surfaces: Other surfaces not exposed or concealed, and: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FORMALDEHYDE -FREE ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK (AC) 123413-8 a. Interior of closed cabinets. b. Top of wall and tall cases. c. Drawers. 2.12 CASE COMPONENTS (FOR PLASTIC LAMINATE -FACED CABINETS) A. General Finishes for non -fire -rated cabinets: 1. Exposed surfaces: Plastic Laminate. 2. Semi -exposed surfaces: Plastic Overlay. 3. Edges of Doors and Drawer Fronts: 3mm ABS edge banding. 4. Edges of Case Body members: Imm ABS edge banding. 5. Edges of Shelves: lmm ABS edge banding (4-sides). B. Case Body Members: 1. Sides: 18mm 3/4 IN Formaldehyde -free core with Plastic Overlay (1-side). 2. Top Panels: 18mm 3/4 IN Formaldehyde -free core with Plastic Overlay (2-sides). 3. Backs: 12mm 1/2 IN Formaldehyde -free core with Plastic Overlay (1-side). a. Exception: Where back face is exposed to view: Upgrade to 18mm 3/4 IN Formaldehyde -free core; Plastic Overlay on inside face; Plastic Laminate (color matching sides and fronts) on exposed back face. 4. Semi -exposed Members: 18mm 3/4 IN Formaldehyde -free core with Plastic Overlay (2- sides). 5. Exposed edges of Formaldehyde -free core: Imm ABS edge banding. 6. Security Panels: 12mm 1/2 IN Formaldehyde -free core with Plastic Overlay (2-sides). 7. Drawer Lock Rails: 18mm 3/4 IN Formaldehyde -free core with Plastic Overlay (2-sides). 8. Base: 18mm 3/4 IN Formaldehyde -free core, with intermediate reinforcing at 600mm 24 IN on O.C. (maximum). C. Shelves: 1. Semi -exposed Shelves: 18mm 3/4 IN Formaldehyde -free core with Plastic Overlay (2- sides). a. Exception: Increase thickness to 25mm 1 IN for spans exceeding 750mm 30 IN. 2. Exposed Shelves: Shelves: 18mm 3/4 IN Formaldehyde -free core with Plastic Laminate (2-sides). a. Exception: Increase thickness 25mm 1 IN for spans exceeding 750mm 30 IN. D. Doors: 1. 18mm 3/4 IN Formaldehyde -free core with Plastic Laminate on exposed faces, Plastic Overlay on semi -exposed faces. 2. Edges: 3mm ABS edge banding on laminate -faced doors. 3. Doors not to exceed 625mm 25 IN in width. E. Drawers: 1. Drawer Fronts: a. 18mm 3/4 IN Formaldehyde -free core with Plastic Laminate on exposed faces, Plastic Overlay on semi -exposed faces. b. Edges: 3mm ABS edge banding on laminate -faced drawer fronts. 2. Sub -fronts, Sides and Backs: a. 12mm 1/2 IN Formaldehyde -free core with Plastic Overlay (2-sides). b. Exposed top edges finished with Imm ABS banding. 3. Bottoms: a. 12mm 1/2 IN Formaldehyde -free core with Plastic Overlay (2-side). b. Include intermediate reinforcing rails where drawer width exceeds 45mm 18 IN. F. Case Base: Integral or separate base for each unit. G. Small Compartment Dividers: 6mm 1/4 IN Clear acrylic panel. H. Filler Panels and Scribe Pieces: 18mm 3/4 IN Formaldehyde -free core with Plastic Laminate exposed surfaces; Plastic Overlay on semi -exposed or fully concealed surfaces, 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 FORMALDEHYDE -FREE ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK (AC) 123413-9 I. Grain Direction (where laminate has a predominate grain direction): Vertical grain at all frames, cases, doors faces, drawer faces and all other vertical surfaces. 2.13 FABRICATION - CONVENTIONAL JOINTING A. Case body: 1. Sides, dividers, bottom, and tops members: a. Dowel with 10mm fluted hardwood dowels. Provide minimum of 6 dowels at each joint for 600mm 24 IN deep cabinets and a minimum of 4 dowels for 300mm 12 IN deep cabinets. b. Glue joints. 2. Back: a. Dado into sides, bottom, and top. Locate dado 18mm 3/4 IN in from back face of cabinet or on -set type, lead in at finished ends, screwed at the top and bottom, stapled at the sides. b. Glue joints. 3. Compartment dividers & lock rails: a. Doweled. 4. Base: a. Integral or separate, to receive base material to match adjacent walls, unless noted otherwise. 5. Blind -fasten to bottom of case body when separate. B. Drawers with subfront: 1. Sub -front, sides and back: a. Doweled corners. b. Glue joints. 2. Bottom: Dado into 4 sides and glued or screwed to the bottom with the use of bottom supporting drawer slide hardware. 3. Front: a. Secured from subfront side with no less than four screws after adjustments. C. Use no blocking or fasteners in exposed or Semi -exposed locations. 2.14 FABRICATION - MECHANICAL FASTENERS A. Countertop joints: 1. Provide joint connectors every 150mm 6 IN OC. B. Pre -drill and countersink screw holes before installation. C. Do not use mechanical fasteners or blocking in exposed locations. When fasteners are required on exposed surfaces color, materials and finish to be approved by Architect. 2.15 FABRICATION - CASE CONFIGURATION A. Plastic Laminate -Faced Units: 1. Provide reveal, approximately 3mm 1/8 IN, at top of doors and drawer fronts, and between doors and drawer fronts in same unit; reveal approximately 1 Imm 7/16 IN at sides. B. Provide reveal 3mm 1/8 IN x 3mm 1/8 IN (black) in upper edge of exposed sides of wall case when plastic laminate soffits provided. C. Toe space: 1. 100mm 4 IN high by approximately 75mm 3 IN deep; provide on front of each base unit unless noted on architectural drawings. D. Pairs of sliding doors: 1. Equal width; overlap approximately 25mm 1 IN. E. Countertop: 1. Veneer faced units: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FORMALDEHYDE -FREE ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK (AC) 12 34 13 - 10 a. Overhang 28mm 1-1/8 IN beyond doors, drawer fronts and exposed ends. 2. Plastic laminate units: a. Overhang 18mm 3/4 IN beyond doors, drawer fronts and exposed ends. - F. Hardware mounting: 1. Drawers: a. Center pull in front, horizontally. b. No more than 100mm 4 IN from top. 2. Drawers with 2 pulls: a. Set pulls at 1/4 points. b. No more than 100mm 4 IN from top. 3. Framed glass doors: a. Center pull in corner of frame. 4. Swinging doors: a. Set pull in swing side corner, vertically; at top of base units; at bottom of wall units. G. Exposed adjustable shelves: 1. Use drilled hole supports only (32mm centers). H. Semi -exposed adjustable shelves: 1. Use drilled hole supports (32mm centers). a. Depth: 12mm 1/2 IN less than inside cabinet depth. b. Width: 3mm 1/8 IN, maximum, less than inside cabinet width. I. Provide doors at locations requiring access to electrical devices, as indicated on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation. B. Insure that adequate Wall Backing has been installed. 1. Metal Wall Backing: Specified in Section 09 22 16. 2. Coordinate and direct installation of backing where required. C. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. D. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer to provide printed instructions or drawings on wall blocking locations and type required to Contractor. B. Use manufacturer's printed instructions or drawings in cases where items or details are not indicated. C. Provide trim, fillers, closures, stands, supports, sleeves, collars, escutcheons, ferrules, brackets, braces or other miscellaneous items required for complete installation. D. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items. E. Seal sink cutouts. F. Install extra locks as directed; deliver unused locks to Owner. 3.3 SEALING OF JOINTS A. Seal casework, countertops and splashes to walls, to seal joints. 1. Sealant color to match countertop color. B. Seal perimeter of counter -mounted sink fixtures. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FORMALDEHYDE -FREE ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK (AC) 12 34 13 - 11 1. Sealant color to match countertop or sink color(s). C. Seal windowsills to walls and window frames to seal joints. 1. Sealant color to match color(s) of sill material specified. 3.4 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING A. Test and adjust items of equipment for satisfactory operation. B. Adjust hinges for proper door alignment. C. Adjust drawer guides for proper drawer front alignment and operation. D. Adjust countertops to a level position and align to adjacent unit. E. Repair damage to casework or countertops to appear in original new condition. F. Repair damage to premises as a result of installation. G. Remove debris left by this installation. H. Clean casework and countertops after above items have been completed. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FORMALDEHYDE -FREE ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK (AC) 1234 13 - 12 SECTION 12 36 63 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS (SSF) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Solid Surface Fabrications, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents. B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable standards: 1. Standards of the following, as referenced herein: a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). d. NSF International. B. NSF/ANSI standards: 1. Refer to www.nsf.org for the latest compliance to NSF/ANSI Standard 51 for food zone -all food types. C. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: 1. Firm that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices and other components. 2. Show full-size details, edge details, thermoforming requirements, attachments, etc. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and reinforcement. 4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, waste receptacle and other items installed in surface. 5. Indicate dimensions, component sizes, fabrication details, attachment provisions and coordination requirements with adjacent work. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturers' product data sheets, details and installation instructions for Solid Surface Fabrications, components and accessories. C. Samples: 1. For each SSF color selected: a. Minimum 300mm x 300mm 6 IN x 6 IN sample in specified gloss. b. Cut sample and seam together for representation of inconspicuous seam. c. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation. 2. Sealant colors for selection. 3. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for work. D. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Maintenance data. 2. Warranty. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS (SSF) 123663-1 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide 10-year manufacturer's warranty including colorfastness and material defects. 1. Warranty shall provide material and labor to repair or replace defective materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Solid Surfacing (SSF) fabrications: 1. Base: a. Corian by DuPont de Nemours. 2. Optional: a. Avonite by Aristech Acrylics LLC. b. Wilsonart Solid Surface. B. Sealant (elastomeric): 1. Base: a. Color Rite. b. Other products approved by SSF manufacturer. C. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with section 00 26 00. 2.2 SOLID SURFACING MATERIALS A. Description: 1. Cast, non -porous, homogeneous, acrylic polymer composition with additional fire retardant fillers and pigments. a. Prime product may not coated, laminated of composite construction. b. Through body colors shall comply with ANSI Z 124.3 or ANSI Z124.6, having minimum physical and performance properties specified. 2. Defects with depth < 0.25mm 0.010 IN shall be considered "superficial". a. Superficial damage shall be repaired by sanding and/or polishing. b. Components with more severe defects shall be rejected. 3. Physical properties: PropertiesMinimum Physical f�k p Tensile Strength ASTM-D638 422 KG/cm1 4100 PSI Tensile Elongation 0.4% min Flexural Strength ASTM-D790 703 KG/cmz 10 KSI Rockwell "M" Scale >85 ASTM-D785 Hardness Barcol Impressor ASTM-D2583 55 3.02 x 10-1 mm/mm/DegC 1.8 x 10' Thermal Expansion ASTM-D696 IN/IN/De F Gloss 60 —degree Gardner ANSI-Z 124 Matte = 5; Highly Polished = 75 Light Resistance NEMA LD 3-2000 No Effect (Xenon Arc) Method 3.3 Wear and Clean ability ANSI-Z124.3 & Z124.6 Pass Stain Resistance ANSI-Z124.3 & Z124.6 Pass Fungal Resistance ASTM-G21 Does not support growth High Temperature Resistance NEMA LD 3-2000 No change 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS (SSF) 123663-2 Method 3.6 Boiling Water Resistance NEMA LD 3-2000Method 3.5 No visible change Ball Impact Resistance; 225 G 1/2 LBS Ball NEMA LD 3-2000 Method 3.5 91mm 36 IN drop 6mm'/4�IN sheet 366mm 144 IN drop12mm /z IN sheet Specific Gravity ASTM-D792 1.70 Water Absorption ASTM-D570 0.8% for 6mm'14 IN sheet 0.6 /o for 12mm % IN sheet Toxicity Pittsburgh Protocol LC50 Test 99 (solid colors) 66(patterned colors Flammability ASTM-E84 and NFPA— 255 Class I / Class A Flame Spread Index < 25 Smoked Developed Index <450 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Backing materials (build down): 1. Finished or exposed edges: SSF material. a. Profiles as indicated. 2. Concealed spaces and non exposed edges: a. Moisture -resistant medium -density fiberboard (MDF) Panels or moisture -resistant plywood. b. Physical Properties, Based on IN Thickness, ASTM D 1037, Part A: 1) Density: 48 LBS/FT3. 2) Modulus of Rupture: 4,500 PSI. 3) Screw Holding: Required to pull 1 IN #10 sheet metal screw: a) Face: 230 pounds (104 kg). b) Edge: 185 pounds (84 kg). 4) Water Absorption: 14 percent average, 24-hour soak. 5) Thickness Swell: 6 percent average, 24-hour soak. 6) Flame Spread Rating, ASTM-E84: Class A (1). c. Panel Thickness: 1) As required for application, utilize a single thickness to achieve build down to cross sectional thickness. 3. Backer Sheets for knee spaces (open areas under countertops): a. Backer sheet: Grade-BK20, 0.5mm 0.020 IN thick. b. Apply to bottom side of backing material. 4. Backing materials adhesive: a. Construction grade adhesive recommended by SSF manufacturer for backing materials with VOC content no greater than 70 g/L. B. Joint Adhesive: 1. Manufacturer's standard one- or two-part adhesive as required for inconspicuous, non- porous joint with VOC content no greater than 80 g/L. C. Sealant (elastomeric): 1. Description: a. Mildew -resistant, FDA -compliant, NSF 51-compliant (food zone - any type), UL-listed silicone sealant in colors matching components. b. Specifically formulated for applications indicated, including wet areas. c. Elastomeric. d. Shore A Hardness: 25. e. Compatible with SSF specified. f. Compatible with gypsum wallboard, paint, laminates and other materials being sealed. g. Sealant VOC content shall be no greater than 250g/L. 2. Colors: a. Colors to match specified SSF colors from no less than 400 standard color choices. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS (SSF) 123663-3 b. Number of different colors required for project shall not be limited. 3. Base Product(s): a. Where "solid" colored SSF: "Color-Sil" by Color Rite; 100% Silicone, uniformly colored, no suspended accent color partials. b. Where "speckle -colored" SSF is specified: "Poly-Sil" by Color Rite; 100% Silicone with suspended accent color particles. c. Architect to select final colors and locations during submittals phase. D. Conductive Foil Tape: 1. Manufacturer's standard aluminum foil tape, with required thickness, for use with cutouts near heat sources. E. Insulating Felt Tape: 1. Manufacturer's standard for use with conductive tape in insulating solid surface material from adjacent heat source. 2.4 SHOP FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Shop assembly 1. Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Form joints between components using color -matched Joint Adhesive in an inconspicuous manner. a. Reinforce with 100mm 4 IN wide strip of SSF material. 3. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as indicated. a. Radius all inside corners of cutouts as large as but not less than 6.4mm 1/4 IN. b. Reinforce with SSF corner blocks to avoid stress cracking. c. Sand edges and corners smooth and free of chips or nicks. d. Utilize heat -conductive aluminum tape around drop -in stoves and other heat sources to protect SSF from thermal stress. 4. Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. a. Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template. b. Smooth edges. c. Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work. 5. Fabricate coved splashes where indicated. 6. Reinforce inside corners, narrow pieces, cantilevered overhangs, and stress points against breakage by laminating an additional thickness of SSF on concealed face. 7. Laminate additional thicknesses of SSF and tool edge profiles indicated. 8. Uniformly finish completed pieces according to SSF schedule. 2.5 FABRICATIONS A. SSF Countertops: 1. General: a. Configurations as indicated on the Q-series Drawings. b. Composite thickness of countertop assemblies: 32mm 1-1/4 IN unless otherwise indicated. 1) Nominal Thickness of SSF material: Minimum 13mm 1/2 IN unless otherwise indicated. c. Radius exposed outside corners: Minimum 37mm 1-1/2 IN. d. Join multiple pieces, where required, with Joint Adhesive to create inconspicuous seam. 2. Backer: a. General: 1) Configure backing material as required for application: b. Ladder frame at SSF countertops supported by base cabinets: 1) Form ladders from approved backing material ripped into 75-100mm 3- 4 IN wide strips. 2) Locate main runner strips (rails) along front and back edges of countertops. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS (SSF) 123663-4 a) Provide clearance for shrinkage and normal expansion and contraction. 3) Space front -to -back supports (stiles) to align with line where base cabinet units adjoin. Locate stiles over other wall brackets and supports. 4) Where base cabinets and supports exceed in 610mm 24 IN width: Include additional intermediate stiles so that maximum spacing does not exceed 610mm 24 IN. 5) Provide additional intermediate stiles at seams in SSF countertop material. 6) Join the stiles to rails using screwed or glued wooden biscuit seams, serrated dowels or rabbeted seams. 7) Overhangs: Configure backer material per SSF manufacturer's guidelines according to amount of overhang projects past its support. c. Countertops which span between supports 750mm 30 IN and wider: 1) Fabricate backer from solid backing material (not stile and rail construction). 2) Extend one-piece, solid backer material, across entire span. Extend load bearing edges not less than 100mm 4 IN over edge of supporting cabinets (or similar support). d. Portions of Countertops schedule to support countertop equipment: 1) Provide full backing for the entire countertop cross section for the full width of the equipment. 2) Extend I00mm 4 IN (min) beyond equipment width and as required for mounting. 3. Backsplashes and Sidesplashes: a. Provide where indicated. b. Thickness: Minimum 13mm 1/2 IN (unless otherwise indicated). c. Height: As indicated. d. Fabricate from same material and color as top. e. Backsplash Style: Integrally -coved. f. Sidesplash Style: Applied. 4. Front overhang of Tops: 38mm 1-1/2 IN (unless otherwise indicated). 5. Edge Treatments: As indicated on the drawings. 6. Polish exposed faces. 7. SSF Color / Pattern / Finish: Per SSF Schedule. 8. Color(s): To be selected by Architect. B. Sinks (specified elsewhere): 1. Porcelain, enameled steel and/or stainless steel bowls: C. Faucets and Trim: Specified elsewhere PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with fabricator present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify measurements, dimensions and drawing details before proceeding. 2. Coordinate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports for attached work. 3. Examine conditions under which work is to be installed. 4. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS (SSF) 123663-5 1. Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product data. 2. Provide product in the largest pieces available. 3. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. a. Exposed joints/seams will not be allowed. 4. Reinforce field joints with SSF strips extending a minimum of 25mm to 50mm 1 to 2 IN on either side of the seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top. 5. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. 6. Rout radii and contours to template. 7. Anchor securely to base cabinets or other supports. 8. Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. 9. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface. 10. Install countertops with no more than 3mm 1/8 IN sag, bow or other variation from a straight line. 11. Units with sinks or lavatories shall withstand an applied vertical load of not less than 113.4 kilograms 250 pounds on front edge of countertop. B. Countertops: 1. Install plumb, level, true and straight. a. Shim as necessary using concealed shims. 2. Adhere tops to base cabinets with dabs of a clear silicone sealant at 250mm to 300mm 10 to 12IN apart. 3. Attach top securely to base unit or support brackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. Supply additional wood supports, spaced no more than 460mm 18 IN apart or as otherwise required for adequate strength. 4. Attach top securely to base unit or support brackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. Ensure full contact with support brackets and backing for entire support length with mechanical fastening into backing material. b. Provide fasteners of appropriate length. Do not allow screws to penetrate into SSF material. c. Supply additional supports or solid backing as required for adequate strength. 5. Where tops are abutted by walls at both ends: All 3mm 1/8 IN expansion gaps at both ends for every of 3 M 10 FT countertop. a. Seal gaps with elastomeric sealant. C. Backsplashes and Sidesplashes: 1. Integrally Coved Splashes: a. Join "coved" items to countertops using color -matched Joint Adhesive. b. Adhere to walls and other substrates with clear silicone sealant. c. Seal to walls and adjacent cabinets with color -matched, elastomeric sealant. 2. Applied Splashes: a. Join "adhered" items to substrate using color -matched, elastomeric sealant. b. Adhere to walls and other substrates with clear silicone sealant. c. Seal to walls and adjacent cabinets with color -matched, elastomeric sealant. D. Sinks (specified elsewhere): 1. Install sinks per mechanical / plumbing requirements 2. Seal to Countertop with elastomeric sealant and mounting hardware provided. 3. Drain and overflow connections: Specified in Section 22 42 00. E. Faucets and Trim: 1. Install faucets and trim per Section 22 42 00. 2. Plumbing connections: Specified in Section 22 42 00. 3. Seal to Countertop with elastomeric sealant. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS (SSF) 123663-6 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Keep components clean during installation. B. Protect finished surfaces from damage. C. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. 3.4 REPAIR A. Repair damaged work. B. Replace damaged work which cannot be repaired to Architect's satisfaction. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS (SSF) 123663-7 Adventhealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room 5 - Cystoscopy Client Code/File Number: 23/100046-127-1 Construction Documents MEP Project Manual VOLUME 2 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No. 042.21-177.01 FL Reg: AA-26003049 Table of Contents DIVISION 23 — HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 2305 10 HVAC DEMOLITION AND ALTERATIONS 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS 23 33 00 AIR DUCDT ACCESSORIES 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL P: No. W 16 :. 0 ; STATE OF I ' � .exoRID�-'�° �tllNtitl� 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 2605 10 SELECTIVE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 2305 19 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWRE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES• A 262813 FUSES ��'�GS•.•••••��*�',9 00® 2628 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS �Q.ceNsF°•.efryQ i Q No. 76422 b i aF •"• � `ooS�NALy,,ve 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 Table of Contents - 1 Table of Contents DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 2305 10 HVAC DEMOLITION AND ALTERATIONS 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION 2331 13 METAL DUCTS 23 33 00 AIR DUCDT ACCESSORIES 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 2605 10 2305 19 26 05 29 26 05 33 26 05 44 26 05 53 26 27 26 26 28 13 26 28 16 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL SELECTIVE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWRE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WIRING DEVICES FUSES ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 042.21-177.01 Advendlealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 Table of Contents - 1 SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for piping, conduit and wiring penetration firestopping installed in fire -resistance -rated walls, horizontal assemblies and smoke barriers. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Access panels 2. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 3. Painting and finishing. 4. Supports and anchorages. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 1.4 SCOPE A. Drawings and Specifications form complementary requirements; provide work specified and not shown, and work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both. Although work may not be specifically shown or specified, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, devices and materials obviously necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. B. It is the intent that these Specifications and associated Drawings establish minimum requirements for products and equipment with the intent to provide HVAC systems finished, tested and ready for operation. Incidental detail that is not shown or specified, but necessary for proper installation and operation shall be included in the work and in these Contractor's estimates, the same as if specified. Locations of all equipment and material shall be adjusted at no extra cost to the Owner, to accommodate the work interferences anticipated and/or encountered. Prior to installation, determine the exact route and location of each pipe, duct and piece of equipment to minimize conflicts with other trades. C. It is the requirement of these Contract Documents to have the contractors provide systems and components that are fully complete, operational and suitable for the intended use. There may be situations in the documents where insufficient information exists to precisely describe a certain component or subsystem, or the routing of a component or its coordination with other building 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-1 elements. In cases such as this, where the Contractor has failed to notify the Architect of the situation the Contractor shall include the specific components or subsystems with all parts necessary for the intended use, fully complete and operational, and installed in workmanlike manner either concealed or exposed per the design intent. 1.5 MODIFICATIONS IN LAYOUT A. Drawings are intended to outline the scope of work required and are not intended to be installation drawings. Drawings are not intended to be absolutely precise; they are not intended to specify or to show every offset, fitting, and component nor do they show the exact routing and locations needed to coordinate with structure and other trades and to meet Architectural requirements. The purpose of the drawings is to indicate a systems concept, the main components of the systems, and the approximate geometrical relationships. Based on the systems concept, the main components, and the approximate geometrical relationships, the contractor shall provide all other components and materials necessary to make the systems fully complete and operational. B. Unless specifically stated to the contrary, no measurement of a drawing derived by scaling shall be used as a dimension to work by. Dimensions noted on the drawings are subject to measurements of adjacent and previously completed work. Measurements shall be performed prior to the actual installation of equipment. C. Prior to installation of visible material and equipment (including access panels) in finished spaces, review Architectural Drawings for desired locations and where not definitely indicated, request information from Architect. D. Check Contract Documents, as well as, Submittals and Shop Drawings of all subcontractors to verify and coordinate spaces in which work of Divisions 21 through 28 will be installed. E. Make reasonable modifications in layout and components needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades. Systems shall be run parallel with or perpendicular to major architectural and structural building elements. F. Where conflicts or potential conflicts exist and engineering guidance is desired, submit sketch of proposed resolution to Architect for review and approval. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of piping and equipment: 1. To maintain maximum headroom; all piping, duct, conduit and associated components to be as tight as possible to underside of structure to provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 2. To allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3. To be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast -in -place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for HVAC items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS 1. When included as part of the Contract Documents, there shall be full cooperation and coordination of all specialty trades. 2. This Division's contractors shall comply fully with the requirements set forth in the "Coordination Drawings" specification section. 1.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record Drawings are specified in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents." 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zcphyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-2 B. The Contractor shall keep a detailed up-to-date record, of the manner and location in which installations are actually made, indexing pipe, duct, and piece of equipment. Record documents are to reflect all changes in work including change orders, field directives, addenda from bid set of Contract Documents, request for information responses, etc. Upon completion of the project, the contractor shall modify the project electronic drawing and specification files to incorporate this information. Modified documents shall be turned over to the Owner in both electronic and hard paper copy formats. Record drawings shall also include: 1. Field changes of dimension or detail. 2. Changes made by field order or change order. 3. Details not on original contract drawings. 1.9 MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Obtain at time of purchase of equipment, three copies of operation, lubrication and maintenance manuals for all items. Assemble literature in a coordinated manual. Manual shall contain names and addresses of manufacturers and local representatives who stock or furnish repair parts for items or equipment. B. The manuals shall include the following and shall have an index of contents and tabs for each Specification Section and each piece of equipment specified in that Section and be provided in the order listed below, per Specification Section. 1. Copies of all approved submittals/shop drawings. 2. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions and parts lists of all items or equipment. Where manufacturer's data includes several types or models, the applicable type or model shall be clearly designated. 3. Startup and shutdown procedures. 4. Flow diagrams. 5. Test records. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Lubrication instructions detailing type of lubricant, amount, and intervals recommended by manufacturer for each item of equipment. 8. Owner's written acknowledgement of satisfactory completion of instruction period. C. Furnish three copies of manuals to Architect for approval and distribution to Owner. Deliver manuals no less than 30 days prior to acceptance of equipment to permit Owner's personnel to become familiar with equipment and operation prior to acceptance. D. Operating instructions: Upon completion of installation or when Owner accepts portions of building and equipment for operational use, instruct Owner's operating personnel in any or all parts of all systems. Factory -trained personnel shall perform instructions. 1.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE AND FORMAT A. This Article supplements Division 1. B. Submittal Cover Sheet 1. Submittal data for each product shall include a copy of the following cover sheet completely filled out. Incomplete or incorrect cover sheet submittal shall constitute reason for rejection. 2. Material submittals shall be organized by specification section. All items requiring a submittal per each specification section shall be combined into a single submittal. Provide each section/item within that submittal with its own cover sheet labeled and tagged to match the drawings. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-3 SHOP DRAWING COVER SHEET PROJECT: CONTRACTOR: DIVISION NO.: SECTION NO.: DESCRIPTION: CONTRACT DRAWING REFERENCE NO.: EQUIPMENT TAG: SUBMISSION (CIRCLE ONE): FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, FOURTH DATE: INFORMATION AND CHECKLIST: 1. Contractor's Log #ID 2. Name, address, and phone number of supplier. 3' Are all specified or scheduled items included and exactly match scheduled/specified items? Yes No 4. Is this item a substitution? Yes No 5. Are deviations clearly identified? Yes No 6. Does equipment fit space shown on construction docu- ments, coordination drawings, and actual field conditions? Yes No 7. Has support, erection, weights, and installation been coor- dinated with all trades? Yes No 8. Does the proposed installation void warranties and/or vio- late UL or code requirements? Yes No 9. Does this material/equipment add expense to any other trade or project costs? Yes No 10. Does equipment require interface with other trades? List divisions and specifics requiring coordination? Yes No 11. Is control interface coordinated? Yes No 12. List electrical characteristics (V/Ph/A) 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-4 C. Multiple Re -submittals: The Engineer will review the first submittal from the contractor and respond with comments, and will review one re -submittal for the same item(s) from the contractor and respond with comments. If the contractor is required to make subsequent submittals for the same item(s) the Engineer shall be compensated by the contractor for the time to review each subsequent re -submittal. The contractor shall agree to compensate the Engineer a minimum of $500 per each re -submittal item. D. Shop Drawings showing layouts of systems shall contain sufficient plans, elevations, sections, details and schematics to describe work clearly. They shall be 1/4 inches = 1 foot 0 inch scale unless specified otherwise. E. Shop drawings and submittals showing manufacturer's product data shall contain detailed dimensional drawings, accurate and complete description of materials of construction, manufacturer's published performance characteristics and capacity ratings (performance data, alone, is not acceptable), electrical requirements and wiring diagrams. Drawings shall clearly indicate location (terminal block or wire number), voltage and function for all field terminations, and other information necessary to demonstrate compliance with all requirements of Contract Documents. F. Provide shop drawing submittals showing details of piping connections to ALL equipment. If connection details are not submitted and connections are found to be installed incorrectly in the field, this contractor shall reinstall them within the original contract price. G. Shop drawings for different systems and equipment shall be bound separately by specification section as indicated above and not bound by manufacturer. Each separate submittal shall have its own transmittal and cover letter. Submittals which contain different specification section systems bound together may be returned un-reviewed for re -submittal. 1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel." B. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of different electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified at the contractor's expense. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. C. All electrical components, devices and accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Skid -mounted or packaged assemblies shall be listed and labeled as an assembly, not just the individual components. D. Fire -Resistance Ratings: For piping, conduit and wiring penetrations, provide penetration firestopping devices tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 814 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." E. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. The Engineer's design for each product is based on the manufacturer listed in the schedule or shown on the drawings. In Part 2 of some technical specifications, other manufacturers are listed as being acceptable. The listing of a manufacturer as acceptable does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any submittals made are for products that meet or exceed the specifications included herein. These are acceptable only if, as a minimum, they: a. Meet all performance criteria listed in the schedules and outlined in the specification. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-5 b. Have identical operating characteristics to those called for in the specification. For example, a two-stroke diesel generator will not be acceptable if a four-stroke model is specified. C. Fit within the available space it was designed for, including space for maintenance and component removal, with no modification to either the space or the product. Clearances to walls, ceilings and other equipment will be at least equal to those shown on the design drawings. The fact that a manufacturer's name appears as acceptable shall not be taken to mean that the Engineer has determined that the manufacturer's products will fit within the available space - this determination is solely the responsibility of the contractor. d. Products must adhere to all architectural considerations including but not limited to: being of the same color as the product scheduled or specified, fitting within architectural enclosures and details, and for diffusers, lighting and plumbing fixtures - being the same size and of the same physical appearance as scheduled or specified products. e. All equipment shall be labeled or listed by the National Board of Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) where such labeling or listing exists for such material. 1.12 TEMPORARY SERVICES/CONTINUITY OF UTILITY SERVICES A. In the absence of specific requirements in Division 1, comply with the following procedures for shut -downs. B. Provide temporary services where project construction schedule requires extended shut downs of existing equipment and/or systems. Temporary services include the necessary equipment and/or systems to maintain continuity of services. Extended shut downs are interruptions of existing services for a period of time longer than that acceptable to the Owner. C. Contractor shall coordinate any shutdowns of existing systems as follows: 1. Give proper notice to Owner when making shutdowns; a minimum of fourteen full days is required. 2. Minimize timeline of shutdowns of any system. 3. Provide temporary services where required and perform shutdowns and tie-ins at a time convenient to Owner. 4. Contractor shall be responsible for completing and filing the Owner's shutdown notice questionnaire. 5. Perform required survey and inspection work required by the notice for shutdown. 6. All life safety systems shall be returned to service at the end of each work day, when work is being performed on the systems. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all associated appurtenances necessary to ensure that the systems are in proper working condition at all times. 1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect equipment/materials from damage during shipping, storage, handling and installation. Delivery equipment/materials to the site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material. B. The Contractor shall provide for enclosed storage, when equipment/materials are stored on -site and prior to building "dry -in", to prevent any damage resulting from inclement weather or construction traffic. Specialties shall not be stored outdoors. C. Equipment/materials, stored or installed, found to be damaged shall be replaced with new by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Owner and at no additional expense. Do not store equipment with PVC material with exposure to direct sunlight. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection. This is applicable for all Division 23 sections. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 CEILING ACCESS AND ACCESS PANELS A. Access panels are generally not shown on the drawings, but they are required to be provided by the Division 1 Contractor. Divisions 23 contractor shall closely coordinate all required access panels with the Division 1 Contractor. B. Provide proper access to materials and equipment that require inspection, replacement, repair or service, and coordinate their delivery with the installing Trade. If proper access cannot be provided, confer with Architect as to best method of approach for minimizing effect of reduced access which may result. C. The maximum distance from the ceiling line to serviceable equipment (i.e., air terminal boxes, valve handles, volume damper handles, etc.) shall be 24 inches unobstructed, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. D. Coordinate and prepare a location, size, and function schedule of access panels required to fully service equipment and deliver to a representative of the installing Trade. Furnish and install distinctively colored buttons (color as selected by Architect) in finished ceiling to identify all access panels. E. Ceilings consisting of lay -in or removable splined tiles do not require access panels. Fire, control dampers, valves and equipment located above ceiling shall have location marked with color -coded identification screws attached to the ceiling "grid." Location shall be noted on record drawings. F. Furnish access panels for installation under other Sections for valves or other items installed under this Division that require access and are concealed in floor, wall, furred space or above ceiling. Coordinate selection with other Sections supplying similar access panels. Color of panel shall be selected by the Architect. G. Access panels shall have same fire rating classification as surface penetrated. Rated access panels must have U.L. Label. H. Panels shall be at least 12 inches x 12 inches; access panels at equipment (VAV boxes, fan boxes and others) shall be at least 18 inches x 18 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRE -BID SITE VISIT A. Before submitting bid, visit and carefully examine site to identify existing conditions and difficulties that will affect work of this division. No extra payment will be allowed for additional work caused by unfamiliarity with site conditions that are visible or readily construed by an experienced observer. B. Contractor shall visit job site to familiarize himself with the specific location of the new equipment installations in existing areas, to ensure there is adequate access for the installation of equipment. All entries, pathways, corridors, stairwells, etc., that may be used to install equipment shall be investigated. All existing conditions and potential obstructions that may impede access and installation shall be addressed prior to equipment purchasing/ordering. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-7 C. The documentation of existing conditions was derived from As -Built documents and are in part unverified. Actual existing conditions shall be verified prior to commencement of work. 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. All equipment shall be installed per the manufacturer's installation requirements. B. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. D. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. E. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. F. If it is determined that in order to install equipment in an existing space, disassembling of the equipment will be required, the Architect shall be notified immediately, prior to ordering equipment. Confirmation that equipment factory warranties will not be voided shall be confirmed in writing. Arrangements for factory -authorized assembly at the job site shall then be made and be considered part of the construction cost 3.3 PAINTING A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting." B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. D. Fireproofing: 1. Clips, hangers, clamps, supports and other attachments to surfaces to be fireproofed shall be installed, insofar as possible, prior to start of spray fiber work. 2. Piping and other items which would interfere with proper application of fireproofing shall be installed after completion of spray fiber work. 3. Patching and repairing of fireproofing due to cutting or damaging to fireproofing during course of work specified under this Section shall be performed by installer of fireproofing and paid for by trade responsible for damage and shall not constitute grounds for extra cost to Owner. 3.5 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth-Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-8 3.6 WELDING A. Weld only by approved acetylene or electric welding processes and welders shall hold certificate from approved insurance company. B. Conduct test to demonstrate suitability of procedures to be used in making welds, which conform to specified requirements. C. Specification for welding procedure shall meet requirements of Welding Qualifications, Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and ANSI B31.1. D. Align components. No strain shall be placed on weld during welding. No part of pipe shall be offset more than 20% of thickness. Set flanges and branches properly. E. Welder and Brazing Qualification: 1. Test welders to demonstrate ability to make acceptable welds. Tests conducted for qualification of welder for work under one Division or Section shall not necessarily qualify welder for work under another Division or Section. 2. Tests shall be as prescribed for welder qualification in Section IX of the ASME code. 3. Records of such tests shall be as follows: Each welder shall be assigned an identifying number, letter or symbol. Identifying mark shall be stamped adjacent to welds made by this welder. Identification shall be at top of horizontal piping and at front of vertical piping. 4. Maintain record of welders employed, showing dates and results of tests and identifying mark assigned to each welder. Certify records and make them accessible to Owner's project representative and/or project manager. Before completion of project, one copy of records shall be turned over to Owner. 5. No qualification shall be older than three years when welder commences work on this project. If welder has not welded in required welding process for a period of six months, he shall be re -certified. F. Welding Tests 1. As designated by Architect, remove welds for destructive testing or for testing by non-destructive means. Tests shall be as determined by Architect. 2. If, in Architect's opinion, welds so tested do not meet requirements of Sections VIII and IX of ASME, then the Contractor shall pay for the costs of the tests. Remove welds welded by that welder, at no cost to the Owner. Rewelding shall be performed by qualified welder other than welder whose welds did not pass test. Welders whose welds were defective shall not be employed on site for remainder of project. 3. Welding of stanchions, brackets, anchors and other welding not performed on pipe joints shall be in accordance with requirements of AWS specifications and requirements. 3.7 INSTALLATION ONLY ITEMS: A. Where this contractor is required to install items which he does not purchase, he shall coordinate their delivery and be responsible for their unloading from delivery vehicles and for their safe handling and field storage up to the time of installation. This contractor shall be responsible for: 1. Any necessary field assembly and internal connections, as well as mounting in place of the items, including the purchase and installation of all dunnage supporting members and fastenings necessary to adapt them to architectural and structural conditions. 2. Their connection to building systems including the purchase and installation of all terminating fittings necessary to adapt and connect them to the building systems. B. This Contractor shall carefully examine such items upon delivery. Claims that any of these items have been received in such condition that their installation will require procedures beyond the reasonable scope of work of this Contractor will be considered only if presented in writing within one week of their date of delivery. Unless such claims have been submitted, this Contractor shall be fully responsible for the complete reconditioning or replacement of the damaged items. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-9 3.8 PIPING SYSTEMS — COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping to permit valve servicing. E. Install escutcheons for exposed piping penetrations of walls, ceilings and floors. F. Fire -Resistance -Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe, conduit and wiring penetrations. Seal penetrations with fire- and smoke -stop materials. Refer to Division 07 for firestopping and fill materials. G. Waterproof Penetrations: Maintain integrity of waterproof roof, wall and floor penetrations for pipe, conduit and equipment support penetrations. Seal penetrations with waterproof materials with clamps, sleeves, flashings, pipe boots and/or pipe curb assemblies as detailed or specified. Refer to Division 07 for waterproofing methods and materials when not specified in this section. H. If, after project is in operation, any piping systems, coils or other apparatus are stratified or air bound (by vacuum or pressure), they shall be re -piped with new approved and necessary fittings, air vents, or vacuum breakers at no extra cost to the Owner. If connections are concealed in furring, floors, or ceilings, this trade shall bear all expenses of cutting, patching and refinishing construction and finish, leaving same in as good condition as before it was disturbed. 3.9 CLEANING A. Cleaning shall be performed prior to system start-up. B. Ductwork 1. Ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned so that no dirt or dust will be discharged from diffusers, registers or grilles, when system is operated. 2. Clean all ductwork both internally and externally to remove all dirt, plaster dust or other foreign materials. When external surfaces of ductwork are rusted, clean and restore surfaces to original condition. 3. Provide temporary connections required for cleaning. Provide cheesecloth for openings during cleaning. 4. Replace filters prior to final inspection and testing. C. Piping 1. General: a. After all piping systems have been pressure tested and approved for tightness, flush and clean piping as specified and as required by codes. b. Furnish pipe cleaning chemicals, chemical feed equipment, materials and labor necessary to flush and clean piping. C. Permanently install necessary chemical injection fittings complete with stop valves. d. Monitor the water temperatures and prevent the heat generated by the pump circulating the water from causing the water temperature to exceed the temperature ratings of the pipe, pumps, and other components of the piping system during the flushing and cleaning process. e. Contractor to provide a portable temporary pumping apparatus for the purpose of flushing and cleaning. Pump shall be adequate to provide the required velocities necessary for the process. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-10 f. When external surfaces of piping are rusted, clean and restore surfaces to original condition. 2. Flushing: a. All water side equipment control valves, strainers, etc., shall be bypassed prior to and during the flushing process. b. Flush all water, steam and condensate systems clear of all dirt and foreign matter with all pumps bypassed. All flushing to be at a circulation rate of 6 f.p.s. C. Maintain continuous blowdown and make-up, as required during flushing operation. d. Once flushing is complete and prior to cleaning, all final connections to equipment shall be performed. e. Water samples taken from the system during flushing shall determine when the system is ready for the cleaning process. 3. Cleaning: a. Clean all pipeline strainer baskets and return to original condition or replace with new baskets prior to the pipe cleaning process. b. The cleaning chemicals shall be designed to remove deposition from construction, such as pipe dope, oils, loose mill scale, and other extraneous silt and mud. The products shall inhibit corrosion of the various metals in the system and shall be safe to handle and use with normal chemical safety equipment, i.e., gloves and safety glasses. Effectiveness of the product shall be such that the water need only be at ambient temperatures. C. During the cleaning procedure, remove strainers, automatic air vents, flow regulators and any other item that would be affected by the clean and flush procedure. All control valves and coils should be set up for wide open, full flow. d. After initial flushing of a system, use portable pumping apparatus for a continuous 24 hour circulation of a cold water detergent equal to Nalco 2567 cleaner. e. After circulating for the prescribed time, systems shall then be drained and flushed until the total alkalinity or conductivity of the rinse water is not more than 20% higher than the readings for the make-up water. Refill with clean water, and treat with scale and corrosion inhibitor. Contractor shall furnish the chemicals, supervise the cleaning, test the water after flushing, and shall provide a report that certifies successful cleaning and flushing of the piping. 3.10 CONTAINMENT ROOM SEALING REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. Work that penetrates or is mounted on ceilings, walls, floors or other surfaces throughout containment rooms shall be sealed as outlined below in addition to sealing specified elsewhere in the Specifications. 2. Completely seal the perimeter joints around all insulated and uninsulated penetrations and surface -mounted items. B. Products 1. Acceptable sealant materials shall be products that conform to ASTM C920 "Specifications for Elastomeric Joint Sealants". Sealant shall adhere to substrates, and maintain seal under normal expected movements of substrates. 2. Sealant specified herein shall be 732-RTV silicone rubber as manufactured by Dow Chemical Co. or equivalent by GE. Color shall be clear. C. Installation 1. Preparation, priming (as applicable), application, curing and protection of the sealant shall be in conformance with the recommendations of the sealant manufacturer. 2. If necessary, fill voids with backer rods as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 3. Mask edges of exposed joints if required to make neat joints and prevent excessive misplacement of sealant onto exposed surfaces adjacent to joints. 4. Perform sealant work after adjacent painting work is complete and dry. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR14VAC 230500-11 Sealant shall be free of voids, be applied in one continuous bead and be tooled concave and smooth. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-12 SECTION 23 05 10 HVAC DEMOLITION AND ALTERATIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Disconnection of mechanical equipment in selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected mechanical components. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS A. Perform all demolition as needed to accomplish new work. B. Do not rely solely on mechanical drawings to determine extent of general construction demolition. Refer to architectural demolition plans for the exact extent of general construction demolition required by this contract. C. This Contractor is responsible for all charges, fees etc. incurred as a result of the mechanical portion of the demolition. D. Prior to demolition or alteration of structures, the following shall be accomplished: 1. Review available record documents of the existing construction. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. 2. Coordinate sequencing with Owner and other Contractors. 3. Coordinate means to separate construction zones from non -renovated zones to prevent the spread of dust, fumes and debris. 4. Coordinate means to provide exhaust and makeup air to maintain the construction zone at an adequate negative pressure to contain all construction dust and fumes. 5. Except as noted otherwise, remove from the premises, all materials and equipment removed in the demolition work. 6. Equipment noted to be removed and turned over to the Owner, shall be delivered to the Owner at a place and time he so designates. 7. Where the materials are to be turned over to the Owner or reused and installed by the Contractor, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to maintain the condition of the materials and equipment equal to that existing before work began. Damaged materials or equipment shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 8. Survey and record condition of existing facilities to remain in place that may be affected by demolition operations. After demolition operations are completed, survey conditions again and restore existing facilities to their pre -demolition condition, at no additional cost to Owner. 9. Salvage equipment scheduled for reuse in new work or scheduled to be delivered to Owner's storage facility. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 HVAC DEMOLITION AND ALTERATIONS 230510-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMOLITION A. Existing mechanical equipment in conflict with new construction shall be removed and/or relocated as indicated on the drawings, as directed or needed. This Contractor shall remove all mechanical equipment released from service as a result of construction, and no equipment removed shall be reused, except as specifically directed on the drawings or elsewhere herein. All mechanical components shall be stored on site for Owner assessment. Any components not retained by the Owner shall be removed by the contractor. Properly dispose or remove from site any items not retained by Owner. B. Any existing services or equipment not shown on the drawings and which are logically expected to be continued in service and which may be interrupted or disturbed during construction, shall be reconnected in an approved manner. Provide temporary ducts, pipes, controls, etc., as needed to prevent interruption of service to occupied areas caused by demolition operations. In addition, any ductwork, piping or equipment which may require relocation or rerouting as a result of construction, shall be considered a part of the work of this section and shall be done by this Contractor with no additional compensation, provided that the referenced relocation is discernable from the pre -bid review of the site, and associated documents. C. This Contractor shall remove all ductwork, piping, straps, and existing equipment, being discontinued or removed due to construction. Abandoned or removed services shall be disconnected and capped at the perimeter of the project or as required elsewhere in the documents. D. The existing building is to remain in operation during construction. This Contractor shall coordinate all work including shutdowns for removing or adding equipment that will interfere with the present operation of the facility with the Owner and Construction Manager. E. All existing equipment that is to remain shall be cleaned inside and out. Clean all pipeline strainer baskets and return to original condition or replace with new baskets. All dirt, plaster dust and other foreign matter shall be blown and/or cleaned from coils, terminal devices, diffusers, registers, and grilles. Touch up paint equipment in exposed areas. F. Ductwork systems indicated to remain shall be wiped or vacuumed clean both internally and externally to remove all dirt, plaster dust or other foreign materials. G. Existing ductwork systems that are being extended or modified to serve this project shall be cleaned inside and out in accordance with the National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) standards. This includes the addition of access panels necessary to reach the complete duct system back to its air handling unit or fan. H. Existing ductwork in remodeled area that is not being removed shall be sealed as necessary to comply with SMACNA standards and requirements of ductwork section of the specifications. I. All coring that is required for mechanical work shall be done by this Contractor. J. All cutting and patching required for mechanical work shall be by this Contractor. K. This Contractor shall provide required additional support for existing ductwork and piping in remodeled area that is not being removed and is not properly supported. L. When existing ductwork, piping, or related equipment in remodeled areas prevents the installation of other work, remove and reinstall existing materials, making necessary modifications and transitions to coordinate with other trades. M. Maintain construction zone at adequate negative pressure by providing exhaust by mechanical means until all work which creates dust or fumes is completed. N. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed unless noted otherwise. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 HVAC DEMOLITION AND ALTERATIONS 230510-2 1. Components to Be Removed: Remove associated HVAC system components including all associated piping, ductwork, supports, grilles, power and controls. 2. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 4. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 5. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 6. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 7. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 8. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. O. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. P. Contractor shall verify that all equipment to be re -used is in satisfactory and functional condition. Notify the architect and engineer of any deficiencies before removing the equipment. Q. The contractor shall perform testing of any air or hydronic system that is to be modified to identify existing flows and pressures. These values shall be used to return flows in sections to remain to pre -renovation values after the renovation. 3.2 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. Report damage or defects to Architect 3.3 TESTING A. Existing equipment shall be tested before demolition begins to determine existing operating conditions and capacities. Upon completion of all new work, the existing equipment shall be rebalanced to serve the new areas and maintain existing capacities in existing areas. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 HVAC DEMOLITION AND ALTERATIONS 230510-3 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for all air and water systems including, but not limited to the following: 1. Air Systems. 2. HVAC equipment quantitative -performance settings. 3. Space pressurization testing and adjusting. 4. Existing systems TAB 5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 6. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section. 191 1111: W k1Lll IlL47►`K A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper. B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities. C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, and other pollutants. D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated. E. NC: Noise Criteria. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results. G. RC: Room Criteria. H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order. I. Smoke -Control System: An engineered system that uses fans to produce airflow and pressure differences across barriers to limit smoke movement. Smoke -Control Zone: A space within a building that is enclosed by smoke barriers and is a part of a zoned smoke -control system. K. Stair Pressurization System: A type of smoke -control system that is intended to positively pressurize stair towers with outdoor air by using fans to keep smoke from contaminating the stair towers during an alarm condition. L. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump. M. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-1 N. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. O. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested. P. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. Q. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system. R. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and reporting TAB procedures. A. Qualification Data: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Projecfs TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3. C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 90 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. D. Certified TAB reports. E. Sample report forms. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by AABC or NEBB. 1. The supervisor directly in charge of this testing shall have a TAB certificate and shall have not less than two years of experience in TAB work. B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. 1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following: a. Submittal distribution requirements. b. The Contract Documents examination report. C. TAB plan. d. Work schedule and Project -site access requirements. e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow. C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following: I. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-2 2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems." or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification." F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer. 1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration. G. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, "Air Balancing." H. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "System Balancing." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. B. Phased TAB: The project may require startup and initial checkout to be executed in phases. This phasing will be planned and scheduled in a coordination meeting by the construction team, led by the TAB agency. C. Renovation of Existing Systems: Where a portion of a system is not included within the Scope of Work boundary on the drawings, testing of the entire existing affected systems are required prior to construction. The first test shall establish existing water and air flows to sub -mains, branches and run -outs to areas which are not scheduled for renovation. The final test shall reset flows of water and air to sub -mains, branches and run -outs outside renovated area to the recorded values from the first test. Include total capacity test of any scheduled existing equipment. Include flow test results of first and final balancing of existing systems in final report. 1.7 DEFICIENCIES A. Any deficiency in the installation or performance of a system or component observed by the TAB agency shall be brought to the attention of the appropriate responsible Contractor or person. B. The work necessary to correct items on the deficiency list shall be performed and verified by the affected contractor or sub -contractor before the TAB agency returns to retest. C. The TAB agency shall return to the site to readjust systems that do not test within specified requirements. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the efforts of factory -authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities. B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-3 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on national certifying agency forms stating that the national certifying agency will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions: 1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. 1. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow - control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents." D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems --Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6 and/or ASHRAE "Fundamentals Handbook" Duct Design Chapter. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions. F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine system and equipment test reports. H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow -control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. 1. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing. J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-4 K. Examine terminal units, such as variable -air -volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. L. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed. M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations. N. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. O. Examine heat -transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. P. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. Q. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: 1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable -air -volume terminals. 4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. 5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. 6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values. R. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature -control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air -pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 TAB CONSTRUCTION ADMINSTRATION SERVICES A. Project Site Observations: During construction, the TAB agency shall observe the installation of pipe systems, sheet metal work, temperature controls, and other component parts of the HVAC systems. Provide a minimum of two site observations when HVAC systems are approximately 50% and 80% complete and issue Field Reports indicating observations and noted deficiencies. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in the TAB firm's national certifying agency: AABC or NEBB; and this section. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-5 Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, "Air Balancing." B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper -control positions, valve position indicators, fan -speed - control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. 3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as -built" duct layouts. C. For variable -air -volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outside -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust -air dampers, through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start -stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air -handling unit components. L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system. M. Fans with Adjustable Speed Drives should be provided with the largest non -overloading sheaves available to match the "full speed" of the motor in Bypass or Hand mode of the Drive. N. For constant speed fans, after the system is balanced, fixed pitch sheaves shall replace the variable pitch sheaves for all motors using multiple belt drives. O. Outside Air. Test and adjust the outside air on applicable equipment. Outside air damper percent open shall be documented and provided to BAS contractor. P. Fan Static Pressure Profile. Provide a diagram of each fan and air handling unit showing the static pressure profile through each pressure drop device (coil, damper, fan, coil, dampers, etc) Q. Energy Efficiency Balancing Approach: At least one run -out volume damper shall be full open in efforts to provide an energy efficient balanced system. R. Room Airflow Tolerance. While the air outlet tolerances are +/- 10%, the Room total air balance shall also be within 10% of the scheduled room air flow. S. Provide duct smoke detector air differential pressure test for each duct detector in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to insure detectors have been properly installed. Contractor shall corr ect any deficient installation and TAB agency shall retest. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT -VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR 14VAC 230593-6 a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. C. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air -handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air -handling and air -treating equipment. a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters. 3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 5. Make required adjustments to pulley/sheave sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan -speed changes. Replace pulley/sheaves to provide the required fan rpm. 6. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan -motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower (kW). B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct -reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. E. CAV System Static Pressure Control: 1. After balancing the terminal units of the system, simulate the dirty filter pressure drop conditions. 2. Work with the controls contractor to set the fan pressure control tracking setpoint to maintain the specified flow. Record in the TAB report the static pressure requirement at the static pressure sensor. Optimize the balancing so the static pressure setpoint is as low 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-7 as possible to achieve airflow at the furthest diffuser with simulated dirty filter pressure drop. 3. Record the fan adjustable speed drive speeds at both the clean and dirty filter conditions. Note that the fan shall be sheaved so the adjustable speed drive should be less than 100% at dirty filter conditions. 3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR SYSTEM BALANCING WITH AIR FILTERS A. For supply or exhaust systems with filters, the systems shall be balanced with clean filters, then re -tested with simulated dirty filter pressure drop conditions. B. Dirty Filter Simulation: Use a filter area blank off plate made of cardboard or plastic to simulate the dirty filter pressure drop. C. Document main traversed air flows with both clean and dirty filter pressure drops. D. Coordinate with Contractor to replace the construction filters with new filters prior to TAB. E. If not provided in the Contract Documents, use the following values for dirty filter pressure drops. Filter Assumed Clean DP Dirty DP 30% Pre (flat) 0.2" 0.4" 30% Pre (angled) 0.25" 0.5" >90% 0.75" 1.5" 99% 0.75" 1.5" 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT -TRANSFER COILS A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Entering- and leaving -water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop. B. Manual Balancing Valves (pressure dependent valves): Measure the following data for each coil or device: 1. Valve type 2. Location 3. Valve differential pressure reading 4. Coil pressure drop 5. GPM (L/sec) 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature -control system. B. For Air Handling Units: Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive eight -hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied. This can be accomplished thru the Building Automation System. C. Measure outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures. 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR SPACE PRESSURIZATION MEASUREMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Before testing for space pressurization, observe the space to verify the integrity of the space boundaries. Verify that windows and doors are closed and applicable safing, gaskets, and sealants are installed. Inspect the ceiling integrity, as well as the integrity of the separation walls 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-8 above the ceiling level. Report deficiencies and postpone testing until after the reported deficiencies are corrected. B. Measure, adjust, and record the pressurization of each room, each zone, and each building by adjusting the supply, return, and exhaust airflows to achieve the indicated conditions. C. Measure space pressure differential where pressure is used as the design criteria, and measure airflow differential where differential airflow is used as the design criteria for space pressurization. 1. For pressure measurements, measure and record the pressure difference between the intended spaces at the door with all doors in the space closed. Record the high-pressure side, low-pressure side, and pressure difference between each adjacent space. 2. For applications with cascading levels of space pressurization, begin in the most critical space and work to the least critical space. 3. Test room pressurization first, then zones, and finish with building pressurization. D. To achieve indicated pressurization: 1. For positive pressure spaces, maintain the supply airflow design requirements and to obtain additional pressurization reduce the exhaust and return airflow to achieve the required pressure difference. 2. For negative pressure spaces, maintain the exhaust/return airflow required and to obtain additional pressurization reduce supply airflow to achieve the required pressure difference E. For spaces with pressurization being monitored and controlled automatically, observe and adjust the controls to achieve the desired set point. 1. Compare the values of the measurements taken to the measured values of the control system instruments and report findings. 2. Check the repeatability of the controls by successive tests designed to temporarily alter the ability to achieve space pressurization. Test overpressurization and underpressurization, and observe and report on the system's ability to revert to the set point. 3. For spaces served by variable -air -volume supply and exhaust systems, measure space pressurization at indicated maximum design airflow and minimum airflow conditions. 4. At minimum airflow conditions verify that when the entrance door is open that the airflows from the room with the higher pressure flows into the room with the lower pressure. If this does not happen document it and report this deficiency. F. In spaces that employ multiple modes of operation, such as normal mode and emergency mode or occupied mode and unoccupied mode, measure, adjust, and record data for each operating mode. G. Record indicated conditions and corresponding initial and final measurements. Report deficiencies. 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. 2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 3. Check the condition of filters. 4. Check the condition of coils. 5. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate drain trap. 6. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 7. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-9 B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. 1. New filters are installed. 2. Coils are clean and fins combed. 3. Drain pans are clean. 4. Fans are clean. 5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected. C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows and determine the new fan, speed, filter, and coil face velocity. 2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. 3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated airflow and water flow rates. If 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required. 4. Air balance each air outlet. 3.12 TEMPERATURE -CONTROL VERIFICATION A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions. C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low -temperature controllers). E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators. F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems. I. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply. J. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations. 3.13 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 percent to plus 10 percent. This includes duct distribution loss. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus 10 percent to minus 10 percent, as long as the overall room is balanced properly and room minimum code required total air changes per hour are maintained. 3. Heating -Water Flow Rate: Plus 10 percent to minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling -Water Flow Rate: Plus 10 percent to minus 10 percent. 3.14 PROGRESS REPORTING A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-10 proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.15 FINAL REPORT A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter -quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust -air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. C. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils if applicable. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Settings for supply -air, static -pressure controller. g. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single -line diagram and include the following: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-11 1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. E. Air -Handling Unit Test Reports: For air -handling units with coils, include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Location. C. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center, and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number of belts, make, and size. k. Number of filters, type, and size. 2. Motor Data: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower (KW) and rpm. C. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full -load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center, and amount of adjustments in inches. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. C. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static -pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat coil static -pressure differential in inches wg. g. Cooling coil static -pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating coil static -pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outside airflow in cfm. j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Outside -air damper position. 1. Return -air damper position. F. Apparatus -Coil Test Reports: 1. Coil Data: a. System identification. b. Location. C. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft.. h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): 042.21-177.01 Advendlealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -12 a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. C. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering -water temperature in deg F. k. Leaving -water temperature in deg F. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering -air temperature in deg F. C. Leaving -air temperature in deg F. d. Air temperature differential in deg F. e. Entering -air static pressure in inches wg. f. Leaving -air static pressure in inches wg. g. Air static -pressure differential in inches wg. h. Low -fire fuel input in Btuh. i. High -fire fuel input in Btuh. j. Manifold pressure in psig. k. High -temperature -limit setting in deg F. 1. Operating set point in Btuh. in. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btuh. G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. C. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center, and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower (KW) and rpm. C. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full -load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number of belts, make, and size. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. C. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. C. Suction static pressure in inches wg. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-13 H. Round, Flat -Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System and air -handling unit number. b. Location and zone. C. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft.. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cftn. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig. 1. Air -Terminal -Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air -handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. C. Test apparatus used. d. Area served. e. Air -terminal -device make. f. Air -terminal -device number from system diagram. g. Air -terminal -device type and model number. h. Air -terminal -device size. i. Air -terminal -device effective area in sq. ft.. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cftm. b. Air velocity in fpm. C. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F. J. System -Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air -handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. C. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfin. b. Entering -water temperature in deg F. C. Leaving -water temperature in deg F. d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. e. Entering -air temperature in deg F. f. Leaving -air temperature in deg F. K. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. C. Application. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR 14VAC 230593-14 d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 3.16 GAUGE AND SENSOR ACCURACY VALIDATION A. The accuracy of the project's installed gauges, thermometers and sensors shall be validated by the TAB Contractor. The TAB Contractor shall use calibrated gauges and thermometers and compare the values against the contractor installed gauges, thermometers and sensors. 1. Thermometers and BAS sensors — Water Systems a. The installed thermometers and sensors shall be within the following tolerances of the TAB contractor's calibrated temperature range at normal system operating temperatures: 1) Chilled water: 0.5°F (0.25°C) 2) Hot Water: 2.0°F (1.0°C) b. TAB shall work with the BAS contractor to calibrate sensors. C. TAB shall notify appropriate responsible contractor of gauge or sensor deficiency for the above to be re -calibrated or replaced. d. Replaced gauges shall be verified for accuracy by TAB. 2. Pressure Gauges and BAS Sensors — Air Systems a. The installed pressure gauges and BAS pressure sensors shall be within 10% of the TAB contractor's calibrated gauge at the normal operating pressures. b. TAB shall notify the responsible contractor of gauge or sensor deficiency for the above to be re -calibrated or replaced. C. Replaced gauges shall be verified for accuracy by TAB. d. The following are the tolerances for various pressure gauges and sensors: 1) Filters: +/- 10% 2) Duct: +/- 10% 3) Space: +/-0.01" 4) Isolation Room: +/- 0.001" wg 3. Thermometers and BAS Sensors — Air Systems a. The installed duct thermometers shall be within IF of the TAB contractors calibrated gauge. b. Duct or air handling unit mounted BAS sensors shall be within 1F of TAB contractor's calibrated gauge. This includes OA, MA, coil, leaving air, and return air sensors. C. TAB shall notify responsible contractor of accuracy deficiency, for the device to be recalibrated or replaced. 4. Air Flow Measuring Stations a. The TAB Contractor shall validate the accuracy of air flow measuring stations by taking traverse readings. The accuracy shall be within 5%. b. TAB shall notify responsible contractor of accuracy deficiency for the device to be recalibrated or replaced. 3.17 INSPECTIONS A. Initial Inspection: 1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the Final Report. 2. Randomly check the following for each system: a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. C. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point. d. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-15 e. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. f. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report. B. Final Inspection: 1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Owner or Architect. 2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Owner or Architect. 3. Owner or Architect shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. 4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." 5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. 6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report. 7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the final payment. C. Authority Having Jurisdiction Inspection 1. Attend inspection by AHJ. A completed and approved certified copy of the TAB report shall be available at the project site at the AHJ inspection. This includes AHCA and OSHPD inspections. 3.18 DEFICIENCY RESOLUTION A. As testing progresses and a deficiency is identified, the TAB contractor shall coordinate with the Contractors to identify the deficiency for a timely resolution of the deficiency. B. The TAB contractor shall include in their base bid, the initial test adjust balance, plus returning to the site for two additional visits to retest systems that do not test within specification requirements. Any additional testing requirements will fall under requirements listed under Cost of Retesting. C. Cost of Retesting 1. The cost for any additional testing beyond the requirements in the paragraph above shall be borne by the installing Contractors, if they are responsible for the deficiency. If they are not responsible, then reasonable costs for retesting shall be negotiated with the Contractor. 2. The time for the Architect/Engineer to direct any retesting required because a specific system report to have been successfully completed, but determined during testing to be faulty, will be back -charged to the Contractor, who may choose to recover costs from the party responsible for stating the system was complete and ready for testing. D. Failure Due to Manufacturer Defect: If 10%, or three (whichever is greater), of identical pieces (size does not constitute a difference) of equipment fails to perform to the Contract Documents (mechanically or substantively) due to manufacturing defect, not allowing it to meet its submitted performance, then all identical units may be considered unacceptable by the TAB agency or the Architect/Engineer. In such case, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with the following: 1. Within one week of notification from the TAB agency, the Contractor or manufacturer's representative shall examine all other identical units making a record of the findings. The 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-16 findings shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer within two weeks of the original notice. 2. Within two weeks of the original notification, the Contractor or manufacturer's representative shall provide a signed and dated written explanation of the problem, cause of failures, etc., and proposed solutions which shall include full equipment submittals. The propose solutions shall not significantly exceed the specification requirements of the original installation. 3. The Architect/Engineer will determine whether a replacement of all identical units or a repair is acceptable. 4. The proposed solution will be installed by the Contractor, and tested for up to one week, upon which the Architect/Engineer will decide whether to accept the solution. 5. Upon acceptance, the Contractor and/or manufacturer shall replace or repair all identical items, at their expense and extend the warranty accordingly, if the original equipment warranty had begun. The replacement/repair work shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one week from when parts can be obtained. 3.19 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near -peak summer and winter conditions, then the TAB contractor shall return to perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near -peak summer and winter conditions. 1. Air handler coil performance test shall be recorded during the opposite season. 2. To verify system calibration, control and operation, test and record 25% of the previously recorded room temperatures (dry bulb and wet bulb). Measurements shall be made near each room sensor or thermostat location in each separate controlled zone. The resulting temperature data shall be included in a revised report with associated thermostat or control setpoint during the tests. Outside temperature and humidity conditions shall also be recorded during the testing periods. 3. Areas of verification include: economizer airflows, building or space pressurization, coil leaving air temperature accuracy. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 17 SECTION 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Mineral fiber. 2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Coatings/Mastics. 5. Lagging adhesives/coatings. 6. Sealants. 7. Factory -applied jackets. 8. Field -applied fabric -reinforcing mesh. 9. Field -applied cloths. 10. Field -applied jackets. 11. Tapes. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water -vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field -applied if any). 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer of insulation product used. B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed. C. Field quality -control reports 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire -test -response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame -spread index of 75 or less, and smoke -developed index of 150 or less. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 1 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field -applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. I . Prefabricate insulation for valves, elbows, tees, flanges and other fittings. 2. lame spread and smoke developed index of 25150 per ASTM E84. 3. Unslit or slit type with self- sealing factory installed tape with overlapping longitudinal seam seal as required to suit the installation. 4. Where scheduled for piping systems where service temperatures exceeds 220 Deg F, insulation shall be EPDM rubber based with service temperature rating of 255 Deg F 255 F minimum. F. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory -applied FSK jacket. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. C. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All -Service Duct Wrap. G. Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB with factory applied jacket. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 HVAC INSULATION 230700-2 a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. C. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series. 2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral -Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195. B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196. C. Mineral -Fiber, Hydraulic -Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. a. K-Flex, 373 B. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 Type I/II. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, H. B. Fuller Construction Products; CP-127/CP-82. b. Foster Products, H. B. Fuller Construction Products; 85-60/85-20. C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 Type I/II for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, H. B. Fuller Construction Products; CP-127/CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Construction Products; 85-60/85-20. D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 2.4 COATINGS/MASTICS A. Vapor -Barrier Coating: Mold Resistant, water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II and must be QPL listed 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Foster Products, H. B. Fuller Construction Products; 30-80 AF. 2. Must comply with ASTM D 5590 with 0 growth rating. 3. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 permat 43-mildry film thickness. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. B. Vapor -Barrier Coating: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products; H.B. Fuller Construction Products; Encacel VNI. b. Foster Products; H.B. Fuller Construction Products; 60-95/60-96. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products; H.B. Fuller Construction Products; CP-10/CP-11. b. Foster Products; H.B. Fuller Construction Products; 46-50. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 HVAC INSULATION 230700-3 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 5. Color: White 2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES/COATINGS A. Description: Mold resistant. Shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, H. B. Fuller Construction Products; CP-137 AF. b. Foster Products, H. B. Fuller Construction Products; 30-36 AF. 2. Must comply with ASTM D 5590 with 0 growth rating. 3. Fire-resistant, water -based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire- resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F. 2.6 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Childers Products, H. B. Fuller Construction Products; CP-76/CP-70. b. Foster Products, H. B. Fuller Construction Products; 30-45/95-50. C. Pittsburgh Corning Pittseal 444N or 727 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Permanently flexible, sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 200 deg F. 5. Color: White, gray, tan, or aluminum B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, H. B. Fuller Construction Products; CP-76/CP-70. b. Foster Products, H. B. Fuller Construction Products; 95-44/30-45. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Gray or Aluminum 2.7 FACTORY -APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory -applied jackets on various applications. When factory -applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 2.8 FIELD -APPLIED FABRIC -REINFORCING MESH A. Woven Glass -Fiber Fabric for Duct and Equipment Insulation: Approximately 0.9 oz/sq. yard. with a thread count of 9 strands by 8 strands/sq. inchfor covering equipment. 1. Foster Mast A Fab 2.9 FIELD -APPLIED JACKETS A. Field -applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Jacket: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. C. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate. 2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 HVAC INSULATION 230700-4 a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field -applied jacket schedules. C. Moisture Barrier for Indoor or Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 3. Stainless -Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M. a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field -applied jacket schedules. C. Moisture Barrier for Indoor and outdoor applications: 3-mil-thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 2.10 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless -steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 HVAC INSULATION 230700-5 I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Install joint sealant for all longitudinal and butt joints. K. Insulation is required for all systems and equipment operating below 70 F and above 105 F. L. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -barrier mastic. I . Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor -barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. M. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. N. Install insulation with factory -applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Cover joints and seams with fab and mastic to maintain vapor seal. 4. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor -barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. O. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. P. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. Q. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. R. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration -control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 HVAC INSULATION 230700-6 insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire -resistive joint sealers. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire -rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 2. Seal penetrations through fire -rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Blanket or Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. C. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with fab and mastic. 4. For all ducts and plenums, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward -clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field - applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with mastic to maintain vapor -barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor -barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 HVAC INSULATION 230700-7 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. All joints, seams and punctures shall be sealed with fabric and mastic. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inchoutward-clinching staples, 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. Cover all joints, seams and punctures with minimum 3" wide glass cloth cloth fabric set in mastic. After first coat is dry, apply second coat of mastic. 7. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 8. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.6 FIELD -APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where glass -cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory -applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless -steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. 3.7 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Ductwork insulation includes all apparatus casings such as air terminal devices, duct heating coils, filters, mixing chambers, sound attenuators, etc., which shall be insulated in accordance with applicable ductwork insulation specifications. B. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Indoor, concealed supply, return, and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply, return, and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 4. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. C. Items Not Insulated: 1. Fibrous -glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 3. Factory -insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory -insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration -control devices. 7. Factory -insulated access panels and doors. 3.8 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Unconditioned spaces shall be considered to be outdoors. B. Concealed supply -air, return -air, and outside -air duct insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. C. Exposed supply -air, return -air, and outside -air duct and plenum insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75-1b/cu. ft. nominal density. 2. Mineral -Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 HVAC INSULATION 230700-8 3.9 INDOOR, FIELD -APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory -applied jacket, install the field - applied jacket over the factory -applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed: 1. None. D. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed: 1. None. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 HVAC INSULATION 230700-9 SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single -wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single -wall round and flat -oval ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports. B. Related Sections include: 1. Division 23 Section "Nonmetal Ducts" for non-metal ductwork. 2. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation" for ductwork external insulation. 3. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound -control devices, duct - mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, fittings and hangers and supports to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and requirements of Part 3Articles. B. Structural Performance: Design duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints to withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible", SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" and ASCE 7 as Delegated Design. C. Comply with applicable SMACNA Standards. D. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 9013, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." E. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. F. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Startup." G. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." H. All system products provided for this project shall conform to NFPA Section 90A and possess a flame spread rating of not over 25 and a smoke developed rating no higher than 50. I. Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, all duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are inside clear dimensions and do not include insulation or duct wall thickness. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 METAL DUCTS 2331 13 - 1 B. Shop Drawings: Completely coordinated with all other trades and include: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop -fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Double line duct layout drawings indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static -pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top and bottom of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire -rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including all dampers (manual, control, fire/smoke), turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. C. Unresolved conflicts between trades shall be clearly noted. D. Delegated -Design Submittal: 1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 5. Design Calculations: Calculations for selecting hangers and supports and, as applicable, seismic restraints. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Plans or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades. The drawings shall include but not be limited to the following items and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, piping and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire -rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. C. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings. B. Welding certificates. C. Field quality -control reports 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/DI.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. 3. AWS D9.IM/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 METAL DUCTS 2331 13 - 2 B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 9013, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All manufactured ductwork and fittings shall be manufactured by a company whose primary business is single wall and double wall spiral duct and fittings and double wall rectangular duct and fittings who has been in business for ten (10) years, minimum. 2.2 SINGLE -WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static -pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA Standards suitable for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, duct reinforcement and other provisions in SMACNA Standards. C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA Standards suitable for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, duct reinforcement and other provisions in SMACNA. D. Fittings: Select according to requirements of the drawings and specifications of similar construction to match duct system. 2.3 SINGLE -WALL MANUFACTURED ROUND AND FLAT -OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Lindab Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC 3. SEMCO Incorporated 4. Lewis & Lambert 5. Crown B. Duct shall be machine formed round and/or flat oval spiral lock seam duct or longitudinal seam duct constructed of galvanized steel as specified suitable for pressure class specified. Use manufactured duct and fittings as indicated on the drawings and as required in accordance with manufacturer's published data. C. The use of lighter gauge single rib ductwork is not allowed. D. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," based on indicated static -pressure class unless otherwise indicated. E. Flat -Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension). F. Transverse Joints: Select slip or flange joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA Standards suitable for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, duct reinforcement and other provisions in SMACNA Standards. 1. Transverse Joints in round ducts larger than 30 Inches in Diameter: Flanged. 2. Transverse joints in flat oval ducts larger than 24" minor or 42" major dimension: Flanged. 3. Transverse joints in round ducts up to 20 inches in diameter: O-ring Seals. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 3 G. Longitudinal Seams: Utilize butt -welded seams fabricated according to SMACNA standards suitable for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, duct reinforcement and other provisions in SMACNA Standards. Fabricate round ducts larger than 84 inches in diameter with longitudinal seam ductwork. Fabricate flat - oval ducts larger than 77 inches in width (major dimension) with longitudinal seam ductwork. H. Spiral Seams: Utilize spiral lock seams fabricated according to SMACNA Standards suitable for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materals involved, duct support intervals and other provisions in SMACNA Standards. Fittings: Select according to requirements of the drawings and specifications of similar construction to match duct system. 2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Stainless -Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 213, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article. D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized -steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, all thread rod, tubing or conduit sized per SMACNA Standards. 2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface -burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame -spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke -developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Water -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 70 percent by volume. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Non-Fibrated. 6. Mold and mildew resistant. 7. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 8. Maximum Static -Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 9. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 10. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single -component, acid -curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 METAL DUCTS 2331 13 - 4 E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at I -inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static -pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM 0-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double -lipped, EPDM 0-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory -fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all -thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc -chromate primer after installation. B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Steel Cables for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Aircraft quality zinc coated galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. D. Steel Cables for Stainless -Steel Ducts: Aircraft quality stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium -plated or Zinc Cast steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic -locking and clamping device. F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. G. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized -steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless -Steel Ducts: Stainless -steel shapes and plates. H. Building Attachment: Galvanized steel or equal corrosion resistant metal suitable for attachment to structure: concrete inserts, beam clamps, concrete anchors and welded studs. Powder - actuated fasteners may be applied if allowed by seismic constraints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Install ducts, hangers and supports according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air -handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Utilize elbows, branch connections and other fittings of the type as shown on the drawings and as specified. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements for seismic installations. D. Install round and flat -oval ducts in maximum practical lengths. E. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. F. Install factory- or shop -fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. G. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 METAL DUCTS 2331 13 - 5 H. Install ducts close to walls, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. Maintain a clearance of 6 inches, for rated walls. J. Install ducts as close as possible to underside of beams and joists. K. Route ducts to avoid passing through electrical rooms and technology rooms. L. Where ducts pass through non -fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. M. Install all control dampers, fire dampers, smoke dampers and fire smoke dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories". N. Use splitter dampers and/or extractors only where manual dampers will not accomplish the intended balancing. The use of splitter dampers and/or extractors will not eliminate the need for specified or indicated manual volume dampers. O. Construct branch take off from duct main with a 45 degree entry fitting or conical fitting. Square edge 90 degree take off fittings, including spin in connections, will not be acceptable. P. Use elbows and tees with a center line radius to width or diameter ratio of 1.5 wherever space permits. When a shorter radius elbow is required, provide short radius elbow with full length splitter vanes or mitered elbow with turning vanes. Q. Rectangular Duct — Elbow and Tee Configuration: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Radius with minimum 1.5 radius -to -diameter ratio. 2. Mitered with single wall turning vanes Type RE2 . R. Round and flat oval Duct — Elbow and Tee Configuration: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Radius type with minimum 1.5 radius -to -diameter ratio. 2. Mitered type by duct manufacturer with single wall turning vanes. 3. Adjustable segmented type elbows up to 16 inch may be used for run out ducts to air inlets and outlets. S. Round Elbows, 14 Inches (356 mm) and Larger in Diameter: 5 piece gored Welded. T. When specified in part 2, snap lock ductwork is allowed for run out ducts to air inlets and outlets up to 16 inches. The use of adjustable segmented elbows is allowed for run out ducts to air inlets and outlets up to 16 inches. All longitudinal and transverse seams shall be sealed with duct sealant and additionally secured with sheet metal screws. Snap lock construction will not be accepted on aluminum ductwork. U. Utilize external reinforcements, tie rods and hangers unless size of duct requires internal tie rods. V. All duct hanger straps are required to be screwed to rectangular duct. W. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines" exceeding SMACNA's advanced level of cleanliness. X. Where two different metal ducts meet, the joint shall be installed to prevent metal to metal contact by using proper seal or compound. Y. Outside air intake ducts shall pitch to intakes and drain to outside of building. Provide water tight joints and seams. Blank off all unused portions of louvers with 2 inch board insulation with galvanized sheet metal backing on both sides. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 METAL DUCTS 2331 13 - 6 Z. All return air openings above ceilings shall be provided with a %" mesh aluminum screen. AA. For exterior ductwork, pitch top of duct to prevent water from pooling on top of duct. BB. Provide negative pressure relief fittings downstream of all closer devices and as shown on the plans and/or details (i.e., control fire, combination fire/smoke dampers, etc.). CC. Provide duct accessories included access doors, manual dampers, control dampers, flexible ductwork, flexible connectors, relief doors per Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories". 3.2 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS OF MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK A. Construct duct and fittings with reinforcements in accord with the manufacturer's published data and SMACNA. Remove internal shipping braces if provided. B. Utilize external reinforcements for double wall duct systems. C. Utilize manufacturer's slip type or flanged connectors to connect duct. Use with double wall duct sections to maintain annular space and seal insulation from the air stream. Connectors shall fit tight to the inner duct wall without projecting into the duct air stream. D. All takeoffs or branch connections shall be provided by the duct manufacturer. E. Seal slip joist with duct sealant and secure with sheet metal screws. F. Utilize flanged connectors for duct sizes requiring reinforcement and for flat oval ducts to prevent sagging. G. Seal flanged connectors with approved gasketing and secure flanges with nuts and bolts. H. Install 0-ring joints per manufacturer's requirements. 3.3 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and other Division 23 specification sections. B. Hanger and support Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," for maximum hanger and support spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. D. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. E. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 METAL DUCTS 233113-7 3.5 PAINTING A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized -steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform visual inspections of installed ductwork to assure that there aren't any gaps or leaks which would degrade system performance. B. Leakage Tests: 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." with the allowable leakage values summarized in the table below. Submit a test report for each test. Duct Pressure Class - P %:" F% 2" wg 3" wg 4", 6", 10" w Leakage Class CFM per 100 S . Ft.. of Duct Surface Area), F1eak e = CL X p.65 Rectangular Metal CL 24 12 6 Round Metal CL 12 6 3 Test the following systems: a. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or 3-Inch wg: Test representative duct sections from sections installed, totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class in each system. b. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 4-Inch wg or Higher: Test 100 percent of total installed duct. C. Return, Exhaust, and Outside Air Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or higher: Test representative duct sections from sections installed, totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class in each system. d. Test all vertical shafts located inside the building envelope and all supply and return ducts located outside of the building envelope (across the roof, attics, mechanical rooms vented to the outside etc.) regardless of pressure class. e. Test grease duct systems as required by the local code enforced. 3. Duct leakage tests shall be performed while duct sections are being installed prior to installation of external insulation and finished ceilings. 4. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. 5. Testing of each duct section is to be performed with access doors, coils, filters, dampers, and other duct -mounted devices in place as designed. No devices are to be removed or blanked off so as to reduce or prevent additional leakage. 6. Conduct leakage testing of ductwork at pressure rating of the duct section, positive pressure or negative pressure as specified. Increase air flow from leakage test fan gradually to prevent over pressurization of ducts. The leakage amount shall not exceed the allotted Leakage Class amount for that portion of the system. 7. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. 8. If excessive air leakage is found during leakage testing, locate leaks, seal, repair and repeat Leakage Test. 9. Submit reports for review during the Construction process. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 METAL DUCTS 233113-8 3.7 DUCT CLEANING A. Ductwork shall be installed with cleanliness that exceeds SMACNA's Advanced Duct Cleanliness Level as defined in SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." B. Use duct cleaning methodology as indicated in NADCA ACR. C. Clean ductwork internally of dust and debris, unit -by -unit as it is installed. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of the facing. D. Clean exposed duct systems of all dust, debris, foreign substances, and shop fabrication identification marks or stickers. Refer to Architectural requirements for painting of exposed duct systems. E. Provide temporary duct closures of polyethylene film or other covering to prevent the entrance of dust and debris until the time connections are completed 3.8 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts as indicated in the following table: Fiber Galva- Alumi- Stainless Black Duct Flexi- REMARKS nized num Steel ble Sheet- Sheet Steel (Un- Board Duct metal Sheet coated Mixed Air Duct & Plenum X "interior" Supply,Retum, Exhaust & O.A Ducts "interior" X Supply/Return Branch Run- See X Refer to details. Sheet metal is required for outs Re- critical care applications in Healthcare Facili- "Interior" marks ties B. All ducts shall have a Seal Class of A, regardless of pressure class, unless noted otherwise. C. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specifications, construct all ductwork for a minimum pressure class equivalent to the positive or negative static pressure at the fan entrance or discharge, or for a 2 inch w.g. pressure class, whichever is greater. 1. Ductwork from air handling unit discharge connection to the inlet connection at the air terminal device or reheat coil shall be constructed to a minimum of 4" w.g. positive pressure class. 2. Ductwork downstream of the air terminal device or reheat coil shall be constructed to a minimum of 2" w.g. positive pressure class. 3. Return, exhaust and outside air ductwork shall be constructed to minimum of 2" w.g. negative pressure class D. Duct Reinforcement: Provide duct bracing to meet pressure class per SMACNA Standards. 1. Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel or carbon steel coated with zinc -chromate primer. 042.21-177.01 AdventHcalth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 METAL DUCTS 233113-9 2. Flat Oval Ducts: Reinforce negative pressure ducts in accordance with SMACNA's requirements for rectangular duct systems. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 METAL DUCTS 2331 13 - 10 SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Backdraft and barometric dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Fire dampers. 4. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 5. Flange connectors. 6. Turning vanes. 7. Remote damper operators. 8. Flexible connectors. 9. Flexible ducts. 10. Runout duct fittings 11. Duct accessory hardware. B. Related Sections include: 1. Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC". 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. I. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Air pressure drop scheduled includes both catalog and system effect pressure loss of the silencer. Submittal pressure drops to include system effect factors based upon the inlet and discharge conditions. Include breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings. B. Shop Drawings: Coordinate with ductwork specifications. I. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. C. Control damper installations. d. Fire -damper smoke damper, combination fire and smoke damper, ceiling, and corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct -mounted access doors and remote damper operators. e. Duct security bars. f. Duct silencer installation including distance to duct fittings g. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-1 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Material of product shall match ductwork material. B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. 2.2 BACKDRAFT AND BAROMETRIC DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. 5. Ruskin Company. B. Description: Gravity balanced. C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm. D. Minimum Pressure Rating: 2-inch wg or pressure rating of ductwork whichever is greater. E. Frame: 0.052-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel, 0.063-inch-thick extruded aluminum or 0.052- inch-thick stainless steel, with welded corners and mounting flange to match ductwork material. F. Blades: Multiple single -piece blades, center -pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.050-inch-thick aluminum sheet with sealed edges. G. Blade Action: Parallel. H. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl or polyurethane, mechanically locked. I. Blade Axles: 1. Material: Stainless steel . 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch. J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension. L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings. M. Barometric Damper Accessories: 1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring -assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-2 2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Greenheck. 3. McGill AirFlow LLC. 4. METALAIRE, Inc. 5. Nailor Industries Inc. 6. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. 7. Ruskin Company. 8. VentLock B. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. C. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. D. Frames: 1. Hat -shaped, channels, 0.052-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel, 0.063-inch-thick extruded aluminum or 0.052-inch-thick stainless steel to match the material of the duct in which they are installed. 2. Mitered and welded corners. 3. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. E. Blades: 1. Multiple blade for ducts over 12 inches in height. 2. Single blade for ducts up to 12 inches in height. 3. Parallel- or opposed -blade design. 4. Stiffen damper blades for stability and to prevent vibration, flutter, or other foreign noise. 5. Minimum 22 ga. thickness in the same material as the duct the damper is installed. F. Blade Axles: the same material as the duct the damper is installed. G. Bearings: 1. Molded synthetic. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. H. Tie Bars and Brackets: same as duct material. 2.4 FIRE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Greenheck. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. 5. Price 6. Ruskin Company. B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL. C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity. D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours, compatible with assembly being installed in. E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behind grille where blades may be inside airstream; fabricated with roll -formed, 0.034-inch-thick galvanized steel or stainless steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field -installed, galvanized sheet steel. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-3 Exception: Omit sleeve where damper -frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements. G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as appropriate for the installation. H. Blades: Roll -formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch-thick, galvanized steel or stainless steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch-thick, galvanized -steel or stainless steel blade connectors. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless -steel closure spring. Heat -Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F unless specifically identified to be 212 deg F rated, fusible links. 2.5 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Greenheck. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. 5. Price 6. Ruskin Company. B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL. C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity. D. Fire Rating: Coordinate with Life Safety Plan E. Heat -Responsive Device: Electric resettable link and switch package, factory installed, rated. Mount on same side as damper actuator. F. Frame: Multiple -blade type; fabricated with roll-formed,0.062-inch-thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. G. Blades: Roll -formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.078-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. H. Leakage: Class I. I. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions. J. Mounting Sleeve: Factory -installed, 0.062-inch-, or duct thickness whichever is greater, thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application. K. Master control panel when used in dynamic smoke -management systems. L. Damper Motors/Actuators: 1. Two -position action. 2. Electrical Connection: Electrical Connection: 120V. Contractors option to use 24V actuators plus controls contractor wiring as a pre -approved substitution including credit from Div 26 for not providing 120V wiring. 3. Actuators shall include the following: a. Actuator shall be furnished factory mounted to the damper with UL555(S) listing by the damper manufacturer for temperature rating of 350' F. b. Provide spring fail safe return. Provide normally open or closed position as indicated in the points list or sequence of operation C. Low voltage relay for 24V dampers. M. Accessories: 1. Auxiliary switches for position indication. 2. Momentary test switch, damper mounted. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-4 2.6 FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Description: roll -formed, factory -fabricated, slide -on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. C. Material: Galvanized steel. D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. 2.7 TURNING VANES A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin -bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 24 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions. 2.8 REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Pottorff, a division of PCI Industries, Inc. 2. United Enertech. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Young Regulator Company. B. Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment via rack an pinion remote control operators. C. Tubing: Brass. D. Cable: Stainless steel. E. Wall -Box and Ceiling -Box Mounting: Recessed, 2 inches (50 mm) deep . F. Wall -Box and Ceiling -Box Cover -Plate Material: Stainless steel or Chrome Plated. G. Linear Diffusers and Linear Returns. Provide plenum mounted cable controller for mounting in the air plenum behind the face of the unit. 2.9 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire rated products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. 3M. 3. Milcor Fire -Rated Access Doors by Greenheck. 4. Milcor Fire -Rated Access Doors by Inryco, Inc. B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL. C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon or 0.0428-inch stainless steel to match duct. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-5 D. Fasteners: Carbon or Stainless steel, to match duct. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall. E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease -tight, high -temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F. F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative. 2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. C. Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F. F. High -Corrosive -Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical -resistant coating. 1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/inch in the warp and 340 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F. G. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle -iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at start and stop. 2.11 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. Thermaflex B. Factory fabricated suitable for pressures and temperatures involved. Flexible duct Underwriters' Laboratories listing, UL-181 Class 1 duct and NFPA 90A a flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or under. C. Pressure Rating of flexible duct, 6 inch w.g.(1500 Pa) positive, 1 inch w.g.(250 Pa) negative , rated for a velocity of at least 4000 fpm (20 m/s) unless otherwise specified. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-6 D. Temperature rating of flexible duct, continuous operation at a temperature range of -20°F to +250°F. unless otherwise specified. E. Insulated flexible duct shall be constructed of an inner air barrier liner supported by and mechanically locked to a helical wound galvanize steel helix without the use of adhesives or chemicals. Factory -insulate the flexible duct with fiberglass insulation with an R value of 6 minimum at a mean temperature of 75 F. Cover the insulation with a fire retardant metalized vapor barrier jacket reinforced with crosshatched scrim having a permeance of not greater than .05 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96. F. Noninsulated, Aluminum Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 0, aluminum construction, spiral wound into a tube and spiral corrugated of triple lock construction, Flexmaster Type NI-TL or approved equal. 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 4.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 5500 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 600 deg F. G. Acoustical Insulated, Flexible Duct: Inner air barrier liner, acoustically transparent CPE air impervious fabric, Flexmaster Type 1M, Thermaflex Type M-KE or approved equal. 1. Sound Performance: Minimum Insertion Loss for 10 foot length straight duct at a velocity of 2500 feet per minute rated in accordance with Air Diffusion Council Test Code FD 72-RI. Octave Band 2 3 4 5 6 7 Hz 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 6-in 11 33 37 39 37 19 8-in 13 35 34 39 29 17 12-in 10 26 26 35 24 11 H. Flexible Duct Connections: 1. Clamps: Stainless -steel band with cadmium -plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm -gear action or Nylon strap to match duct material and to suit duct size. Sheet metal screws will not be allowed. 2.12 RUNOUT DUCT FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following; 1. Elgen. 2. Flexmaster. 3. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. 4. Or approved equal B. Description: Factory -fabricated conical fittings for sheet metal or ductboard with integral volume damper. Utilize side takeoff fittings with integral volume damper with 45 degree slope on upstream side or 45 degree slopes on upstream and downstream side when indicated on the drawings or as required by duct configuration. Utilize to connect runout ducts from diffusers and grilles to submains. C. Construction: 1. Low leakage welded seam galvanized steel, stainless or aluminum to match the material of the duct in which they are installed. 2. Spin in construction or flanged construction with neoprene gasket. 3. Integral single damper blade, 3/8" square shaft, U-bolt, nylon bushings, 2" buildout stand- off handle with locking damper quadrant handle. Dampers to be fabricated with to 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-7 prevent vibration, flutter or other noise. Stand-off handle not required for non -insulated duct systems. Round outlet with rolled stiffener bead for strength and sealing runout ducts. Side takeoff fittings to maintain a ratio of 1 to 1 of inlet to outlet area. Overall length of fitting not to exceed 13". Utilize 4" W.G. construction with or without damper as shown on the drawings when connecting to 4" pressure class duct. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless -steel accessories in stainless -steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install backdraft and barometric dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan or elsewhere indicated on the plans and except those specified to be by the fan manufacturer and where motor operated dampers are shown or specified to be located in the discharge ductwork. D. Install control dampers under the coordinating control and supervision of the control contractor as specified in Section Instrumentation and Control for HVAC, in locations indicated on the drawings, as detailed and according to manufacturer's instructions. 1. Provide adequate operating clearance and access to operator. 2. Dampers, individual or multiple section assemblies, must be completely square and free from racking, twisting, or bending. 3. Unless specifically designed for vertical blade application, dampers must be mounted with blade axis horizontal. 4. Damper blades, axles, and linkage must operate without binding. Before system operation, cycle damper after installation to ensure proper operation. On multiple section assemblies, all sections must open and close simultaneously. 5. Provide a visible and accessible indication of damper position on the drive shaft end. 6. At inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated. E. Install manual volume dampers at points on supply, return, exhaust and outside air systems at all branches extending from larger ducts, including run -outs to diffusers and grilles, in addition to the dampers indicated on the plans, and as necessary to regulate the flow of air meeting the air balance requirements. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. F. Utilize runout duct fittings for runout duct to diffusers, registers and grilles where duct configuration permits, unless indicated otherwise. Fittings shall be secured and sealed to duct connections in accordance ductwork specifications. G. Locate volume dampers as close to main duct as possible unless indicated otherwise. H. Install dampers so as to not flutter or vibrate. I. Damper handles shall be installed with stand-off handle to be mounted exterior to insulated ducts. J. Attach a 24 inchlong fluorescent orange plenum rated "surveyors" tape at all dampers to assist in locating dampers upon completion of installation for test and balance. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-8 K. Install remote damper operators at all volume dampers in inaccessible locations such as above gypsum board ceilings. L. Install fire dampers according to UL listing, NFPA 90A, and the manufacturer's installation instructions. Install complete with mounting collars, retaining angles, connections to ductwork and duct access doors. 1. Curtain -type fire damper sizes shall be based upon free area of duct, so the damper blades shall not reduce the free area of the airstream. 2. Multiple Fire Dampers — if a duct requiring a fire damper is larger than the biggest available curtain -type fire damper size, then two or more multi -blade type fire dampers shall be used instead of multiple adjacent curtain -type dampers. M. Install smoke and combination fire/smoke dampers according to UL listing, NFPA 90A, and the manufacturer's installation instructions. Install complete with mounting collars, retaining angles, connections to ductwork and duct access doors. N. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. On upstream side of duct coils. 2. Upstream from duct filters. 3. At outdoor -air intakes and mixed -air plenums. 4. At drain pans and seals. 5. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links and for inspection for combination fire/smoke dampers. 6. At duct smoke detectors. 7. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers. 8. At control devices requiring inspection. 9. Upstream of elbows with turning vanes. 10. Elsewhere to service equipment. O. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. P. Provide hinged access doors or cam -latch with chain access doors in exposed applications and cam -latch type in concealed installations. Q. Install the following sizes for duct -mounting, rectangular access doors: 1. Minimum Size: 12 by 12 inches. For smaller ducts where this size is not possible, use the largest size that fits and no smaller than a minimum 12 by 6 inches for two -hand access. For even smaller ducts where the 12 by 6 inches is not possible, use the largest size that fits one -hand or inspection access. 2. For fire and combination fire/smoke dampers equipped with fusible links, internal operators or both, if a minimum 12 by 12 inches access door cannot be installed, provide a removeable duct section. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 18 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 20 by 20 inches. 5. Body Access: 24 by 24 inches. R. Label access doors to indicate the purpose of access door. For Fire, smoke and combination fire/smoke dampers, provide labels having letters not less than 1/2 inch S. Ceiling access panels shall be provided, where required, to service dampers, heaters, valves and other concealed mechanical equipment, T. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment containing rotating or vibrating equipment, with not less than 4-incheslength of material and in accordance with SMACNA. U. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. V. When specified, connect supply diffusers and return grilles to ducts with flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. Flex duct to each diffuser shall be a maximum length of 6'-0". 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-9 W. Connect flexible ducts to runout fittings, sleeves and air devices per manufacturer's installation instructions: 1. Up to 3" duct construction: 2 wraps of approved tape and draw band to secure inner core. 2. Over 3" duct construction: sealer, 2 wraps of approved tape and draw band to secure inner core. 3. For metal type flex additionally secure with sheet metal screws. 4. For insulated flex, seal outer jacket as specified for duct insulation. 5. When connecting flexible duct to round metal duct utilize metal connecting sleave to maintain duct shape. X. Flexible duct is not permitted in Healthcare Facilities for critical care applications. Y. Supply and Return flex duct shall be insulated. Exhaust flex duct shall not be insulated unless part of an energy recovery system. Z. For high pressure fan discharge, install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4- inch movement during start and stop of fans. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire, smoke and combination fire/smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat -response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. 5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-10 SECTION 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceiling diffusers. 2. Registers and Grilles 3. Operating room ceiling diffusers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume - control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 2. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation" for insulation of supply plenums. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static -pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 1.4 DESCRIPTION A. All diffuser and register locations in ceilings and walls shall be coordinated with reflected ceiling plans and electrical and low voltage plans prior to submittal and installation. B. Prior to submitting diffusers, registers and grilles to for review, and prior to ordering, verify the ceiling system and type of ceilings specified in each space and coordinate the air device mounting system and frame with the ceiling type indicated on the reflected ceiling plans in the architectural plan documents. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers for specialty products are listed under those articles. For all other diffusers, registers and grilles available manufacturers are as follows: 1. Anemostat. 2. Kreuger 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. Price Industries. 6. Titus. 2.2 CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Construct diffusers of aluminum unless otherwise indicated, and provide with the frame type appropriate to the installation. B. Provide diffusers with air straighteners. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 2337 13- 1 C. Perforated face ceiling diffusers shall have field adjustable pattern controllers accessible through a removable or hinged face plate. D. Furnish round or square neck duct adapters for each unit for top connection or side connection as appropriate to the space. E. Accessories: 1. Equalizing grid. 2. Plaster ring. 3. Safety chain. 4. Wire guard. 5. Sectorizing baffles. 6. Operating rod extension. F. Diffuser models, sizes and finishes shall be as shown on the plans and/or as scheduled. Unless noted otherwise, diffusers shall have a baked enamel finish with color to be selected by the Architect. 2.3 REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Construct registers and grilles of aluminum unless otherwise indicated, and provide with the frame type appropriate to the installation. B. Supply registers and grilles shall be double deflection type blades to provide for air deflection adjustment in all directions. C. Return and exhaust registers and grilles shall have a core of fixed blades. D. Furnish supply grilles complete with opposed blade volume control dampers, operable from the face. E. Register and grille models, sizes and finishes shall be as shown on plans and/or as scheduled. Unless noted otherwise, registers and grilles shall have a baked enamel finish with color to be selected by the Architect. 2.4 OPERATING ROOM CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Panels shall be aluminum construction consisting of framing, valve mechanism and perforated distribution plate. B. Valve mechanism shall be accessible through the distribution plate which shall be removable for cleaning. C. Furnish panels for round or rectangular duct connections as indicated on the drawings. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713-2 B. Ceiling -Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. D. Blank -off unused portion of linear diffusers and grilles. E. Coordinate border and frame type with Architectural Plans. F. For return grilles open to a ceiling plenum provide insulated sound boot behind grille for sound control and to prevent above ceiling utilities from being visible from the occupied space. 3.3 Provide caulking of diffusers, registers, and grilles for Pressure Sensitive Rooms including Isolation Rooms, and BSL-3 and BSL-4 spaces. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713-3 Table of Contents DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 10 HVAC DEMOLITION AND ALTERATIONS 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION 2331 13 METAL DUCTS 23 33 00 AIR DUCDT ACCESSORIES 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 2605 10 2305 19 26 05 29 26 05 33 26 05 44 26 05 53 26 27 26 2628 13 2628 16 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL SELECTIVE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWRE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WIRING DEVICES FUSES ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 Table of Contents - I SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for piping, conduit and wiring penetration firestopping installed in fire -resistance -rated walls, horizontal assemblies and smoke barriers. C. Division 07 "Roof Accessories" and "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for piping, conduit and equipment supports penetrating roofs, exterior walls and floors including flashings, curbs, sealants, clamps and vents. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Flashing Materials. 3. Access Panels 4. Common electrical installation requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Code. National, State and Local Electrical codes including OSHA requirements. B. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. C. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases. D. Electrical ductbank: Assembly consisting of multiple electrical conduits embedded in earth or concrete. E. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. F. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. G. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. H. Home Run: The portion of a branch circuit between the serving panelboard and the first electrical outlet, lighting fixture, or other electrical load connected to the circuit. I. High voltage: 35,001 volts and greater. J. Low voltage: 50 to 600 volts. K. Medium voltage: 601 to 35,000 volts. L. Provide. Furnish, install and wire ready for service. M. Signal voltage. NEC class 1, 2, or 3 remote control, signaling, or power limited circuits. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-1 1.4 SCOPE A. Drawings and Specifications form complementary requirements; provide work specified and not shown, and work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both. Although work may not be specifically shown or specified, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, devices and materials obviously necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. B. It is the intent that these Specifications and associated Drawings establish minimum requirements for products and equipment with the intent to provide electrical service, distribution and systems finished, tested and ready for operation. Incidental detail that is not shown or specified, but necessary for proper installation and operation shall be included in the work and in these Contractor's estimates, the same as if specified. Locations of all equipment and material shall be adjusted at no extra cost to the Owner, to accommodate the work interferences anticipated and/or encountered. Prior to installation, determine the exact route and location of each raceway and piece of equipment to minimize conflicts with other trades. C. This project will be phased, as defined by the Owner. This may necessitate the provision of temporary electrical utilities. All associated appurtenances with the utilities shall be provided as part of this project in the appropriate phase coordinated with Owner's phasing requirements. D. Information and components shown on riser diagrams but not shown on plans, and vice versa, shall be provided as if expressly required on both. E. It is the requirement of these Contract Documents to have the contractors provide systems and components that are fully complete, operational and suitable for the intended use. There may be situations in the documents where insufficient information exists to precisely describe a certain component or subsystem, or the routing of a component or its coordination with other building elements. In cases such as this, where the Contractor has failed to notify the Architect of the situation in accordance with Paragraph (A) above, the Contractor shall include in their bid the specific components or subsystems with all parts necessary for the intended use, fully complete and operational, and installed in workmanlike manner either concealed or exposed per the design intent. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than 0 deg F or exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Humidity: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 3. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet, or 3300 feet if equipment includes solid-state devices. 1.6 MODIFICATIONS IN LAYOUT A. Drawings are intended to outline the scope of work required and are not intended to be installation drawings. Drawings are not intended to be absolutely precise; they are not intended to specify or to show every offset, fitting, and component nor do they show the exact routing and locations needed to coordinate with structure and other trades and to meet Architectural requirements. The purpose of the drawings is to indicate a systems concept, the main components of the systems, and the approximate geometrical relationships. Based on the systems concept, the main components, and the approximate geometrical relationships, the contractor shall provide all other components and materials necessary to make the systems fully complete and operational. B. Unless specifically stated to the contrary, no measurement of an electric drawing derived by scaling shall be used as a dimension to work by. Dimensions noted on the electric drawings are subject to measurements of adjacent and previously completed work. Measurements shall be performed prior to the actual installation of equipment. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 2 C. Prior to installation of visible material and equipment (including access panels) in finished spaces, review Architectural Drawings for desired locations and where not definitely indicated, request information from Architect. D. Check Contract Documents, as well as, Submittals and Shop Drawings of all subcontractors to verify and coordinate spaces in which work of Divisions 21 through 28 will be installed. E. Make reasonable modifications in layout and components needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades. Systems shall be run parallel with or perpendicular to major architectural and structural building elements. F. Where conflicts or potential conflicts exist and engineering guidance is desired, submit sketch of proposed resolution to Architect for review and approval. f l 1 r�K�Z1111 R K1V _Y_ [13 0 A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of equipment and raceways: 1. To maintain maximum headroom; all piping, duct, conduit and associated components to be as tight as possible to underside of structure to provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 2. To allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3. To allow connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways to be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast -in -place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." 1.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record Drawings are specified in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents." B. The Contractor shall keep a detailed up-to-date record, of the manner and location in which installations are actually made, indexing each feeder, pull box and protective device. Record documents are to reflect all changes in work including change orders, field directives, addenda from bid set of Contract Documents, request for information responses, etc. Upon completion of the project, the contractor shall modify the project electronic drawing and specification files to incorporate this information. Modified documents shall be turned over to the Owner in both electronic and hard paper copy formats. Record drawings shall also include: 1. Locations of buried conduit or similar items. Include buried depth. 2. Field changes of dimension or detail. 3. Details not on original contract drawings. 4. Changes to circuit numbers. 5. Junction box locations and conduit runs, with trade sizes indicated, for lighting, power, and electrical systems installed. 6. Final panel schedules on drawings matching construction document drawing size. 1.9 MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Obtain at time of purchase of equipment, three copies of operation, lubrication and maintenance manuals for all items. Assemble literature in a coordinated manual using loose leaf sheets in a three ring binder(s). Manual shall contain names and addresses of manufacturers and local representatives who stock or furnish repair parts for items or equipment. B. The manuals shall include the following and shall have an index of contents and tabs for each Specification Section and each piece of equipment specified in that Section and be provided in the order listed below, per Specification Section. 1. Copies of all approved submittals/shop drawings. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 3 2. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions and parts lists of all items or equipment. Where manufacturer's data includes several types or models, the applicable type or model shall be clearly designated. 3. Startup and shutdown procedures. 4. Test records. 5. Wiring diagrams. 6. Lubrication instructions detailing type of lubricant, amount, and intervals recommended by manufacturer for each item of equipment. 7. Owner's written acknowledgement of satisfactory completion of instruction period. C. Furnish three copies of manuals to Architect for approval and distribution to Owner. Deliver manuals no less than 30 days prior to acceptance of equipment to permit Owner's personnel to become familiar with equipment and operation prior to acceptance. D. Operating instructions: Upon completion of installation or when Owner accepts portions of building and equipment for operational use, instruct Owner's operating personnel in any or all parts of all systems. Factory -trained personnel shall perform instructions. 1.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE AND FORMAT A. This Article supplements Division 1. B. Submittal Cover Sheet 1. Submittal data for each product shall include a copy of the following cover sheet completely filled out. Incomplete or incorrect cover sheet submittal shall constitute reason for rejection. 2. Material submittals shall be organized by specification section. All items requiring a submittal per each specification section shall be combined into a single submittal. Provide each section/item within that submittal with its own cover sheet labeled and tagged to match the drawings. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-4 SHOP DRAWING COVER SHEET PROJECT: CONTRACTOR: DIVISION NO.: SECTION NO.: DESCRIPTION: CONTRACT DRAWING REFERENCE NO: EQUIPMENT TAG: SUBMISSION (CIRCLE ONE): FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, FOURTH DATE: INFORMATION AND CHECKLIST 1. Contractor's Log #ID 2. Name, address, and phone number of supplier. 3. Are all specified or scheduled items included and exactly match scheduled/specified items? Yes No 4. Is this item a substitution? Yes No 5. Are deviations clearly identified? Yes No 6. Does equipment fit space shown on construction documents, coordination drawings, and actual field conditions? Yes No 7. Has support, erection, weights, and installation been coordinat- ed with all trades? Yes No 8. Does the proposed installation void warranties and/or violate UL or code requirements? Yes No 9. Does this material/equipment add expense to any other trade or project costs? Yes No 10. Does equipment require interface with other trades? List divi- sions and specifics requiring coordination? Yes No 11. Is control interface coordinated? Yes No 12. List electrical characteristics (V/Ph/A) 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-5 3. Multiple Re -submittals: The Engineer will review the first submittal from the contractor and respond with comments, and will review one re -submittal for the same item(s) from the contractor and respond with comments. If the contractor is required to make subsequent submittals for the same item(s) the Engineer shall be compensated by the contractor for the time to review each subsequent re -submittal. The contractor shall agree to compensate the Engineer a minimum of $500 per each re -submittal item. 4. Shop Drawings showing layouts of systems shall contain sufficient plans, elevations, sections, details and schematics to describe work clearly. They shall be 1/4 inches = 1 foot 0 inch scale unless specified otherwise. 5. Shop drawings and submittals showing manufacturer's product data shall contain detailed dimensional drawings, accurate and complete description of materials of construction, manufacturer's published performance characteristics and capacity ratings (performance data, alone, is not acceptable), electrical requirements and wiring diagrams. Drawings shall clearly indicate location (terminal block or wire number), voltage and function for all field terminations, and other information necessary to demonstrate compliance with all requirements of Contract Documents. 6. Provide shop drawing submittals showing details of electrical connections to ALL equipment. If connection details are not submitted and connections are found to be installed incorrectly in the field, this contractor shall reinstall them within the original contract price. 7. Shop drawings for different systems and equipment shall be bound separately by specification section as indicated above and not bound by manufacturer. Each separate submittal shall have its own transmittal and cover letter. Submittals which contain different specification section systems bound together shall be returned un-reviewed for re -submittal. 8. Lighting Fixture shop drawings shall consist of two submittals, one for interior lighting and one for exterior lighting. Each submittal shall have all associated light fixtures included. Separate submittals grouped by manufacturer or supplier shall not be accepted. The contractor shall be responsible for coordinating drawings from his various suppliers in order to comply with this requirement. 1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. The Engineer's design for each product is based on the manufacturer listed in the schedule or shown on the drawings. In Part 2 of some technical specifications, other manufacturers are listed as being acceptable. The listing of a manufacturer as acceptable does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any submittals made are for products that meet or exceed the specifications included herein. These are acceptable only if, as a minimum, they: a. Meet all performance criteria listed in the schedules and outlined in the specification. b. Have identical operating characteristics to those called for in the specification. For example, a two-stroke diesel generator will not be acceptable if a four-stroke model is specified. C. Fit within the available space it was designed for, including space for maintenance and component removal, with no modification to either the space or the product. Clearances to walls, ceilings and other equipment will be at least equal to those shown on the design drawings. The fact that a manufacturer's name appears as acceptable shall not be taken to mean that the Engineer has determined that the manufacturer's products will fit within the available space - this determination is solely the responsibility of the contractor. d. Products must adhere to all architectural considerations including but not limited to: being of the same color as the product scheduled or specified, fitting within architectural enclosures and details, and for diffusers, lighting and plumbing fixtures - being the same size and of the same physical appearance as scheduled or specified products. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrbills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-6 B. All equipment shall be labeled or listed by the National Board of Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) or other recognized listing/testing agency where such labeling or listing exists for such material. C. All electrical components, devices and accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Skid -mounted or packaged assemblies shall be listed and labeled as an assembly, not just the individual components. D. Fire -Resistance Ratings: For piping, conduit and wiring penetrations, provide penetration firestopping devices tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 814 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect equipment/materials from damage during shipping, storage, handling and installation. Delivery equipment/materials to the site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material. B. The Contractor shall provide for enclosed storage, when equipment/materials are stored on -site and prior to building "dry -in", to prevent any damage resulting from inclement weather or construction traffic. Specialties shall not be stored outdoors. C. Equipment/materials, stored or installed, found to be damaged shall be replaced with new by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Owner and at no additional expense. Do not store equipment with PVC material with exposure to direct sunlight. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING ACCESS AND ACCESS PANELS A. Access panels are generally not shown on the drawings, but they are required to be provided by Contractor. B. Access panels shall be of size required to provide adequate access to equipment. Minimum size shall be 12" X 12" for hand access or 24" X 24" for body access. Minimum 16 gauge frame, not less than 18 gauge hinged door panel. Door locks shall be screwdriver operated for panels in general location applications and shall be key locked for public area applications. C. Furnish access panels for installation under other Sections valves or other items installed under this Division require access and are concealed in floor, wall, furred space or above ceiling. Access panels shall be by Milcor, Knapp, Nystorm or Inland Steel; coordinate selection with other Sections supplying similar access panels. Color of panel shall be selected by the Architect. D. Panels shall include concealed hinges, cam type locking devices, and shall have a frame border type necessary for the particular wall or ceiling construction in which they are installed. Access panels shall be flush mounted, recessed frame type units. Access panels shall be prime coated steel, for field painting for general applications and stainless steel for use in toilet rooms, shower rooms, and similar wet locations. E. Access panels shall have same fire rating classification as surface penetrated. Rated access panels must have U.L. Label. 2.2 FLASHING MATERIALS A. All piping, conduit and equipment supports through roofs shall be flashed. Flashing materials and methods shall be in accordance to the roof manufacturer's and Division 07 requirements. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zcphyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRE -BID SITE VISIT A. Before submitting bid, visit and carefully examine site to identify existing conditions and difficulties that will affect work of this division. No extra payment will be allowed for additional work caused by unfamiliarity with site conditions that are visible or readily construed by an experienced observer. B. Contractor shall visit job site to familiarize himself with the specific location of the new equipment installations in existing areas, to ensure there is adequate access for the installation of equipment. All entries, pathways, corridors, stairwells, etc., that may be used to install equipment shall be investigated. All existing conditions and potential obstructions that may impede access and installation shall be addressed prior to equipment purchasing/ordering. C. The documentation of existing conditions was derived from As -Built documents and are in part unverified. Actual existing conditions shall be verified prior to commencement of work. 3.2 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 — Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting. B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall -mounting items. C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope. F. Fire -Resistance -Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe, conduit and wiring penetrations. Seal penetrations with fire- and smoke -stop materials. Refer to Division 07 for firestopping and fill materials. G. Waterproof Penetrations: Maintain integrity of waterproof roof, wall and floor penetrations for pipe, conduit and equipment support penetrations. Seal penetrations with waterproof materials with clamps, sleeves, flashings, pipe boots and/or pipe curb assemblies as detailed or specified. Refer to Division 07 for waterproofing methods and materials when not specified in this section. 3.3 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide raised concrete base for all floor mounted electrical equipment, including but not limited to, switchboards, transformers, motor control centers, transfer switches, lighting control/dimmer cabinets, and motor controllers. B. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes (if applicable) at Project. Where specific requirements are not specified in Division 3 or detailed on the Drawings, comply with the following at a minimum: 1. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated; and extend base not less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated. 2. Edges of concrete bases shall have a minimum 1-1/2 inch chamfer. 3. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 4. Install epoxy -coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-8 5. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 6. Cast anchor -bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 7. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 8. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive -strength concrete with wire -mesh reinforcement. 3.4 FIREPROOFING A. Clips, hangers, clamps, supports and other attachments to surfaces to be fireproofed shall be installed, insofar as possible, prior to start of spray fiber work. B. Piping and other items which would interfere with proper application of fireproofing shall be installed after completion of spray fiber work. C. Patching and repairing of fireproofing due to cutting or damaging to fireproofing during course of work specified under this Section shall be performed by installer of fireproofing and paid for by trade responsible for damage and shall not constitute grounds for extra cost to Owner. 3.5 INSTALLATION ONLY ITEMS A. Where this contractor is required to install items which he does not purchase, he shall coordinate their delivery and be responsible for their unloading from delivery vehicles and for their safe handling and field storage up to the time of installation. This contractor shall be responsible for: 1. Any necessary field assembly and internal connections, as well as mounting in place of the items, including the purchase and installation of all dunnage supporting members and fastenings necessary to adapt them to architectural and structural conditions. 2. Their connection to building systems including the purchase and installation of all terminating fittings necessary to adapt and connect them to the building systems. B. This Contractor shall carefully examine such items upon delivery. Claims that any of these items have been received in such condition that their installation will require procedures beyond the reasonable scope of work of this Contractor will be considered only if presented in writing within one week of their date of delivery. Unless such claims have been submitted, this Contractor shall be fully responsible for the complete reconditioning or replacement of the damaged items. 3.6 PAINTING A. Furnish one can of aerosol -free touch-up paint for each different color factory finish which is to be the final finished surface of the product. 3.7 CLEANING A. Cleaning shall be performed prior to equipment being energized . B. Raceways 1. General: a. Cover all raceway openings prior to the installation of conductors to prevent dirt, moisture, and other debris from entering the raceways. b. Before pulling conductors, swab out all raceways to remove any debris that may have entered raceways during construction or during storage. C. When external surfaces of raceways or enclosures are rusted, clean and restore surfaces to original condition. 2. Equipment a. After completion of work but prior to turning equipment over to the Owner, clean the exterior surfaces to be free from concrete residue, dirt, paint residue, etc. b. All dirt, drywall dust, and all other foreign matter shall be blown from, wiped away, or vacuumed from transformer coils, terminal devices, panelboard interiors, switchboard interiors, junction boxes, pullboxes, and other similar equipment enclosures. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-9 C. Thoroughly clean equipment of all stains, paint spots, dirt, and dust. Remove all temporary labels not used for instruction or operation and remove all visible trade labels. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-10 SECTION 26 0510 SELECTIVE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Disconnection of power to selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected electrical components. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." 2. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for sequencing and scheduling procedures and requirements for demolition activities. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS A. Perform all demolition as needed to accomplish new work. B. Do not rely solely on electrical drawings to determine extent of general construction demolition. Refer to architectural demolition plans for the exact extent of general construction demolition required by this contract. C. This Contractor is responsible for all charges, fees etc. incurred as a result of the electrical portion of the demolition. D. Prior to demolition or alteration of structures, the following shall be accomplished: 1. Review available record documents of the existing construction. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. 2. Coordinate sequencing with Owner and other Contractors. 3. Coordinate means to separate construction zones from non -renovated zones to prevent the spread of dust, fumes and debris. 4. Coordinate means to provide exhaust and makeup air to maintain the construction zone at an adequate negative pressure to contain all construction dust and fumes. 5. Except as noted otherwise, remove from the premises, all materials and equipment removed in the demolition work. 6. Equipment noted to be removed and turned over to the Owner, shall be delivered to the Owner at a place and time he so designates. 7. Where the materials are to be turned over to the Owner or reused and installed by the Contractor, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to maintain the condition of the materials and equipment equal to that existing before work began. Damaged materials or equipment shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 8. Survey and record condition of existing facilities to remain in place that may be affected by demolition operations. After demolition operations are completed, survey conditions again and restore existing facilities to their pre -demolition condition, at no additional cost to Owner. 9. Salvage equipment scheduled for reuse in new work or scheduled to be delivered to Owner's storage facility. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SELECTIVE ELECTRICDAL DEMOLITION 2605 10 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine the extent of selective demolition required. B. Refer to demolition drawings of other trades. Where motors, control panels, and other loads that have an electrical connection are being removed, include the disconnection and removal of associated electrical feeds, circuits, and loose control equipment in this contract. C. Protect existing work to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain property of Owner. D. Protect existing services and utilities. E. Disconnect electrical systems in walls floors and ceilings scheduled for removal. F. Coordinate utility service outages with serving utility company. G. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing circuits in service during construction. H. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switch overs and connections. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service to areas adjacent to work area. 3.2 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. B. Existing electrical equipment in conflict with new construction shall be removed and/or relocated as indicated on the drawings, as directed or needed. This Contractor shall remove all electrical equipment released from service as a result of construction, and no equipment removed shall be reused, except as specifically directed on the drawings or elsewhere herein. All mechanical components shall be stored on site for Owner assessment. Any components not retained by the Owner shall be removed by the contractor. Properly dispose or remove from site any items not retained by Owner. C. Any existing services or equipment not shown on the drawings and which are logically expected to be continued in service and which may be interrupted or disturbed during construction, shall be reconnected in an approved manner. Provide temporary power connections, lighting, controls, etc., as needed to prevent interruption of service to occupied areas caused by demolition operations. In addition, any conduit, wiring, fixtures, or equipment which may require relocation or rerouting as a result of construction, shall be considered a part of the work of this section and shall be done by this Contractor with no additional compensation, provided that the referenced relocation is discernable from the pre -bid review of the site, and associated documents. D. Verify circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. E. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. F. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SELECTIVE ELECTRICDAL DEMOLITION 260510-2 G. De -energize, disconnect, demolish, and remove electrical systems, equipment, raceways, wiring, and components indicated to be removed. H. Conduit to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated or specified to be removed. In general, all empty raceways and associated supporting devices shall be removed back to nearest active junction box, panelboard, switchboard, panel cabinet, or other similar enclosure. Conductors to be Removed: Unless specifically stated elsewhere, all un-terminated conductors shall be de -energized, and all de -energized conductors shall be removed back to source. Equipment to be Removed, Including Panelboards and Distribution Equipment: De -energize, disconnect associated raceways and wiring, and remove equipment. K. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: De -energize, disconnect associated raceways and wiring, and remove equipment. Clean equipment and store where appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. Test equipment and associated components in accordance with the appropriate specification section. L. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: De -energize, disconnect associated raceways and wiring, and move equipment to on site storage area as designated by the Owner. M. Any unused conduit openings injunction boxes, panelboards, switchboards, panel cabinets, pull boxes, or other similar enclosures shall be covered in a code approved manner. N. Update any electrical circuit directories or breaker identification nameplates to reflect changes in the status of overcurrent devices resulting from demolition. O. Update circuit designations on any junction boxes where feeders and/or circuits were removed to properly indicate remaining circuits injunction boxes. P. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stands, hangers, and other accessories. Q. Contractor shall check the ballasts of light fixtures removed from service. If any ballasts contain PCB's those ballasts shall be stored on site in containers and in a manner approved by local authorities and the Environmental Protection Agency. The contractor shall be responsible for disposal of ballasts that contain PCB's in an EPA -approved chemical waste processing plant in accordance with federal, state, and local requirements. R. Notify Architect of location and extent of existing piping, conduit, OR equipment that interferes with new construction. In coordination with and with approval of Architect, relocate conduit and equipment to permit new work to be provided as required by Contract Documents. Remove non-functioning and abandoned conduit and equipment as directed by Architect. Dispose of or store items as requested by Architect. S. Outlet boxes being abandoned in existing walls in remodeled areas shall have opening patched to match existing wall finish. Blank covers are not acceptable. T. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. U. Maintain continuity of circuits that remain in service. V. During the demolition and alterations, the fire alarm system, exit lighting and corridor life safety lighting shall remain active. W. The fire alarm zone serving smoke detectors in the smoke compartment where work is occurring may be disconnected when work is taking place to avoid false alarms. Zone shall be reconnected at end of each work day. Smoke detectors shall be protected to keep dust and dirt from entering sensing chamber. All smoke detectors within the smoke compartment where work is occurring shall be cleaned upon completion of work within that area. X. Existing conduit and wiring in remodeled area that is not being removed, but which will be in conflict with new HVAC duct work being installed, shall be rerouted as required. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SELECTIVE ELECTRICDAL DEMOLITION 260510-3 Y. This Contractor shall provide required additional support for existing conduit in remodeled area that is not being removed and is not properly supported in accordance with NEC requirements. Z. When existing ductwork, piping, or related equipment in remodeled areas prevents the installation of other work, remove and reinstall existing materials, making necessary modifications and transitions to coordinate with other trades. 3.3 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. Report damage or defects to Architect B. Existing Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness electrical connections. Provide closure plates for vacant positions. C. If equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. D. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damage during demolition and extension work. E. Luminaires: Clean existing luminaires shown to be reused. Use mild detergent to clean interior surfaces and visible exterior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps. Energize fixtures. Notify Architect of fixtures with faulty components. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SELECTIVE ELECTRICDAL DEMOLITION 260510-4 SECTION 26 05 19 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality -control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Wire and cable routing where shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. B. Where wire and cable routing are not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Belden, Inc. 2. Cerro Wire. 3. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 4. Priority Wire & Cable, Inc. 5. Southwire Company. 6. WESCO B. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current -carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less. C. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. D. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2605 19 - 1 2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. E. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Type SO with ground wire. 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 2. O-Z/Gedney. 3. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 4. Tyco Electronics Corp. 5. Thomas & Betts. B. Description: Factory -fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. C. Spring wire connectors: Corrosion -resistant, live -action spring in insulated shell, rated 105°C. 1. Non spring type connectors shall not be used and will be contractor's expense to replace if used. D. Connectors and lugs: Circumferential compression (non -indenter) type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. General: 1. Homeruns are defined from panelboard or source of power to junction box in room or space where devices are being served or to the device itself. B. Feeders: 1. Conductor: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 2. Insulation: Type XHHW-2 insulation for feeders larger than #2 AWG; Type THHN/THWN-2 insulation for feeders #2 AWG and smaller. C. Branch Circuits: 1. Conductor: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 2. Insulation: Type XHHW-2 insulation for branch circuits larger than #2 AWG; Type THHN/THWN insulation for branch circuits #2 AWG and smaller. D. Motors and equipment connections subject to vibration: Copper. No. 12 AWG and larger, stranded conductor, single conductor. E. Use stranded conductor, single conductor, No. 14 minimum for control wiring. F. All conductors for isolated power circuits shall be copper stranded with a cross -linked polyethylene insulation or equivalent with a dielectric constant of 3.5 or less. Minimum insulation wall thickness shall be 4/64" for #10 and #12 AWG and 5/64" for #8 AWG and larger conductor. Under no circumstances shall wire pulling compound be used when pulling the wire for isolated power circuits. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders: Single conductors in raceway. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-2 C. Feeders, Branch Circuits, and Control Wiring Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Single conductors in raceway. D. Feeders, Branch Circuits, and Control Wiring Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on -Grade, and Underground: Single conductors UL rated for wet locations in raceway. E. Feeders, Branch Circuits, and Control Wiring Installed below Raised Flooring: Single conductors in raceway. F. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless - steel, wire -mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, above ceilings, and in floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed conduits parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible. E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. F. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." G. Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 FEEDER REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall provide lugs, compression fittings, auxiliary wireways, etc., of adequate size for termination of feeder sizes as indicated on drawings. Feeder sizes indicated may be oversized for voltage drop in some cases. Contractor shall coordinate with equipment manufacturer for proper lug sizes. B. Extend feeders at full capacity from origin to termination. C. Feeders shall be continuous, without splices in so far as, practical. All feeder splices not specifically indicated on drawings must be prior approved by engineer in writing before splicing any cable. D. Each conduit raceway shall contain only those conductors constituting a single feeder circuit. E. Where multiple raceways are used for a single feeder, each raceway shall contain a conductor of each phase and neutral, if used, and a grounding conductor. F. Where feeder conductors are run in parallel, conductors shall be of same length, same material, circular -mil area, insulation type, and terminated in same manner. G. Where parallel feeder conductors are run in separate raceways, raceways shall have same physical characteristics. H. Feeders shall follow most accessible routes, concealed in construction in finished areas, exposed to the minimum temperature gradient and to minimum temperature fluctuation. I. Confine feeders to insulated portions of building, unless otherwise shown. J. Trapped runs without facilities for continuous drainage are not acceptable. K. Do not draw conductors into conduits until building is enclosed and watertight and until work which may cause cable damage has been completed. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-3 L. Feeders shall be sized for a maximum voltage drop of 2%. 3.5 BRANCH CIRCUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Do not use wire smaller than No. 12 AWG (unless otherwise noted) for branch circuit wiring, including motor circuits. All 20 amp, 120 volt and 277 volt branch circuit homeruns (to panelboard) serving receptacles, equipment, and lighting shall be No. 10 AWG minimum to first outlet or light fixture. B. Size homeruns for 120V branch circuits based on the overall circuit length to the furthest outlet. The following requirements shall be followed: 1. 0 to 100 ft. circuit length: Size homerun at #10 AWG minimum to first outlet. 2. 101 to 150 ft. circuit length: Size homerun at #8 AWG minimum to first outlet. 3. 151 to 250 ft. circuit length: Size homerun at #6 AWG minimum to first outlet. 4. For other branch circuits, size conductors so that voltage drop does not exceed 3%. C. All 120 volt and 277 volt branch circuits shall have a dedicated neutral conductor for each circuit. D. The plans show a circuit number for each device or light. This is done for clarity. No more than three 120V or 277 circuits shall be allowed in a single homerun raceway. E. For isolated ground receptacle circuits, provide a dedicated neutral conductor and a dedicated isolated ground conductor for each circuit. F. Any branch circuit protected by a GFCI circuit breaker shall be provided with a dedicated neutral conductor. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 48613. B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. D. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. E. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. F. Use compression connectors for conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Use compression tool designed for the size and type of connector being compressed. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150% of insulation rating of conductor. G. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. H. Where oversized conductors are called for (due to voltage drop, etc.) provide/install lugs as required to match conductors, or provide/install splice box, and splice to reduce conductor size to match lug size. 3.7 MOTOR AND EQUIPMENT WIRING A. Furnish and install motor circuits in accordance with schedules on drawings and code requirements, from source of supply to associated motor starter, and from starter to motor terminal box, including necessary and required intermediate connections. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-4 B. Conductor and conduit size for motor branch circuits, if shown on drawings, are sized for motor requirement only. Contractor may, at his option, include associated control conductors in same conduit providing the conduit size is adjusted to meet code requirements for percentage of fill. C. Motors shall have proper size wire as per applicable codes and nameplate ratings. Verify ratings of motors before installing wiring. D. Obtain manufacturer's wiring diagrams of electrical equipment furnished with equipment and do not proceed to wire equipment without this information. E. Before installing raceways and pulling wire to any mechanical equipment, verify electrical characteristics with final submittal on equipment to assure proper number and AWG of conductors. (As for multiple speed motors, different motor starter arrangements, etc.). F. Make equipment connections with flexible conduit or liquid -tight flexible metallic conduit. Properly ground non -current carrying metal parts of equipment. Where cord connections or receptacles are required, provide type "S" rubber jacketed cord, 600 volt, heavy duty service of sizes and lengths required, and receptacle as applicable. G. Coordinate work with the other trades such that the operation of mechanical equipment will be as described in mechanical specifications. H. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or in specifications, motors shall be furnished, set in place, and connected to driven equipment and prepared for operation as specified in other sections. Provide final connection and proper phase relationship to achieve proper motor rotation. 3.8 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.9 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire -resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and all feeder conductors. 2. Visual and Mechanical Inspection a. Compare cable data with drawing and specifications b. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and correct connection in accordance with single -line diagram. C. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque -wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data. d. Inspect compression -applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation. e. Inspect for correct conductor identification and phase arrangements. f. Inspect jacket insulation and condition. 3. Electrical Tests a. Perform insulation -resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 500 volts do for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts do for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-5 1) Test and document all combinations of Phase to Phase, Phase to Ground, Phase to Neutral, and Neutral to Ground. Should contractor not test all combinations, contractor shall retest at contractor's expense. 2) Submit prior to energizing equipment for approval. b. Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection. C. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors. 4. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: a. Test procedures used. b. Make and model of test equipment used, including last calibration date (calibration date must be within the last 12 months) C. Test results that comply with requirements. d. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room ##5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-6 SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported conduit systems and their contents. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. C. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. For empty conduits, include weight of 5 type XHHW wires of maximum permissible size. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory -fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. ERICO International Corporation. C. Thomas & Betts Corporation. d. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. e. Hilti Inc. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. 4. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items. 5. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel. 6. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable -iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non -armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron in non -corrosive areas and fiberglass or stainless steel in corrosive areas. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized in non -corrosive areas and Stainless Steel (in corrosive areas. F. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems — Corrosive Areas: Structural -grade, factory -formed, glass -fiber -resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch-diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1 surface. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. C. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. d. Seasafe, Inc. 2. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. 3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items. 4. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel. 5. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria. G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-2 supported loads and building materials where used. Approval from structural engineer shall be obtained prior to the use of power -actuated fasteners. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, zinc -coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable -iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type, Stainless Steel (in corrosive areas). 7. Hanger Rods: Galvanized threaded steel, Stainless Steel (in corrosive areas). 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural -steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter and except where support spacing requirements exceed NFPA 70 requirements. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for raceways as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two -bolt conduit clamps for conduits 1 '/4 inch and larger, single -bolt conduit clamps for conduits 1 inch inch and smaller and as approved by an agency acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-3 B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder -actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard -weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight -aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts; Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted -channel racks attached to substrate. D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. E. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. F. Obtain permission from Structural Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. H. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. I. In wet and damp locations use channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch off wall. 3.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Lay -in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: 1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4- inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. B. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem -Mounted, Single -Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin -stem hangers and swivel aligners. 3. Verify stem/pendant/rod length. 4. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-4 C. Install channel supports across main grid runners or grid supports, securely tied down or anchored for fixtures and devices mounted in suspended ceiling systems so as not to cause tile to sag and so that fixture or device cannot be lifted, rotated, or displaced. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site - fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-5 SECTION 26 06 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Fire Stop Systems" for fire stopping materials and installation at penetration through walls, ceilings and other fire -rated elements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. C. GRC: Galvanized rigid (steel) conduit. D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. F. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit. G. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. H. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listing and Labeling: Conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-1 2.2 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 4. Robroy Industries. 5. Southwire Company. 6. Thomas & Betts Corporation. B. Metal Conduit: 1. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 2. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc -coated steel or aluminum. 3. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. 4. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. 5. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. C. Metal Fittings: 1. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 2. Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 3. Fittings for EMT: a. Conduit Fittings for Indoor Wet Locations or Exterior: Steel insulated throat, compression, UL listed rain -tight. b. Fittings for dry locations: Steel insulated throat, set -screw or compression type (Die-cast fittings will not be accepted). 4. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. D. Joint Compound for IMC and GRC: Approved, as defined in applicable electrical code, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Amco Corporation. 4. Cantex Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp. 6. Champion Fiberglass 7. Condux International, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Company. 9. Kraloy. 10. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 11. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 12. RACO; a Hubbell company. 13. Thomas & Betts Corporation. B. Nonmetallic Conduit: 1. Fiberglass: a. Comply with NEMA TC 14. b. Comply with UL 2515 for aboveground raceways. C. Comply with UL 2420 for belowground raceways. 2. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC„ complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-2 3. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. C. Nonmetallic Fittings: 1. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 2. Fittings RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. a. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. 3. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer. 2.4 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor, dry locations, Type 3R for outdoor and indoor wet locations, and Type 4X for corrosive areas, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold- down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. C. Wireway Covers: Hinged type for Type 1 wireways, Flanged-and-gasketed type for Type 3R and 4X wireways. D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse -Hinds. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 4. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 5. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 6. Robroy Industries. 7. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 8. Wiremold / Legrand. B. General Requirements: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Galvanized Steel. Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Surface mount, NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover with stainless steel screws. Provide threaded hubs. E. Weatherproof outlets shall utilize a use stainless steel or cadmium plated malleable iron box suitable for flush mounting. F. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: 4 inch (102 mm) octagon, minimum depth of 3 inches (76 mm). G. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. H. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, listed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb. I. Device Box Dimensions: Minimum 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. J. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. K. Gangable boxes are prohibited. L. Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-3 M. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1,Type 3R, Type 4 with continuous -hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC or IMC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC, IMC, EMT. 3. Underground Conduit: a. Outside Building Foundation: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC,. b. Under Slab on Grade: Use RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: I. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC or IMC to below switch height. Raceway locations include the following: a. Loading docks. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet -handling units. 3. Exposed Wet or Damp Locations: Use GRC or IMC between finish grade and 96 inches (2.5 m) above finish grade. Use EMT above 96 inches (2.5 m) with rain -tight compression fittings. 4. Concealed above Ceilings, elevated underfloor, and in Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Concealed in Concrete Walls or Slab: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC. 7. Connections to Lighting Fixtures in Accessible Ceilings: FMC — max 72 inches (1.8 m) in length. 8. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: EMT. 9. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT. 10. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT. 11. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 3R in damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1. Minimum conduit size shall be % inch trade size except for switch legs and control circuits may be'h inch. 2. Minimum FMC size shall be '/2 inch except flexible connections to lighting fixtures may be 3/8 inch, not to exceed 6 feet in length D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 4 3.2 EXPANSION FITTINGS — BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS A. Provide appropriate type of building expansion fittings as identified in this specification as required for each type of raceway. B. For quantity and location of ALL building expansion joints refer to Architectural and Structural drawings. Exact quantity and locations of expansion fittings may or may not be shown on the electrical plans and does not relieve the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate with other disciplines for building expansion joints. Change orders will not be allowed for missed expansion joints by contractor. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof. C. Keep raceways at least 12 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. D. Conduit routing shown on drawings indicate approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. E. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. F. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. G. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. I. Install 4 to 6 foot flexible steel conduit drops from an independent junction box mounted above ceiling and accessible from below ceiling to recessed ceiling mounted equipment. Allow for positioning of equipment to tile increments. J. Flexible conduit shall not be run from light fixture to light fixture. K. Make bends in raceway using large -radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved. L. Conceal conduit within finished walls, above ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. 1. Conduits for interior building branch circuits shall not be installed below floor slab on grade or within concrete floor slabs. 2. RNC conduit shall not be used in interior spaces. Conduit shall not be run below or within floor slabs for branch circuits within interior spaces, unless otherwise noted on drawings for certain spaces. Where RNC conduit is run below floor slabs for feeder conduits and conduit is stubbed above slab, EMT or galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be provided for conduit above floor slab. RNC conduit for feeders for emergency system shall be EPC-80-PVC. Where it is impossible to run conduit for branch circuits overhead to equipment and receptacles, conduit shall be run below slabs on grade or run within concrete slab, if not on grade, and conduit shall be galvanized rigid steel and shall be black mastic coated the entire length. M. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-5 N. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximuml0-foot intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Where the first outlet box or device is more than 18" above finished floor transition from PVC to EMT, IMC, or rigid steel conduit before rising above the floor. O. Stub -ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or GRC for raceways. 2. Use conduit bushings or insulated fitting at conduit ends not terminated in hubs or to an enclosure. P. Underground Conduit Bends: 1. Conduit Bends: Where RNC is installed, all conduit bends greater than 45' in conduits 1 'h inches trade size and larger shall be made with a fiberglass elbow or black mastic coated rigid steel conduit. Q. Use EMT conduit for all isolated circuit conductors. Under no circumstances shall wiring pulling compounds be used when pulling the wire for isolated circuits. R. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. S. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. T. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. U. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. V. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. W. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. X. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor -type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. Y. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, rigid, metallic and nonmetallic, as follows: 1. % inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1 inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Any section of conduit longer than 150 feet or containing more than two (2) 90 degree bends shall have pull boxes. These boxes are not shown on drawings. 4. Communications conduits shall be separated from power conduits. Coordinate with Communications, Specialty Contractors, and Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) recommendations. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-6 Z. Install raceway sealing fittings/compound at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Areas where conduits are in water such as fountains and pools. 3. Where an underground raceway enters a building or structure. 4. Any exterior or wet areas where conduits stub up above ground with cables exiting. 5. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain different pressure set points. 6. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. AA. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. BB. Expansion -Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight -run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RNC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight -run length that exceeds 100 feet. 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. C. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. 3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 4. Install each expansion joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. CC. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. DD. Conduit Routing: 1. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. 2. Route exposed conduit parallel with and perpendicular to walls and other building architectural and structural elements. 3. Route conduits above accessible ceilings to clear access openings. 4. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping of other trades. 5. Maintain 12 inches clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 deg F. EE. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de -burr cut ends. FF. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. GG. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses control expansion joints. HH. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. II. Termination of Conduit Stubs: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-7 1. Underground and Flush with Finish Floor: Use coupling and threaded plug. 2. Above Floor: Use conduit bushing. 3. Low Voltage Systems (comm, security, AV, etc.): Use conduit bushing. JJ. Make conduit penetrations of exterior concrete or masonry walls below grade, and of floor slabs on fill below grade, watertight. 3.4 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Location of outlets and equipment as shown on drawings is approximate, and exact location shall be verified and shall be determined by: 1. Construction or code requirements. 2. Conflict with equipment of other trades. 3. Equipment manufacturer's drawings. 4. As dimensioned on interior or architectural elevations/plans as long as in compliance with all applicable codes. B. All outlet boxes shall be mounted flush with wall surface unless noted otherwise. C. Weatherproof outlet boxes specifically noted for surface mounting shall utilize a cast metal box complete with threaded conduit ends for surface outlets. D. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. E. Use plaster rings for all concealed work except for masonry boxes; depth of rings as required to reach finished surface. F. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. G. Use masonry boxes with square corners in tile, marble, brick or concrete block. H. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits or from ceiling support wires. I. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices". J. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. K. Conflict with millwork, tack boards, etc. Coordinate mounting heights and location of outlets mounted above counters, benches and backsplashes. Contractor shall review architectural elevations and millwork drawings before roughing -in boxes and conduit. Any conflicts shall be noted and addressed by an RFI requesting direction as to resolution. Adjusting box locations due to such conflicts shall be at no additional compensation. L. Minor modification in the location of outlets and equipment is considered incidental up to a distance of 10 feet with no additional compensation, providing necessary instructions are given prior to roughing in of outlet. M. Electrical outlet boxes may be installed in vertical fire resistive assemblies classified as fire/smoke and smoke partitions without affecting the fire classification, provided such openings do not exceed 16 square inchesand they are located per applicable U.L. assembly. All clearances between such outlet boxes and the gypsum board must be completely filled with joint compound or other approved materials. The wall must be built around outlets of a larger size so as to not interfere with the integrity of the wall rating. The aggregate surface area of the boxes shall not exceed 100 square inches per 100 square feet. Boxes located on opposite sides of walls or partitions shall be separated by a horizontal distance of 24 inches or by providing listed putty pads around both boxes. The metallic outlet or switch boxes shall be securely fastened to the 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-8 studs and the opening in the wallboard facing shall be cut so that the clearance between the box and the wallboard does not exceed 1/8 inch. N. Do not install boxes back to back or through wall. Offset outlet boxes on opposite sides of wall a minimum of 12 inches or on opposite sides of stud in partition walls. Where back to back boxes cannot be avoided, provide gypsum board between boxes. O. Where more than two switches or devices are located at one point, use ganged boxes and covers, unless devices do not allow for ganging or manufacturer recommends otherwise. Provide permanently installed barriers between adjacent switches as required to meet regulatory requirements. P. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats and similar devices. Q. Install emergency switches which occur adjacent to normal light switches in separate boxes to maintain system's isolation in accordance with NEC required separation 3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.6 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-9 SECTION 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non -fire -rated construction of poured concrete walls and floors. 2. Sleeve -seal systems. 3. Sleeve -seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire -resistance -rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. C. Metraflex Company (The). d. GPT Industries — (Link -Seal) 2.2 SLEEVES A. Wall Sleeves: 1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends. 2. Cast -Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non -Fire -Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized -steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw -fastening the sleeve to the board. C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544-1 b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. 2.3 SLEEVE -SEAL SYSTEMS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM or Nitrile (Buna N) rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Glass Reinforced Plastic or Reinforced Nylon Polymer or Stainless Steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 4. Positive hydrostatic seal rated at 20 psig or greater. 2.4 SLEEVE -SEAL FITTINGS A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve -type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 2.5 GROUT A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non -fire - rated walls or floors. B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post -hardening and volume -adjusting, dry, hydraulic -cement grout. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 2.6 SILICONE SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealants: Single -component, silicone -based, neutral -curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self -leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone -based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON -FIRE -RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations. C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above -Grade Non -Fire -Rated Concrete and Masonry -Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non -Fire -Rated Walls and Floors: a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section "Joint Sealants." b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544-2 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core -drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for above grade floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors [4 inches] above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non -Fire -Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. E. Roof -Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot - type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. F. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. G. Underground, Exterior -Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for I -inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve -seal system. 3.2 SLEEVE -SEAL -SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve -seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs -on -grade at raceway entries into building. B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.3 SLEEVE -SEAL -FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve -seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall. C. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve -seal fittings. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 26 05 44 - 3 SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground -line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive -attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color -Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive wraparound or tubing type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 1 1. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection. 2. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings including neutral conductor. 3. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams on shop drawings. 2.2 FLOOR MARKING TAPE A. 2-inch-wide, 5-mil pressure -sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay. 2.3 UNDERGROUND -LINE WARNING TAPE A. Description: Permanent, bright -colored, continuous -printed, polyethylene tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 3. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. 4. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 5. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. B. Color and Printing: 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red -Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. 3. Inscriptions for Orange -Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE. 2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark -gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 1/2 inch. C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark -gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 1/2 inch. 2.7 CABLE TIES A. UV -Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 2 4. Color: Black. B. Plenum -Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self -tapping stainless steel screws, except contact type permanent commercial grade adhesive providing a permanent bond shall be used where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. C. Two-sided tape and dynamo type adhesives are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use as listed below: 1. Indoors and Outdoors: UV -stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. G. Underground -Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground -line warning tape directly above line at 12 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Colors for Accessible Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Paint all junction boxes, junction box covers, and conduit fittings using color code legend. 2. Legend: a. Emergency Power Supply (EPS) — Purple b. Emergency System Life Safety Branch — Yellow C. Emergency System Critical Branch — Orange d. Equipment System Branch — Green B. Colors for Raceways for Low Voltage Systems: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-3 I . Paint all junction boxes, junction box covers, and conduit fittings using color code legend. 2. Legend: a. Fire Alarm System — Red b. CCTV System — Brown C. CATV System — Black d. Access Control System — Light Blue e. Telecommunications System (Voice/Data) - White f. Nurse Call Systems — Pink g. Doctor's Dictation/Physiological Monitoring Systems — White 3. If existing color coding is different than indicated above, match existing color coding. C. Power -Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color - coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color -Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch -circuit conductors and neutral and ground conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208Y/120V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral: White. 5) Ground: Green. 6) Isolated Ground: Green/Yellow Tracer. C. Colors for 480Y/277V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral: Gray. 5) Ground: Green. 6) Isolated Ground: Green/Yellow Tracer. d. If existing color coding is different than indicated above, match existing color coding. 2. Field -Applied, Color -Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half -lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. D. Install instructional sign in the main electrical room including the color -code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive -film -type labels. E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write -on tags to conductors and list source. F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field -installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory -installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. G. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground -line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 4 Install underground -line warning tape for both direct -buried cables and cables in raceway. H. At each junction box, the covers on junction boxes and pull boxes in areas that are not to be painted shall be marked with "Indelible Markers" to indicate the panel and circuit number(s) of conductors in the box. In areas where exposed conduit and junction boxes are to be painted, indicate circuit number(s) of conductors in the box on the inside cover of the box. I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive warning labels. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment. J. Stored Energy Devices/Equipment (UPSs and Inverters) 1. Provide Warning sign(s) on the door(s) leading into spaces containing energy storage devices to alert first responders there may be energized equipment inside. Provide a sign clearly indicating the disconnect to the output of the energy storage device, if exists. K. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with design documents. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1- 1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high and where three lines of text are required, use 3 inches b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. C. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. C. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Disconnects e. Switchgear. f. Switchboards. g. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. h. Substations. i. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. j. Motor -control centers. k. Enclosed switches. 1. Enclosed circuit breakers. in. Enclosed controllers. n. Variable -speed controllers. o. Power transfer equipment. p. Contactors. q. UPS equipment. r. Lighting Control Equipment S. Power Inverters 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-5 L. Engraved laminate signs for equipment identification shall have white lettering in a colored field as indicated below for the following systems: 1. Normal Power - Black 2. EPS System - Purple 3. Emergency System Life Safety Branch - Yellow 4. Emergency System Critical Branch - Orange 5. Emergency System Equipment Branch - Green 6. Fire Alarm System - Red 7. Nurse Call Systems - Blue 8. If existing color coding is different than indicated above, match existing color coding. M. Equipment connected to the Essential Electrical System (panels, transfer switches, disconnects, etc.) shall be labeled as per branch, i.e.: "PANEL XXX-LIFE SAFETY BRANCH"; "PANEL XXX-CRITICAL BRANCH"; "PANEL XXX EQUIPMENT BRANCH". Voltage shall also be indicated. N. Panelboard identification shall indicate panelboard designation, voltage and where fed from, i.e., "PANEL ILA — 208Y/120V, 30, 4W" FED FROM 1MDPHA O. Provide energy storage warning sign(s) on the door(s) leading into the spaces containing energy storage devices to alert first responders there may be energized equipment. 1. Provide a warning sign for the first responders to easily identify the disconnect to the output of the energy storage devices. P. Panelboards located in storage rooms shall have floor space per NEC- 110 permanently marked and shall be identified as "Electrical Access - Not For Storage." Q. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings. R. Identify neutrals with its associated circuit number(s). S. Install conductor markers at all new connections and terminations and existing connections and terminations, modified or altered. A. All cover plates for control stations controlling remote equipment shall be engraved to identify the device being controlled. B. Engraved cover plates shall be supplied and installed on all switches serving lobbies, corridors, and other public locations and shall indicate load controlled. C. Wiring device cover plates shall be factory engraved to indicate panel designation and circuit number (i.e."1HLA-7" ). Letter height shall be'/4", recessed and colored: a. Black for normal power b. White for emergency power (on red faceplate) D. For receptacles other than 20A, 120V, engraving shall include receptacle voltage, phase and amperage at top of receptacle and panel designation and circuit numbers at bottom of receptacles. E. Adhesive labels and nameplates are not acceptable. 3.4 PANELBOARD CIRCUIT DIRECTORIES A. Install in each panelboard a typewritten directory accurately indicating rooms and equipment being served. Verify actual room names and numbers to be used. Also, provide a copy of typewritten panelboard directories in Owner's close-out manuals. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 6 B. Where new circuits are added to existing panelboards or existing circuits deleted, provide new typewritten panelboard circuit directory with added circuits identified and deleted circuits indicated as `spare'. Circuit identification shall indicate room and equipment being served. 3.5 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Provide'neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor and voltage/phase rating. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-7 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles. 2. Receptacles with integral GFCI. 3. Twist -locking receptacles. 4. Receptacles with integral surge suppression units. 5. Isolated -ground receptacles. 6. Hospital -grade receptacles. 7. Device face plates. 8. Momentary Contact Switches 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter. B. RFI: Radio -frequency interference. C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Receptacles for Owner -Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality -control reports. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing - label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source unless noted otherwise. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room 45 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 3. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 2.2 DEVICE COLORS A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Generator Power System: Red. 3. Isolated -Ground Receptacles: Color of wiring device with orange triangle. 2.3 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. General: 1. Hospital -Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A, 5-20R configuration: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498 Supplement SD, and FS W-C-596. B. Heavy -Duty, Simplex: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pass & Seymour — 8301 b. Hubbell — HBL8310 C. Leviton — 8310 C. Heavy -Duty Duplex: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pass & Seymour — 8300 b. Hubbell — HBL8300 C. Leviton — 8300 D. Tamper -Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pass & Seymour — TR63H b. Hubbell — HBL8300-SG C. Leviton — 8300-SG 2. Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article, "Pediatric Locations" Section. E. Controlled Duplex Receptacles: 1. Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 2. Device marked as controlled receptacle. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pass & Seymour — 5362CD b. Hubbell — BR20C2 C. Leviton — 5362-2P F. Combination USB-A / USB-C Duplex Receptacles: 1. Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A, tamper resistant. 2. Device shall incorporate (1) USB-A port, (1) USB-C, and (2) AC outlets. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pass & Seymour — TR20HUSBAC b. Hubbell — USB8200AC C. Leviton — T5833-HG 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 2 G. Outdoor and Damp/Wet Locations Weather Resistant Combination USB-A/USB-C Duplex Receptacles: 1. Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A, tamper resistant. 2. Device shall incorporate (1) USB-A port, (1) USB-C, and (2) AC outlets. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pass & Seymour — WRTR20USBAC b. Hubbell — USB20AC5WWR H. Ground -Fault Circuit Interrupters: 1. General Description: Hospital -Grade, duplex, feed -through type. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: a. Receptacle shall be capable of being installed in a 2-1/2 inch deep outlet box without adapter. b. Shall be grounding type with solid-state ground fault sensing and signaling; with 5 milliamperes ground fault trip level. C. Test and reset buttons shall match color of face. d. If critical components within receptacle are damaged and the ground fault protection is lost, power to receptacle shall be automatically disconnected within the device. e. Receptacle shall automatically monitor ground fault circuit interrupting functionality at a maximum of every (3) hours. If receptacle can no longer provide GFCI protection, it must deny power and provide a visual indication that it is no longer functional. f. Receptacle shall deny power if line conudctors are incorrectly wired to the load terminals. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Indoor — Dry Locations (Tamper Resistant): 1) Pass & Seymour — 2097HGTR 2) Hubbell — GFTWRST83 3) Leviton — GFTR2-HG b. Outdoor and Damp/Wet Locations: 1) Pass & Seymour — 2097TRWR 2) Hubbell — GFTWRST83 3) Leviton — GFWT2-HG I. Duplex Convenience Isolated Ground Receptacles: 1. Straight blade, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding type, NEMA 5-20R configuration, orange triangle indication, with provision for back or side wiring and rated 20 amperes, 125 volt, AC. `Hospital' grade. a. Device color shall match non isolated ground receptacles and have an orange triangle on the device. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pass & Seymour — IG8300 b. Hubbell — IG8300 C. Leviton — 8300IG 3. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. J. TVSS Receptacles: 1. General Description: Comply with UL 1449, with integral TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground. a. TVSS Components: Multiple metal -oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp -level rating of 400 volts and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J, according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726-3 b. Active TVSS Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to indicate device is "active" or "no longer in service." C. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pass & Seymour — 5352-SP (without iso ground), IG5362-SP (with iso ground) b. Hubbell — HBL8362-SA (without iso ground), IG8362-SA (with iso ground) C. Leviton — 7380 (without iso ground), 5380IG (with iso ground) K. Clock -Hanger Receptacle: 1. Provide recessed, 15A, Clock -Hanger type receptacle: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pass & Seymour — S3713 b. Hubbell — HBL5235 C. Leviton — 5261-CH L. Special Purpose Receptacle: 1. Manufacturer: Same as general purpose receptacle. 2. Configuration as shown on Drawings. f 4c�y `f I Frei 1_LO A. General: B. Switches shall be rated for 20 amperes, and rated 120/277 volts AC. Switch shall be manufacturer's specification grade toggle switch. Switches shall have quiet action mechanism with silver alloy contacts for longevity. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. 1. Terminal screws shall allow back and side wiring and accept #14, 12, and 10 AWG stranded or solid wire. C. Single Pole 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pass & Seymour — PS20AC1 b. Hubbell —HBL 1221 C. Leviton—1221-2 D. Double Pole Single Throw: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pass & Seymour — PS20AC2 b. Hubbell — HBL 1222 C. Leviton—1222-2 E. Three Way: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pass & Seymour — PS20AC3 b. Hubbell — HBL 1223 C. Leviton—1223-2 F. Four Way: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pass & Seymour — PS20AC4 b. Hubbell — HBL 1224 C. Leviton—1224-2 G. Key Switch Locking - Same series devices as above with —L option. H. Indicator Light — Separate pilot strap, red color. I. Locator Light — Lighted handle type switch, green color handle. 2.5 DIMMERS - WALL BOX A. LED Fixtures - 0-10V: 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room 45 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726-4 1. Provide branch lighting 0-10V sinking control for fixtures with LED drivers, with electromagnetic filters to reduce noise, RF and TV interference to minimum. Construct with continuously adjustable trim potentiometer for adjustment of low and high end dimming; and with anodized heat sinks. Provide 6 inch wire connecting leads. a. Shall be Lutron (slide to off) Nova NTSTV-DV. b. Provide wattage as indicated on drawings. C. Provide additional interface modules if connected wattage exceeds dimmer rated wattage including any derating of the dimmer as documented by the manufacturer. B. LED Bulbs in 120V Fixtures with Retrofit LED Bulbs: 1. Provide branch lighting control for LED bulbs, with electromagnetic filters to reduce noise, RF and TV interference to minimum. Construct with continuously adjustable trim potentiometer for adjustment of low and high end dimming; and with anodized heat sinks. Provide 6 inch wire connecting leads. a. Shall be Lutron (slide to off) Nova NTCL. b. Provide wattage as indicated on drawings. C. Use only with LED bulbs marked as dimmable and on the Lutron recommended list. C. Incandescent Lamp: 1. Provide branch lighting solid-state AC dimmer controls for incandescent fixtures; wattage as indicated, 120 volts, 60 HZ single pole. Equip with electromagnetic filters to eliminate noise, RF and TV interference, and with 6 inch wire connecting leads. Do not remove fins. a. Shall be Lutron (slide to off) type Nova NT series for line voltage incandescent lamps. b. Shall be Lutron (slide to off) Nova NTLV series for low voltage incandescent lamps. C. Provide wattage as indicated on drawings. D. Fluorescent Lamp: 1. Provide single pole, full -wave semi -conductor modular type AC dimmers for fluorescent fixtures; with 60 Hz, wattage and voltage as indicated, and with electromagnetic filters to reduce noise, RF and TV interference to minimum. Construct with continuously adjustable trim potentiometer for adjustment of low end dimming; and with anodized heat sinks. Provide 6 inch wire connecting leads. a. Shall be Lutron (slide to off) NTF series (coordinate with ballast wiring type) 2.6 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES A. Wall Plates: 1. Provide wall plates for single and combination wiring devices, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Select plates which mate and match wiring devices to which attached. Construct with metal screws for securing plates to devices; screw heads colored to match finish of plates; wall plates colored to match wiring devices. Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features: a. Material and Finish: 1) Stainless Steel (0.04 inch thick type 302 satin finished) a) Kitchens b) Back of House Areas subject to damage • Equipment Rooms • Loading Docks • Similar areas 2) Nylon, smooth — color to match device a) All other areas 2. Device plates for surface mounted Type FS or FD boxes: Type FSK galvanized steel covers. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726-5 3. Device plates for surface mounted, 4 in. square boxes: 1/2 in. raised galvanized steel covers. B. Weatherproof Covers: I. Weatherproof covers for all 125-250 volt, 15 and 20 ampere receptacles installed outdoors or in a wet location shall be weatherproof, NEMA 3R, with hinged outlet enclosure rated for rain proof protection while outlet is in use. The unit shall be furnished with a neoprene gasket between the mounting surface and the enclosure, and between the mounting plate and the hinged cover to assure proper seal. a. Surface Mounted Type: shall be RedDot, Die Cast with GFCI mounting plate horizontal mount (duplex), CKMU, vertical mount (quad), 2CKU. 2. Weatherproof covers for all free standing outdoor receptacles shall be installed in a 19.5", low -profile enclosure with built in while in use cover. Shall be bronze in color equal to Arlington Industries GPDI9BR. 3. Weatherproof covers for all other receptacles shall be cast aluminum with a gasketed cover. Shall be RedDot DCCD series. 4. Weatherproof covers for switches shall be lever switch type, rugged metallic construction with gasketed cover . Shall be equal to Hubbell-Raco 5121 (single switch), Hubbell- Raco 5124 (two ganged switches), Hubbell-Raco 5126 (three ganged switches). 2.7 Shunt Trip Stations 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or equal: a. Rockwell Automation: Cat# 80OT-NX114 2. Break -Glass Push Button Station Red push button station in a weatherproof enclosure incorporates snap -action contact block with (1) NO and (1) NC contacts, which are operated when the small glass window is broken. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATOIN A. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. B. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. C. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. d. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726-6 C. Device Installation: 1. Clean debris from every outlet box; including excess drywall mud. 2. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 3. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 4. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. Clean exposed surfaces to remove spatters and restore finish. 5. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 6. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding -head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 7. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 8. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 9. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 10. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal -to -metal contact. Provide extension rings to bring device flush with finished surface (do not use switch box extension rings/goof rings). Install devices plumb, level and rigidly in place. D. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Vertically Mounted Receptacles - Install ground pin down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left. 2. Horizontally Mounted Receptacles — Install so that Neutral blade is on top. E. Device Plates: I. Do not use oversized or extra -deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. Dimmers: 1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions. 4. Verify dimmers achieve full rating of specified/designed load indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates where devices permit. H. All exterior receptacles shall be GFCI type mounted in weatherproof boxes. I. Ground receptacles with the insulated green ground wire from device ground screw to a bolted outlet box connection. Isolated ground receptacles shall have the second ground wire (green with yellow tracer) ground the receptacle. J. Provide hospital grade receptacles in all "Patient Care" areas. K. This Contractor shall check the switch location against the Architectural plans and shop drawings to be certain that switches are on the strike side of the door, regardless of swing shown on drawings. Edge of plate shall be not more than 12" from door frame. L. Install emergency switches which occur adjacent to normal light switches in separate boxes to maintain system's isolation in accordance with NEC required separation. M. Ground -fault circuit interrupter type receptacles may provide GFCI protection for downstream receptacles on same circuit only where located in same room as other receptacles. N. Provide hospital grade safety type, tamper resistant duplex receptacles in all pediatric locations. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726-7 A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served on device. 2. Shunt Trip Stations: Identify panel being shunt tripped via placque above station. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99. a. Provide a grounding system test in accordance with NFPA 99 for all receptacles in patient care areas. 2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 3. Provide operational testing for devices. 4. Test receptacles with Hubbell 5200, Woodhead 1750, or equal, for correct polarity, proper ground connection, and wiring faults. 5. Test straight blade hospital -grade convenience outlets for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz.. B. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726-8 SECTION 26 28 13 FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits, enclosed switches and enclosed controllers. 2. Plug fuses rated 125-V ac and less for use in plug -fuse -type enclosed switches. 3. Spare -fuse cabinets. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare -fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated: 1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses. D. Comply with NFPA 70. E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FUSES 262813-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc. 2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages. 2.3 SPARE -FUSE CABINET A. Characteristics: Wall -mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano -hinged door and key - coded cam lock and pull. 1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity minimum. 2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel. 3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch-high letters on exterior of door. 4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged. B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features. C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment. D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS A. Cartridge Fuses: 1. Service Entrance: Class L, time delay (200kA Rated). 2. Motor and Equipment Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay (200kA Rated). 3. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is easily readable without removing fuse. B. Install spare -fuse cabinet(s) in each electrical room serving fused equipment. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 FUSES 2628 13 - 2 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder. END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 FUSES 2628 13 - 3 SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Non -fusible switches. 3. Molded -case circuit breakers (MCCB's). 4. Molded -case switches. 5. Enclosures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality -control reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room 45 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2628 16 - 1 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Square D switches or comparable product by one of the following. The listing of a manufacturer as "acceptable" does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to ensure that any submittals made are for products that meet or exceed the specifications included here. 1. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 and 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. B. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. 6. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 7. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 8. Service -Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2628 16 - 2 2.3 NON -FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 and 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. B. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. 5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 2.4 HORSEPOWER RATED SWITCHES A. Switches utilized for disconnecting means for motors and equipment shall have the following ratings and shall be one of the above specified manufacturer catalog numbers. 1. Rated 30 amps, for motor loads of up to 2 hp at 120 volt and 3 horsepower at 208, 240, and 277 volts. 2. Provide pad lock accessory where required by code to be locking which includes any motor/equipment disconnects serving elevators in machine room or hoistway. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pass & Seymour — 7802 a. Hubbell — HBL7832D b. Leviton — MS302-DS 2.5 MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents indicated on the drawings. B. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits in each pole. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 150 A and larger, adjustable from the front. C. Construct with over center, trip -free toggle type operating mechanisms with quick make, quick break action and positive handle trip indication. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position. Provide breakers lugs AL/CU rated. Lugs shall be adequate to accept wire size indicated on the drawings. D. Adjustable, Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front -mounted, field -adjustable trip setting. E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field -replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field -adjustable settings: 1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short -time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short -time time adjustments. 4. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response. F. Current -Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let -through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. G. Ground -Fault, Circuit -Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with Class A ground -fault protection (6-mA or more trip and hold below 4mA of ground fault 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816-3 current). One way circuit length shall not exceed 250 feet. If length exceeds 250 feet, notify engineer in writing prior to installing circuit. H. Ground -Fault, Equipment -Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground -fault protection (30-mA trip). Provide as noted on plans and/or panel schedules and for all circuits supplying power to heat trace. I. Where required to achieve system coordination with upstream and downstream overcurrent devices, solid-state circuit breakers shall be provided. All electronics shall be self-contained and require no external relaying, power supply, or accessories. Printed circuit cards shall be treated to resist moisture absorption, fungus growth, and signal leakage. All electronics shall be housed in an enclosure which provides protection against arcs, magnetic interference, dust, and other contaminants. Solid -sate sensing shall measure true RMS current with error less than one percent on systems with distortions through the 131h harmonic. Peak or average actuating devices are not acceptable. Current sensors shall be toroidal construction, encased in a plastic housing, filled with epoxy to protect against damage and moisture and shall be integrally mounted on the breaker. Where indicated on the drawings, circuit breaker frames shall be rated for 100 percent continuous duty. Circuit breakers shall have tripping features as described below; 1. Long time current pick up. 2. Adjustable long time delay. 3. Short time current pick up. 4. Adjustable short time delay. 5. Short time I square times t switch. 6. Instantaneous current pick up. 7. Ground fault current pick up, adjustable from 20 percent to 60 percent of sensor rating, but in no case greater than 1200 amperes. Sensing of ground fault current at the main bonding jumper or ground strap shall not be permitted. Provide ground fault only where indicated on the drawings. 8. Overload and short circuit and ground fault trip indicators shall be provided. J. Interrupting ratings shall be as indicated on drawings. Circuit breakers shall be fully rated for available fault current. Series rating is not acceptable. K. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high -intensity discharge lighting circuits. 4. Provide the following where noted on the drawings or schedules: a. Ground -Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self - powered for solid state type trip units and remote -mounted and powered for magnetic type trip units with mechanical ground -fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time -delay settings, push -to -test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero -sequence current transformer/sensor. b. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil -clearing contact. 2.6 ENCLOSURES A. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: Type 1. B. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. C. Outdoor Locations subject to salt air: Type 4X D. Kitchen and wash -down areas: Type 4X, stainless steel. E. Pool and Water Equipment room with salt water, chlorine, or chemical storage: Type 4X. F. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2628 16 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Klf� Q&3IF11A WIVne1►1 A. Install individual wall -mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. C. Install fuses in fusible devices. D. Circuit breakers and molded case switches shall be factory installed in enclosures. E. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated -plastic nameplate. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. F. Test and/or permanently record the following: 1. Fuses: a. Equipment nameplate requirement. b. Actual fuse rating. 2. Circuit Breakers: a. Nameplate data. b. Actual trip setting. 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 ENCLOSED SWITC14ES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816-5 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field -adjustable circuit -breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "System Studies." END OF SECTION 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoseopy 3/17/2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2628 16 - 6 ehapuis design group a r<hi lectu�.ps Adventhealth Zephyrhills: Operating Room 5 - Cystoscopy Client Code/File Number: 23/100046-127-1 Construction Documents Special Conditions of the Contract VOLUME 3 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No. 042.21-177.01 FL Reg: AA-26003049 Table of Contents NOA 20-0310.10 SteelCraft H Series Double Flush Outswing Commercial Steel Door w/wo Panic Exit-LMI W� 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth - Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystology 3/17/2021 Table of Contents - 1 MIAMhOADE MIAMI-DADE COUNTY Q;KAW= PRODUCT CONTROL SECTION 11805 SW 26 Street, Room 208 DEPARTMENT OF REGULATORY AND ECONOMIC RESOURCES (RER) Miami, Florida 33175-2474 BOARD AND CODE ADMINISTRATION DIVISION T (786) 315-2590 F (786) 315-2599 NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE (NOA) www.miamidade.eov/economy Schlage Lock Company 11819 N. Pennsylvania Street Carmel, IN 46032 SCOPE: This NOA is being issued under the applicable rules and regulations governing the use of construction materials. The documentation submitted has been reviewed and accepted by Miami -Dade County RER -Product Control Section to be used in Miami Dade County and other areas where allowed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). This NOA shall not be valid after the expiration date stated below. The Miami -Dade County Product Control Section (In Miami Dade County) and/or the AHJ (in areas other than Miami Dade County) reserve the right to have this product or material tested for quality assurance purposes. If this product or material fails to perform in the accepted manner, the manufacturer will incur the expense of such testing and the AHJ may immediately revoke, modify, or suspend the use of such product or material within their jurisdiction. RER reserves the right to revoke this acceptance, if it is determined by Miami -Dade County Product Control Section that this product or material fails to meet the requirements of the applicable building code. This product is approved as described herein, and has been designed to comply with the Florida Building Code, including the High Velocity Hurricane Zone. DESCRIPTION: SteelCraft H Series Double Flush Outswing Commercial Steel Door w/wo Panic Exit-LMI APPROVAL DOCUMENT: Drawing No IRF-D07 Rev O titled "Steelcraft H series Double Flush outswing", sheets 1 through 17 of 17, prepared by the manufacturer, dated 05-20-07 and last revised on 03/04/20, signed and sealed by Hermes F. Norero, P.E., bearing the Miami -Dade County Product Control Revision stamp with the Notice of Acceptance number and expiration date by the Miami -Dade County Product Control Section. MISSILE IMPACT RATING: Large and Small Missile Impact Limitations: 1. See sheets 1 & 2 for Design Pressures, Sizes and Hardware. See sheets 5 6, 7 and 8 for door sizes VS threshold types, brand and water infiltration limitations. Lower design Pressure shall control the entire assembly. 2. New Von Duprin HH9954 mullion must meet min thickness & strength as listed in sheet 16. See Hollow mullion in sheet 15. Drop -in or expansion mullion anchor assembly must be from the anchor manufacturer (No substitution parts permitted).Use of Ives viewers (model U696/U698) is limited to max. +/-75 PSF. 3. The top strike plate 338 can be used w/wo roller option for Concealed Rod Panic devices (CVR) shown in sheet 9. 4. Electrical/Electronic functions and Fire ratings are not part of this approval, such functions to be reviewed and approved by AHJ. LABELING: Each unit shall bear a permanent label with the manufacturer's name or logo, Cincinnati, Ohio and Series and following statement: "Miami -Dade County Product Control Approved", unless otherwise noted herein. RENEWAL of this NOA shall be considered after a renewal application has been filed and there has been no change in the applicable building code negatively affecting the performance of this product. TERMINATION of this NOA will occur after the expiration date or if there has been a revision or change in the materials, use, and/or manufacture of the product or process. Misuse of this NOA as an endorsement of any product, for sales, advertising or any other purposes shall automatically terminate this NOA. Failure to comply with any section of this NOA shall be cause for termination and removal of NOA. ADVERTISEMENT: The NOA number preceded by the words Miami -Dade County, Florida, and followed by the expiration date may be displayed in advertising literature. If any portion of the NOA is displayed, then it shall be done in its entirety. INSPECTION: A copy of this entire NOA shall be provided to the user by the manufacturer or its distributors and shall be available for inspection at the job site at the request of the Building Official. This NOA revises NOA #19-1016.05 and consists of this page 1 and evidence pages E-1, E-2, E-3, E-4, E-5 and E-6, as well as approval document mentioned above. The submitted documentation was reviewed by Ishaq I. Chanda, P.E. NOA No. 20-0310.10 Expiration Date: May 05, 2023 C ,! Approval Date: May 07, 2020 Page 1 Schlaze Lock Company NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE: EVIDENCE SUBMITTED 1. Evidence submitted under previous approvals A. DRAWINGS 1. Manufacturer's parts and sections drawings (Submitted under file as below). 2. Drawing No IRF-D07 Rev K, titled "Steelcraft H series Double Flush outswing", sheets 1 through 13 of 13, prepared by the manufacturer, dated 05-20-07 and last revised on 08/30/15, signed and sealed by Thomas Gordon, P.E. B. TESTS (Submitted under files #15-0930.05 /#13-1217.17/#12-0305.13/ #10-0209.06/#07-0829.03) 1. Test report on 1) Air Infiltration Test, per TAS 202-94 2) Uniform Static Air Pressure Test, Loading per TAS 202-94 3) Large Missile Impact Test per FBC, TAS 201-94 4) Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading per FBC, TAS 203-94 5) Forced Entry Test, per PA 202-94 Along with manufacturer's parts and section drawings of Single outswing steel doors w/ Stainless steel continuous Hinges & modified Hat stiffeners, marked by Certified Testing Lab, Test Reports No(s). CTLA-3045W dated February 16, 2015, signed and sealed by Ramesh Patel, P.E. Along with manufacturer's parts and section drawings of double outswing steel doors w/CVC panic exit and Peep hole, marked by Element Material Technology, Test Reports No(s). ESP011623P dated May 14, 2013, signed and sealed by Jason Sheen, P.E. 2. Test reports on 1) Uniform Static Air Pressure Test, Loading per FBC TAS 202-94. 2) Water Resistance Test per FBC TAS 202-94 Along with marked -up drawings and installation diagram of double steel commercial doors, prepared by National Certified Testing Laboratories Inc., Test Report No. NCTL- 210-03-0514-11, dated August 31, 2004 , NCTL 210- 03-3511-1 dated 04/09/08 and NCTL 210- 03-3549-1 dated 08/26/08, all signed and sealed by Gerry Ferrara, P. E. Note: Test report No(s): NCTL210-3549-1 and NCTL-210-3511-1 have been revised by an addendum letter, issued by Lab, dated Feb. 04, 2009, signed & sealed by Gerard J. Ferrara, P. E. 3. Test report on 1) Air Infiltration Test, per TAS 202-94 2) Water Resistance Test per FBC TAS 202-94(Not conducted) 3) Uniform Static Air Pressure Test, Loading per TAS 202-94 4) Large Missile Impact Test per FBC, TAS 201-94 5) Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading per FBC, TAS 203-94 6) Forced Entry Test, per PA 202-94 Along with manufacturer's parts and section drawings of double flush outswing steel doors, marked by National Certified Testing Lab, Test Reports No. NCTL-210- 3580-2, dated March 25, 2009 and NCTL-210- 3357-1, both signed and sealed by Gerry Ferrara, P. E. Along with manufacturer's parts and section drawings of double glazed outswing steel doors, marked by Certified Testing Lab, Test Reports No(s). CTLA-776W dated February 20, 2002, CTLA-975W dated Jan 23, 2003, CTLA-882W dated Aug 29, 2002, CTLA-1035W, dated May 28, 2003 and, CTLA-1086-W dated Nov. 17, 2003 and CTLA-1107W-3 dated June 30, 2004, all signed and sealed by Ramesh Patel, P.E. (The CTLA-1035W has been revised by an addendum). 5. Additional Reference test report No.CTLA-1107W for strap anchor qualification. Ishaq I. Chanda, P.E. Product Control Unit Supervisor J4 NOA No. 20-0310.10 Expiration Date: May 05, 2023 Approval Date: May 07, 2020 E-1 Schlage Lock Company NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE: EVIDENCE SUBMITTED C. CALCULATIONS: (submitted under file #15-0930.05) 1. Anchor verification calculations per FBC 2014 (5th Edition) dated 08/30/15, prepared, signed & sealed by Thomas Gordon., P.E. 2. Hinge Load Evaluation report dtd 01/04/04, prepared, signed & sealed by Thomas Gordon, P.E. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE BY 1. Miami Dade Department of Regulatory and Economic Resources (RER). E. MATERIAL CERTIFICATIONS (items 6 thru 9, submitted under file # 10-0209.07) 1. Material composition & Flammability properties and Material Safety Data sheet of Pyrophobic P25C-60 core by Pyrophobic System LTD, dated DEC 05, 2010, issued by I. Zhvanetsky, chemical consultant. 2. Material composition & Flammability properties and Material Safety Data sheet of Calcium Silicate mineral block, issued by Marshfield Door Sys, Inc., Marshfield. WI 54449. 3. Test Report No. 12-11177, Nov 29, 2012, issued by Commercial Testing Co. for "Surface Flame spread & Smoke density Characteristics of Building material" per ASTME84-12 for "Elfoam P200", issued to Elliott Co. of Indianapolis Inc. 4. Test Report No. 16206-122543 (1015P200(3)), dated November 29, 2004 for " Surface Burning Characteristics of Bldg. material" per ASTME84 and self -Ignition per ASTMI929D for "Polyisocyanurate" issued by Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. to Elliot Co., Indianapolis, IN. 5. Tensile test report # CTLA-776W (0194H), dtd 02/25/02 prepared by CTL, Architectural Division, sheet samples, tested per ASTM E8, signed & sealed by Ramesh Patel, P.E. 6. Test Report No. 3094867SAT-001, April 13, 2006, issued by Intertek for "Surface Burning Characteristics of Building material" per ASTME84 and self -Ignition per ASTMI929D for "BPS", issued to Falcon Foam, a Div. of Atlas Roofing, re -named as "ATLAS EPS'. 7. Tensile Test report No. A103W1-Test 1, 2 & 3 dated 23 APR 03 per ASTME-8 for steel face sheet, prepared by Certified Testing laboratory, signed and sealed by Ramesh Patel, P.E. 8. Test Report No. 3094867SAT-001, April 13, 2006, issued by Intertek for "Surface Burning Characteristics of Building material" per ASTME84 and self -Ignition per ASTMI929D for "BPS", issued to Falcon Foam, a Div of Atlas Roofing, re -named as "ATLAS EPS'. F. STATEMENTS: Except items #1, balanced items submitted under files referenced above. 1. Letter of conformance to FBC 2014 (51h Edition), dated 08/30/15-, prepared, signed and sealed by Gordon Thomas, P.E. 2. Statement letter dated Nov. 26, 2013 issued by Ingersoll-Rand for name change, signed by Jim Donlan, Compliance Engineer. 3. Ingersoll—Rand press release, dated 12/10/12, integrating the brands of Ingersoll—Rand and Schlage among others. 4. Department of State Certification of Reinstatement for SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC as a limited liability company, active and organized under the laws of the State of Florida, dated 03/17/06 and filed with the Secretary of State 5. Certification of Formation dated 12-08-2003 of Schlage Lock Company, LLC, issued by Secretary of State of Delaware. 6. Statement letter of conformance to FBC 2007 and no fin.---;-' PUP n) In 10, prepared, signed and sealed by Gordon Thomas, P.E. l 41 n .1e, _. ______, P.E. Product Control Unit Supervisor NOA No. 20-0310.10 Expiration Date: May 05, 2023 Approval Date: May 07, 2020 E-2 Schlaae Lock Company NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE: EVIDENCE SUBMITTED F. STATEMENTS (continue): 7. Laboratory Compliance statement issued as part of the above test reports. 8. Addendum letter dated DEC 19, 2011, issued by Certified Testing Lab verifying wire anchors, strength of grout, stud anchor, Strike plate and MA series Mortise Lock, supplemented w/ marked -up drawings, signed and sealed by Ramesh Patel, P.E. 9. Letter of certification dated 04/20/10, issued by Ingersoll-Rand for electronic CO lock series mechanical /functional parts same as AD, ND and AD-M series. G. OTHER 1. This NOA renews NOA #15-0930.05, expiring on 05/05/18. 2. Request for 1-Year renewal by Schlage Company dated 04/20/17, signed by James Donlan. 3. Test proposals # 14-0252, -0254, #14-1086, 414-0254-Rl and #12-0797R approved by RER. 4. Consolidation Test proposal # 06-2468, dated 04/27/07 approved by BCCO. 5. Previously consolidates NOA (s) associated with this files are NOA # 10-0209.07, 07-0829.04, 02-0712.01, 02-0712.03, 03-0908.03, 04-0203.03, 04-0303.03 and 05-0103.01. 6. Technical brochures of butt Hinges, continuous Hinges, Schlage & Falcon Mortise Locks, Supplied by Schlage Company (former Ingersoll-Rand). 2. Evidence submitted under previous submital. A. DRAWINGS 1. Drawing No IRF-D07 Rev N, titled "Steelcraft H series Double Flush outswing", sheets 1 through 17 of 17, prepared by the manufacturer, dated 05-20-07 and last revised on 04/24/18, signed and sealed by Hermes F. Norero„ P.E. B. TESTS 1. Additional Test report on 1) Uniform Static Air Pressure Test, Loading per TAS 202-94 2) Large Missile Impact Test per FBC, TAS 201-94 3) Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading per FBC, TAS 203-94 4) Forced Entry Test, per PA 202-94 Along with manufacturer's parts and section drawings of double flush outswing steel doors, marked by National Certified Testing Lab, Test Reports No. NCTL-210- 3580-2, dated March 25, 2009, signed and sealed by Gerry Ferrara, P. E. Along with manufacturer's parts and section drawings of glazed outswing double steel doors, marked by Certified Testing Lab, Test Reports No(s). NCTL-210-3232-1 dated 02/24/06 and NCTL-210-3357-1 dated Dec 28, 2006, signed and sealed by Gerard J. Ferrara, P.E. Along with manufacturer's parts and section drawings of glazed outswing double steel doors, marked by Certified Testing Lab, Test Reports No(s). NCTL-210-3232-1 dated 02/24/06 and NCTL-210-3357-1 dated Dec 28, 2006, signed and sealed by Gerard J. Ferrara, P.E. 2. Additional verification test NCTL-210-3549-1 for VonDuprin HH9954 mullion per TAS 202, 201 & 203, issued by National Certified Testing, signed & sealed by Gerry Ferrara, P. E. 3. Additional Reference test report No.CTLA-1107W for strap anchor qualification. ISG«7 1- Z4,1nje, Ishaq 1. Chanda, P.E. Product Control Unit Supervisor NOA No. 20-0310.10 Expiration Date: May 05, 2023 Approval Date: May 07, 2020 E-3 Schlaae Lock Cotnnany NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE: EVIDENCE SUBMITTED C. CALCULATIONS: 1. Anchor verification calculation complying w/ FBC 2017(6"' Edition) dated 04/04/2017 and last revised on 04/09/2018, prepared by Building Drops, signed & sealed by Hermes F. Norero., P.E. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE BY 1. Miami Dade Department of Regulatory and Economic Resources (RER). E. MATERIAL CERTIFICATIONS: 1. None. F. STATEMENTS: (items # 4 thru 6, submitted under file # 17-1026.24) 1. Letter statement dated April 03, 2018, issued by Allegion for future catalog update and inclusive of the upgrading of Von Duprin HH 9954 mullion, signed by Jim Donlan, Compliance Engineer. 2. Letter of conformance to FBC 2014 (5t' Edition) and FBC 2017 (6t' Edition), dated 02/08/18, prepared by Building Drops, Inc., signed and sealed by Hermes F. Norero, RE 3. Letter of adoption of another Engineer's work per FLA rule 61G15-27, dated 03/14/2017, prepared by Building Drops, Inc., signed and sealed by Hermes F. Norero, P.E. 4. Ingersoll—Rand press release, dated 12/10/12, integrating the brands of Ingersoll—Rand and Schlage among others. 5. Department of State Certification of Reinstatement for SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC as a limited liability company, active and organized under the laws of the State of Florida, dated 03/17/06 and filed with the Secretary of State 6. Certification of Formation dated 12-08-2003 of Schlage Lock Company, LLC, issued by Secretary of State of Delaware. 7. Statement letter dated Nov. 26, 2013 issued by Ingersoll-Rand for name change, signed by Jim Donlan, Compliance Engineer. 8. Letter of certification dated 04/20/10, issued by Ingersoll-Rand for electronic CO lock series mechanical /functional parts same as AD, ND and AD-M series. 9. Addendum letters dated Feb 20, 2009 for test reports Test report CTLA-1035W, issued by Certified Testing lab, signed and sealed by Ramesh Patel, P.E 10. Addendum letter dated DEC 19, 2011, issued by Certified Testing Lab verifying wire anchors, strength of grout, stud anchor, Strike plate and MA series Mortise Lock, supplemented w/ marked -up drawings, signed and sealed by Ramesh Patel, P.E. G. OTHER 1. This NOA revises & renews NOA #17-0326.04, expiring on 05/05/23. 2. Test proposals #14-0251, #14-0252-R, 14-0253, #14-0254-R1, #14-1086 and #12-0797R approved by RER. 3. Consolidation Test proposal # 06-2468, dated 04/27/07 approved by BCCO. 4. Technical brochures of butt Hinges, continuous Hinges, Schlage & Falcon Mortise Locks, Supplied by Schlage Company (former Ingersoll-Rand). 5. Allegion's (Schlage/ Former Ingersoll-Rand) future ,incinted l4R(A54 Vnn-r)»nrin Mullion catalog. Z 41n� Ishaq I. Chanda, P.E. Product Control Unit Supervisor NOA No. 20-0310.10 Expiration Date: May 05, 2023 Approval Date: May 07, 2020 E-4 Schlage Lock Company NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE: EVIDENCE SUBMITTED 3. Evidence submitted in previous NOA A. DRAWINGS Drawing No IRF-D07 Rev N, titled "Steelcraft H series Double Flush outswing", sheets 1 through 17 of 17, prepared by the manufacturer, dated 05-20-07 and last revised on 04/24/18, signed and sealed by Hermes F. Norero, P.E. B. TEST 1. Test report on 1) Uniform Static Air Pressure Test, Loading per TAS 202-94 2) Large Missile Impact Test per FBC, TAS 201-94 3) Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading per FBC, TAS 203-94 Along with manufacturer's parts and section drawings of Single outswing Flush steel doors w/ SVR and top Strike #338 w/roller, issued by UL Testing Lab, Test Reports No(s). SV31245-20190521 dated SEP 03, 2019, signed and sealed by Alex Spyrou, P.E. Along with manufacturer's parts and section drawings of Single outswing glazed steel doors w/ SVR and top Strike #338 w/roller, issued by UL Testing Lab, Test Reports No(s). SV31245-20190624 dated SEP 03, 2019, signed and sealed by Alex Spyrou, P.E. C. CALCULATIONS 1. None D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Miami Dade Department of Regulatory and Economic Resources (RER). E. MATERIAL CERTIFICATIONS 1. None F. STATEMENTS (submitted under file # 17-0426.04) 1. Statement letter of conformance to FBC 2017(6 h edition) dated 02-08-2018, prepared by Building Drops, signed & sealed by Hermes F. Norero, P.E. 2. Statement letter of adopting another Engineer's work per Florida Rules 61 G615-27 dated March 14, 2017, prepared by Building Drops, signed & sealed by Hermes F. Norero, P.E. G. OTHER 1. This NOA revises NOA # 17-0426.04, expiring 05/05/23. 2. Optional CVR top strikes #338 w/wo Roller (see below) Product Control Unit Supervisor NOA No. 20-0310.10 Expiration Date: May 05, 2023 Approval Date: May 07, 2020 E-5 Schla2e Lock Comnany NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE: EVIDENCE SUBMITTED 4. New Evidence submitted A. DRAWINGS 1. Drawing No IRF-D07 Rev O titled "Steelcraft H series Double Flush outswing", sheets 1 through 17 of 17, prepared by the manufacturer, dated 05-20-07 and last revised on 03/04/20, signed and sealed by Hermes F. Norero, P.E. B. TEST 1. None. C. CALCULATIONS 1. None. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE l . Miami Dade Department of Regulatory and Economic Resources (RER). E. MATERIAL CERTIFICATIONS 1. None. F. STATEMENTS (submitted under file # 19-1016.05) 1. Statement letter of conformance to FBC 2017(6th edition) dated 02-08-2018, prepared by Building Drops, signed & sealed by Hermes F. Norero, P.E. 2. Application request of address change only by Schlage Lock company, signed by Donald James. G. OTHER l . This NOA revises NOA # 19-1016.05, expiring 05/05/23. 1 stk-47 f • Ishaq I. Chanda, P.E. Product Control Unit Supervisor NOA No. 20-0310.10 Expiration Date: May 05, 2023 Approval Date: May 07, 2020 E-6 SURFACE , _, a., MORTISE it LU a = I _ z I z f z w LU O w I 00 = jr F- g oQC Ow 00 INACTIVE ACTIVE Q I 1 m rn omit PRESSURE RATIN PSF WHERE WAT£ R INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT 1 Is NEEDED ISIm.NEEDED +75 t75 SEE TABLE 3,I SEE TABLE", ON ON SHT.5 SHTJA, 4.2 ON SNT.B DESIGN PRESSURE RATING, PSF NIHERE WATER INFILTRATION INFILTRATION P REQUIREMENT REQUIREMENT IS NEEDED IS NOT NEEDED ASEXTABLE3.11 SEET BLES4.1ON ONSHT.S 7 84t0 SHT.6 RIM EXIT y.47- 'T! RIM EXIT 11 11 RIM EXIT -4- JU RIM EXIT O DESIGN PRESSURE RATING, PSF WHEREWATER WHERE WA ER +� F INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT ISNEEOED IS NOT NEEDED 5 t75 IN * SEE TABLE 3A SEE TABLES 4A ON ON SHT.6 SHT.7 A 42 ON SHT.6 tl MAX. UNIT WIDTH TY .=IUW 86" MAX. DOOR OPEN, G WIDTH - SURFACE c D 2CYLINDRICA BOLTS iT 1T = 1 L z ..UU I_ j INACTIVE ACTIVE I n D4 Ill DESIGN PRESSURE RATING WHERE WAIER WHERE W#iklrtR INFILTRATION INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT REQUIREMENT 2 IS NEEDED I$ )iWNEEDED t55 t5 SEE TABLE 3.1 SEE TAKES 4.1 ON ON SHT.S SNT.7& 4.2 ON SNTA -MAX. UNIT WIDTH TYP.-10(r- 96" MAX. DOOR OPENING WIDTH - SURFACE SURFACE VERTICAL ROD gV.ERTICAL R4 FYIT r-fY EXIT SURFACE W O z z W COIN,If INACTIVE n rn z 1 I z 1 Z z z ra a 0 D' �0 13 w iS 0 0 m II rills II 50 II h II8 IIco T- -14 A' I III T ' SEE NOTE 4 ONSHEET2 7tlIF1X, UNIT WIDTH TYP.=100' W MAX. DOOR OPENING WIDTH THREE POINT LATCHING HARDWARE MULLION Tr rp 2 MIT Ili D (' u, w >- 0 - z I = w 0. ----- -- --- L it I 0 z O o � g Y/kJ WPRN FWl01VNiE , I rn M(nuoN Bea JHLL1 R6 i �4 FT DESIGN PRESSURE RATING., PSF WHEREWATER INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT HERE INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT IS NEEDED IS NOT NEEDED 8 t70 t70 SEE TABLE 3.1 SEE TABLES 4.1 ON ON SHT. 5 SHT.7 8 4.2 ON SITS p 13 E$ PRESSURE RATING PSF WHEREWATE R WATER INFILTRATION INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT REQUIREMENT IS NEEQEO I$ NEEDED 6 t t70 SEE TA91F 3.1 SEE TABLES 4.1 ON ONS4T.5 $HT.784.20119141.6 DESIGN PRESSURE RATING PSF RO O WHERE WATEW#"E WATER $= F INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT IS NEEDED 1$ NEEDED 7 ±70 t 0 SEE TABLE 3.1 SEE TABLES 4.1 ON ON $HT. S SHTA A 42 ON MAX. UNIT WIDTH-104' 10(r MAX. OPENING WROTH THREE POINT LATCHING FUIED HOLLOW I METAL MULLION _ & T IS D z t I 3- Y D I .+EruLLIONDSHLA) F4RmAx 15 _ WIDTH -4R* MAX WIDTH- TNRFF P01NT LAT('NINA FIYFD NAI I AW MFTAI. MITI 1 inhi DESIGN PRESSURE RATWO, PSF _ WHERE WATER INFILTRATION WHERE WATER INFILTRATION 0 REQUIREMENT IS NEEDED REQUIREMENT L''9N�7iT. NEEDED ZERO IINNTLa568 (11A) ,.o1 SEE TABLE 3.2ONSHT. B SEE TABLE ON SHT.7 10 +501-70 t70 NOP358(11B) SEE TABLES 3.3 ON SHT. 6 SEE TABLE 4.1 ON $HTS ACTIVE O OESIGN PRESSURE PAVING, P8 O WHERE WAT ...!TAlt011 ATE INFILTRATION MOISREMENT REQUIREMENT 3 IS NEEDED IS VI NEEDED :1:65 166 BEE TABLE 3.1 SEE TABLES4.1 ON ON SHT, 6 SHLT 8 4.2 ON SHT.6 UNIT WID7 H TYP.-IUU' -W MAX. DOOR OPENING WIDTH [MAX, SURFACE D 84CYLINDRICA BOLTS LOCK = I LU W :7 I z 1 z 1. Y A D INACTIVE ACTIVE 1 I T T- +� 1--4 DESIGN PRESSURE PATIV PSF WHERE WATE W TER INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT 18 NEEDED NIMINE1,090 4 t75 t75 SEE TABLE 3.1 SEE TABLES 4.1 ON ON 101T.5 SHT.T& 4.2 ON SHT.S CONCEALED CONCEALED NOTE: VERTICAL ROD VERTICAL ROD SEE SHEETS 5, 6, 7, 8 B FOR EXIT - EXIT THRESHOLD TYPES, WEATHERSTRIPS t It COMPONENTS, DOOR SIZE I I I VS DP AND LIMITATIONS O DESIGN PRESSURE RATING. PSF WHERE WATER WHE WATER INFILTRATION INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT REQUIREMENT IS NEEDED IS NOT NEEDED 8 t7a t o SEE TABLE 3.1 SEE TABLES 4.1 ON ON SIT. 5 SNT.T 8 4.2 ON SRT.6 WITH HARDWARE MULLION O 0 DESIGN PRESSURE RAT NG, PSF WHERE WATER' ERE ER INFILTRATION INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT REQUIREMENT IS NEEDED 131KNEEDED 11 +70 - 5 +7 -5 SEE TABLE 3A SEE TABLES 4.1 ON ON SHT. 5 SNIT-7 & 4.2 ON SHL6 R E V I S I❑ N S LTR DESCRIPTION DATE A APPROVAL DWG YMF 05/20/07 F REVISED DWG YMF 05/30/08 G REVISED PER-MDBCCO YMF 02/06/09 H REVISED DWG YMF 02/01/10 J REVISED DWG YMF 04/06/10 Le K REVISED NAME JPD 11/01/13 13 L REVISED DWG JPD 02/01/15 M REVISED DWG JPD 05/05/15 N ENGINEER CHANGE LA 02/03/17 0 ADDRESS UPDATE SM 02/27/20 APPROVED I DETAIL 'C• MEETING DOOR EDGES DOOR CONFIGURATIONS: 1, IA, 2, 3.4 DOOR CONFIGURATIONS: 5, 6, S 8 11 Z-ASTRAGAL ON VON DUPRIN REMOVABLE INACTIVE LEAF HARDWARE MULLIONS DuravOL1 O(1DD6t OIRN01 ORL:-: DQL it ,y,m rant DMCTtvE ACTIVE OROMP 2 REMOVABLE HARDWARE MULLION HH9054 - SEE SHEET 16 DOOR CONFIGURATIONS: 7 & 6 DOOR CONFIGURATION: 10 NO ASTRAGAL / NO MULLION FIXED HOLLOW METAL MULLION BOTH DOORS ACTIVE a'IDmRCUT �NITDIWt Dursvat5 4CTIY[ ACOVL EXTERIvt talTERme /MIg1O1 IM1Jm1 E ACTIVE INTERIOR FIXED HOLLOW METAL MULLION COMPLIANCE STATEMENT: RFF RHFFTRRA1fi 1. THESE PRODUCTS HAVE BEEN TESTED TO HVHZ PROTOCOLS TAS 201,202 & 203-94 AND COMPLY WITH THE 2017 (6TH ED.) FLORIDA BUILDING CODE. NOTES: N 1 1. INTERIOR VIEWS ARE SHOWN FOR ALL ELEVATIONS (OUTSWING DOORS) 2. SEE TABLE 1 ON SHEET 2 FOR HARDWARE APPLICATIONS AND LIMITATIONS �'✓� �� Q`� �f 3. SEE SHEET 3 & 14 FOR HINGE REQUIREMENTS - !V i 4. SEE SHEETS 4 & 15 FOR ANCHORING TYPES AND LIMITATIONS AND SHEETS 15 & 16� FOR MULLION INSTALLATION. 5. SEE SHEET 5 TABLE 3.1 AND SHEET 6 TABLES 3.2 & 3.3 FOR WATER RATED THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIPPING INSTALLATION AND LIMITATIONS = = 6. SEE SHEET 7 TABLE 4.1 AND SHEET 8 TABLE 4.2 FOR NON WATER RATED THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIPPING INSTALLATION AND LIMITATIONS (� 6. SEE SHEETS 3 - 8, & 17 FOR SILL INSTALLATION INFORMATION GSM 7. ALL CONFIGURATIONS MEET LARGE AND SMALL MISSILE IMPACT REQUIREMENTS - E.dwIA �� 17c� LARGE MISSILE IMPACT AT (50 FIS) r SJ�6sIe BEND RADIUS 1 MANUFACTt1RfAV V ACILITY, SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC STEELCRAFT 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET 9017 BLUE ASH ROAD __ CARMEL, IN 46032 CINCINNATI, OH 45242 THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION TITLE: STEELCRAFT H SERIES DOUBLE FLUSH OUTSWING COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS WITH AND WITHOUT PANIC EXIT DEVICES DRAWN DATE YMF 03IW87 MIAMI-DADE COUNTY PRODUCT APPROVAL FLUSH OUTSWING, DOUBLE DOORS AND HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS, CHECKED APPROVED SIZE FLAT DWG NO. REV I R F D 0 7 JPD I wlet&F AUTDCAD OF R E V IS I❑ N S Maximum Design Pressure, Maximum Door Opening Door PSF Size, in. Locking Hardware Description Comments LTR DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED Configuration A APPROVAL DWG YMF 05/20/07 Positive Negative Width Height Hardware Family Model/Serles Strike Models Brand D REVISED DWG YMF 01/16/08 ULV9400/AD/CO MD 10-072 Schlage Function with deadbolt, E REVISED DWG YMF 02/28/08 1 75 75 96 96 Mortise Lock 3/4" min. throw latch & F REVISED DWG YMF 05/30/08 MA ANSI Falcon 1" min throw deadbolt G REVISED PER_MDHCCO YMF 02/06/09 Function without H REVISED DWG YMF 03/16/09 1A 60 60 96 96 Mortise Lock ULV9000/AD/CO MS 10-025 Schlage deadbolt, 3/4" min. J REVISED DWG YMF 04/06/10 throw latch K REVISED NAME JPD 11/01/13 2 55 55 96 96 Cylindrical Lock AL 10-025 Schlage 1/2" throw latch L REVISED DWG JPD 02/01/15 M REVISED DWG JPD 05/05/17 3 65 65 96 96 Cylindrical Lock D/ND/AD/CO CYL 10-025 Schlage 1/2" throw latch N ENGINEER CHANGE LA 02/23/17 D/ND/AD/CO CYL 10-025 Schlage 3/4" throw latch 0 ADDRESS UPDATE SM 02/27/20 4 75 75 96 96 Cylindrical Lock T ANSI Falcon 3/4" throw latch 5 90 90 96 96 Rim Exit Device XP 98/99(F) 909/954 Von Duprin for pairs use HH9954 SEE NOTE 4. SEE NOTE 4. mullion by Von Duprin 88-F 268/499F Von Duprin for pairs use HH9954 6 70 70 96 96 Rim Exit Device mullion by Von Duprin 98/99(F) 299FI499F Von Duprin 9819927(F) 299FI499F Top, 304U248L4 Von Duprin Surface Vertical Rod Exit Bottom 7 70 70 96 96 Device (F)25-V 3788 Top, 2130 Bottom Falcon Concealed Vertical Rod 9819947-F 336 Top, 385A/304L Bottom Von Duprin 8 70 70 96 96 Exit Device F-25-C 4188 Top, 2130 Bottom Falcon 299F/499F Top/Middle, 9 70 70 96 96 98/9957(F) Von Duprin for pairs use HH9954 Three -Point Latching 304U248L4 Bottom mullion by Von Duprin Device 10 70 70 48 96 98/9957(F) 299F/499F Top/Middle, Von Duprin See note #2 304U24BL4 Bottom t lAi 11 70 55 96 96 Rim Exit Device (F)25-R 299F/499F Falcon for Pairs use HH9954 by Von Duprin.,• �4` mullion Q 1 S '> 73778 TABLE 1. NOTES: ��, ••' 1. FOR DOOR CONFIGURATIONS 1, 1A, 2, 3, & 4, INACTIVE LEAF REQUIRES IVES SB360 SURFACE BOLTS IN TOP AND �� �` BOTTOM BEND RADIUS l ``' MANUFACTUIR111 ! A ILITY- 2. DOOR CONFIGURATION 10 IS USING FIXED HOLLOW METAL MULLION BETWEEN TWO DOORS (SEE MULLION DETAIL IN SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC STEELCRAFT SHEET 15) 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET 9017 BLUE ASH ROAD 3. SEE SHEETS 10 THROUGH 16 FOR LOCKING HARDWARE AND HARDWARE MULLION DETAILS _{-----_J- CARMEL, IN 46032 CINCINNATI, OH 45242 4. DOOR CONFIGURATION 5 IS RATED FOR MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE UP TO 175 PSF WITH ZERO INT'L THRESHOLD 11A DOUBLE FLUSH OUTSHANG COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS WITH AND D ANGtE P�DATE DRAWN VATHOUT PANIC EXIT DEVICES OR FOR DOOR OPENINGS UP TO T-O" X T-O" WITH NGP THRESHOLD 11 B AND ±50 PSF FOR DOOR OPENINGS UP TO 4'-0" X YMF MIAMI-DADE COUNTY PRODUCT APPROVAL 8'-0" WITH NGP THRESHOLD 11 B WHEN WATER INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT IS NEEDED. SEE SHEETS 5 AND 6. CHECKED FLUSH OUTSWING DOORS AND HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS 4.1 DOOR CONFIGURATION 5 IS WATER RATED FOR A MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE UP TO ±75 WITH ZERO INT'L COMMERCIAL DOOR OPENING DOUBLE FLUSH DOORS. THRESHOLD (11 A) OPTIONS AND UP TO ±90 PSF WITH THE NON -WATER RATED NGP 950 THRESHOLD (12B) OPTIONS WHEN APPROVED SIZE FLAT DWG NO. IRFD07 REv ❑ WATER INFILTRATION REQUIREMENT IS NOT REQUIRED. SHEET 8. ENG, APPVL 5. SCHLAGE AL -SERIES CYLINDRICAL LOCK (DOOR CONFIGURATION 2) IS LIMITED TO ±55 PSF MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSUREf— JPD ro/,e/a SCALE' NTS I AUT❑CAD SHEET 2 OF 17 ----MAXIMUM OVERALL UNIT WIDTH = 104" CL OF SEE NOTE 2 R MAXIMUM DOOR OPENING 100" (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) 11- "E MAX.e H SO I (I I SEE DETAIL 'C' 0 (% INSTALL . i i i SHEET 1 wz LEFTJAND Ills _ W SIMILAR I I F D_ TO RIGHT. z 0 0 0 1 I > > i lINT O� LJ titl � I11I D g 1 ! I 1 TOP & BTTM L (EXTERIOR VIEWR} � . J (_r_._4.72a TABLE 2 ALL DIMENSIONS TYPICAL. UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE TYR 9.75 OF HINGE -11.00" MAX O.C. 7 @ INTERIOR SEE NOTE 6. SEE DETAIL ON SHEET I 5.75" NOM. EQ.' I 3 NOTE 3.) EXTERIOR 4" MAX 1/a' x 1-s/a• Irn CL DF HINGE TYPICAL SILL INSTALLATION (SEE SHT.ddcl7i SUILDEX/REDHEAD TAPCON OR {14 X 1-3/4' WOOD SCREW AS REQUIRED E .' ro SEE SHTS 5, EXTERIOR 6, 7, 6 & 17 1 CL OF HINGE 1/4' X 1-3/4' ITW BUILDEX/REDHEAD E TAPCON OR TO SUIT #14 X 1-3/4' WOOD SCREWE.D. 1,25' MIN. E.D. CL Or HINGE 1.25' MIN. EMBEDMENT WOOD (SG-.55) 1038 SILL DETAIL (SIDEVIEW) (3K E.D. CONCRETE WOOD OR CONCRETE SILL 3KSI MIN.) E.D. - EDGE DISTANCE QUANTITY DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SIZE 1 HEAD SEE SHT 9 ASTM A366 .053' MIN. STL MAX. 100' VON DUPRIN HH9954 HARDWARE MULLMN.312' A500 STL MAX. 96' HEIGHT, HINGE JAMB SEE SHT 9 ASTM A366 .053' MIN. STL 3.5 X 9 .44 MAX 2 HINGE SIDE PANIC REINF13RCEMENT 067' MIN. STL MAX. 20' 6I NOTE 2. HINGE REINFORCE R AaIM A .167' MIN. STL. 1.23' X 9,19' MIN. NOTE 2. HiNgE REINFORCEMENT FRAME AsTM A621 .167' MIN. STL. 1.5' X 9,19' MIN, 4.5' X 4.5' BUTT HINGES (SEE SHT.17) .134 MIN. (8) #12-24 MS PER HINGE 8 NOTE 2, GE T 7 .750' MIN. STL/.12 ALUM MAX. 95' 9 2 CORE MATERIAL (SHT15>, ) STIFFENED A/) PO YS EN R N / N T E) MINERAL BOARD TEMPERATURE RISE CORE 10 2 LOCKING HARDWARE - SEE SHEETS 2' 10 11 & 12 11 1 11A> 566 ZERO WATER SHTS 5&6 NON WATER SHT 7 .125' ALUM. 6063 T5 5,0'X0.5'X96'MAX. 11B) 950A NGP WATER RATED SHT 6 NON WATER SHT 8 .078' ALUM. 6063 T5 110 65 ZERO NON WATER RATED SHEET 7 .125' ALUM, 6063 T5 IID> 568 ZERO NON WATER RATED SHEET 7 M. 063 T5 6.0'XO.5'X96'MAX. le NOTE L JAMB ANCHOR ASTM A924 SEE SHEET 7 13 SEE SHTS 6, 7 & 8 -13) PS 4 R SEAL STEELCRAFT TPE VARIES 13B)188S, 130117S, 13D)8144S 1308150S DOOR SEAL ZERO SILICONE 14 2 FAS-SEAL D OR SWEEP SEE SHTS 5 6 7&8 TPE MAX, 47.66' END CHANNEL ASTM A924 (14 GA - INVERTED) ' MAX 16 1 16A) 328 SPLIT ASTRAGAL BY ZERO INT'L SEE SHEETS 5 & 7 16B) 137 SPLIT ASTRAGAL BY NGP SEE SHEETS 6 & 8 17 AS..NEEDE CAULK - BUTYL RUBBER OR 100% SILICONE SEE SHTS 5,6,7&8 18 2 DOOR SLAB (16 OR 14 GA) SEE SHEET 9 4 X ' MAX, 19 1 19A) 8150S DOOR SEAL BY ZERO INT'L SEE SHTS 5 & 7 TPE MAX. 24' 19B) IB8S DOOR SEAL BY ZERO INT'L SEE SHTS 6 & 7 20 4 202N DOOR SEAL BY NGP SEE SHEET 6 TPE MAX. 96' 21 2 21A) 139 DOOR SWEEP BY ZERO INT'L SEE SHEETS 5 & 6 MAX, 96' FOR VERTICAL MAX. 48' FOR HORIZONTAL 21B) 328 DOOR SWEEP BY ZERO INT'L 210 20ON DOOR SWEEP BY NGP 22 2 22A) 475 ADJUSTABLE SEAL BY ZERO INT'L SEE SHEET 6 TPE MAX. 48' 22B) 170N ADJUSTABLE SEAL BY NGP SEE SHEET 6 23 1 23A> 142 RAIN DRIP BY ZERO INT'L SEE SHEETS 5 & 6 MAX. 104' 2 23B) it RAIN DRIP BY ZERO INT'L MAX. 48' 230 16A RAIN DRIP BY NGP 24 2 TOP CAP GALV. A60 ASTM A924 .020' MIN, STL 0.5' X 1.76' X 48' MAX. 25 2 IVES 360 12' SURFACE BOLT 26 1 ASA STRIKE 27 1 Z-ASTRAGAL .067' MIN. STL MAX. 95.5 28 1 HOLLOW METAL MULLION (SINGLE OR DOUBLE RABBET) SEE SHEET 9 MAX. 96- 291 1 IVES 698/U698 DOOR VIEWER BRASS R E V I S I❑ N S LTR DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED A APPROVAL DWGS. YMF 05/20/07 H REVISED DWG YMF 02/01/10 J REVISED DWG YMF 04/06/10 K REVISED NAME JPD 11/01/13 L REVISED DWG JPD 02/01/15 M REVISED DWG JPD 05/05/15 ® N ENGINEER CHANGE LA 02/23/17 12 GA. LOCKSIDE 1 O ADDRESS UPDATE SM 02/27/20 c INFORCING CHANNEL 1.66`-1 ©DOOR HINGE 3,5' MIN' ° FRAME HINGE NOTES: 1. ANCHOR REQUIREMENTS: SEE SHEETS 4 & 17 FOR APPROVED ANCHORS AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. SEE SHEETS 15 & 16 FOR MULLION INSTALLATION. 2. HINGE REQUIREMENTS: FOR DOOR OPENING UP TO 90• HIGH - MIN. (3) BUTT HINGES HINGE DETAIL SEE HINGE OPTIONS SHEET 15 FOR DOOR OPENING OVER 90' - 96' HIGH - MIN. (4) BUTT HINGES LOCATIONS: 9.75• FROM RABBET IN HEAD TO CL OF TOP HINGE 10.38' FROM FLOOR TO CL OF BOTTOM HINGE, EQUALLY SPACED IN BETWEEN. o 0 HINGE LOCATIONS MAY VARY, MAX SPACING NOT TO EXCEED 35.5" FOR THREE HINGES. o FOR APPROVED CONTINUOUS HINGE MODELS SEE SHEET 17. ©7 GA. o 3. SEE SHEETS 1, 2 & 9 FOR AVAILABLE STANDARD OPENING SIZES AND SPECIFICATIONS. 0 e 4. HARDWARE INSTALLATION AS PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. DOOR HINGE a • • 5. V FACE FRAME HEAD IS AVAILABLE. SEE SHEETS 4 AND 17. REINFORCEMENT 6. APPLY CAULK TO FULL LENGTH OF SILL AND ENTIRE PERIMETER OF FRAME. SEE SHEETS 5, 6, 7, & 8. 7. SEE SHEET 13 FOR HORIZONTAL SECTION A -A, SEE SHEET 14 FOR VERTICAL SECTIONS B-B AND C-C. 8. EXIT HARDWARE OPTIONS: • • FOR 98/99 & XP98/99 SERIES - FUNCTIONS E, QEL, RX, LX, SS, EL, CX, F o TRIM: ALL APPLICABLE TRIMS AVAILABLE. ¢ FOR 88-F SERIES - FUNCTION E o TRIM: ALL APPLICABLE TRIMS AVAILABLE. o 0 PN MODEL OFFERED. Q 7 GA. FOR 2670 GUARD-X FRAME HINGE TRIM: ALL APPLICABLE TRIMS AVAILABLE. REINFORCEMENT FOR 25-R, 25-C & 25 V SERIES - FUNCTIONS DM,LM, KOR, MU, EL, EA, FSA, FSE, HWEA TRIM: ALL APPLICABLE TRIMS AVAILABLE 9. PN MODEL OFFERED. { t t ! I `11 f!! NO 10. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION AND FIR RATINGS ARE UNDER SEPARATE APPROVAL AND MUST BE REVIEWED BY `�� �� CORRESPONDING AUTHORITY. USED �j .•' •- ' E/V& '••. 11. OPTIONAL POWER TRANSFERS, MONITORING SWITCHES, SUPPLEMENTARY MAGNETIC LOCKS MAY BE AS ALLOWED BY CODE AND IT DOES NOT EFFECT THE MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF EXIT DEVICE AND/OR INHIBIT EGRESS, •` TO BE REVIEWED BY BUILDING OFFICIAL. (a 0 = �7$ ' 12. WEATHERSTRIPPING: - WHEN WATER INFILTRATION IS REQUIRED INSTALL PER SHEETS 6 OR 6 AS APPLICABLE - WHEN WATER INFILTRATION IS NOT REQUIRED INSTALL PER SHEETS 7 OR 8 AS APPLICABLE 'U ; 13. SILL SHALL BE ANCHORED PER INSTALLATION DETAIL ON THIS SHEET AND SHEETS 4 & 17, o •. �: 07 14. GASKETING QUANTITY WILL INCREASE WHEN USED WITH HOLLOW METAL MULLION. SEE SHEET 6,7 & 8 FOR DETAILS. r� ;'0'P . .111 REND RADIUS MANUFACTUAI 1 ACILITY- SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC STEELCRAFT 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET 9017 BLUE ASH ROAD NTT__ CARMEL, IN 46032 CINCINNATI, OH 45242 THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION T1TLEi STEELCRAFT H SERIES DOUBLE FLUSH OIUTSWING COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS WITH AND DRAWN DATE WITHOUT PANIC EXIT DEVICES YMF °"L0'07 MIAMI-DADE COUNTY PRODUCT APPROVAL CHECKEDH SERIES FLUSH DOUBLE DOORS OUTSWING C❑NFIGURATIONS IRFD07 0 G. APPLL JPD 10,12/07 SCALE' N T S I A U T ❑CAD I SHEET 3 DF 17 6' J MAX. 2' MIN. . • 3.125" MIN. Q EDGE DISTANCE 3.125 MIN. 0 • ' , . `' EDGE L x• 0 DISTANCE sue. i a:,tl :.►• • a ,: • 02 T 96"X96" 24" O•C. MAXIMUM DOOR MAX. OPENING H_ 24. O.C. MAX. JAMB BASE ANCHOR WELDED OR ADJUSTABLE) 24' O.C. MAX EFER TO SRL STALLAT*N 'TH' TDETAIL rr%Amr. cwv rN 10" MAX. JAMB BASE ANCHOR INTO CONCRETE (3 KSI MIN.) 00.375' WITH 2' MIN. EMBEDMENT POWERS POWER BOLT. POWERS LOK BOLT AS, HIL71 HLC-FPH SLEEVE ANCHOR, SIMPSON STRONG TIE SLEEVE -ALL OR 3/B' LAG BOLT INTO (2) 2X WOOD SILL (SG-.55) 00 _ r 17.6. O.C. 96"X96" MAX. MAXIMUM DOOR + o OPENING 17.6" O.C. L0 MAX. 17.M'AX t?L + 17.6" O.C, MAX. REFER TO SILL 17 8 O.0 INSTALLATION DETAIL 'TH' MAX iH X 1-3/4' 6" GROUT FILLED T_ANCHOR 3 ' MIN (4) TAL PER MAX. ELLxnL1Eu1 0 : 3 t:• 4 t: O Lwc...,,.. EXT. EXT, SHIM SPACE "',_SHIM SPACE *WOOD STUD WALLS 1/4" MAX. - BLOCK WALLS 1/4' MAX. SEE NOTEAslar CMU (C-90) 2000 PSI FL GROUT FILLED {.7s` AC1530.1 SPO7WELDED A"RE ANCHOR 03/16' (2)PLACES Fy MIN.-36 KSI BRIGHT BASIC WARE ss' Q d a 7, 5 WOOD STUD OR UNIVERSAL ANCHOR 5.19' X 9.56" ` —L (LOCK -IN OR WELD -IN) WIRE MASONRY ANCHOR MASONRY MASONRY T-ANCHOR FUItIm MIN.-58 KSI T-ANCHOR S GA STEEL (0.048') Fy MIN.-35 KSI LFy MIN.-36 KSI (ISTIN ; MASONRY ANCHOR (EMA) INTO a EXISTING MASONRY ANCHO,�(E A) WITH rnUrarrr WAI I nD flUt I 110 TA 7r, Rcr AAG BOLT INTO WOOD STUB WALL ttA- HDI OR HD2 MAX. ra 21' O.C. MAX +..: :,; 21O.C. 6. 8. MAX ••..s: OPENING (SEE SHTA) ;!,':r, ;.;'+ ,.. t- 4 MAX. i ° to REFER TO SILL 2{' O.C. INSTALLATION .,,.,: r;'•.', •• MAX. 'TH' `''�` ,. DETAIL 1 (y�"" 0 MIN. r- 3.125" MIN. EDGE r. r DISTANCE :^ 3.125" MIN. EDGE DISTANCE 1_ GROUT FILLED SHIM SPACE C-90) CMU 11/ ' MAX, / ' MIN. 3000P•1 CONCRETE LOCK WALL TYPICAL /f 00.375' WITH 2' MIN. EMBEDMENT WITH Y MIN. POWERS POWER BOLT, ENT HILTI HLC-FPH POWERS LOK BOLT AS, ANCHOR IN CMU HIL71 HLC-FPH SLEEVE ANCHOR, OR SIMPSON STRONG TIE SLEEVE ALL IN CONCRETE HD3 -y w i- 14' O.C.MAX. 6' X 7' 14' O.C.MAX. OR� 5 8' X 8' OPENING 14' O.C.MAX. z a (SEE SHT1) Lg VC O.C.MAX. c>J I 14' O.C.MAX. REFER TO SILL D INSTTAIILL 'TH' 14' O.C.MAX. wnnn cn Ln WAI L c 6' M' SEE NOTE ;. -- MAX. rMN 1.5' MIN O DISTANCE a r L• C. EW EMBEDMENT_LAG R 0p Ir1 R 6' MAX. 6' MAX. tTf T 96"X96" 21' O.C. MAXIMUM DOOR M OPENING 21' O.C. MAX 21 O.C. MAX. REFER TO SILL 21, O.C. INSTALLATION MAX. DETAIL 'TH' L 12 SIAS (GR. 5) 2) PER ANCHOR =13 EX *STEEL STUD WALLS SEE NOTE 1. Fy MIN.-36 KSI STEEL STUD ANCHOR WELD -IN OR LOCK -IN NTEI.OR MAX. J *STEEL STUD WALLS. SEE NOTE 1. 4 UNIVERSAL ANCHOR WELD -IN OR LOCK -IN CONCRETE LINTEL SHOWN MAY VARY PER WALL -,, L- L7 1 XT, i f EXTERIOR LL �tRANE JArO -1 I-4' MAX, SEE CORRESPONDING 1/4' X 1-3/4" ITW MULLION INSTALLATION � ON SHTS. 15 do 16 EXTEM0R BUILEX/REOHEAD TAPCON DETAIL'TH' OR /14 X 1-3/4" WOOD SILL INSTALLATION DOUBLE OUTSWINO SCREW AS REQUIRED DOORS ALSO SEE SHEETS 3.6 & 17 9 EXTERIOR R E V I S I❑ N S LTR DESCRIPTION DATE A APPROVAL DWG YMF 05/20/07 C REVISED DWG RAP 12/03/07 D REVISED DWG YMF 01/17/08 F REVISED DWG YMF 05/30/08 G REVISED PER_MDBCCO YMF 02/06/09 H REVISED DWG YMF 03/18/09 J REVISED DWG YMF 04/06/10 K REVISED NAME JPD 11/01/13 L REVISED DWG JPD 02/01/15 M REVISED DWG JPD 05/05/15 N ENGINEER CHANGE LA 02/10/17 O ADDRESS UPDATE SM 02/27/20 CONCRETE LINTEL SHOWN 2' FACE WITHOUT GROUT APPROVED MAY VARY PER FRAME HEAD WALL -� FILLED W/2000 CONSTRUCTION a : ' : PSI GROUT ACI 530.1 ' •• 2' OR 4' FACE GROUT FILLED ui la, X: 1 EXTERIOR 1,75' .CTIDN 81112 - FRAME HEAD SECTION WOOD STUD LINTEL SHOWN MAY ALSO BE- STEEL STUD �` 2' FACE -WITHOUT GROUT CONSTRUCTION I •t. EN01. S. Of EXTERIOR 5�8 ;• 101 . "MEN , P.E.: `� •r �� 1/4" X 1-3/4' ITw CONCRETE OR BUILEX/REDHEAD W1mD S1tL HD3 -FRAME HEAD SECTION i�� eIyy°4• i� onLJBEACHrr�Vo.• TAPCON OR 1.25' MIN. EDGE J14 X 1-3/4' WOOD DISTANCE (E.D.) SCREW 1.25" MIN. INTO WOOD (SG-.55) BEND RADIUS / 1 MANUFACINd �A�ILITY L EMBEDMENT 2.5' MIN. EDGE DETAIL'TH' SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY LLC ' STEELCRAFT SILL INSTALLATION SIDE VIEW DISTANCE (E.D.) INTO CONCRETE 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET 9017 BLUE ASH ROAD (3KSI MIN.) - CARMEL, IN 46032 CINCINNATI, OH 45242 NOTES: 1.(*)WOOD OR (*)STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS OF WOOD THIRD ANGLE PREIJECTION TITLE: STEELCRAFT H SERIES DOUBLE FLUSH OUTSVANG COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS WITH AND AND STEEL -STUD WALLS MUST BE DESIGNED TO CARRY DRAWN DATE WITHOUT PANIC EXIT DEVICES AT LEAST 312 #/FT. LOAD FOR ASSEMBUES RATED 075 YMF +sieve? ANCHOR DETAILS / INSTALLATION CONDITIONS PSF.AND 375#/FT. FOR ASSEMBLIES RATED 0 90 PSF. CHECKED FOR ASSEMBLIES WITH A DESIGN PRESSURE RATING WHICH SHOULD BE VERIFIED BY THE APPROPRIATE OFFICIAL, OF 75 PSF OR LESS 2.NUMBER OF ANCHORS FOR VARIOUS OPENING HEIGHTS IS LIMITED BY MAXIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN ANCHORS, SHOWN APPROVED SIZE FLAT DWG ND. REV ON THIS SHEET. 3.SEAL ALL JOINTS WHERE FRAME MEETS WALL WITH BUM 1 I R F D O 7 ❑ RUBBER OR tOOX SILICONE CAULK. ENG. APPVL 4ANSTALL THRESHOLD INTO BEAD OF BUM RUBBER OR JPD 10„v, SCALE' N T S A U T ❑CAD SHEET OF 17 t00X SILICONE CAULK FULL LENGTH OF SILL TABLE 3.1 WATER RATED PERIMETER SEAL HARDWARE - ZERO INT'L THRESHOLD 566 ITEM NUMBER MODEL No./ DESCRIPTION MFG. 11A 566 THRESHOLD ZERO INT'L 14 FAS-SEAL SWEEP STEELCRAFT 15 END CHANNEL STEELCRAFT 16A 328 SPLIT ASTRAGAL ZEROINT'L 19A 8150S DOOR SEAL ZERO INT'L 21A 139 DOOR SWEEP ZERO INT'L 23A 142 RAIN DRIP ZERO INT'L 23B 11 RAIN DRIP ZERO INT'L 24 DOOR TOP CAP STEELCRAFT ZERO INT'L 566 THRESHOLD GASKETING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR WATER INFILTRATION - MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE RATING 75PSF - (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) FOR CONFIGURATIONS: 1, 1A, 2, 3 & 4 (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) TOP OF DOOR FRAME HEAD EXTERIOR INTERIOR �NEOPRENE (tug length) 0.125 10.25 EXT n r I 0.50 T-� 5.00 �-T ZERO INT'L 566 SERIES THRESHOLD 1� UP TO MAX. DESIGN PRESSURE 41- 75 PSF 0.067' I kiw DOOR END CHANNEL ZERO 61505 DOOR SEAL 0.0s 1.36• o.sa• 313 ZERO 11 RAIN DRIP T. INT. TYPICAL THRESHOLD SET INTO BEAD OF CAULK SEE NOTE 6 SEE :B oso• v 0.3 5' FLO CLEARANC EO• E 0. 1/4-Xi-3/4- ITW 1.25- MIN. EDGE DISTANCE BURDEX/REDN£AO T INTO WOOD SILL (SO-.65) OR P14 WOOD SCREW 25' MIN. EDGE DISTANCE 1.25' UK EMOEOMENT INTO CONCRETE SILL (3 KS MIN,) BOTTOM OF DOOR WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SILL INSTALLATION 19A 19A INTERIOR INACTIVE ACTIVE ° 21 HINGE JAMB EXTERIOR SEE R HINGE REINF. HINGE JAMB Sm Noo w*a ' I—. 1.00- MZERO INTL 328 SERIES SPLITASTRAGAL 0.2• — u(.07 5 ' 1ZERO 139 DOOR SWEEP EXT, INT. TYPICAL THRESHOLD SET INTO BEAD OF CAULK SEE NOTE 6 19A a HINGE JAMB 47.625 LAX. — a93 -11.25 173 `' 1125 - SEE NOTE 1 _ m �E — — SIX — — f--I aso — — — SECTION ZERO INT'L 566 THRESHOLD GASKETING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR WATER INFILTRATION - MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE RATING 75PSF - (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) FOR CONFIGURATIONS: 7 & g SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1 ( ) 23 19A TOP OF DOOR 24 FRAME HEAD t5 R E V I S I❑ N S LTR DESCRIPTION DATE A APPROVAL DWG YMF 05/20/07 E REVISED DWG YMF 04/09/08 F REVISED DWG YMF 06/02/08 125 OTE 3) 14 FASSEAL DOOR SWEEP G REVISED DWG YMF 02/06l09 H REVISED DWG YMF 03/18/09 J REVISED DWG YMF 04/06/10 r asar--- -ao sou ZERO 142 2� RAIN DRIP t.Ts• --11 .06r 0-w DIMPLED HOLE FOR SELF -DRILLING SCREW 24 DOOR TOP CAP K REVISED NAME JPD 11/01/13 L REVISED DWG JPD 02/01/15 M REVISED DWG JPD 05/05/15 N ENGINEER CHANGE LA 02/03/17 O ADDRESS UPDATE SM 02/27/20 ZERO INT'L 566 THRESHOLD GASKETING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR WATER INFILTRATION - MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE RATING 75PSF - (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) FOR CONFIGURATIONS: 5, 6, 9, & 11 (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) EXTERIOR TOP OF DOOR FRAME HEAD INTERIOR 0.50, 0.3 5' FLU CLEARANC ED. 1/4-X1--3/4- ITT 1.2S' MIN. EDGE DISTANCE OWLDEX/REDNEAD T INTO WCOD SILL (SO-.SSI OR 11 1YOOb SCREW 26' MN. E00£ DISTANCE 1.26' MIN. T INTO CONCRETE SU (3 KS MIN.) BOTTOM OF DOOR WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SILL INSTALLATION HH985� ' VON DUPRIN MULLION INTERIOR T 19A ACTIVE ACTIVE 16 SPLIT ASTRAGAL EXTERIOR EXTERIOR INTERIOR APPROVED 15 23B 21 CAU CAULK SEE SEE 17 1 14 1TA 17 NOTE6 NOTE 6 I 0.50' Dona seu 03 S' FLDt�*rffl APPLIED TO CLEARANC ED. I1At�0S� 1/4'Xt-Les' MN. EDGE OISTANCE 19A INTERIOR 19A OURDEX/REDHEAD T INTO WOOD SILL (S8-." OR 014 WOOD SCREW 2, MIN. DANCE 1.2V MK EMBEDMENT (3 KSI WN.) FOR BOTTOM OF DOOR WEATHERSTRIPPING 1111 ACTIVE ACTIVE 1111'. HINGE AND SILL INSTALLATION RUNE EXT. INT. ° 18 SPLIT ° ASTRAGAL HINGE JAMB EXTERIOR HINGE JAMB TYPICAL THRESHOLD SET INTO BEAD OF CAULK SEE NOTE 6 `%�� NOTES: \N fj 1. SLOT LOCATIONS MAY VARY WITH DIFFERENT DOOR WIDTH. SEE 2. DOOR SWEEP RIGID SECTION IS MADE OF PRO -FAX #PD-199 POLYPROPYLENE •` JCS, ' {� 6 HOMOPOLYMER. «=; 3. DOOR SWEEP FLEXIBLE SECTION IS MADE OF SANTOPRENE #1D1-73 Q, %8 4. FAS-SEAL DOOR SWEEP (14), AND THRESHOLD (11A) ARE REQUIRED FOR ALL INSTALLATIONS. 5. SEAL ALL JOINTS WHERE FRAME MEETS WALL WITH BUM RUBBER OR 100% SILICONEi�=.1aoa�(6PE. CAULK : OT PE. T3TTII; , 6. INSTALL THRESHOLD INTO BEAD OF BUTYL RUBBER OR 100% SLICONE CAULK FULL ° LENGTH OF SILL iSrACKA+. BEND RADIUS MANUVA TW(tI11Vpj jF,40ENITYI SEE OR HINGE Rm. HINGE JAMB SCHLAGE LUCK COMPANY, LLC STEELCRA 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET 9017 BLUE ASH ROAD CARMEL, IN 46032 CINCINNATI, OH 45242 - THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION TITLES STEELCRAFT H SERIES DOUBLE FLUSH OUTSWING COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS WITH AN WITHOUT PANIC EXIT DEVICES AWN DATE YMF 06'2"0' DOUBLE FLUSH DOOR PERIMETER SEAL HARDWARE APPROVED WHERE WATER INFILTRATION IS REQUIRED ECKED PROVED SIZE FLAT DWG NO. REV I R F D 0 7 10 G. APPVL JPD 1g,1t.07 SCALE' NTS I AUT❑CADT 5 of 17 TABLE 3.2 WATER RATED PERIMETER SEAL HARDWARE - ZERO INT'L THRESHOLD 566 ITEM NUMBER MODEL No./ DESCRIPTION MFG. 11A 566 THRESHOLD ZERO INT'L 14 FAS-SEAL SWEEP STEELCRAFT 15 END CHANNEL STEELCRAFT 19B 188S DOOR SEAL ZERO INT'L 21A 139 DOOR SWEEP ZERO INT'L 21B 326 DOOR SWEEP ZERO INT'L 22A 475 ADJUSTABLE SEAL ZERO INT'L 23A 142 RAIN DRIP ZERO INT'L 23B 11 RAIN DRIP ZERO INT'L 24 IDOORTOPCAP ISTEELCRAFT1 ITEM NEOPRENE(fulllerp) r 0.125 1 NUMB L0.25 EXT C\ 11B 0.50 14 ZERO INT'L 566 SERIES THRESHOLD I� 15 q( 1Ai UP TO MAX. DESIGN PRESSURE +/-75 PSF 13A 47.625 3.91 —j MAX. X. —I 3,91 - 11.25 17.3 11.25 SEE N07E I RIGID SECTION ---GD- SEE NOTE NOTE 2. 0.50 ZERO THRESHOLD GASKETING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS NTS FOR WATER INFILTRATION - MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE RATING 70 PSF - (SEE CONFIGURATION 10, ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) 14 FAS•SEALDOOR SWEEP FOR CONFIGURATION: 10 (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) DOOR HEAD SEE 0.50' IIA, FLD CLEARAN E.O. E.D. 1/4-XI-3/4' 17W 1.2b' MIN EDGE DISTANCE BUILDEX/tiEDHEAD TAPCON INTO WOOD SILL (SD-.55) OR j14 WOOD SCREW 2.5' MN. EOCE DISTANCE 1.25' MIN. EMBEDMENT INTO BETE SILL (3 KSI MN.) BOTTOM OF DOOR WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SILL INSTALLATION EXTERIOR ;RAIN ZERO142 DRIP 0.067' - t.6s• --i DOOR END CHANN I WATER RATED PERIMETER SEAL MODEL No./� DESCRIPTION MFG. 950 THRESHOLD NGP FAS-SEAL SWEEP STEELC END CHANNEL STEELC 20 202N DOOR SEAL NGP 21C 20ON DOOR SWEEP NGP 22B 170N ADJUSTABLE SEAL NGP 23C 16A RAIN DRIP NGP 24 DOOR TOP CAP STEELCRAFT NGP 950 THRESHOLD GASKETING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR WATER INFILTRATION - MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE RATING 170 PSF FOR MAXIMUM DOOR SIZE OF 3'-0" X 7'-0" MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE +501-70 PSF FOR MAXIMUM DOOR SIZE OF 4'-0" X 8'-0" (SEE CONFIGURATION 10, ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) 1.75' ---�� .062' f— 0.50' 1.52' DIMPLED HOLE FOR RBXI-1/2 PHFH SELF -DRILLING SCREW DDOOR TOP CAP Ds� 0,378- 1 Snapon Cma (Temper PwoO ZERO 1B8S ZERO 475 )B DOOR SEAL 22A ADJUSTABLE SEAL FOR CONFIGURATION: 10 (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) TOP OF DOOR FRAME HEAD O.r 0.06' EXTERIOR INTERIOR 1.25' 1.00' 0.07' O 0.59' ZERO 139 ZERO 328 236 ZERO 11 1 DOOR SWEEP Z1 B DOOR SWEEP RAIN DRIP EXT. INT. CAUL SEE 1 1 15 NOTE 6 14 J 23 TYPICAL THRESHOLD SET INTO 116 d CAULK SEE BEAD OF CAULK SEE NOTE 6 EXT. INT. 0.125. L - �1T NOTE 6 ....„ T— EMBEDMENT CLEARANCE FLOOR E D E.D. CLEARANCE APPLIED TO THE SOFFIT AREA OF HINGE .IAMBS. ITT AGAINST OSED DOOR DOOR SEAL APPLIED TO HEAD AND JAMDS HINGE JAMB TYPICAL THRESHOLD SET INTO 1/4'Xt-3/4- ITW 1.25' MIN. EDGE DISTANCE BEAD OF CAULK SEE NOTE 6 BUILDEX/REONEAD TAPCON INTO WOOD SILL (SG-.55) OR #14 WOOD SEW 2.5' MIN. EDGE DISTANCE 1.25' MIN. EMBEDMENT INTO CONCRETE SILL (3 KSI MIN.) BOTTOM OF DOOR WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SILL INSTALLATION HINGE JAMB EATERIUR HINGE JAMB - NGP THRESHOLD R E V I S I 0.N S DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED A REVISED DWG YMF 05/20/07 E REVISED DWG YMF 04/09/09 F REVISED DWG YMF 06/02/08 G REVISED DWG YMF 02/06/09 H REVISED DWG YMF 03/18/09 J REVISED DWG YMF 04/06/10 K REVISED DWG JPD 11/01/13 L REVISED NAME JPD 02/01/15 M REVISED DWG JPD 05/05/15 N ENGINEER CHANGE LA 02/03/17 D 1 ADDRESS UPDATE SM 02/27/20 NOTES: SEE 1. SLOT LOCATIONS MAY VARY WITH DIFFERENT DOOR WIDTH. 6 2. DOOR SWEEP RIGID SECTION IS MADE OF PRO -FAX #PD-199 POLYPROPYLENE HOMOPOLYMER. 3. DOOR SWEEP FLEXIBLE SECTION IS MADE OF SANTOPRENE #101-73 4. FAS-SEAL DOOR SWEEP (14), AND THRESHOLD (11A OR 11B) AS APPLICABLE ARE REQUIRED FOR ALL INSTALLATIONS. 5. SEAL ALL JOINTS WHERE FRAME MEETS WALL WITH BUTYL RUBBER OR 100% SILICONE CAULK 6. INSTALL THRESHOLD INTO BEAD OF BUTYL RUBBER OR 100% SLICONE CAULK FULL LENGTH OF SILL BEND RADIUS 03/E01,07 SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET CARMEL, IN 46032 TITLE) STEELCRAFT H SERIES WITHOUT PANIC EXIT DEVICES -s if MANUFACTMIACI MAWNITYI STEELCRAFT 9017 BLUE ASH ROAD CINCINNATI, OH 45242 DOUBLE FLUSH DOOR PERIMETER SEAL HARDWARE APPROVED WHERE WATER INFILTRATION IS REQUIRED NTS I AUTDCAD IRFD07 JPD 10A1/07 6 Of 17 Ifi1:1R3sE1kC47lk1►.T/_Lid:l:L•di:1d»:1I'viI:ki7d 1:r1I ITEM NUMBER MODEL NO./ DESCRIPTION MFG. 11 11A 566 THRESHOLD ZERO INT`L 11C 65 THRESHOLD ZERO INT'L 11D 568THRESHOLD ZEROINT'L 13 13A PS074 DOOR SEAL STEELCRAFT 13B 188S DOOR SEAL ZERO INT'L 13C 117S DOOR SEAL ZERO INT'L 13D 8144S DOOR SEAL ZERO INT'L 13E 81SOS DOOR SEAL ZERO INT'L 14 FAS-SEAL SWEEP STEELCRAFT 15 END CHANNEL STEELCRAFT 16A 328 SPLIT ASTRAGAL ZERO INT'L ZERO INT'L 566, 65 AND 568 THRESHOLD GASKETING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS WHEN WATER INFILTRATION IS NOT REQUIRED MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE RATING 75 PSF - EXCEPT CONFIGURATION 10 LIMITED TO 70 PSF MAXIMUM DOOR SIZE 4'-0" X 8'-0" (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) FOR CONFIGURATIONS: :�l•T T ►4:t0*1l71, kifti NEOPRENE (lull lelpth `225 L ( 0.25 EXT ®� I FLEXIBLE 0.50 SEMI. "Go 4B` L—� TI S00 �� I ost4 l�._N ZERO INTL 566 SERIES THRESHOLD 1 MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE +/- 75 PSF PS-074 SEE SHEET 1A STEELCRAFT DOOR SEAL SILICONE (lull lang8l 0.44' 0.25 FXT 0.50 Tr 0.125 5.00 ZERO INT'L 65 SERIES THRESHOLD MAXIMUM DESSGN PRESSURE +/- 70 PSF 1 SEE SHEET 1 044' ZERO 8144S i 3D DOOR SEAL NEOPRENE (lull longth 0.125 r0.13 ExT r� Q 0.50 TI 6.00• �7 ZERO INT'L 508 SERIES THRESHOLD 01D] M1 D MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE +/- 75 PSF (SEE SHEET 1) 1, 1A, 2, 3 & 4 (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) DOOR SEAL APPLIED TO HEADAND 13 13 INTERIOR 13 SEE SHL3 FOR INACTIVE ACTIVE HWIE REINF. HINGE JAMB EXTERIOR HINGE JAMB FOR CONFIGURATIONS: 5, 6, 9, & 11 (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) R E V I S I❑ N S 47.625 LTR DESCRIPTION DATE p,g• 0 �. aql -{ �� --I a91 A APPROVAL DWG YMF 05/20/07 „j 11.25 - 1L25 SEE NOTE 1 Rlaro SECTION E REVISED DWG YMF 04/09/08 SEE: NOTE 2 — — — F REVISED DWG YMF 06/02/08 O.SD ZER0188S ZERO IITS -- — - - — -13CT �OL G REVISED DWG YMF 02/06/09 38 DOOR SEAL DOOR SEAL ,313' �-' 0.067' so•-- ZERO 8150S DOOR DOOR SEAL 15 END CHANNEL FOR CONFIGURATIONS: 7 & 8 (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) DOOR SEAL APPLIED TO L6 1,25 (NOTE Jj H REVISED DWG J REVISED DWG 14 FAS-SEAL DOOR SWEEP K REVISED NAME L REVISED DWG 9• �Ov__ M REVISED DWG i6A SoNdNeoF+ano N ENGINEER CHANGE ZERO 328 SPLIT ASTRAGAL D ADDRESS UPDATE ALL CONFIGURATIONS TOP OF DOOR FRAME HEAD READ AND i s JA ISS INTERIOR *FM 3 ACTIVE ACTIVEEEXTERIOR INTERIOR FSPLITASTRAGAL HINGE JAMB EXTERIOR HINGE JAMB FOR CONFIGURATION: 10 (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) 15 YMF YMF JPD JPD JPD 05/05/15 LA 02/03/17 SM 102/27/20 APPROVED 28 TERIOR CAU < 1 l I 1 / / HH9954 2 DOORSM HOL;101A1 DOOR SEAL SEE 1 14 11 CAULK SEE ti\1 1!1 VON DUPRIN NOTE 6 MULLION APPl1EDT0 fAULLAPPLIEDTD 17 NOTES �'� •* • • tt INTERIOR HEAD AND HEADAND �}(.�, •,• /��••(,�\y „/• JAtu>S JALIes 13 13 13 13 13 t3 E.D. E D. �. S�'• : (' SEE3 7 3HT.3 SEE 1/4x1-3/4• ITIII 12be-Lim. EDGE DISTANCE „- • w FOR SHT.3 BUIIDEx/REDFIEAD TAPCON DLTO WOOD SILL (SO-55) ACTIVE ACTIVE RINN Acrrvc OR /14 WOOD SORELY EDGE HINTIME. 1.25' MIN. EMBEDMENT (3 0" CONCRETE SNt •" ; BOTTOM OF DOOR WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SILL INSTALLATION �, C,� ;•� P�• 1V� ° 18 SPLIT ° e 13 13 ° AS � ASTRAGAL EXTERIOR s HINGE JAMB EXTERIOR HINGE JAMB HINGE JAMB HINGE JAMB �,�l,%E,p K� •\�� NOTES: 1. SLOT LOCATIONS MAY VARY WITH DIFFERENT DOOR WIDTH. 2. DOOR SWEEP RIGID SECTION IS MADE OF PRO -FAX #PD-199 POLYPROPYLENE HOMOPOLYMER, 3. DOOR SWEEP FLEXIBLE SECTION IS MADE OF SANTOPRENE #101-73 4. FAS-SEAL DOOR SWEEP (15), DOOR SEAL (13A, 13B, 13C, 13D, 13E) AND THRESHOLD (11A, 11C, 11D) AS APPLICABLE, ARE REQUIRED FOR ALL INSTALLATIONS. 5. SEAL ALL JOINTS WHERE FRAME MEETS WALL WITH BUTYL RUBBER OR 100% SILICONE CAULK 6. INSTALL THRESHOLD INTO BEAD OF BUTYL RUBBER OR 100% SILICONE CAULK FULL LENGTH OF SILL EXT. INT. ( TYPICAL THRESHOLD SET INTO BEAD OF CAULK SEE NOTE 6 BEND RADIUS YMF 105/EO/OT JPD Iloalva SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET CARMEL, IN 46032 OUTSWING WITHOUT PANIC EXIT MANUFACTLONG 'FACILTITY, STEELCRAFT 9017 BLUE ASH ROAD CINCINNATI, OH 45242 DOUBLE FLUSH DOOR PERIMETER SEAL ZERO INT'L HARDWARE APPROVED WHERE WATER INFILTRATION IS (l L REQUIRED • I • IRFD07 7 DF 17 0 TABLE 4,2 NON WATER RATED PERIMETER SEAL HARDWARE - NGP THRESHOLD ITEM NUMBER MODEL No./ DESCRIPTION MFG. 11B 950 THRESHOLD NGP 13A PS074 DOOR SEAL STEELCRAFT 14 FAS-SEAL SWEEP STEELCRAFT 15 END CHANNEL STEELCRAFT 16B 1137 SPLIT ASTRAGAL NGP NGP 950 THRESHOLD GASKETING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS WHEN WATER INFILTRATION IS NOT REQUIRED - MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE 90 PSF FOR MAXIMUM DOOR SIZE OF 4'-0" X 8'-0" EXCEPT CONFIGURATION 10 LIMITED TO MAX 70 PSF (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) BUMPER (full k"th)—\ r 0.078 r 0.25 EXT ;0 --, ---- FOR CONFIGURATIONS: 1, 1A, 2,3 & 4 (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) 5.00 NATIONAL GUARD 950 SERIES THRESHOLD MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE +1.100 PSF 47.625 3.91-I `73_j n.2s I- n.es SEE M07E I rdw SEC FAS-SEAL DOOR SWEEP 000asFx APPLIED TO tiFJlDAt10 13A 13A INTERIOR 1 SEE SHU FOR INACTIVE1T ACTIVE HINGE REIM 0 HINGE JAMB EXTERIOR 0 HINGE JAMB FOR CONFIGURATIONS: 5, 6, 9, & 11 (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) 0.50 125 I FLEXIBLE,., M-RfGID 4U` 0.067' I ,�• I»-60--•-� -- 1.66' PS•074 DOOR ,A STEELCRAFT 15 END CHANNEL DOOR SEAL NEOPRENE OR 4sIUCONE� 0.8759L {— 0,875 L/ 031 NGP 137 SPLIT ASTRAGAL R E V IS I O N S LTR DESCRIPTION DATE A APPROVAL DWG YMF 05/20/07 E REVISED DWG YMF 04/09/08 F REVISED DWG YMF 06/02/08 G REVISED DWG YMF 02/06/09 H REVISED DWG YMF 03/18/09 J REVISED DWG YMF 04/06/10 K REVISED NAME JPD 11/01/13 REVISED DWG JPD 02/01/15 M REVISED DWG JPD 05/05/15 N ENGINEER CHANGE LA 02/03/17 0 ADDRESS UPDATE SM 02/27/20 FOR CONFIGURATIONS: 7 & 8 (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) DOOR SM APPLIED TO HEAD AND 13A 13A INTERIOR Slit.3 FOR ACTIVE ACTIVE HINGE RONF 1 SPLIT ASTRAGAL HINGE JAMB EXTERIOR HINGE JAMB FOR CONFIGURATION: 10 (SEE ELEVATIONS SHEET 1) ALL CONFIGURATIONS EXTERIOR fOP OF DOOR FRAME HEAD INTERIOR 8INTERIOR CAUL 14 SEE 7 HH9954 VON DUPRN DOOR SEAT. ttOLLDTi l.T DDOR SEAL NOTES 11B MULLION APPLIED TO htULLtON`�—,— APPLIED TO INTERIOR �13 HEADAND �,;. ^`". 13A 1 13N 19 13A Imes t3A E.D. ED. SEE 1/4SE''Xi-3/4' ITw 1.2V MK EDGE DISTANCE FOR SRT.3 BUIIDEX/REOHEAD TAPCOI/ INTO WOOD SILL (Sc=w) ACTIVE ACTIVE HINGE At1TK FOR OR #14 MOOD SCREW 2W MIN. EDGE DISTANCE ROW. H� 1.25' MIN. EMBEDMENT IN C NCCRETE SLL BOTTOM OF DOOR WEATHERSTRIPPING 1 SPtt7 ASTRAGAL ° 0 1 13A # AND SILL INSTALLATION HINGE JAMB EXTERIOR HINGE JAMB HINGE JAMB EXTERIOR HINGE JAMB BEND RADIUS NOTES: 1. SLOT LOCATIONS MAY VARY WITH DIFFERENT DOOR WIDTH. 2. DOOR SWEEP RIGID SECTION IS MADE OF PRO -FAX #PD-199 POLYPROPYLENE HOMOPOLYMER. 3. DOOR SWEEP FLEXIBLE SECTION IS MADE OF SANTOPRENE #101-73 4. FAS-SEAL DOOR SWEEP (15), DOOR SEAL (13A) AND THRESHOLD (118) AS APPLICABLE, ARE REQUIRED FOR ALL INSTALLATIONS. 5. SEAL ALL JOINTS WHERE FRAME MEETS WALL WITH BUTYL RUBBER OR 100% SILICONE CAULK 6. INSTALL THRESHOLD INTO BEAD OF BUTYL RUBBER OR 100% SILICONE CAULK FULL LENGTH OF SILL EXT, INT. ( TYPICAL THRESHOLD SET INTO BEAD OF CAULK SEE NOTE 6 SEE :6 SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET —�- CARMEL, IN 4603E APPROVED O JJJ 'Z 73778 . O . A �II MANUFACT001461 VWILTITYI STEELCRAFT 9017 BLUE ASH ROAD CINCINNATI, OH 45242 THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION ITITLEt STEELCRAFT H SERIES DOUBLE FLUSH OUTSWING COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS WITH I 4WN DATE WITHOUT PANIC EXIT DEVICES YMF DOUBLE FLUSH DOOR PERIMETER NGP SEAL HARDWARE -CKED APPROVED WHERE WATER INFILTRATION IS WZ REQUIRED 'ROVED SIZE FLAT DWG NO, REV IRFD07 i. APPVL JPD Iallrol SCALE' NTS AUTOCAD 8 Df 17 BENT TABS TO SECURE ASSEMBLY 'KD' "KNOCKED-DG.,,. ASSEMBLY HEAD ANCHOR •.Pf '`V `--TOP OF JAMB HEAD NOTCHED AND BOLTED ON TOP OF JAMBS TYPICAL FRAME PROFILE DOUBLE RABBET 4� OPTIONAL FOR HEAD SECTION [ If DOOR SIDE EXTERIOR 1.938" 5.75 _ NOM. WELDED SEE NOTE 4 ,SUN SET-UP AND ARC -WELDED ASSEMBLY CUP TO HEAD JAMB HEAD NOTCHED AND BOLTED BETWEEN JAMBS 0.625" 1 �+ 2" MIN. VARIES 5.75" 0.625" JAMB NOM. T- 1.938" VARIES DOOR SIDE J_ EXTERIOR 2"MAX ,TE SEE TABLE 7. STEEL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES MATERIAL ASTM REF. YIELD KSI TENSILE i CRS A366 MIN. 30.1 MIN. 44.7 HRS A1011 GALV: A60 A924 SS: 304,3061 A240 IMIN, 31.2 MIN. 73.2 HEAD NOTCHED HEAD SITS ON TOP AND BUTTED BETWEEN JAMBS OF NOTCHED JAMBS #8 X 5/8 TRUSS HEAD SMS •v- ,MU, "MULTI -USE" SERIES ASSEMBLY SUA OPTIONAL OPTIONAL FRAME PROFILE SINGLE RABBET 2.625 NOM. .. T_ 4 MAX. VARIES 12" MIN 1.938 2.625" JAMB 5. '5" MIN. NOM. NOTES: 10.62!5"IL4 I I I 1 DOOR CONSTRUCTION REVISIONS LTR DESCRIPTION DATE A APPROVAL DWG YMF 05/20/( D REVISED DWG YMF 01 23 E REVISED DWG YMF 04 09/1 F REVISED DWG YMF 06/02/( G REVISED PER-MDBCCO YMF 02/06/( APPROVED K REVISED NAME JPD 11/01/13 L REVISED DWG JPD 02/01/15 M REVISED DWG JPD 02/01/15 N ENGINEER CHANGE LA 03/10/17 0 ADDRESS UPDATE SM 02/27/20 TART F R_ AVAII ARI F STFFLCRAFT FRAME CONFIGURATIONS FRAME JAMB MAX. OPENING SIZE MATERIAL SERIES DEPTH WIDTH HEIGHT DESCR. GA. MIN. THK 16/.053" CRS/HRS 14/.067" F 5.75" 8'0" 8'0" GALV 12/.099" NOM. STAINLESS 16/.053" STEEL MU 5.75" 8#0" 810" CRS/HRS 16/.053" 14/.067" NOM. GALV TARI F 5. AVAII ARI F STFFI_CRAFT DOOR CONFIGURATIONS CORE MATERIAL MAXIMUM OPENING SIZE SKIN MATERIAL PER SHT.13 WIDTH I HEIGHT DESCR. GA. MIN. THK HONEYCOMB POLYSTYRENE VARIES CRS 16/.053" POLYURETHANE SEE SHEET 2 GALV 14/.067" (POLYISOCYANURATE) TABLE 1 TEMPERATURE RISE STEEL STIFFENED HONEYCOMB VARIES POLYSTYRENE SEE SHEET 2 SS 16/.053" POLYURETHANE TABLE 1 STEEL STEE I VARIES - 1.938" 1.1. NOMINAL DOOR THICKNESS - 1 3/4" DOOR SIDE 1.2. DOOR SIZE MAY VARY, SUBJECTED TO COMPLIANCE EXTERIOR 5.75" DOOR SIDELWITH FLORIDA BUILDING CODE AND PRODUCT AVAILABILITY FROM NOM. EXTERIOR FIXED HOLLOW FIXED HOLLOW METAL MULLION METAL MULLION DOUBLE RABBET SINGLE RABBET 0.625" � � VARIES ---{ VARIES OPTIONAL 5.75" VARIES VIEWER NOM. I NOM. 1 I SEE SHEET ITEM 29 DOOR SIDE 1.94" SEE NOTE 4. 1.94" EXTERIOR � -DOOR SIDE -----DOOR SIDE 2" MIN EXTERIOR 0.625" -- 2" MIN EXTERIOR 4" MAX APPLICABLE TO ELEVATION 4" MAX 10 ONLY (SEE SHEET 1) HOLLOW MULLION MATERIAL: MINIMUM THICKNESS IS 0.053" (16 Go.) HOLLOW 1 MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH = 58,000 PSI MULLION \ MINIMUM TENSILE STRENGTH = 45.700 PSI --i MANUFACTURER (SEE SHEET 2 FOR AVAILABLE HARDWARE) 0.625" 1.3. PEEP -HOLES AND DOOR VIEWERS ARE PERMITTED TO BE USED 2" MAX. IN DOORS WITH A MAXIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE OF +/- 75 PSF OR LESS. MAXIMUM 9/16" DIAMETER HOLE THROUGH DOOR FOR AVAILABLE DOOR PANEL CONFIGURATIONS VIEWER INSTALLATION. 2. FRAME CONSTRUCTION WIDTH MAX.4B- -�) WIDTH MAX.48- �-- 2.1. NOMINAL JAMB DEPTH - 5 3/4", STOP HEIGHT - 5/8" 2.2. FRAMES AVAILABLE AS FLUSH (F-SERIES) AND MULT-USE (MU -SERIES) (SEE TABLE 6) 3. FOR MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS REFERENCE SEE TABLE 7. 4. CONTINUOUS BACK WELD WITH FULL PENETRATION TO FACE SEAM. GRIND, SMOOTH, PRIME, & PAINT. WELD CLSSIFICATION - E70XX FLUSH Y BEND RADIUS PANEL HEIGHT MAX. 96" D. 6 A n EMBOSSED . X�N� Q1.0 ,/ a avd�tssnseaettsaooy.� 1.� SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC MAN �11 I1ti ITY. 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET 9017 BLUE BLUE ASH ROAD CARMEL, IN 46032 CINCINNATI, OH 45242 ECTION TITLE: STEELCRAFT H SERIES DOUBLE FLUSH OUTSWING COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS WITH AND DAIS WITHOUT PANIC EXIT DEVICES FRAME PROFILE, CORNER DETAILS AND DOOR FRAME MATERIAL, AND SIZE OPTIONS JPD I lomlo? I suAL: N TS I AU TOCAD IRFD07 94" 9 oF 17 x (4) X #325 SEXBOLTS (MOUNTED R E V I S I❑ N S 4X #425 SEX BOLTS ON OPPOSITE DOOR FACE) FASTEN LTR DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED ,-(DEVICE THRU BOLTED WITH TOP AND BOTTOM LATCHES TO DOOR D REVISED DWG YMF 01/23/08 J #10-24 MACHINE SCREWS (MOUNTED WITH (7) #1/4-20 MS) F REVISED DWG YMF 06/02/08 pp (OPTIONAL) G REVISED PER-MDBCCO YMF 02/06/09 AUX. LATCH 299F/499F TOP STRIKE 268 ❑R499F STRIKE (STEEL) MOUNTED WITH H REVISED DWG YMF 03/l8/09 (STAINLESS STEEL) (3) #10-24 SMS'' 'Si J REVISED PER-MDBCCO YMF 04/06/10 MOUNTED WITH Y (3) #10-24 SMS F MIN.=120 KSi K REVISED NAME JPD 11/01/13 CROSSBAR Fy=120,000 PSI LATCH BOLT L REVISED DWG JPD 02/01/I5 CENTERCASE TOP ROD M REVISED DWG JPD 05/05/IS MECHANISM CASE TOP LATCH N ENGINEER CHANGE LA 03/10/17 USED DUPRIN 88-F RIM DEVICE CENTERCASE 0 ADDRESS UPDATE SM 02/27/20 s DEVICE CENTERCASE (4) X #325 SEXBOLTS (MOUNTED THRUBOLTED TO 4X #425 SEX BOLTS •� ON OPPOSITE DOOR FACE) FASTEN EXTERIOR TRIM TOP AND BOTTOM LATCHES TO DOOR (DEVICE THRU BOLTED WITH PUSHBAR (NOT SHOWN) 299F/499F TOP STRIKE (STEEL) MECHANISM CASE / #10-24 MACHINE SCREWS) 25' WITH (4) 310-24 MS MOUNTED WITH (3) #10-24 SMS--�_,• (MOUNTED WITH (7) #1/4-20 MS) po (OPTIONAL) I Fy MIN.=120 KSi AUX. LATCH 299E STRIKE BOTTOM ROD 299-F (499-F) TOP LATCH STRIKE BOTTOM LATCH TOP ROD TOUCHBAR • •'_(STAINLESS STEEL) MECHANISM CASE MOUNTED WITH 284L4 BOTTOM e CENTERCASE 304E (3) #10-24 SMS / Fy=120,000 PSI STRIKE (STEEL) s UX. LATCH LATCH BOLT GROUTED INTO FLOOR 299-F (499-F) CENTERCASE n -STRIKE, MOUNTED PUSHBAR 2.G• WITH (3) #10-24 SMS 3--1 VON DUPRIN 98/99 (F) RIM DEVICE VON DUPRIN 98/9927 (F) SURFACE VERTICAL ROD EXIT DEVICE Fy=120,000 PSI USED IN CONFIGURATION, 6 USED IN CONFIGURATION: 7 299F STRIKE BOTTOM ROD LATCH BOLT BOTTOM LATCH 4X#425 SEX BOLTS 338 TOP STRIKE #10-24 MS 304E 284L4 BOTTOM s <DEVICE THRU BOLTED WITH / goMECHANISM CASE p� #10-24 MACHINE SCREWS) (2) EA. STRIKE (STEEL) (OPTIONAL) GROUTED INTO FLOOR • TOP LATCH VON DUPRIN 98/9957 (F) THREE-POINT LATCHING DEVICI� 909 (954) USED IN CONFIGURATIONS: 9 & 10 001 II11ii TOUCHBAR TOP ROD ❑ 1.55 V.STRIKE MOUNTED WITH �' ' .�� �' ,._ • to (3) #10-24 SMS MECHANISM CASE --� �~ �� F120,000 PSI CENTERCASE —2.49 LATCH B❑Lyy=T 338 STRIKE N 37 $o CENTERCASE DEVICE CENTERCASE -U THRU-BOLTED TO OF VON DUPRIN XP98/99 (F) EXTERIOR TRIM A.` USED IN CONFIGURATION: 5 PUSHBAR — (NOT SHOWN) WITH lC� (4) #10-24 MS NOTES: + e 1. ELECTRICAL FUNCTIONS/INSTALLATION AND FIRE RATINGS ARE BOTTOM ROD BEND RADIUS NOT PART OF THIS APPROVAL AND TO BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED a MANUFACTURING FACILITYi BY BUILDING OFFICIAL. (�i{ SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC STEELCRAFT 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET 9017 BLUE ASH ROAD 2. EXIT HARDWARE OPTIONS: -- CARMEL, IN 46032 CINCINNATI, OH 45242 FOR 98199 & XP98/99 SERIES - FUNCTIONS E, RX, LX, SS, EL, QEL, CX, F BOTTOM LATCH THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION TITLE, STEELCRAFT H SERIES DOUBLE FLUSH OUTSWING COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS WITH AND ALK TRIM: ALL APPLICABLE TRIMS AVAILABLE. DRAWN DATE WITHOUT PANIC EXIT DEVICES, FOR 88-F SERIES - FUNCTION E; TRIM: ALL APPLICABLE TRIMS 385A OR 304L L YMF 05/mO7 EXIT HARDWARE FOR FLUSH DOUBLE DOORS. AVAILABLE. PN MODEL OFFERED. BOTTOMSTRIKE (STEEL) CHECKED MATE FOR 33/35-F SERIES - FUNCTIONS RX, LX, EL, SS; TRIM: ALL GROUTED INTO FLOOR APPLICABLE TRIMS AVAILABLE. ley APPROVED AD/1TE slzE FLAT DWG N0 REV FOR 2670 GUARD-X; TRIM: ALL APPLICABLE TRIMS AVAILABLE. IRFD07 VON DUPRIN 98i9947-F CONCEALED VERTICAL ROD EXIT DEVICE ENG. APPVL �19/jlem E TRIM: ALL APPLICABLE TRIMS AVAILABLE. USED IN CONFIGURATION: 8 JPD sCALE� NTS AUT❑CAD SHEET low 17 (V71 i #8-32 MACHINE SCREWS #12-24 MACHINE SCREWS Fy min=120,000 PSI LATCH 012-24 MACHINE Fy min=126 MIN. THROW: DEADBOLT = 1 LATCH = -Y4" SCHLAGE AL SERIES 1 IES MORTISE LOCKSET CYLINDRICAL LEVER USED IN CONE WITH I1/?"2THROW LATCH I SCHLAGEW1DEAD BOLT. U0SEDRIN CONFIGURATION: 1 MIN. LATCH THROW: CONFIGURATION 3 = 1/2" CONFIGURATION 4 = 3/4" LATCH 2-24 MACHINE SCREWS #8-32 MACHINE SCREM Fy min120,000 PSI SCHLAGE D/ND—SERIES CYLINDRICAL LEVER LOCKSET. USED IN CONFIGURATIONS: 3 & 4 MIN. LATCH THROW = 3/4" N8-32 MS e Fy-120.000 PSI #12-24 MS SS Fy-120,000 PSI LATCH FALCON, T—SERIES CYLINDRICAL LEVER LOCKSET USED IN CONFIGURATION: 4 MIN. LATCH THROW = 3/4" #12-24 MS r�+ Fu min= 120,000 PSi , _ 174 .'Al LATCH SCHLAGE ULV 9000 SERIES MORTISE LOCK WITHOUT DEADBOLT USED IN CONFIGURATION: 1A #12-24 MACHINE S SS Fy=120,000 PSI MIN. THROW., DEADBOLT = 1" LATCH = 3�a" DEADBOLT LATCH Irmol FALCON MA —SERIES MORTISE LOCKSET W/ DEADBOLT USED IN CONFIGURATION: 1 10 #12-24 MS SS Fu=120,000 PSI L9000 SERIES LOCK MECHANISM MIN. LATCH THROW = 3/4" 0- SCHLAGE AD/CO MS SERIES MORTISE LOCK WITHOUT DEADBOLT USED IN CONFIGURATION: 1A NOTES: 1. ELECTRICAL FUNCTIONS/INSTALLATION AND FIRE RATINGS ARE NOT PART OF THIS APPROVAL AND TO BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY BUILDING OFFICIAL. R E V I S 1 0 N S LTR DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED A APPROVAL DWG YMF 05/20/07 D REVISED DWG YMF 01/23/08 E REVISED DWG YMF 04/09/08 F REVISED DWG YMF 06/02/08 G REVISED PER-MDBCCO YMF 02/06/09 H REVISED DWG YMF 03/18/09 J REVISED PER-MDBCCO YMF 04/06/10 K REVISED NAME JPD 11/01/13 L REVISED DWG JPD 02/01/15 M REVISED DWG JPD 05/05/15 N ENGINEER CHANGE LA 03/10/17 0 ADDRESS UPDATE SM 02/27/20 .0 * 78 i W 4 7p BEND RADIUS SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC MANUFAbtbhlNG FACILITY. 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET STEELCRAFT -�- CARMEL, IN 46032 9017 BLUE ASH ROAD CINCINNATI, OH 45242 MIRD ANGLE PROJECTION TITLE: STEELCRAFT H SERIES DOUBLE FLUSH COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS WITH AND 'WN DATE WITHOUT PANIC EXIT DEVICES F HARDWARE FOR FLUSH DOUBLE DOORS. JPD 110/12/07 Of IRFD07 l 0 SHEET 11 of 17 4X #425 SEX BOLTS (DEVICE THRU BOLTED WITH MECHANISM CASE 10-24 MACHINE SCREWS) 299-F (489-F) STRIKE STAINLESS STEEL d MOUNTED WITH (3) #10-24 MS Fy MIN: 120 KSI TOUCHBAR �� v D w CENTERCASE TO 0 #12-24 MS SS Fy--120,000 PSI MIN. THROWi DEADBOLT = V LATCH = �'♦' SERIES LOCK DEADBOLT FALCON (F)25-R RIM EXIT DEVICE SCHLAGE AD/CO MD SERIES MORTISE LOCKSET WITH DEADBOLT USED IN DOOR CONFIGURATION 11 SEE SHTA) USED IN CONFIGURATION& 1 (SEE SHTA) 4188 TOP STRIKE i 3788 TOP STRIKE MOUNTED WITH (2) MOUNTED WITH (2) #10-24 MS #10-24 SMS TOP ROD ` TOP LATCH TOP ROD Fy MIN.=120 KSi MECHANISM CASE () MECHANISM CASE TOP LATCH [7 r—CENTERCASE d'� n CENTERCASE TOUCHB - u �� BOTTOM ROD IA60 2250 - (2)#10-24 4188STRIKE BOTTOM ROD smsBOTTOM BOLT BOTTOM LATCH GUIDE 3788 STRIKE 2130 BOTTOM F STRIKE GROUTED INTO FLOOR �— 2130 BOTTOM s STRIKE GROUTED INTO FLOOR FALCON F-25-C CONCEALED VERTICAL ROD EXIT DEVICE FALCON (F)25-V SURFACE VERTICAL ROD EXIT DEVICE USED IN DOOR CONFIGURATION 8 (SEE SHT.1) USED IN DOOR CONFIGURATION 7 (SEE SHTA) NOTES: ELECTRICAL FUNCTIONS/INSTALLATION AND FIRE RATINGS ARE NOT PART OF THIS APPROVAL AND TO BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY BUILDING OFFICIAL. EXIT HARDWARE OPTIONS: F-25-C & (F)25-V (F) 25-R SERIES - FUNCTIONS AE, DM, LM, LK, KOR, ED, EL, EA, FSA, FSE, HWEA TRIMS: ALL APPLICABLE TRIMS AVAILABLE ND SERIES LATCH #12-24 MS—1, Fy chin=120 ksl R E V I S I❑ N S LTR DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED A APPROVAL DWG YMF 05/20/07 C REVISED DWG RAP 12/03/07 D REVISED DWG YMF 01/23/08 E REVISED DWG YMF 04/09/08 F REVISED DWG YMF 06/02/09 G REVISED PER_MDBCCO YMF 02/06/09 H REVISED DWG YMF 03/18/09 J REVISED PER-MDBCCO YMF 04/06/10 K REVISED NAME JPD 11/01/13 L REVISED DWG JPD 02/01/15 M REVISED DWG JPD 05/05/15 N ENGINEER CHANGE LA 03/10/17 O ADDRESS UPDATE SM 02/27/20 AD/CO MIN. LATCH THROW, CONFIGURATION 3 = 1/2' CONFIGURATION 4 = 3/4' •,1t11�S11.! �l BEND RADIUS SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC MANUFACTURING FACILITY, STEELCRAFT 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET CARMEL, IN 46032 BLUE ASH ROAD CIN —�- CINCINNATI, CH 45242 THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION TITLE, STEELCRAFT H SERIES DOUBLE FLUSH OUTSWING COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS WITH AND 4WN DATE WITHOUT PANIC EXIT DEVICES YMF 03/20/07 HARDWARE FOR FLUSH DOUBLE DOORS. IRFD07 p i. APPVL EDA7E JPD la,2,07 I SCALE' N T S I A U T❑CAD sHEET 12 OF 17 MAXIMUM UNIT WIDTH 100" MAXIMUM DOOR OPENING WIDTH (SEE INACTIVE MORTISE LOCKSET SECTION A 1 (SEE SHT.1) MAXIMUM DOOR OPENING WIDTH (SEE NOTE 1) INACTIVE CYLINDRICAL LOCKSET SECTIONS A-2. A-3. A-4 (SEE SHT.1) RIM PANIC DEVICE VON DUPRIN HARDWARE MULLION. SECTION A-5 A-B A-11 (SEE SHT.1) )M DOOR OPENING WIDTH (SEE NO EXTERIOR N.:/ SURFACE VERTICAL ROD DEVICE SECTION A-7 (SEE SHT.1) NOTES: 1. FOR MAXIMUM OPENING SIZE SEE TABLE 1 ON SHEET 2 & FOR MAXIMUM UNIT WIDTH SEE SHEET 1. 2. SEE SHEET 4 & 15 FOR ANCHOR INSTALLATION AND SHEETS 3, 4, 5, 6 & 15 FOR SILL INSTALLATION DETAILS AND SHEETS 15 & 16 FOR MULLION INSTALLATION. )M UUUK VVt=NINU VVIU I M (Stt NU I t 1) EXTERIOR /"EALED DEVICE TOP CATCN�` SHOWN, BROKEN VIEW FOR CLARITY CONCEALED VERTICAL ROD DEVICE SECTION A-B (SEE SHT.1) MAXIMUM DOOR OPENING WIDTH (SEE NOTE 1) 1.75" 1.75" MAXIMUM UNIT WIDTH 104" MAXIMUM DOOR OPEING WIDTH INCLUDING MULLION 100" MAXIMUM OPENING WIDTH --►I Ia MAXIMUM OPENING WIDTH EXTERIOR \�J I+ + i ` 4" MAX. 3-POINT LATCHING DEVICE. WITH FIXED HOLLOW METAL MULLION. SECTION A-10 (SEE SHTA) BEND RADIUS 1.75 R E V I S I❑ N S LTR DESCRIPTION DATE A APPROVAL DWG YMF 05/20/07 G REVISED PER_MDBCCO YMF 02/06/09 H REVISED DWG YMF 03/18/09 J REVISED PER_MDBCCO YMF 04/06/10 K REVISED NAME JPD 11/01/13 L REVISED DWG JPD 02/01/15 M REVISED DWG JPD 05/05/15 N ENGINEER CHANGE LA 02/23/17 O ADDRESS UPDATE SM 02/27/20 APPROVED I SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC MANUFACTURING FACILITY, STEELCRAFT 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET CARMEL, IN 46032 CIN BLUE ASH ROAD --�---J - CINCINNATI, OH 45242 THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION TITLE' STEELCRAFT H SERIES DOUBLE FLUSH OUTSWING COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS WITH Af AWN DATE WITHOUT PANIC EXIT DEVICES YMF °5�'of HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTIONS FOR FLUSH DOUBLE DOORS. NTS1 AUT❑CAD IRFD07 ID 130E 17 CONCRETE LINTEL (Typ) 2" MIN. ,,; .• ,�;, � 4' MAX, 1.75' —* EXTERIOR DOOR OPENING HEIGHT 96" MAX UNIT HEIGHT 100' EILOCKSIDE NFORCING CHANNEL 2" MIN. e � 4' MAX. • 7 ✓I 2" MIN. ... 4' MAX, 1.75" -+- 1.75" EXTERIOR v EXg619E ol jjf DOOR DOOR OPENING OPENING • HEIGHT 96" HEIGHT 96" MAX UNIT MAX HEIGHT UNIT ASTRAGAL ATTACHED TO HEIGHT G 100' • THE DOOR EDGE WITH #BX3/4 SCREWS (�)LOCKSIDE I A 1 12.53' O.G. MAX. REINFORCING CHANNEL 4 LOCKSIDE REINFORCING CHANNEL • EXTERIOR SEE SHEET 4. FOR SILL INSTALLATION 1.25' MIN EMBED 1.25' MN(. E.D. WOW 2.5' MILK EQ. CONCRETE • E.D. MORTISE LOCK SECTION 5-1 ISEE SHT.11 2' MIN. 4" MAX. 1.1 r-a DOOR I ^ 1 I I OPENING HEIGHT 96' MAX UNIT • HEIGHT 100" CHANNEL V 1 • 0 SEE SHEET 4. FOR SILL INSTALLATION MIN. E.D. WOW MIN, E.D. CONCRETE —FLOOR LATCHING DETAIL SURFACE VERTICAL ROD EXIT DEVICE / SEE SHEET 4. FOR SILL INSTALLATION 1.25' MIN EMBED 1.25' MIN. ED. WOOD 2.5' INN. ED.CONCRETE CYLINDRICAL LOCK SECTIONS B•2, B3. BA (SEE SHTA 2" MIN. 4' MAX. ROUGH CUTOUT IN HEAD 1' SQUARE t Y SEE SHEET 4. 1.25' MIN EMBED FOR SILL 1.25' MIN. ED. WOOD INSTALLATION E D' 2.W MIN. E.D. CONCRETE INACTIVE LEAF WITH IVES 361 R E V I S 1 0 N S LTR DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED A APPROVAL DWG YMF 05/20/07 F REVISED DWG YMF 06/02/08 G REVISED PER_dDBCCO YMF 02/06/09 H REVISED DWG YMF 03/18/09 J REVISED PER_MDBCCO YMF 04/06/10 K REVISED NAME JPD 11/01/13 L REVISED DWG JPD 02/01/15 M REVISED DWG JPD 05/05/15 N ENGINEER CHANGE LA 03/10/17 0 ADDRESS UPDATE SM 02/27/20 STRIKE SIDE 12 GA. REINFORCING CHANNEL WITH ASA CUTOUT I� INACTIVE DOOR LEAF r- INACTIVE LEAF ASA STRIKE PREP AND ASSEMBLY DETAIL 1.25- MIN EMBED 1,25' MIN, E.D. WOOD SURFACE BOLTS Z-ASTRAGAL WI7H ASA 2 S' MIN E.D. CONCRETE IN TOP AND BOTTOM STRIKE PREP. SECTIONS C-1. C-2, C3, CA RIM EXIT DEVICE (SEE SHT.1) NOTES: SECTKMFSB B-ii SEESHT.1 1. FOR MAXIMUM DOOR AND UNIT 2' MIN. OPENING SIZES SEE ELEVATION 1 4" MAX. SHEET 1 AND TABLE 1 ON SHEET 2. 2.SEE SHEET 4 & 15 FOR ANCHOR T+ INSTALLATION AND SHEETS 3, 4, 5, MIN BOn� i Tom_'" 6 & 15 FOR SILL INSTALLATION 1 1.75' — OPENING EXTERIOR HEIGHT 96" MAX UNIT HEIGHT 100' SHEET 4. SILL ALLATION 1.25' MIN. OD E.D. WO EA 25' MIN. E.D. CONCRETE CONCEALED VERTICAL FLOOR LATCHING DETAIL ROD EXIT DEVICE CONCEALED VERTICAL ROD SECTION B.6 (SEE SHT.11 EXIT DEVICE OLOCKSIDE SEE SHEET 4. ® TM?! — 1.26' MIN EMBED.• ".g r 1.25' MIN. E.D. WOOD 2.5' CONCRETE THREE-POINT LATCHING EXIT DEVICE. SECTIONS 8•9. B•10 (SEE SHT.1) D(( LATCH u�1 DETAILS AND SHEETS 15 & 16 FOR MULLION INSTALLATION. -7NRE5NIXQ THRES"" dF v .4 �'�' ` , Isla.• � I • ~S` Q BOTTOM STRU 6ROUTW INTO nx" -" S'(• T FLOOR LATCHING DETAIL FLOOR LATCHING DETAIL �• .• '`�%•�q�g ` SURFACE VERTICAL ROD CONCEALED VERTICAL_ ROD gI;D.E. `V EXIT DEVICE EXIT DEVICE CsR;aaQa+�``�� roH H>�R iRJ1QyHNO.2WO BEND RADIUS MANUFACTURING FiAACILITY- SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC STEELCRAFT 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET 9017 BLUE ASH ROAD -�- CARMEL, IN 46032 CINCINNATI, OH 45242 THIN ANGLE PROJECTION I TITLE: STEELCRAFT H SERIES DOUBLE FLUSH OUTSWING COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS WITH AND WITHOUT PANIC EXIT DEVICES YMF 05/20/07 VERTICAL CROSS SECTIONS FOR FLUSH DOUBLE DOORS. APPVL 1RFD07 10 JPD 10/12/07 SCALE: N TS I AU TOCAD SHEET 14 OF 17 awsr i ray M AA >�i�al�i�w«ii•'•iii�ii }�:�,.•.•..tl.�.�t�*.�. _ •ter •t %i i i *w j r•� rat. r1• AA (A) EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM BY ATLAS EPS DENSITY: 1.0 LBS/FT3 D SECTION DD—DD (D) HONEYCOMB KRAFT PAPER. BB Man va ■' t!!!•!•••!•f f ! f f f • ! • • • • • • • s • f • • BB (B) POLYISOCYANURATE (POLYURETHANE) BY ELLIOT CO. OF INDIANAPOLIS, IN DENSITY:2 LBS/FT3 SECTION EE—EE rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr .-rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrr+ -rrrrrrrrrrr ..rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr r rrrrrrrrr.—+ r r r r r r r r r r r rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr DEE rrrrrrrrrrr E rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr r rrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrr ---------- ------------ ----------- ----------- (E) TEMPERATURE RISE CORE MINERAL FIBER BOARD DENSITY:17f1.5 LBS/FT3 PYROPHIBIC SYSTEMS LTD PYROPHOBIC PSL—P250C-60 OR MARSHFIELD DOOR SYSTEMS CALCIUM SILICATE MINERAL CORE NOTES: 1. CORE MATERIAL SHOWN WITHOUT CUTOUTS FOR REINFORCEMENTS A .-SEE DETAIL'Vt' OR 'V2' SECTION CC -CC (C) STEEL STIFFENED HAT SHAPED SECTIONS SECTION FF—FF 1,5' MIN FF FF (F) EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM BY ATLAS EPS DENSITY.1.0 LB/FT3 OR POLYISOCYANU RATE (POLYURETHANE) BY ELLIOT CO. OF INDIANAPOLIS, IN. DENSITY.2 LBS/FT3 R E V I S I O N S LTR DESCRIPTION DATE A APPROVAL DWG JPD 02/03/14 DETAIL'V1' 22GA. HAT SHAPED —STIFFENERS SPOTWELDED 6" O.C. TO INSIDE OF B REVISED DWG JPD 02/01/15 ,av FACE SHEETS AND WELDED TOGETHER C REVISED DWG JPD 05/05/15 AT TOP AND BOTTOM .ego• D ENGINEER CHANGE LA 03/10/17 O ADDRESS UPDATE SM 02/27/20 SECTION CC —CC WELD AT JOINT CONTINUOUS DETAIL'V 2' 20GA. HAT SHAPED 2' MIN. 4 MAX. STIFFENERS SPOTWELDEO MIG—WELD BEAD 6" O.C. TO INSIDE OF ONE ALONG FACE FACE SHEET 80' SIDES AND BONDED TO THE 980# MIN LOAD OTHER FACE SHEET CAPACITY TO BE FULLY GROUTED WITH r� 2D00 PSI GROUT FOR SECTION CC —CC /' CONFIGURATION #10 HOLLOW METAL MULLION DOUBLE RABBETED SHOWN EXT. SEE TABLE BELOW FOR APPLICABLE ANCHOR TYPES AND REQUIREMENTS USE 2 MULLION BASE ANCHORS FOR 4' FACE MULLIONS USE I MULLION BASE ANCHOR FOR 2' FACE MULLIONS 0 `v' MULLION MULLION BASE BASE ANCHORS ANCHORS (2' FACE) (4' FACE) STEEL MULLION APPLICABLE TO ELEVATION 10 ONLY (SEE SHTA) MULLION BASE ANCHORS Anchor Embedment Edge Distance Conc. StraNth SPaci Quantity Eico 6116" Ultracon 2" 3.75' 3515 psi 3-319" Thru Base Anchor 2 per Base Anchor (2 for 2" Face 4 for 4" Face) Powers 318" Power -Bolt 2" 3000 psi Powers 318" Lok Bolt AS 1-1W Hilti 318" Kwik Bolt 3 1-5/B" Dewalt 3J8' Screw Bolt+ 2" BEND RADIUS J SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET CARMEL, IN 46032 APPROVED FIFE 1401 im�.sss,e MANUFACTURING FACILITY, STEELCRAFT 9017 BLUE ASH ROAD CINCINNATI, OH 45242 DATE WITHOUT PANIC EXIT DEVICES 02/03/14 DOOR CORE OPTIONS AND HOLLOW METAL AND HARDWARE MULLION INSTALLATION IRFD07 I NTS) AUTOCAD 15 of 17 29 IVES 698/U698 DOOR VIEWER APPLICATION LIMITED TO +/— 75 PSF DESIGN PRESSURE OR LESS #12-24 MACHINE i SCREWS STEEL BUTT HINGE IVES 5BB1/3CB1 STANLEY FBB179/1900 T HAGER BB1279 o 0 4.5" X 4.5" STD. WT. MIN. 4.5" .134" MIN. THICKNESS MIN. � (� Fy MIN. = 36ksi j VON DUPRIN MULLION . *COVER t 2.000\ oq 3.000 MULLION BODY .312 THK WALL A 500 GRDE STEEL HH9954 MULLION 4X 5 1SCRE MA' SCREWS Fy=120ks1 min. 1 DET61L 'C-1' 2X 1 A-20 MACHINVSCREWS TO MOUNT COVER STRIKE x EXT MULLION Q D A (499-F) STRIKE {■� STRIKE MOUNTED WITH 3 X #10-24 STEEL MACHINE SCREWS Fy=120 KSI MULLION FITTING 8620 STEEL BASE &HEAD Uw EDGE DISTANCE & O.C. SPACING SHWON FOR BASE FITTING INSTALLATION T�y11 1 MULLION BASE FITTING�j11" I QTY; 4 ANCHORS, SEE BELOW FOR ALLOWABLE OPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS MULLION EXPANSION ANCHOR NOTES: ANCHORS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN 3000 PSI CONCRETE (SEE ABOVE FOR SPACING REQUIREMENTS), ALLOWABLE ANCHOR TYPES ARE: 1/4" POWERS SMART DI+ EXPANSION ANCHORS WITH MIN 1" EMBEDMENT OR 1/4" HILTI KWIK BOLT 3 EXPANSION BOLTS WITH MIN 1-1/8" EMBEDMENT LTR A B C N 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 CONTINUOUS HINGE IVES 112HD & 224HD STANLEY 661 HD SELECT Sl "u^ PEMKO FN HAGER 7E ABH A24C ALUMINUM .110" MIN. STEEL CONTINUOUS IVES 600 .075 (14GA.) MIN. ll 1012 COLD ROLLED Fy MIN. 45ksi STAINLESS STEEL C( IVES 700, 700CS HAGER 790-900 MARKAR FM-300 & ABH A500 .075 (14GA.) MIN. TI 304 STAINLESS STEE 96" MAX. ry MIN. JIKSI CONTINUOUS HINGE NOTES: R E V I S 1 0 N S DESCRIPTION I DATE APPROVED APPROVAL DWGS. REVISED DWGS. REVISED DWGS. ENGINEER CHANGE ADDRESS UPDATE 11 /01 /13 02/01 /15 05/05/15 LA 03/10/17 SM 02/27/20 (15 MIN.) 12-243/4"FLAT HEAD UNDERCUT SELF DRILLING SCREW DOOR LEAF (15 MIN.) 12-24 X 1-3/8" FLAT HEAD UNDERCUT SELF DRILLING SCREW FRAME LEAF QUANTITY VARIES PER HINGE 1. QUANTITY OF SCREWS VARIES PER HINGE LENGTH, MANUFACTURER AND MODEL NUMBER 2. SCREW SPACING VARIES PER HINGE LENGTH, MANUFACTURER AND MODEL NUMBER 3. INSTALL HINGES PER THE MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS BEND RADIUS SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC 11819 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET -- CARMEL, IN 46032 RD ANGLE PROJECTION TITLE: STEELCRAFT H SERIES DOUBLE FLUSH OUTSMNG C 4 DATE PANIC EXIT DEVICES JPD 02/03/14 HINGE AND VIEWER OPTIONS NTS I AUTOCAD IN.) #10-24X 1/2" MIN. INE SCREW OR SELF NG EACH HINGE LEAF TITY VARIES PER HINGE N MANUFAtVF11I1441j X'CILITY: STEELCRAFT 9017 BLUE ASH ROAD CINCINNATI. OH 45242 0 SHT16OF17 WIRE OR T MASONRY AZ INTO GROUT FILLED Np CHOR FRAME AND BLOCK WALL UP TO 90 PSF 10' HD2 MAX. JAMB BASE ANCHOR INTO CONCRETE (3 KSI )EMKDMENTN 2' 96"X96" 24" O.C. MIN MAXIMUM DOOR MAX. POWERS R B as OPENING LO C 0 HL71HLC-FPM SLEEVE 7d 24' O.C. SIMPSON STRONG TIE SLEEVE -ALL MAX. OR JAMB BASE ANCHOR I 31W LAO BOLT tyr WELDED OR ADJUSTABLE) {- INTO (2) 2X WOOD SILL (S@".55) 24. O.C. MAX. REFER TO SILL INSTALLATION DETAIL 'TH' 1 AX •e" FRAME 2000 PSI MASONRY GROUT FILLED -[\ T ANCHOR- 3, ' MIN :o y u I- r-L•""' EXT. SHIM SPACE ",_SHIM SPACE 1/4' MAX. MASONRY BLOCK WALLS 1/4" MAX. CMU (C-90) 2000 PSI 1 GROUT FILLED AC1530.1 • 'M j±D3 T 17.6' O.C. 96"X96" MAX. MAXIMUM DOOR 4._ OPENING 17.6. O.C. MAX. 17.6' O.C. MAX. car + 17.V O.C. MAX. REFER TO SILL 17.8 O.C. INSTALLATION DETAIL 'TH' MAX. L, !B X 1-3/46' (4) TOTAL PER MAX. 5' EWE 2�__ DIST. �.`NNxNL - -' EXT, L*1W1OOD STUD WALLS SEE NOTE 1. WARE ANCHOR 03/I6' PL S'S, (21 PLACES • Q Q 1.75 ' 5/B' BRIGHT BASIC WARE 5.19, X 9.56' LLJ MASONRY T-ANCHOR Fy MIN-36 KSI WIRE MASONRY ANCHOR MASONRY B GA STEEL (0.048') WOOD STUD OR UNIVERSAL ANCHOR Fy MIN.-36 KSI Fullim MIN.-58 KSI T-ANCHOR lFy MIN.-36 KSI DZ EXISTING MAaQNRY ANCHOR (EM INTO CONCRETE WALL OR CMU UP TO 90 PSF 6' HDI OR HD2 MAX. f' oi- r• A.r.• J 21' D.C. .r. { MAX. •..i • 6' X 7, a. OR MAX .'.s, li y• OPENING (SEE SHT.1) ' 21' O.C. MAX. REFER TO SILL 21' O h. + XC. fMSTALLAT' MA 'TH' DETAIL 6' j 2' MIN. EMBEDMENT MAX' 2" MIN, EMBEDMENT T- 3.125" MIN. . 3.125' MIN. EDGE EDGE DISTANCE �`_ ,r ., y. i DISTANCE r 3.125" MIN. t 3.125 MIN. EDGE 0" s EDGE ® it 1■� c• • • ••r L I jr 12.5' O.C.M/ 6' XOR 7' 12.5' O+- 8' X 8' 12.5' O.C.MI O 0 OPENING 4-- (SEE SHT.1) 12.5' OIG,MI 12.5' O.C.MI REFER TO SILL 12.5" O.0 M/Ml INSTALLATION j- DETAIL 'TH' 12.5" O.C.MA J_ wnnn -Ti in wei i c 6" SEE NOTE 1. MAX. 3•-13'MIN, 1 O EDGE DISTANCE DISTANCE a• DISTANCE I LAG SCREW MIN. 2 OOPs1 -L SHIM SPACE J EXTERIOR\3/e H GROUT FILLED \SHIM SPACE 1/4" MAX. W/3" MIN. EMBEDMENT (C-90) CMU 1/4" MAX. MIN, 3000Pa1 CONCRETE EX151ING MASONRY ANCHOR (EM TYPES BLOCK WALL TYPICAL -� 00.375" WITH 2' MIN. EMBEDMENT �p 00.375' WITH 2" MIN. POWERS POWER BOLT, I' EMBEDMENT HILTI HLC-FPH POWERS LOK BOLT AS, SLEEVE ANCHOR IN CMU HILTI HLC-FPH SLEEVE ANCHOR, OR SIMPSON STRONG TIE SLEEVE ALL IN CONCRETE LOCK -IN EMA-U ANCHOR WELD -IN 6' MAX. H'33Ak '- HNA MAX MAk� A I4WX on MAX 6' MAX. tft' G►2 STEEL STUD ANCHOR UP TO 90 PSF fHD3 r MAX. 96"X96" 21" O.C. MAXIMUM DOOR MAX. OPENING 21' O.C. MAX. 21"D.C. MAX. REFER TO SILL 21' O.C. INSTALLATION MAX. TH DETAIL '' L � 2 SMS (GR 5) PER ANCHOR EX' J MAX KT. *STEEL STUD WALLS *STEEL STUD WALLS. SEE NOTE 1. SEE NOTE 1. Fy MIN.-36 KSI UNIVERSAL STEEL STUD ANCHOR ANCHOR WELD -IN OR LOCK -IN WELD -IN OR LOCK -IN "TOM -rmw ~ 4' MAX. SEE CORRESPONDING MULLION INSTALLATION OR@ offalM BUIU X 1-3/4" ITN ON SHTS. 15 m 16 BUILEX/REDHEAD TAPCON DNST L LA OR /14 X 1-3/4' WOOD SILL INSTALLATION DOUBLE OUiSWING DOORS SCREW AS REWIRED ALSO SEE SHEETS 3 & 4 EXTERIOR 1/4' IL 1-3/4" 17WCONCRETE OR BUILEX/REDHEADAD WOOD SILL TAPCON OR-41.25" MIN. EDGE 014 X 1-3/4" WOOD DISTANCE (E.D.) SCREW 1.25" MIN. INTO WOOD (SG-.55) EMBEDMENT 2.5" MIN. EDGE DETAIL'TH' DISTANCE (E.D. SILL INSTALLATION SIDE VIEW INTO CONCRETE (3KSI MIN.) NOTES: 1.(+)WOOD OR (*)STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS OF WOOD AND STEEL -STUD WALLS MUST BE DESIGNED TO CARRY AT LEAST 312 #/FT. LOAD FOR ASSEMBLIES RATED W5 PSF, AND 375#/FT. FOR ASSEMBLIES RATED 0 90 PSF, WHICH SHOULD BE VERIFIED BY THE APPROPRIATE OFFICIAL. 2.NUMBER OF ANCHORS FOR VARIOUS OPENING HEIGHTS IS LIMITED BY MAXIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN ANCHORS, SHOWN ON THIS SHEET. 3.SEAL ALL JOINTS WHERE FRAME MEETS WALL WITH BUTYL RUBBER OR 10OX SILICONE CAULK. 4.INSTALL THRESHOLD INTO BEAD OF BUTYL RUBBER OR 10OX SILICONE CAULK FULL LENGTH OF SILL BEND RADIUS JPD R E V I S I❑ N S LTR DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED A APPROVAL DWG JPD 05/05/15 N ENGINEER CHANGE LA 02/23/17 0 ADDRESS UPDATE SM 02/27/20 CONCRETE CONCRETE LINTEL SHOWN LINTEL SHOWN FRAME HEAD MAY VARY PWALL MAY VARY PEWALL R FILLED / FILLED W 2000 -ERR ;. 7• �`;'+ f:' PSI GROUT CONSTRUCTIONS ;'b'r: k - ' CON TRUCTION +: }° ACI 530.1 ~ '• •e `' •' 2' OR 4' FACE . GROUT FILLED NI W • { y" W = 2' FACE _ 0 T GROUT[WITH a i EXTERIOR L� EXTERIOR 5 WOOD STUD LINTEL SHOWN MAY ALSO BE STEEL STUD -�` 2' FACE -WITHOUT GROUT CONSTRUCTION � III I I f of f// o LLJ L� EXTERIOR '" £L •ON ; HD3 -- FRAME HEAD SECTION Af'. m tlp11 .2•sr• MANUFACTURING FACILITY, SCHLAGE LOCK COMPANY, LLC 11619 N. PENNSYLVANIA STREET STEELCRAFT BLUE ASH ROAD �- CARMEL, IN 46032 CINCINNATI, OH 45242 CIN JECTION TITLE: STEELCRAFT H SERIES DOUBLE FLUSH OUTSWING WITHOUT PANIC EXIT DEVICES COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS WITH AND DATE 05/MOY ANCHOR DETAILS / INSTALLATION FOR ASSEMBLIES WITH A DESIGN CONDITIONS PRESSURE RATING GREATER THAN 75 PSF UP TO AND INCLUDING 90 PSF SIZE FLAT DWG NO. REV IRFD07 p 1o/tei07 SCALE' N T S A U T D C A D SHEET 17 OF 17 Adventhealth Zephyrhills: Operating Room 5 - Cystoscopy Client Code/File Number: 23/100046-127-1 Construction Documents AHCA Requirements VOLUME 4 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No. 042.21-177.01 FL Reg: AA-26003049 Table of Contents VOLUME 4 — AHCA REQUIREMENTS AdventHealth Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy - AHCA_PHAMA AdventHealth Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy - AHCA _Functional Program AdventHealth Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy - AHCA _Design ICRA AdventHealth Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy - AHCA_ Construction ICRA AdventHealth Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy - AHCA_ Design Considerations for Accommodation of Patients of Size 042.21-177.01 AdventHealth Zephyrhills: Operating Room #5 - Cystoscopy 3/17/2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS -CD Table of Contents - 1 Alavent HealtUL AdventHealth: Zephyrhilis Cystoscopy Operating Room #5 AHCA Client Code/File-Project Number: 23/100046-127-1 General Note: *1.2-4.3 Patient Handling and Movement Assessment (PHAMA) 1.2-4.3.1 General 1.2-4.3.1.1 PHAMA requirement (1) The governing body of the hospital shall provide the project design team with a PHAMA that addresses the specific patient handling and movement needs of all areas affected by a project. Roth the PHAMA and the functional program have been provided to the design team. (2) The governing body shall incorporate the findings and recommendations of the PHAMA into the safety risk assessment. This process has been followed. 1.2-4.3.1.2 Design recommendations (1) PHAMA results and recommendations shall be specific to each patient care area where patient handling and movement occur. PHAMA consideration has been included for the following areas within the 2nd floor of the Advent Health Zephyrhills facility: Operating Room #5 (2) The findings and recommendations of the PHAMA shall include consideration of the patient care requirements for all patients, including patients of size. This project has not been developed in consideration of patients of size. See Statement for the Accommodation of Patients of Size. This PHAMA has not been developed in consideration of patients of size. Advent Health: Zephyrhills—Cystascopy Operating Room #5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.: 042-21-177,01 Page 1 of 7 AHCA No_:23/100046-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review AdventHealth 1.2-4.3.2 Patient Handling and Movement Elements for the Safety Risk Assessment 1.2-4.3.2.1 Phase 1: Patient handling and movement needs assessment. Evaluation of patient handling and movement needs shall include at minimum the following considerations: (1) Patient handling, movement, and mobility equipment recommendations based on the following: (a) Characteristics of projected patient populations Patient population consists of inpatients outpatients. Patient will be non - ambulatory while within operating room. (b) Types of high -risk patient handling and movement tasks to be performed Primary patient population is not high -risk. When high -risk patients are accommodated, staff will escort patient at all times. The patient is never left unattended. Medical gases, medication station, and other patient safety procedures are available when needed. (c) Knowledge of specific technology to enable physical activity by patients and reduce risk for each patient handling and movement task No technology has been considered. Staff will receive training on assisting in the movement of patients without this technology. (d) Architectural factors that interfere with use of patient handling equipment or impede mobility No architectural factors that interfere with mobility have been noted. (2) Types of patient handling and movement equipment to be used (e.g., manual or power - assisted fixed ceiling or wall -mounted lifts, manual or power -assisted floor -based sling or sit -to -stand lifts, electric height -adjustable beds, or a combination thereof) This project is a change out of existing cystoscopy equipment within an existing operating room. Patient handling and movement procedures within the department are already in place and shall remain. Patients shall be transported to the operating room via stretcher or gurney. (3) quantity of each type of patient handling and movement equipment needed for each area under consideration Such equipment is already within the facility. Increased patient load has been considered. (4) Required weight -carrying capacities This project has not been designed in consideration of patients of size / bariatric patients. Advent Health: Zephyrhills—Cystoscopy Operating Room 45 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.: 042-21-177.01 Page 2 of 7 AHCA No.: 23/100046-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review 6P M� UUN'TV 02'4�� (5) Locations/rooms/areas where patient handling, movement, and mobility equipment will be used, with installation requirements (if fixed) and storage requirements Patient handling, movement, and mobility equipment are not part of this project. Storage for walkers, wheelchairs, stretchers, etc. is existing. 1.2-4.3.2.2 Phase 2: Design considerations. The impact of patient handling and movement needs on building design shall be addressed in the PHAMA, including consideration of the patient care needs of all patients, including patients of size. These design considerations shall incorporate results from the Phase 1 assessment and shall include, at minimum, the following: (1) Structural considerations to accommodate current and/or future used of fixed equipment that supports patient handling and movement This project has not been developed in consideration of patients of size. See Statement for the Accommodation of Patients of Size. There is no fixed equipment. (2) Electrical and mechanical considerations for current and future use and/or installation of patient handling and movement equipment and associated storage and charging areas New or fixed patient handling equipment is not a consideration in this project. (3) Adequate space for provision of patient care and for unhindered maneuvering of patient handling and movement equipment. For clearance requirements to accommodate patients of size, see Section 2.1-2.3.2 (Accommodations for Care of Patients of Size — Patient Room). Existing room sizes are not to be altered. Existing spaces can accommodate the needs of the patients and support by doctors, nurses and staff. No special equipment will be used. (4) Destination points for patient ambulation transfers, and transport This project is a change out of existing cystoscopy equipment within an existing operating room. Patient handling and movement procedures within the department are already in place and shall remain. Patients shall be transported to the operating room via stretcher or gurney. Existing transfer points shall remain the same after completion of this project. (5) Sizes and types of door openings through which patient handling and movement equipment and accompanying staff must pass. See Section 2.1-2.3.10.2 (Special Design Element for Spaces for Care of Patients of Size —Door openings) for additional requirements This project is not designed for patients of size. No doors are included in this project. Advent Health: Zephyrhills — Cystosoopy Operating Room M5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.: 042-21-177-01 Page 3 of 7 AHCA No.: 23/100046-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review (6) Types of floor surfaces and transitions needed to facilitate safe and effective use of patient handling and movement equipment Finish floor work is minimal. Mirror patching is included. All flooring materials are coplanar with little need for vertical transitions. (7) Coordination of patient handling and movement equipment installations with building mechanical, electrical, communication, and life safety systems Installation of patient handling equipment is not a consideration in this project. (8) Storage space requirements and locations available or to be provided Storage space is not included in this project. Any pertinent storage space is existing and located adjacent to Operating Room #5. (9) Impact of the installation and use of patient handling and movement equipment on aesthetic characteristics of the environment of care Installation of patient handling and movement equipment is not part of this project. (10) Impact of the installation and use of patient -handling and movement equipment on the aesthetics of the patient care space installation of patient handling and movement equipment is not part of this project. (11) Infection control risk mitigation recommendations The equipment and procedures used by the department are existing. Any Infection Control Risk Mitigation Requirements are also existing. *1.2-4.4 fall Prevention Assessment *1.2-4.4.1 Fall Prevention Elements of the Safety Risk Assessment 1.2-4.4.1.1 Fall -risk locations. The SRA report shall identify fall -risk locations for a new construction or renovation project. This project is a change out of existing equipment with an existing operating room. This project's SRA Team has not identified specific at -risk fall locations included in project area. *1.2-4.4.1.2 Design features. The SRA team shall identify required patient fall prevention design features for the identified at -risk locations. See Section 2.1-7 (Common Elements for Hospitals —Design and Construction Requirements). This project is a change out of existing equipment with an existing operating room. This project's SRA Team has not identified specific at -risk fall locations included in project area. Advent Health: Zephyrhills — Cystoscopy Operating Room #5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.. 042-21-177.01 Page 4 of 7 AHCA No.: 23/100046-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review 6r 1.2-4.4.2 Fall Prevention Response 1.2-4.4.2.1 The design team shall incorporate required patient fall prevention design features in the project design documents. This project is a change out of existing equipment with an existing operating room. This project's SRA Team has not identified specific at -risk fall locations included in project area. 1.2-4.4.2.2 For renovation projects, documentation shall describe the specific fall risk mitigation methods to be used in and around construction zones and shall, at minimum, address the following: (1) Standards for barriers and other protective measures required to protect adjacent areas and susceptible patients from clutter and construction dust on flooring This project is separated from other patients care areas by the 1HR fire rated partition with a 1-hour fire rated door with closer and construction ante room requiring construction staff be vacuumed using a HEPA vacuum or construction staff are required to wear cloth or paper coveralls and shoe covers that are removed each time they leave work site. Additionally, construction staff are required to sweep / mop public areas during construction to minimize dust from foot traffic to and from the construction area. Additionally, negative air machines with HEPA equipped filters will be utilized in containing dust to within the project site. See Construction ICRA (2) Protection from demolition debris on flooring Demolition debris is to be brought from the construction area in covered cart to minimize dust and debris from falling out of the container. Additionally, construction debris is to fit within the covered cart and not extend past the cart top edges. *1.2-4,5 Medication Safety Assessment *1.2-4.5.1 Medication Safety Elements of the Safety Risk Assessment Medication safety zones are existing in the department and will not be altered in this project. *1.2-4.5.1.1 Number and location of medication safety zones. The governing body shall identify the number and location of medication safety zones for the project and include them in the SRA report. 1.2-4.5.2 Medication Safety Response The design team shall incorporate the required medication safety design features in the project design documents. Medication safety zones are existing in the department and will not be altered in this project. Advent Huth: Zephyrhills—Cystoscopy Operating Room p5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.: 042-21-177.01 Page 5 of 7 ANCA No 2 3/10004 6-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review AaventHealth *1.2-4.6 Behavioral and Mental Health Risk (Psychiatric Patient Injury and Suicide Prevention) Assessment 1.2-4.6.1 Behavioral and Mental Health Elements of the Safety Risk Assessment The SRA report shall identify areas where patients at risk of mental health injury and suicide will be served. This project has not been designed in consideration of behavioral and mental health patients. 1.2-4.6.2 Behavioral and Mental Health Response 1.2-4.6.2.1 The SRA team shall identify mitigating features for the identified at -risk locations. This project has not been designed in consideration of behavioral and mental health patients. 1.2-4.6.2.2 The design of behavioral and mental health patient care settings shall address the need for a safe treatment environment for those who may present unique challenges and risks as a result of their mental condition. (1) This patient environment shall be designed to protect the privacy, dignity, and health of patients and address the potential risks related to patient elopement and harm to self, others, and the environment. (2) The design of behavioral/mental health patient areas shall accommodate the need for clinical and security resources. *1.2-4.7 Patient Immobility Assessment Patient immobility risk in patient care areas shall be assessed to identify design factors that discourage patient mobility and determine how to mitigate their contribution to sedentary patient treatment and behavior. This project is a diagnostic testing and treatment area and not a nursing unit. This department is not a "length of stay" type department. Thus, patients are not in this department long enough to be classified as sedentary. *1.2-4.8 Security Risk Assessment 1.2-4.8.1 Project Security Plan For new construction or renovation projects, a security plan shall be developed that addresses risks from the environment, function of the project space, and the construction process. This plan shall include the following: Advent Health: Zephyrhills—Cystoscopy Operating Room #5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.: 042-21-177.01 Page 6 of 7 AHCA No.: 23/100046.127.1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review a 1.2-4.8.1.1 A description of the impact of demolition and phasing on existing site functions and any existing protection strategies and design interventions. This project is a renovation of existing interior space within the main hospital. The existing function of the area to be renovated will be vacated prior to construction commencing. As such, construction will be limited primarily to within this area and not affect existing site functions until necessary. Any shut -downs or service disruption to operation shall be coordinated and scheduled with the facility and department head 1.2-4.8.1.2 An assessment of the need for temporary security barriers such as fencing and security systems, including intrusion detection and video surveillance systems The area being renovated will not need any fencing or security other than the required ICRA barriers and construction ante room which will be locked after hours. The project area will be under the existing hospital security and surveillance protocols The project area is within a restricted access area of the hospital. No patients — ambulatory or non -ambulatory —will be left unattended. 1.2-4.8.1.3 A schedule for installation of security systems for completion during move -in activities to allow for protection of the facility and equipment This project will be under the existing hospital security protocols. Therefore, a separate security system for the urology suite renovation is not part of this project's scope. 1.2-4.8.2 Security Elements of the Safety Risk Assessment *1.2-4.8.2.1 Design features. Design features shall address identified security risks specific to the patient population to be served and environmental factors related to the project scope. No security risks were identified. Respectfully submitted, Signature Name (Printed) Title Advent Health: Zephyrhills—Cystoscopy Operating Room #5 March 17, 2021 COG Project No.: 042-21-177.01 Page 7 of 7 AHCA No.:23/100046.127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review FUNCTIONAL PROGRAM As required by the "FGI 2018 Guidelines for Design and Construction of Healthcare Facilities" Planning, Design Construction and Commissioning (Chapter 1.2) 1.2-2 Functional Program The provisions of Chapter 1.2 shall generally apply to this project. This document has been developed based on the 2018 "Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilitates," which is also referred to as "the Guidelines." 1.2-2.1 General *1.2-2.1.1 Functional Program Purpose The primary purpose of the functional program shall be to communicate the owner's intent for the project to the designers of record as a basis of design at the initiation of the project. 1.2-2.1.1.1 The functional program shall be used to determine the application of the Guidelines when developing facility projects. 1.2-2.1.1.2 The facility shall retain the functional program with other design data to facilitate future alterations, additions, and program changes. 1.2-2.1.2 Functional Program Requirement *1.2-2.1.2.1 The governing body shall be responsible for having a functional program developed, documented and updated. 1.2-2.1.2.2 A functional program shall be developed for new construction, major renovations, and projects that change the functional use of any hospital space. This project is a single phase renovation project of an existing Operating Room for Cystoscopy, primarily the installation of a new Cystoscopy table. This project does not include wall demolition only minor ceiling demolition and rework for new lighting and Cystoscopy bed installation and control table in an existing operating room #5. No structural work in scope, aside from equipment support i.e. unistrut. A functional program shall be developed per the requirements below. (1)The functional program shall be completed as part of the project planning phase as updated, as needed, throughout the design and construction phases. (2) Following its approval, the functional program shall serve as the basis for the project design and construction documents. Advent Health. Zephyrhills—Cystoswpy Operating Room #5 March 17, 2021 COG Project No.: 042-21-177.01 Page 1 of 8 AHCA No.: 23/100046-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review 1.2-2.1.3 Nomenclature in the Functional Program 1.2-2.1.3.1 The names for spaces and departments used in the functional program shall be consistent with those used in the Guidelines for Design and Construction of Hospitals. If acronyms are used, they shall be clearly defined. 1.2-2.1.3.2 The names and spaces indicated in the functional program also shall be consistent with those used on submitted floor plans. 1.2-2.2 Functional Program Content The functional program for a project shall include the following: 1.2-2.2.1 Functional Program Executive Summary An executive summary of the key elements of the functional program shall be provided and, at minimum, shall include the information outlined in Section 1.2-2.2 (Functional Program Content) in a project narrative. This project is a single phase renovation project of an existing operating room for cystoscopy, primarily the installation of a new cystoscopy table. This project does not include wall demolition only minor ceiling demolition and rework for new lighting and cystoscopy bed installation and control table in an existing operating room #5. No structural work in scope. A functional program shall be developed per the requirements below. The modified operating room will be generally consisting of the following program elements: 0 Operating Room #5 1.2-2.2.2 Purpose of the Project Services to be provided, expanded, or eliminated by the proposed project shall be described. This project is being constructed to provide modified cystoscopy services within the main hospital to the patient population. The existing operating room is in need of updated cystoscopy equipment and the renovation of the existing operating room will provide updated services within the hospital. 1.2-2.2.3 Project Type and Size 1.2-2.2.3.1 The type of hospital(s) proposed for the project shall be identified as defined by the Guidelines. This project will reside on the second floor of an existing space in an existing 1-2 occupancy. Advent Health: Zephyrhills—Cystoscopy Operating Room #5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.: 042-21-177.01 Page 2 of B AHCA No.:23/100046.127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review a 1.2-2.2.3.2 Project size in square footage (new construction and/or renovation) and number of stories shall be provided. The facility is an existing 3 story hospital. The hospital is on a sloped site and therefore, includes a "Ground" floor, first floor, and second floor. This project will reside on the second floor within an existing space. The existing operating room to be renovated is approximately 400 SF of interior space. 1.2-2.2.4 Construction Type/ Occupancy and Building Systems 1.2-2.2.4.1 New construction. If the proposed project is new construction that is not dependent on or attached to an existing structure, the following shall be included: Project does not include new construction not attached to existing structure. (1) A description of construction type(s) for the proposed project (2) A description of proposed occupancy(ies) and, if applicable, existing occupancy(ies) 1.2-2.2.4.2 Renovation. For a project that is a renovation of, or addition to, an existing building, the following shall he included in the project narrative: (1) A description of the existing construction type and construction type for any proposed renovations or additions. (2) A general description of existing engineering systems serving the area of the building affected by the proposed project. 1.2-2.2.5 Project Components and Scope 1.2-2.2.5.1 The Clinical and support areas affected by the project shall be identified. The existing operating room will be renovated and upgraded. 1.2-2.2.5.2 The services required for the completed project to function as intended shall be described. The services required for the completed project to function as intended shall be to remain, as this project is a renovation to an existing operating room. There will be no change in services required for the completed project to function as intended.. *1.2-2.2.6 Indirect Support Functions increased (or decreased) demands, workloads, staffing requirements, etc., imposed on support functions affected by the project shall be described. The project will have minimal, if any, increased (or decreased) demands, workloads, staffing requirements, etc, imposed on support functions. Advent Heatth: Zephyrhills—Cystoscopy Opereting Room t5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.: 042-21.1.77,01 Page 3 of 8 AHCA No. 23/100046-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review 1.2-2.2.7 Operation Requirements The operational requirements, which include but are not limited to the following, shall be described: 1.2-2.2.7.1 Projected operational use for project components The projected operational use for the space/s in this project includes surgical and cystoscopy services within an operating room. 1.2-2.2.7.2 Relevant operational circulation patterns, including movement of staff, patients and their companions, members of the public, and materials and equipment Relevant operational circulation patterns, including movement of staff, patients and their companions, members of the public, and materials and equipment shall be minimally impacted. 1.2-2.2.7.3 Departmental operational relationships and required adjacencies This shall be described below and included in the Construction ICRA. 2.2-3 Diagnostic and Treatment Facilities *2.2-3.3.3 Operating Rooms 2.2-3.3.3.1 General *(1) Application. This section shall apply to rooms designated for the performance of invasive procedures as defined in the glossary. (2) The operating room shall meet the requirements of a restricted area. *2.2-3.3.3.2 space requirements (1) Operating room (a) Area. Each operating room shall have a minimum clear floor area of 400 square feet (37.20 square meters). The operating room in which the project is proposed in an existing operating room currently. The square footage of the existing operating room will not change. The existing operating room meets minimum clear floor area requirements. Advent Health: Tephyrhills—CystoscopyOperating Room #5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.: 042.21-177.01 Page 4 of 8 AHCA No.: 23/10DO46.127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review (b) Clearances. The following minimum clearances shall be provided around the operating table, gurney, or procedural chair: (i) 8 feet 6 inches (2.59 meters) on each side The operating room in which the project is proposed in an existing operating room currently. The square footage of the existing operating room will not change. The existing operating room meets minimum clear floor area requirements. (ii) 6 feet (1.83 meters) at the head. This dimension shall result in an anesthesia work zone with a clear floor area of 6 feet x 8 feet (1.83 meters x 2.4 meters). The operating room in which the project is proposed in an existing operating room currently. The square footage of the existing operating room will not change. The existing operating room meets minimum clear floor area requirements. (iii) 7 feet (2.13 meters) at the foot. This project is a change out of an existing cystoscopy. The new equipment will be installed in the same location as existing. The required clearances will be met. (c) An operating room used for cesarean and other delivery procedures shall meet the requirements in Section 2.2-2.9.11.1 (Cesarean delivery room.) This operating room is not intended for Cesarean and other delivery procedures. *(2) Operating room for image -guided surgery using portable imaging equipment or surgical procedures that require additional personnel and/or large equipment. (a) An operating room of this type shall: (i) Be sized to accommodate the personnel and equipment planned to be in the room during procedures. This cystoscopy operating room shall be sized to accommodate the personnel and equipment planned to be in the room during procedures. Advent Health: Zephyrhills—Cystoscopy Operating Room f#5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.: 042-21-177.01 Page 5 of 8 AHCA No: 23/100046-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review (ii) Have a minimum clear floor area of 600 square feet (55.74 square meters) with a minimum clear dimension of 20 feet (6.10 meters) The project is a renovation and change out of existing cystoscopy equipment within of an existing operating room. This project does not include wall demolition with only minor ceiling demolition. There will be rework for new lighting and cystoscopy bed installation and control table in existing operating room. Existing operating room meets minimum clearance floor requirements. (b) Where renovation work is undertaken and it is not possible to meet the above minimum standards, these rooms shall have a minimum clear floor area of 500 square feet (46.50 square meters) with a minimum clear dimension of 20 feet (6.10 meters). The project is a renovation and change out of existing cystoscopy equipment within of an existing operating room. This project does not include wall demolition with only minor ceiling demolition. There will be rework for new lighting and cystoscopy bed installation and control table in existing operating room. Existing operating room meets minimum clearance floor requirements (3) Fixed encroachments into the minimum clear floor area. Fixed encroachments shall be permitted to be included when determining the minimum clear floor area for an operating room as long as: (a) There are no encroachments into the sterile field. (b) The encroachments do not extend more than 12 inches (30.5 centimeters) into the minimum clear floor area outside the sterile field. (c) The encroachment width along each wall does not exceed 10 percent of the length of that wall. The project is a renovation and change out of existing cystoscopy equipment within of an existing operating room. This project does not include wall demolition with only minor ceiling demolition. There will be rework for new lighting and cystoscopy bed installation and control table in existing operating room. Existing operating room meets minimum clearance floor requirements. Advent Health; Zephyrhills—Cystoscopy Operating Room N5 March 17, 2021, CDG Project No.: 042-21-177,01 Page 6 of 8 AHCA No,: 23/10O046-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review r 2.2-3.3.3.3 Documentation area (1) Accommodations for written and/or electronic documentation shall be provided. (2) Where a built-in feature is provided for documentation, it shall allow for direct observation of the patient. Tnis project is a renovation and change out of an existing cystoscopy equipment within an existing operating room. Provisions for written and / or electronic documentation are not included as part of this project and are existing within the space and / or department. 2.2-3.3.3.4 Image viewers. Medical image viewers (e.g., x-ray film or digital) shall be provided. Medical image viewers (e.g., x-ray film or digital) shall be provided as necessary for Cystoscopy. 2.2-3.3.3.5 Other design requirements (1) Electrical receptacles. See Table 2.1-1(Electrical Receptacles for Patient Care Areas in Hospitals) for requirements. This project is a renovation and change out of an existing cystoscopy equipment within an existing operating room. (2) Medical gas outlets. See Table 2.1-3 (Station Outlets for Oxygen, Vacuum, Medical Air, and Instrument Air Systems in Hospitals) for requirements. This project is a renovation and change out of an existing cystoscopy equipment within an existing operating room (3) Communications systems (a) All operating rooms shall be equipped with an emergency communication system that incorporates push activation of an emergency call switch. This project is a renovation and change out of an existing cystoscopy equipment within an existing operating room (b) Each operating room shall have a system for emergency communication with the surgery department control station. This project is a renovation and change out of an existing cystoscopy equipment within an existing operating room. Advent HeaRh: Zephyrhills—Gystoscopy Operating Room #5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.: 042-21-177.01 Page 7 of 8 AHCA No.:23/100046-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review (c) For nurse call requirements, see Table 2.1-2 (Locations for Nurse Call Devices in Hospitals). This project is a renovation and change out of an existing cystoscopy equipment within an existing operating room. *2.2-3.3.3.6 Equipment storage rooms for operating rooms that require additional equipment. Where open-heart or complex orthopedic and neurosurgical surgery is performed, equipment storage rooms shall be provided in the semi -restricted area of the surgery department for storage of the large equipment used to support these procedures. The project is a renovation project of an existing operating room for Cystoscopy- All procedures shall pertain to Cystoscopy procedures, operations, and diagnostics. Equipment storage rooms are existing within the department as necessary. Respectfully submitte Signatur Name (Printed) � i D 1 rec t_ r Title Advent Health. Uphyrhills—Cystoscopy Operating Room #5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.: 042-21.177.01 Page 8 of 8 AHCA No.. 23/100046-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review AdventHealth: Zephyrhills Cystoscopy Operating Room #5 AHCA Client Code/File-Project Number: 23/100046-127-1 *1.2-4.2 Infection Control Risk Assessment (ICRA) The infection control risk assessment is a multidisciplinary, documented assessment process intended to proactively identify and mitigate risks from infection that could occur during construction activities. This process identifies and considers the patient population at risk, the nature and scope of the project, and the functional program of the health care facility. The ICRA determines the potential risk of transmission of various air- and waterborne biological contaminants in the facility. 1.2-4.2.1 General 1.2-4.2.1.1 ICRA requirement. For a hospital project to support safe designs, HVAC/plumbing systems, and surface and furnishing material selections, and infection control risk assessment shall be a part of integrated facility planning, design, construction, and commissioning activities and shall be incorporated into the safety assessment. The ICRA development was considered within the design of the project criteria. 1.2-4.2.1.2 ICRA recommendations. Based on the results of the initial stage of the ICRA, the governing body shall provide the following recommendations for incorporation into the safety risk assessment: (1) Design recommendations generated by the ICRA Recommendations, as appropriate, were made. (2) Infection control risk mitigation recommendations (ICRMRs). See Section 1.2-4.2.3.1 (Infection control risk mitigation recommendations). Recommendations, as appropriate, were made. 1.2-4.2.2 ICRA Considerations At minimum, the ICRA shall address the following: 1.2-4.2.2.1 Design elements. See Table 1.2-2 (Infection Control Risk Assessment Design Considerations) for cross-references to more information. (1) The number, location, and type of airborne infection isolation (All) and protective environment (PE) rooms shall be determined by the ICRA where these rooms are required in the facility type chapters in the Guidelines. This project does not include A.I.I. environments. These types of spaces are accommodated elsewhere in the facility. Advent Health: Zephyrhills—Cysty Operating Room #5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No., 042-21-177.01 Page 1 of 5 AHCA No.: 23/100046-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review (2) Special heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning (HVAC) needs required to accommodate the services (e.g., surgical suites, All/PE rooms, laboratories, pharmacies, areas with local exhaust systems for hazardous agents, and other special areas) performed in spaces included in or affected by the project shall be addressed in the ICRA. Project ventilation requirements have been accommodated in the design by a Florida licensed professional engineer. (3) Water/plumbing systems (a) The minimum number, location, and type of plumbed hand -washing stations, hand sanitation dispensers, and emergency first -aid equipment (e.g., eyewash stations and deluge showers) are identified in the facility chapters in the Guidelines. The need for additional fixtures shall be addressed in the ICRA. Project plumbing requirements have been accommodated in the design by a Florida licensed professional engineer. The number of hand -washing stations, hand sanitation dispensers, and emergency first -aid equipment has been approved by the facility. (b) The ICRA shall include an assessment of the risk from transmissible waterborne pathogens and establish strategies to mitigate the risk. Project plumbing requirements have been accommodated in the design by a Florida licensed professional engineer (4) Characteristics related to infection prevention for selection of materials for surfaces and furnishings This project is a change out of existing cystoscopy equipment within an existing operating room. No new finish work is included in this project. Minor patching is included to match existing finishes. 1.2-4.2.2.2 Construction elements. When conducting the ICRA and developing infection control risk mitigation recommendations (see Section 1.2-4.2.3) for building and site areas anticipated to be affected by construction, the following shall be addressed: (1) The impact of disrupting essential services to patients and employees The path of material and construction staff movement has been designed to have the least impact on patient care areas and high -risk patients. (2) The specific hazards and protection levels for each designated area Primary access for construction is through the closest exterior door, which is not the main entrance of the hospital. Advent Health: Zephythills—Cystoscopy Operating Room #5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.: 042-21-177.01 Page 2 of 5 AHCA No.: 23/100046-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review (3) Location of patients according to their susceptibility to infection and the definition of risks to each The location of patients will not be displaced as a result of this construction. At various, minimal times, the existing 8' corridor may be reduced to 6'-0" wide with the implementation of an ICRA/construction —type barrier. (4) The impact of movement of debris, traffic flow, spill cleanup, and testing and certification of installed systems Primary access for construction is through the closest exterior door, which is not the main entrance of the hospital. (S) Assessment of external as well as internal construction activities No external construction is included in this project. Any disturbances from duct modifications on the interior spaces to be coordinated with the facility to limit disturbance to patients. (6) Location of known hazards This project does not contain known hazards. 1.2-4.2.3 Infection Control Risk Mitigation *1.2-4.2.3.1 Infection control risk mitigation recommendations (ICRMRs). These written plans shall describe the specific methods by which transmission of airborne and waterborne biological contaminants will be avoided during construction as well as during commissioning when HVAC and plumbing systems and equipment (e.g., ice machines, steam sterilization systems) are started/restarted. 1.2-4.2.3.31CRMR content. ICRMRs shall, at minimum, indicate how the following issues will be addressed during construction: (1) Patient proximity to construction activities and potential need for patient relocation This project does not create the need to relocate patient population. (2) Standards for barriers and other protective measures required to protect adjacent areas and susceptible patients from airborne contaminants See construction ICRA for protective measures during construction. Construction will not interfere with the current patient population. This project is separated from other patients care areas by the 1HR fire rated partition with a 1-hour fire rated door with closer and construction ante room. Construction area is ventilated to be negative with adjacent areas of occupied spaces. Negative air shall be maintained at specified levels. Advent Health: Zephyrhills—Lystosoopy Operating Room #S March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.: 042-21-177.01 Page 3 of 5 AHCA No.: 23/100046-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review A-0-vent, Health (3) Temporary provisions or phasing for construction or modification of HVAC and water supply systems Negative air requirements as well as temporary construction activity barriers shall be in place and maintained during construction activities. (4) Protection from demolition This project is separated from other patients care areas by the 1HR fire rated partition with a 1-hour fire rated door with closer and construction ante room. Construction area is ventilated to be negative relative to adjacent areas of occupied spaces. (S) Training for staff, visitors, and construction personnel Training has been considered and accommodated. (6) The impact of potential utility outages or emergencies, including the need to protect patients during planned and unplanned utility outages and evacuation See construction ICRA for potential shutdowns. All shutdowns will be coordinated with the facility. (7) The impact of movement of debris, traffic flow, cleanup, elevator use for construction materials and construction workers, and construction worker routes The path of material and construction staff movement has been designed to have the least impact on patient care areas and high -risk patients. (8) Provision for use of bathroom and food facilities by construction workers Facility will determine restroom and food facilities to be used by construction workers. (9) Installation of clean materials (particularly ductwork, drywall, and wood/paper/fabric materials) that have not been damaged by water Appropriate storage will be available for materials to prevent damage and contamination. *1.2-4.2.3.4 Monitoring plan and procedures (1) The governing body shall provide monitoring plans for effective application of ICRMRs during the course of the project. See construction ICRA. (2) Provisions for monitoring shall include: (a) Written procedures for emergency suspension of work See construction ICRA. (b) Protective measures indicating the responsibilities and limitations of each party (i.e., governing body, designer, contractor, and monitor) See construction ICRA. Advent Health: Zephyrhills—Gystosoopy Operating Room #5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No,: 042-21.177.01 Page 4 of 5 AHCA No.: 23/100046-127-1 Stage 3 stand up Document Review Respectfully Submitted, Signature Name (Printed) Title Advent Health: Zephyrhills—Cystoscopy Operating Roam #5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.: 042 21-177.01 page 5 of 5 AHCA No.: 23/100046-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review ADVENTHEALTH INFECTION CONTROL RISK ASSESSMENT Infection Control Construction Worksheet No: Location of Construction: ( Nsto fable Relocation Project Start Date: 41 1 c2021 Project Coordinator: Jordan Stu itb Estimated Duration. 1120 days Contractor Performing Work: 'I'BD Completion Date: W3W2021 Supervisor: FHO Telephone- T 111) YES NO I CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY YES NO INFECTION CONTROL RISK GROUP TYPE A: Inspection, non-invasive activity GROUP 1: Low Risk TYPE B: Small scale. short duration GROUP 2: Medium Risk moderate to high levels TYPE C: Activity generates moderate to high GROUP 3: Medium/High Risk levels of dust, requires greater I work shift for completion X TYPE 1) Major duration and construction I X I J�)i 1' 1 Rs,i activities requiring consecutive work shifts I. Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust 3. Minor Demolition for Remodeling CLASS 1 2. Immediately replace a ceiling tile displaced for visual inspection I. Provide active means to prevent airborne dust from 6. Contain construction waste before transport in dispersing into atmosphere, tightly covered containers 2. Water mist work surfaces to control dust while 7. Wet mop and/or vacuum with HEPA filtered CLASS 11 cutting. vacuum before leaving work area. 3. Seal unused doors with duct tape. 8. Place dust mat at entrance and exit of work area 4. Block off and sea] air vents. 9. Isolate HVAC system in areas S. Wipe work surfaces with disinfectant. where work is being preformed. 1. Isolate HVAC system in area where work is being 6. Vacuum work with HEPA filtered vacuums. CLASS I I I done to prevent contamination of duct system. 7. We mop with disinfectant Date: 2. Complete all critical barriers or implement control & Remove barrier materials carefully to minimize Cube method before construction begins. spreading of dirt and debris associated with 3. Contain construction waste before transport in construction Initial tightly covered containers 9. Cover transport receptacles or carts. 'rape coverings 4. Maintain negative air pressure within work site 10. Isolate HVAC system in arm where utilizing HEPA equipped air filtration units. work is being preformed S. Do not remove barriers from work area until completed project is thoroughly cleaned by the Environmental Services Department. I , Isolate HVAC in area where work is being- 6..AIIperumnel entering work site are required to CLASS Pv done to prevent contamination of -duct system. wear shoe covers. Date. 2 Complete all critical barriers or implement control 7. Do not remove barriers from work area until cube method before construction begins. completed project is thoroughly cleaned by the 3 Maintain negative air pressure within work site I -n% ironmental Services Department. utilizingHEPA equipped air filtration units. 8. Vacuum work with I ILPA filtered vacuums. Initial 4, Seal holes, pipes, conduits. and punctures 9. We mop with disintectant appropriately. 10. Remove barrier materials carefull), to nimimi/c S. Construct anteroom and require all personnel to spreading of dirt and debris associated with pass through this room so they can be vacuumed construction using a HEPA vacuum cleaner before leaving work 11. Contain construction waste before transport in site or they can wear cloth or paper coveralls that tiphtly covered containers are removed each time they leave work site, 12 Cover transport receptacles or carts. rape coverings 13, Isolate HVAC systcm in area, where work is beint, preformed Architect: %, 0. 05 Engineering: Jordaii Smith !�Infection Safety Officer: Jordan Stnith Contractor: Date: 3.15.21 Exceptions/Additions to this inspection: Yes No Steps 1-3 Adapted with permission V Kennedy, B Barnard. St. Luke Episcopal Hospital, Houston TX, C Fine, CA Steps 4-14 Adapted with permission Fairview University Medical Center. Minneapolis MN a ADVENTHEALTH INFECTION CONTROL RISK ASSESSMENT Infection Control Risk Assessment Matrix of Precautions for Construction & Renovation Step One: Using the following table, identify the Typ e of Construction Project Activity (Type A-D) Inspection and Non -Invasive Activities. Includes, but is not limited to: 4 Removal of ceiling tiles for visual inspection limited to I the per 50 square feet. I*MA # Painting (but not sanding) # Wall covering, electrical trim work, minor plumbing, and activities Which do not generate dust or require cutting of walls or access to Ceilings other than for visual inspection Small scale, short duration activities which create minimal dust. Includes, but is not limited to: TYPE V # Installation of telephone and computer cabling # Access to chase spaces # Cutting of walls or ceiling where dust migration can be controlled. Work that generates a moderate to high level of dust or requires Demolition or removal of any fixed building components or assemblies. J Includes, but is not limited to: # Sanding of walls for painting or wall covering TV)?EzjQ # Removal of floor covering, ceiling tiles and casework all construction 41' # Minor duct work or electrical work above ceilings # Major cabling activities, major plumbing activities (including items that expose sewage, such as work on a major stoppage). # Any activity which cannot be completed within a single work shift. Major demolition and construction projects. Includes, but is not limited to: TYPE D # Activities which require consecutive work shifts # Requires heavy demolition or removal of a complete cabling system # New construction Step 1: TYN D Steps 1-3 Adapted with permission V Kennedy. B Barnard. St. Luke Episcopal Hospital. I-louston'rX; C Fine. CA Steps 4-14 Adapted with permission Fairview University Medical Center, Minneapolis MN ADVENTHEALTH INFECTION CONTROL RISK ASSESSMENT Step Two: Using the following table, identify the Patient Risk Groups that will be affected. If more than one risk group will be affected, select the higher risk group. Low Risk Medium Risk Hi h Risk Highest Risk Offices A I I patient care areas Emergency Department Operating Rooms Administration not mentioned in Radiology/MRI Sterile Processing Public Areas groups 3 or 4 PACU ICU Kitchen Nuc Med Cath Lab Admission Laboratories Outpatient Areas Echocardiography Dialysis Pharmacy Step 2: t I igh Step Three: Match the Patient Risk Group (Low, Medium, High, Highest) with the planned... Construction Project Type (A, B, C, D) on the following matrix, to find the... Class of Precautions (1, 11, 111, IV) or level of infection control activities required. Class 1-I),' or Color -Coded Precautions are delineated on the following page. IC Matrix — Class of Precautions: Construction Project by Patient Risk Construction Project Type Note: Infection Control approval will be required when the Construction Activity and Risk Level indicate that ® or ® control procedures are necessary. Steps 1-3 Adapted with permission V Kennedy, B Barnard, St. Luke Episcopal Hospital. Houston TX: C Fine, CA Steps 4-14 Adapted with permission Fairview University Medical Center. Minneapolis MN ADVENTHEALTH INFECTION CONTROL RISK ASSESSMENT Step 3: Description of Required Infection Control Precautions by LIM During Construction Project I - Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust From construction operation. 2. Immediately replace a ceiling tile displaced for visual inspection 1. Provide active means to prevent airborne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. 2. Water mist work surfaces to control dust while cutting. 3. Seal unused doors with duct tape. 4. Block off and seal air vents. 5. Place dust mat at entrance and exit of work area 6. Isolate the FIVAC system in areas where work is being performed. I. Remove or isolate HVAC system in area where work, is being done to prevent contamination of duct system. 2. Complete all critical barriers i.e. sbeetrock, plywood, plastic, to seal area from non work area or implement control cube method (cart with plastic covering and sealed connection to work site with HEPA vacuum for vacuuming prior to exit) before construction begins. 3. Maintain negative air pressure within work site utilizing HEPA equipped air filtration units. 4. Contain construction waste before transport in tightly covered containers. 5. Cover transport receptacles or carts. Tape covering unless solid lid. Isolate FIVAC system in area where work is being done to prevent contamination ot'duct system. 2. Complete all critical barriers I.e. shectrock, ply wood, plastic. to seat area from non work area or implement control cube method (cart w ith plastic covering and sealed connection to work site with I IFPA N acuum for vacuuming prior to exit) before construction begins. 3. Maintain negative air pressure within work site utilizing I IF PA equipped air filtration units. 4. Seal holes, pipes, conduits, and punctures. 5. Construct anteroom and require all personnel to pass through this room so they can he vacuumed using a FIEPA vacuum cleaner before leaving A ork site or they can vicar cloth or paper coveralls that are removed each time they leave work site. 6. All personnel entering work site are required to wear shoe covers. Shoe covers must be changed each time the worker exits the work area. 7 Do not remove barriers from work area until completed project is inspected by the owner's Safety Department and Infection Control Department and thoroughly cleaned by the owner's Environmental Services Dept. Upon Completion of Project 1. Wipe work surfaces with disinfectant. 2. Contain construction waste before transport in tightly covered containers. 3. Wet mop and/or vacuum with HEPA filtered vacuum before leaving work area. 4. Remove isolation of FIVAC system in areas where work is being performed. I. Do not remove barriers from work area until completed project is inspected by the owner's Safety Department and Infection Control Department and thoroughly cleaned by the owner's Environmental Services Department. 1 Remove barrier materials carefully to minimize spread of dirt and debris associated with construction. 3. Vacuum work area with HEPA filtered vacuums. 4. Wet mop area with disinfectant. 5. Remove isolation of HVAC system in areas where work is being performed. I Remove barrier materials carefully to minimize spread ot'dirt and debris 1 Contain construction waste before transport in rightly covered containers. 3. Cover transport receptacles or carts. Tape covering unless solid lid. 4. Vacuum work area with HEPA filtered vacuums. 5. Wet mop area with (I isin 1'ectant. 6. Remove isolation ot'l IVAC system in areas where work is being performed. Steps 1-3 Adapted with permission V Kennedy, B Barnard, St. Luke Episcopal Hospital. Houston TX; C Fine. CA Steps 4-14 Adapted with permission Fairview University Medical Center. Minneapolis MN ADVENTHEALTH INFECTION CONTROL RISK ASSESSMENT Step 4: Identify the areas surrounding the project area, assessing potential impact Unit Below Unit Above Lateral Lateral Behind Front IA) _A PA( t 'N'k N" x NA Risk Group Risk Group Risk Group Risk Group Risk Group Risk Group Step 5: Identify specific site of activity eg, patient rooms, medication room, etc. 111%tallatioll of Step 6: Identify issues related to: ventilation, plumbing, electrical in terms of the occurrence of probable outages. N A Step 7: Identify containment measures, using prior assessment What types of barriers? (Eg, solid wall barriers); Will HEPA filtration be required? Solid N-kall Barriers with I ItT X filtratioll negative air machines (Note: Renovation/construction area shall be isolated from the occupied areas during construction and shall be negative with respect to surrounding areas) Step8: Consider potential risk or water damage. Is there a risk due to compromising structural integrity? (eg, wall, ceiling, roof) None Step9: Work hours: Can or will the work be done during non -patient care hours? Normat Witt rs Step 10: Do plans allow for the adequate number of isolation/negative air flow rooms? No Step 11: Do the plans allow for the required number & type of hand washing sinks? N/A Step 12: Does the infection control staff agree with the minimum number of sinks for this project? N11,"t Step 13: Does the infection control staff agree with the plans relative to clean and soiled utility rooms? N/A Step 14: Plan to discuss the following containment issues with the project team. Eg, traffic flow, housekeeping, debris removal (how and when), ontractor to rvinoN e waste out the back of the building. Contractor to monitor housekeeping and sticky mats At All tintes. Appendix. Identify and communicate the responsibility for project monitoring that includes infection Control concerns and risks. The ICRA may be modified throughout the project. Steps 1-3 Adapted with permission V Kennedy. B Barnard, St. Luke Episcopal Hospital, Houston TX, C Fine, CA Steps 4-14 Adapted with permission Fairview University Medical Center, Minneapolis MN ADVENTHEALTH INFECTION. CONTROL RISK ASSESSMENT IRevisions must be cot humicateel to. the Project Nfanager, Yes No I NIA X Will there be Noise generated that will impact a departitient adjacent to, above or below:tlie constructiori area? x, A: if so. departments mast be notified, x 13: MoNv are you going to reduce the: noise tri :?n acceptable leuel? Iles No NIA: x Wil1 Vibration be generated that will impaet.a departmentadjaccnt to, above; or below the construction area? A:'Ifso; departments Must be notified. X B: Hm., are you going to reduce the noise to an acmptable level? Yes No NIA `{ Are Emergency Procedures.in place and .posted.on each`job for .accidental events that could greatly impact Patient Care or.Life Safety to the facility? Included in these procedures are:such. th.ings.as: Eincrgenuy telephone nUfnbcrs oftcy departments A plait that describes ► here tmairi valves, switches, and controls are for the area iii case of an eniergehgpy. A plan for unexpected outages. Steps i-..Adapted with permission V Kennedy, 1313arnard. St. Luke Episcopal f{ospital,.Houston "tX; C, l ictc, CA Steps 4-14 Adapted %vitli permission Fairviav University Medical Center, Minneapolis MN ADVENTHEALTH. INFECTION . -CONTROL. RISK ASSESSMENT F- PROJECT BARRIER/NEGATIVE AIR, SITE INSPECTION Inspections must be done bV.jcc.d.aily Project'. Date Time Inspected .By— Negative Air Reading. Containment Reinarks. 9tcps 1-3 Adapwd witli permission V Ki:nncdy. B Bai'tiard—St. Luke Episedpal.04spiial. 11otjstbhTX4, C Fik,' CA 0 S.teps 4-14 Adapted with permissipn Fairview University tvledical..Ccnter; minneapolus MN ADVENTHEALTH. INFECTION CONTROL RISK. ASSESSMENT Steps I � -3 Adapted with pehbi,;'Wt1.V Kennedy.13 Barnard, St, Luke Episcopal Hospildl,11duston'rX, C lziilc,.CA Steps 4-14 Adapted Nvith permission Fairview University Medical - Center.:Minneapolis MN 8. 11 • , AdventHealth: Zephyrhills Cystoscopy Operating Room #5 AHCA Client Code/File-Project Number: 23/100046-127-1 Statement for the Accommodation of Patients of Size *1.2-6.4 Design Considerations for Accommodation of Patients of Size 1.2-6.4.1 Projected Need for Accommodations for Care of Patients of Size The need for accommodations for care of patients of size shall be defined in the planning phase and shall include the following: *1.2-6.4.1.1 Projected weight capacities for patients of size in the population to be served. This project has not been designed to specifically serve patients of size. *1.2-6.4.1.2 Projected number of spaces required to accommodate patients of size. This project has not been designed to specifically serve patients of size. *1.2-6.4,1.3 Projected number of expanded -capacity lifts required. This project has not been designed to specifically serve patients of size. *1.2-6.4.2 Design Response for Accommodations for patients of Size. This project has not been designed to specifically serve patients of size. 1.2-6.4.2.1 The projected maximum weight of patients of size who will require accommodations shall determine the design requirements for sinks, toilets, grab bars, casework, and lifts in area where patients of size will receive care. This project has not been designed to specifically serve patients of size. 1.2-6.4.2.2 Those areas of the facility designated for accommodations for patients of size, and the associated path of egress to reach these areas, shall be designed with appropriate support and clearances. This project has not been designed to specifically serve patients of size. However, doors have been oversized wherever possible to accommodate patient handling. Respectfully Signatur_` Name (Printed) Ic f- t jj�� Title Advent Health: Zephyrhllls Cysto=opy operating Room #5 March 17, 2021 CDG Project No.: 042-21-177.01 Page 1 of 1 AHCA No.: 23/100046-127-1 Stage 3 stand-up Document Review